Download: HP Mopier 320 System Service Manual English Manual Part No. HP Mopier 320 System C4229-90911 Service Manual

HP Mopier 320 System Service Manual English

Copyright© 1998 Hewlett-Packard Co. Printed in USA

Manual Part No. HP Mopier 320 System C4229-90911 Service Manual

*C4229-90911* Printed on at least *C4229-90911* 50% Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper C4229-90911, Service Manual HP Mopier 320 System Service Manual, © Copyright Warranty WARNING Hewlett-Packard Company 1998 The information contained in Electrical Shock Hazard All Rights Reserved. this document is subject to To avoid electrical shock, use Reproduction, adaptation, or change without notice. only supplied power cords and translation without prior written Hewlett-Packard makes no connect only to properly permission is prohibited, except warranty of any kind with regard grounded wall outlets. as allowed under the copyright to this material, including, but laws. not limited to, the implied Publication number warranties or merchantability C4229-90911 and fitness for a particular purpose. First edition, October 1998 Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein Trademark Credits or for incidental or consequential damages in Adobe and PostScript are connection with the furnishing, trademarks of Adobe Systems performance, or use of this Incorporated which may be material. registered in certain jurisdictions. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.,

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions: The names of major printer parts and assemblies are Capitalized. Color is used to emphasize items which are important to the material under discussion. Bold is used for emphasis, particularly in situations where italic type would be confusing. Italic type is used to indicate related documents or emphasis. Note Notes contain important information set off from the text. CAUTION Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment or loss of data. WARNING! Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury. The illustration below shows the orientation of the paper-handling accessories as they are referred to in this publication. C4229-90911 iii,

Chapter Descriptions

1 Product Information Contains printer features and product overview, tray capacities and sizes, media specifications, how to get technical assistance, and required safety and compliance statements. 2 Site Requirements Contains space and environmental requirements. 3 Operating Overview Contains details about control panel menus, restoring factory defaults, and resetting and testing the printer. 4 Maintenance and Adjustments Contains cleaning and preventive maintenance information, and adjustment procedures for all paper trays. 5 Functional Overview Contains block diagrams and basic theory of operation for the printer systems, paper paths, and paper handling devices. Contains basic cabling information. 6 Removal and Replacement Contains step-by-step procedures for replacing field replaceable units (FRUs) in the printer and paper-handling devices. 7 Troubleshooting Contains a preliminary troubleshooting table, a table with descriptions and recommended actions for all control panel messages, image defect samples, paper handling problems, service approach, and troubleshooting checks and tools. iv C4229-90911, 8 Parts and Diagrams Contains exploded view drawings and part number listings for all replaceable parts in the printer and paper-handling devices. Contains two replaceable parts tables: one sorted alphabetically by part name, and one sorted numerically by part number. Both tables are cross referenced to the diagrams in the chapter.

Subject Index

Contains an alphabetical, cross referenced listing of information found in the main body of the manual. C4229-90911 v, vi C4229-90911,

Table of Contents List of Figures List of Tables

1 Product Information Features of the HP Digital Copy 320..2 Features of the Mopier ..2 Features of the Copy Module ..4 Product Overview ..5 External View of Mopier ..5 Formatter Assemblies ..7 External View of HP Digital Copy 320..8 Configurations..9 Paper Capacities and Sizes ..11 Mopier and Paper-handling Devices..11 Mopier Media Selection Guidelines..13 Paper ..13 Envelopes ..13 Adhesive Labels ..14 Transparencies ..15 Storing Print Media ..15 Shipping Print Media..15 Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines..17 Paper Specifications ..17 Paper Size ..17 Paper Conditions ..18 Document Quality ..18 Identification ..22 Model and Serial Numbers ..22 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options ..23 Ordering Information ..24 Hard Disk ..30 Determining Memory Requirements ..30 Technical Assistance..32 HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology). .32 Internet ..33 World Wide Web..33 HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line (US Only)..33 Other Areas..33 C4229-90911 Table of Contents vii, Regulatory Information ..34 FCC Regulations..34 Environmental Product Stewardship..35 Material Safety Data Sheet ..37 Environmental Conformity..38 Declarations of Conformity ..39 Safety Statements..42 2 Site Requirements Operating Environment ..46 Space Requirements..47 Environmental Requirements ..50 Specifications ..51 Mopier and Paper-handling Devices..51 Copy Module..55 3 Operating Overview HP Mopier 320 Using the Mopier Control Panel ..58 Control Panel Layout ..58 Indicator Lights ..59 Settings and Defaults ..60 Printer Driver Information ..60 Paper Source Default ..61 Performing a Cold Reset ..62 Setting the Display Language..62 Control Panel Menus..65 Quick Copy Jobs Menu..66 Private/Stored Jobs Menu..66 Information Menu ..67 Paper Handling Menu ..68 Print Quality Menu ..70 Printing Menu ..72 Configuration Menu..75 I/O Menu ..80 EIO Menu ..82 Resets Menu..84 Mopier Service Mode ..85 Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count, and Serial Number ..87 Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size ..88 Testing the Mopier..89 Paper Path Test ..89 Configuration Page ..89 viii Table of Contents C4229-90911, HP Digital Copy 320 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel ..90 HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel ..91 HP Digital Copy 320 Settings ..100 Loading documents into the ADF ..102 Loading documents onto the Flatbed ..104 Copy Module Service Mode ..105 HP Resource Manager ..107 Accessing the HP Resource Manager ..107 Downloading Copy Module Firmware ..108 4 Maintenance and Adjustments HP Mopier 320 Cleaning the Mopier and Accessories..112 Cleaning the Mopier ..113 Cleaning Spilled Toner ..114 Preventive Maintenance ..115 Tray Adjustment Procedure..116 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure..118 HP Digital Copy 320 Cleaning the HP Digital Copy 320..120 Materials ..120 Vacuum Specifications ..120 Cleaning ADF and Glass..121 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass ..121 Cleaning the ADF ..122 Complete Optics Cleaning..124 Cleaning the ADF Lamp and Mirrors ..124 Lubricating the ADF Gears ..124 Cleaning the Carrier Unit and Mechanical Assemblies..125 Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft ..125 Lubricating the Top of the Carrier Guide Rail ..125 Lubricating the Flatbed Motor Gears ..125 Cleaning the Front Panel ..125 Maintaining the HP Digital Copy 320..126 HP Digital Copy 320 Maintenance Parts..126 Calibrating the HP Digital Copy 320 ..126 Types of Calibration ..126 When to Calibrate ..127 Calibration Target ..127 Entering the Calibration Menu in Service Mode ..127 How to Perform an Offset Adjustment Calibration ..128 How to Perform a Density Calibration Adjustment ..128 How to Perform an ADF Vertical Magnification Adjustment .128 C4229-90911 ix, 5 Functional Overview HP Mopier 320 Printer Functional Block Diagram ..130 Power Distribution System ..131 AC Power Distribution..132 Overcurrent/Overvoltage Protection ..132 High Voltage Power Distribution ..133 Formatter System ..134 DC Controller System ..137 Laser and Scanner Drive ..137 Paper Motion Monitoring and Control ..137 Clutches ..137 Engine Test Microswitch ..138 Motors ..138 Image Formation System ..139 Toner Cartridge..140 Drum Cleaning ..142 Drum Conditioning ..143 Image Writing ..144 Image Developing..146 Image Transferring and Media Separation ..148 Image Fusing ..149 Paper Paths and Components ..150 Printer, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder..150 Paper Size Switches (Trays 2 and 3) ..153 Printing from Tray 1 ..153 Printing from Trays 2 and 3..153 Printing from the Envelope Feeder ..154 Printing with the Duplexer ..154 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) Components ..155 2000-Sheet Input Tray Operation ..1572x500-sheet Input Tray ..1602x500-sheet Input Tray Operation ..162 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components ..164 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation..166 8-bin Mailbox Components ..170 8-bin Mailbox Operation ..173 Finisher Components ..175 Stapler Unit Operation ..177 Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler (Internal Paper Path)179 Communication Link (Daisy Chain)..180 Paper Jam Detection..182 Printer Timing ..182 IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information..184 x Table of Contents C4229-90911, HP Digital Copy 320 Copy Module Functional Overview ..185 Copy Module System ..185 Function and Layout of the Copy Processor..187 Power Up Process..189 Copy Processor Board ..189 Copy Module..191 Mopier ..192 Notes About the HP Mopier 320 Product ID ..192 ADF Simplex Operation..193 ADF Duplex Operation ..194 Flatbed Operation ..194 Image Path ..196 Communication to the Mopier ..198 Communication Channels..198 Print Job Interrupt ..198 Paper Path and Sensors..199 6 Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement Strategy..202 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions ..202 Required Tools ..203 User Installable Accessories ..204 Memory and Personality Upgrade ..204 Duplexer ..206 Envelope Feeder..206 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray ..207 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler ..208 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox ..209 Hardware Table..212 HP Mopier 320 Engine Removal and Replacement..214 Control Panel ..215 Covers..217 Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin) ..226 Diverter Assembly..229 Diverter Door Assembly ..230 Lower Right Door Assembly ..231 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) ..234 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust) ..236 Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake) ..237 Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust) ..238 Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake) ..239 Tray 1 ..241 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly ..244 C4229-90911 xi, Engine Removal and Replacement (continued) Feeder Assembly ..248 Formatter Assembly ..250 Fusing Assembly..252 Laser/Scanner Assembly ..254 Main Gear Assembly..256 Main Motor Assembly ..259 Paper Input Unit (PIU)..260 PCA, DC Controller..261 Output Paper Sensor PCA ..262 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) ..269 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) ..270 Registration Assembly ..271 Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad ..274 Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers ..276 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) ..277 Registration Sensor (PS1) ..279 Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3) ..281 Transfer Roller Assembly ..282 Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies ..284 Paper-handling Devices 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement..285 Orientation ..286 Front Cover ..287 Back Cover ..288 Left Cover ..289 Right Cover ..290 Main Drive Assembly ..291 Paper Tray ..293 Main Cable Harness ..294 Controller PCA ..296 Front LED PCA Assembly..298 Pickup Assembly..300 Power Supply ..302 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers ..304 Paper Quantity Switch Assembly ..306 Paper Size Switch Assembly ..306 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) ..308 Tension Springs ..310 Locating Pins ..311 Casters and Stabilizing Feet ..312 Adjustable Foot ..313 xii Table of Contents C4229-90911, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement ..314 Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray ..315 Back Cover ..316 Left Cover ..317 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) ..318 Right Cover ..321 Front Top Cover ..324 Trays 4 and 5 ..327 Pickup Assembly..329 Paper Deck Drive Assembly ..331 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers ..333 Controller PCA ..334 Tray-Size Sensing PCA ..335 Power Supply ..337 Main Cable ..338 Storage Paper Tray..340 Front Door (Storage Area) ..341 Casters ..342 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet) ..3432x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement Locating Pins ..344 Front LED PCA ..345 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement ..347 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox ..348 Front Cover ..349 Back Cover ..352 Top Cover ..354 Controller PCA ..358 Power Supply ..359 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) ..360 Face-down Bins ..364 Empty Bin Sensor PCA..367 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA ..369 LED PCA..371 Face-up Sensors PCA ..372 Reversing Mechanism Motor ..373 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) ..375 Short Tray 7 ..378 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism ..379 Flipper Solenoid ..380 Handle..381 Latching Mechanism..382 Cover Latch..383 C4229-90911 xiii, 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement..384 Orientation ..385 Front and Back Covers ..386 Top Cover ..387 Power Supply ..388 Paper Bins and Blind Cover ..389 Flipper Assembly ..390 Delivery Head Motor ..393 Transport Belt Motor ..394 Input Paper Guide..396 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly ..398 Controller PCA ..400 Anticurl Strings ..402 Delivery Head Assembly..404 Interlock Switch..409 Diagnostic LED PCA..410 User Status LED PCA..412 Adjustable and Fixed Casters ..414 Attachment Assembly ..415 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement ..416 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation..417 Back Plate..419 Stapler Controller PCA ..421 Top Cover Assembly..424 Stapler Bed Assembly..425 Hinges..427 HP Digital Copy 320 HP Digital Copy 320 Removal and Replacement ..429 Installing the HP Digital Copy 320..430 Install the HP Digital Copy 320 on the Optional HP Digital Copy 320 Stand ..430 Install the Mopier on the Optional Input Accessory..432 Roll the Mopier onto the Optional HP Digital Copy 320 Stand432 Install the Optional Output Accessory..433 Install the Copy Connect EIO Board into the Mopier ..434 Install the Copy Connect Cable ..435 Install the Y Power Cord ..436 Hardware Table ..437 Orientation of the HP Digital Copy 320..439 Copy Module Maintenance Parts ..440 Separation Pad Assembly..440 Pick Roller Assembly ..441 xiv Table of Contents C4229-90911, Copy Module Skins ..445 Document Holding Pad..445 Paper Chute Flip-out..446 Output Tray Flip-out ..447 Output Tray ..447 Flatbed (FB) Cover Assembly..448 ADF Latch Cap ..451 ADF Cover ..452 Front Panel ..454 Panel Cover ..459 Front Panel Brackets ..460 Upper Cover ..462 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies ..464 Copy Processor Board ..464 Power Supply and Main Board Tray ..465 RFI Cover ..467 Control PCA ..469 Fan ..472 Power Supply ..473 Back PCA ..474 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies ..475 Optical Unit ..475 ADF Lamp PCA ..477 ADF Lamp..479 Sensor Unit Assembly..480 ADF Motor Unit ..483 ADF Belt ..484 LED Assembly PCA ..486 ADF Unit ..487 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies..488 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring ..488 Output Tray Brackets ..489 Glass Plate Assembly ..490 Home Position Sensor ..492 Carrier Unit Lamp ..494 Carrier Unit ..497 Felt Pad..501 Feet..502 Frame Ground Spring ..503 Front Lamp PCA ..504 Junction PCA and Cover..505 Front Panel Ribbon Cable..507 Carrier Belt and Motor..509 C4229-90911 xv, 7 Troubleshooting Service Approach ..512 Ordering Parts..512 Exchange Program ..513 Consumables ..513 Toner Cartridge Life ..513 Refilled Toner Cartridges and Non-HP Staple Cartridges . .514 Recycling Toner Cartridges ..514 Troubleshooting Process..515 Mopier System Troubleshooting Process ..517 Mopier/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process ..518 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process ..520 HP Mopier 320 Troubleshooting the Mopier System ..522 Preliminary Operating Checks ..522 Communication ..523 Interface Troubleshooting ..523 Network Troubleshooting ..525 Verify Host System Operation..527 Verify Network and Server Operation ..527 General Troubleshooting Information ..528 Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions ..528 Paper Curl..533 Troubleshooting the Mopier and Paper-handling Devices ..534 Step 1 Power On ..534 Engine Test..537 Step 2 Display ..538 Event Log ..538 Step 3 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages ..542 Printer Message Tables ..544 Engine Error Messages ..545 Input Device Messages..557 Output Device Messages ..565 Finisher Devices Messages ..576 Paper Handling Controller Error Messages ..580 Step 4 Paper Path Troubleshooting ..581 Paper Jams..582 Paper Path Test ..584 Step 5 Information Pages..587 Menu Map..587 Configuration Pages ..589 File Directory Page ..592 Usage Page ..593 Step 6 Image Quality ..597 Check the Toner Cartridge ..598 xvi Table of Contents C4229-90911, Troubleshooting the Mopier and Paper-handling Devices (continued) Image Quality Tables ..599 Repetitive Defect Ruler ..612 Image System Troubleshooting ..614 High-Voltage Power Supply Check..615 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices ..617 2000-sheet Input Tray Stand-alone Diagnostics..6172x500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics ..621 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics..625 8-bin Mailbox Stand-alone Diagnostics..630 Diagrams ..638 HP Digital Copy 320 Troubleshooting the HP Digital Copy 320 ..651 Step 1 Power On ..652 Step 2 Display and Communication ..653 Step 3 Error Messages and Problems ..654 Status Messages ..654 Step 4 Information Pages..659 Step 5 Paper Path ..660 Step 6 Image Quality ..661 Testing the HP Digital Copy 320 ..664 Copy Processor LED Test ..664 Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions ..666 Copy Module Offline Test ..667 Other Tests ..669 Service Mode Tests ..671 8 Parts and Diagrams How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams ..674 Ordering Parts..674 Common Hardware..674 Illustrations and Parts Lists ..675 HP Mopier 320 Mopier and Paper-handling Components ..676 Printer Parts and Diagrams ..680 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams..694 Input Devices ..694 Output Devices ..702 Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) . .714 Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) ..724 C4229-90911 xvii, HP Digital Copy 320 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams ..735 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) ..750 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) ..754

Index

xviii Table of Contents C4229-90911,

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Copy System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 Figure 1-2 Mopier - Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open - - - - - - - 5 Figure 1-3 Rear and Left Side View - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7 Figure 1-4 Front view of HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 Figure 1-5 Rear view of HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 Figure 1-6 Preferred Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9 Figure 1-7 Tabletop Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10 Figure 1-8 Paper size specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 17 Figure 1-9 Paper orientation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20 Figure 1-10 Areas of the Paper that Should Not Be Perforated - - - - - - - - 21 Figure 1-11 Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the Mopier - - - - - 22 Figure 1-12 Paper Handling Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23 Figure 2-1 Mopier Space Requirements (Top view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 47 Figure 2-2 Mopier Space Requirements (Side view) - - - - - - - - - - - - 47 Figure 2-3 Mopier Space Requirements (with Mailbox and Input Device) - - 48 Figure 2-4 Mopier and Copy Module Space requirements- - - - - - - - - - 49 Figure 2-5 Dimensions of Paper Handling Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53 Figure 3-1 Control Panel Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 Figure 3-2 Front Panel Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 91 Figure 3-3 Button/LED Functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 98 Figure 3-4 Copy Module Service Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 105 Figure 3-5 HP Resource Manager (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 108 Figure 3-6 HP Resource Manager (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 109 Figure 4-1 Image Area Margins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116 Figure 4-2 Tray Position Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 117 Figure 4-3 Tray 4 Position Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 118 Figure 4-4 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121 Figure 4-5 Parts of the ADF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 122 Figure 4-6 Creating an Offset Target - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127 Figure 5-1 Printer Functional Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 130 Figure 5-2 Low Voltage Power Distribution System - - - - - - - - - - - - - 131 Figure 5-3 Low Voltage Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 132 Figure 5-4 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133 Figure 5-5 Normal Mode vs EconoMode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136 Figure 5-6 Image Formation Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 139 Figure 5-7 Photosensitive Drum - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 141 Figure 5-8 Drum Cleaning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 142 Figure 5-9 Primary Charging Roller- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 143 Figure 5-10 Image Writing- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 144 Figure 5-11 Image Development - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 147 C4229-90911 List of Figures xix, Figure 5-12 Image Transferring and Media Separation - - - - - - - - - - - - 148 Figure 5-13 Image Fusing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 149 Figure 5-14 Printer Paper Paths - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 150 Figure 5-15 Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans - - - - - 152 Figure 5-16 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Path- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155 Figure 5-17 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches, and Motors - 157 Figure 5-182x500-sheet Input Tray Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 160 Figure 5-192x500-sheet input Tray Sensors and Switches - - - - - - - - - 161 Figure 5-20 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - 164 Figure 5-21 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - 165 Figure 5-22 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Block Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 169 Figure 5-23 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 170 Figure 5-24 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA - - 172 Figure 5-25 Finisher Paper Path- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 176 Figure 5-26 Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - 176 Figure 5-27 Stapler Cycles - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 179 Figure 5-28 Recommended C-link Configuration (Daisy Chain)- - - - - - - - 181 Figure 5-29 General Timing Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 183 Figure 5-30 Copy Module System Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 185 Figure 5-31 Copy Processor and key components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 187 Figure 5-32 Image path (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 196 Figure 5-33 Locations of ADF Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 199 Figure 5-34 ADF Sensors functional diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 200 Figure 6-1 Phillips vs. Posidriv Screwdrivers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 203 Figure 6-2 Disk Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 205 Figure 6-3 Control Panel (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 215 Figure 6-4 Control Panel (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 216 Figure 6-5 AC Access Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 218 Figure 6-6 Back Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 219 Figure 6-7 Front Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 220 Figure 6-8 Front Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 221 Figure 6-9 Left Lower Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 222 Figure 6-10 Top Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 223 Figure 6-11 Top Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 224 Figure 6-12 Delivery Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 226 Figure 6-13 Delivery Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 227 Figure 6-14 Diverter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 229 Figure 6-15 Diverter Door Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 230 Figure 6-16 Lower Right Door Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 231 Figure 6-17 Right Lower Door Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 232 Figure 6-18 Right Lower Door Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 233 Figure 6-19 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 234 Figure 6-20 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 235 Figure 6-21 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 236 Figure 6-22 Fan 3, Formatter Fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 237 Figure 6-23 Fan 4, Delivery Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 238 Figure 6-24 Fan 5 Removal (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 239 xx List of Figures C4229-90911, Figure 6-25 Fan 5 Removal (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 240 Figure 6-26 Tray 1 Removal (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 241 Figure 6-27 Tray 1 Removal (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 242 Figure 6-28 Tray 1 Removal (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 243 Figure 6-29 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 244 Figure 6-30 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 245 Figure 6-31 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 246 Figure 6-32 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 247 Figure 6-33 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 248 Figure 6-34 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 249 Figure 6-35 Formatter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 251 Figure 6-36 Fusing Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 252 Figure 6-37 Laser/Scanner Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 254 Figure 6-38 Main Gear Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 256 Figure 6-39 Main Gear Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 257 Figure 6-40 Main Gear Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 258 Figure 6-41 Main Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 259 Figure 6-42 Paper Input Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 260 Figure 6-43 DC Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 261 Figure 6-44 Output Paper Sensor PCA (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 262 Figure 6-45 Output Paper Sensor PCA (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 263 Figure 6-46 Output Paper Sensor PCA (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 264 Figure 6-47 Output Paper Sensor PCA (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 265 Figure 6-48 Paper Size PCA (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 266 Figure 6-49 Paper Size PCA (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 267 Figure 6-50 Paper Size PCA (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 268 Figure 6-51 High Voltage Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 269 Figure 6-52 Low Voltage Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 270 Figure 6-53 Registration Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 271 Figure 6-54 Registration Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 272 Figure 6-55 Registration Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 273 Figure 6-56 Tray 1 Feed Roller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 274 Figure 6-57 Tray 1 Separation Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 275 Figure 6-58 Tray 2 and 3, Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - 276 Figure 6-59 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 278 Figure 6-60 Registration Sensor (PS1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 280 Figure 6-61 Face-up Solenoid Assembly, SL3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 281 Figure 6-62 Transfer Roller Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 282 Figure 6-63 2000-sheet Input Tray Orientation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 286 Figure 6-64 2000-sheet Input Tray Front Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 287 Figure 6-65 2000-sheet Input Tray Back Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 288 Figure 6-66 2000-sheet Input Tray Left Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 289 Figure 6-67 2000-sheet Input Tray Right Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 290 Figure 6-68 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - 291 Figure 6-69 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 293 Figure 6-70 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Cable Harness - - - - - - - - - - - 295 Figure 6-71 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 296 C4229-90911 xxi, Figure 6-72 2000-sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - 299 Figure 6-73 2000-sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - 300 Figure 6-74 2000-sheet Input Tray Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 302 Figure 6-75 2000-sheet Input Tray Rollers: Pickup, Feed, and Separation - - 304 Figure 6-76 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch - - 307 Figure 6-77 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch Assemblies (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 307 Figure 6-78 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) - - - - - - - 308 Figure 6-79 2000-sheet Input Tray Tension Springs - - - - - - - - - - - - - 310 Figure 6-80 2000-sheet Input Tray Locating Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 311 Figure 6-81 2000-sheet Input Tray Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 312 Figure 6-82 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustable Foot - - - - - - - - - - - - - 313 Figure 6-83 Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray - - - - - - - - - - - 315 Figure 6-84 Back Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 316 Figure 6-85 Left Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 317 Figure 6-86 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 318 Figure 6-87 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 319 Figure 6-88 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 320 Figure 6-89 Right Cover (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 321 Figure 6-90 Right Cover (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 322 Figure 6-91 Right Cover (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 323 Figure 6-92 Front Top Cover (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 324 Figure 6-93 Front Top Cover (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 325 Figure 6-94 Front Top Cover (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 326 Figure 6-95 Trays 4 and 5 (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 327 Figure 6-96 Trays 4 and 5 (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 328 Figure 6-97 Pickup Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 329 Figure 6-98 Pickup Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 330 Figure 6-99 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 331 Figure 6-100 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 332 Figure 6-101 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 333 Figure 6-1022x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - 334 Figure 6-103 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 335 Figure 6-104 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 336 Figure 6-105 Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 337 Figure 6-106 Main Cable (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 338 Figure 6-107 Main Cable (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 339 Figure 6-108 Storage Paper Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 340 Figure 6-109 Front Door (Storage Area) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 341 Figure 6-110 Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 342 Figure 6-111 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 343 Figure 6-112 Locating Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 344 Figure 6-113 Front LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 345 Figure 6-114 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox - - - - - - - - - - - - 348 Figure 6-115 Front cover (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 349 Figure 6-116 Front cover (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 350 Figure 6-117 Front cover (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 351 xxii List of Figures C4229-90911, Figure 6-118 Back cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 352 Figure 6-119 Back cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 353 Figure 6-120 Top cover (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 354 Figure 6-121 Top cover (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 355 Figure 6-122 Top cover (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 356 Figure 6-123 Top cover (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 357 Figure 6-124 Mailbox Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 358 Figure 6-125 Mailbox Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 359 Figure 6-126 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (1 of 5) - - - - - - - - 360 Figure 6-127 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (2 of 5) - - - - - - - - 361 Figure 6-128 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5) - - - - - - - - 361 Figure 6-129 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5) - - - - - - - - 362 Figure 6-130 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (4 of 5) - - - - - - - - 363 Figure 6-131 Face-down Bins (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 364 Figure 6-132 Face-down Bins (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 365 Figure 6-133 Face-down Bins (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 366 Figure 6-134 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 367 Figure 6-135 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 368 Figure 6-136 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - 369 Figure 6-137 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - 370 Figure 6-138 LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 371 Figure 6-139 Face-up Sensors PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 372 Figure 6-140 Reversing Mechanism Motor (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 373 Figure 6-141 Reversing Mechanism Motor (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 374 Figure 6-142 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - 375 Figure 6-143 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - 376 Figure 6-144 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - 377 Figure 6-145 Short Tray 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 378 Figure 6-146 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 379 Figure 6-147 Flipper Solenoid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 Figure 6-148 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 381 Figure 6-149 Latching Mechanism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 382 Figure 6-150 Cover Latch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 383 Figure 6-151 Orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 385 Figure 6-152 8-bin Mailbox Covers (Front and Back) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 386 Figure 6-153 8-bin Mailbox Top Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 387 Figure 6-154 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 388 Figure 6-155 8-bin Mailbox Paper Bins and Blind Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - 389 Figure 6-156 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 390 Figure 6-157 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 391 Figure 6-158 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 392 Figure 6-159 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 393 Figure 6-160 8-bin Mailbox Transport Belt Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 394 Figure 6-161 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - 396 Figure 6-162 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - 397 Figure 6-163 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - 398 Figure 6-164 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - 399 C4229-90911 xxiii, Figure 6-165 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 400 Figure 6-166 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 401 Figure 6-167 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 402 Figure 6-168 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 403 Figure 6-169 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - 404 Figure 6-170 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - 405 Figure 6-171 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - 406 Figure 6-172 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - 407 Figure 6-173 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 409 Figure 6-174 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 410 Figure 6-175 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 411 Figure 6-176 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 412 Figure 6-177 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 413 Figure 6-178 8-bin Mailbox Adjustable and Fixed Casters - - - - - - - - - - - 414 Figure 6-179 8-bin Mailbox Attachment Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 415 Figure 6-180 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation- - - - - - - 417 Figure 6-181 C-link Cable on Mailbox with Stapler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 418 Figure 6-182 Back Plate (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 419 Figure 6-183 Back Plate (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 420 Figure 6-184 Stapler Controller PCA (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 421 Figure 6-185 Stapler Controller PCA (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 422 Figure 6-186 Stapler Controller PCA (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 423 Figure 6-187 Top Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 424 Figure 6-188 Stapler Bed Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 425 Figure 6-189 Hinges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 427 Figure 6-190 Optional Output Accessory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 433 Figure 6-191 Copy Connect EIO Board (slot 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 434 Figure 6-192 View with HP Digital Copy 320 Stand (preferred configuration) - - 435 Figure 6-193 View with HP Digital Copy 320 on Tabletop - - - - - - - - - - - 435 Figure 6-194 Orientation of the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 439 Figure 6-195 Separation Pad Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 440 Figure 6-196 Pick Roller Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 441 Figure 6-197 Pick Rollers (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 442 Figure 6-198 Pick Rollers (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 443 Figure 6-199 Document Holding Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 445 Figure 6-200 Paper Chute Flip-out - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 446 Figure 6-201 Output Tray- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 447 Figure 6-202 FB Cover Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 448 Figure 6-203 Thumb Screw for Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - 449 Figure 6-204 Removing the Cover from the Posts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 450 Figure 6-205 ADF Latch Cap - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 451 Figure 6-206 ADF Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 452 Figure 6-207 ADF Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 453 Figure 6-208 Front Panel (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 454 Figure 6-209 Front Panel (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 455 Figure 6-210 Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate - 456 Figure 6-211 Front Panel Ribbon Cable- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 457 xxiv List of Figures C4229-90911, Figure 6-212 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 458 Figure 6-213 Panel Cover (bottom view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 459 Figure 6-214 Front Panel Brackets (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 460 Figure 6-215 Front Panel Brackets (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 461 Figure 6-216 Upper Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 462 Figure 6-217 Upper Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 463 Figure 6-218 Copy Processor Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 464 Figure 6-219 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 465 Figure 6-220 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 466 Figure 6-221 RFI Cover (inside/rear view)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 467 Figure 6-222 RFI Cover (outside/front view)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 468 Figure 6-223 Control PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 469 Figure 6-224 Card Cage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 470 Figure 6-225 EEPROM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 471 Figure 6-226 Fan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 472 Figure 6-227 Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 473 Figure 6-228 Back PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 474 Figure 6-229 Optical Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 475 Figure 6-230 Optical Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 476 Figure 6-231 ADF Lamp PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 477 Figure 6-232 ADF Lamp PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 478 Figure 6-233 ADF Lamp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 479 Figure 6-234 Sensor Unit Assembly (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 480 Figure 6-235 Sensor Unit Assembly (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 481 Figure 6-236 Sensor Unit Assembly (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 482 Figure 6-237 ADF Motor Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 483 Figure 6-238 ADF Belt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 484 Figure 6-239 LED Assembly PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 486 Figure 6-240 ADF Unit (shown without Optical Unit) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 487 Figure 6-241 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 488 Figure 6-242 Output Tray Brackets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 489 Figure 6-243 Glass Plate Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 490 Figure 6-244 Idle Roller Coil Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 491 Figure 6-245 Home Position Sensor (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 492 Figure 6-246 Home Position Sensor (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 493 Figure 6-247 Dust Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 494 Figure 6-248 Lamp (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 495 Figure 6-249 Lamp (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 496 Figure 6-250 Carrier Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 497 Figure 6-251 Carrier Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 498 Figure 6-252 Carrier Belt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 499 Figure 6-253 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 500 Figure 6-254 Felt Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 501 Figure 6-255 Feet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 502 Figure 6-256 Frame Ground Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 503 Figure 6-257 Front Lamp PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 504 Figure 6-258 Junction PCA Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 505 C4229-90911 xxv, Figure 6-259 Junction PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 506 Figure 6-260 Front Panel Ribbon Cable- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 507 Figure 6-261 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 508 Figure 6-262 Carrier Belt and Motor (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 509 Figure 6-263 Carrier Belt and Motor (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 510 Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 515 Figure 7-2 Mopier System Troubleshooting Process - - - - - - - - - - - - 517 Figure 7-3 Mopier and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) - - 518 Figure 7-4 Mopier and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) - - 519 Figure 7-5 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - 520 Figure 7-6 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - 521 Figure 7-7 Communications Link (C-link) Cables, Supported Daisy Chain Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 523 Figure 7-8 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 526 Figure 7-9 Fan Location and Airflow - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 536 Figure 7-10 Engine Test Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 537 Figure 7-11 Sample Event Log - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 539 Figure 7-12 Error Format for Paper Handling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 543 Figure 7-13 Paper Path Jam Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 583 Figure 7-14 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection - - - - - - - - - - 585 Figure 7-15 Sample Menu Map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 588 Figure 7-16 Sample Mopier Configuration Page (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 590 Figure 7-17 Sample Copy Module Configuration Page - - - - - - - - - - - - 591 Figure 7-18 Sample File Directory Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 592 Figure 7-19 Sample Usage Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 594 Figure 7-20 Repetitive Defect Ruler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 613 Figure 7-21 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 616 Figure 7-22 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 630 Figure 7-23 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply Test Mode Switch - - - - - - - - - 631 Figure 7-24 Printer Sensors and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 639 Figure 7-25 Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids - - - - - - - - - - - - - 640 Figure 7-26 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - 641 Figure 7-27 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - 642 Figure 7-28 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - 643 Figure 7-29 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - 644 Figure 7-30 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - 645 Figure 7-31 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 646 Figure 7-32 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs - - - - - - - - - - 647 Figure 7-33 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs - - - - - - - - - 648 Figure 7-34 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - 649 Figure 7-35 8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 650 Figure 7-36 Copy Processor LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 664 Figure 7-37 Locations of ADF Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 667 Figure 8-1 HP Mopier 320 Paper-Handling Components - - - - - - - - - - 676 Figure 8-2 Printer Covers and Doors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 680 Figure 8-3 Printer Internal Components (1 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 682 Figure 8-4 Printer Internal Components (2 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 684 xxvi List of Figures C4229-90911, Figure 8-5 Printer Internal Components (3 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 686 Figure 8-6 Printer Internal Components (4 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 688 Figure 8-7 Detail of Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 690 Figure 8-8 PCB Assembly Location Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 692 Figure 8-9 Face-up Solenoid Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 693 Figure 8-10 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 694 Figure 8-11 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 696 Figure 8-122x500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components- - - - - - - - - - 698 Figure 8-13 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - 702 Figure 8-14 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 706 Figure 8-15 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 708 Figure 8-16 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 710 Figure 8-17 Stapler Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 712 Figure 8-18 Assembly Location Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 735 Figure 8-19 Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 736 Figure 8-20 Flatbed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 738 Figure 8-21 Glass Plate and PCA Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 740 Figure 8-22 Carrier Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 742 Figure 8-23 ADF Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 744 Figure 8-24 Optical Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 746 Figure 8-25 Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 747 Figure 8-26 Screws (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 748 Figure 8-27 Screws (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 748 Figure 8-28 Screws (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 749 Figure 8-29 Screws (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 749 C4229-90911 xxvii, xxviii List of Figures C4229-90911,

List of Tables

Table 1-1. Features of the Mopier Engine - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 Table 1-2. Paper Capacities and Sizes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11 Table 1-4. Accessories and Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 24 Table 1-5. Minimum Memory Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31 Table 1-6. Declaration of Conformity (HP Mopier 320) - - - - - - - - - - - 39 Table 1-7. Declaration of Conformity (HP Digital Copy 320) - - - - - - - - - 40 Table 2-1. Mopier and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions- - - - - - 50 Table 2-2. Dimensions of Mopier and Paper-handling Devices - - - - - - - 51 Table 2-3. Dimensions of Output Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52 Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53 Table 2-5. Acoustic Emissions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 54 Table 2-6. Specifications for Copy Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 Table 3-2. Indicator Lights - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59 Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63 Table 3-4. Quick Copy Jobs Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 66 Table 3-5. Private/Stored Jobs Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 66 Table 3-6. Information Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 67 Table 3-7. Paper Handling Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 68 Table 3-8. Print Quality Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 70 Table 3-9. Printing Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 72 Table 3-10. Configuration Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75 Table 3-11. I/O Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 80 Table 3-12. EIO Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 82 Table 3-13. Resets Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84 Table 3-14. Service Mode Menu Items - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 85 Table 3-15. Status Bar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 91 Table 3-16. Menu Tabs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92 Table 3-17. Context-sensitive Help - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97 Table 3-18. Default Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97 Table 3-19. Functions of Buttons and LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 98 Table 3-20. Start Button LED States- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 99 Table 3-21. Default Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 100 Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 114 Table 4-2. Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121 Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 122 Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans - - - - - 151 Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 153 Table 5-3. 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches and Motors - 156 Table 5-4. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Quantity Switches - - - - - - - - - 158 C4229-90911 List of Tables xxix, Table 5-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size Switches - - - - - - - - - - - 158 Table 5-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, and Motors- - - - - 161 Table 5-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Switches- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 162 Table 5-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors, Switches, and Motors - - - - - 165 Table 5-9. 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA - - 171 Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - 177 Table 5-11. Printer Timing- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 182 Table 5-12. Parallel Cable Pin Assignments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 184 Table 6-1. Hardware Table- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212 Table 6-2. Hardware Table- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 437 Table 7-1. Paper Curl - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 533 Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 534 Table 7-3. Fans - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 536 Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 545 Table 7-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - 557 Table 7-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - 561 Table 7-7. Envelope Feeder Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 564 Table 7-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - 565 Table 7-9. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 570 Table 7-10. Stapler Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 576 Table 7-11. Duplexer Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 579 Table 7-12. Paper Handling Controller Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - 580 Table 7-13. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions - - - - - - - - - 581 Table 7-14. Key to Figure 7-15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 588 Table 7-15. Printer Devices Troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 596 Table 7-16. Image Quality- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 597 Table 7-17. Blank (White) Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 599 Table 7-18. Black Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 599 Table 7-19. Fading Print - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 600 Table 7-20. Dropout- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 602 Table 7-21. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path) - - - - - - - - - - 602 Table 7-22. Toner Smear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 603 Table 7-23. Background Scatter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 604 Table 7-24. Repetitive Defects - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 605 Table 7-25. Line at Edge of Paper - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 606 Table 7-26. Misshapen Characters, Voids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 607 Table 7-27. Faulty Registration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 608 Table 7-28. Image Skew - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 608 Table 7-29. Bubble Print - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 609 Table 7-30. White Stripes Parallel to Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 610 Table 7-31. Partial Blank Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 610 Table 7-32. Compressed Print- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 611 Table 7-33. Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page (Tray 4 Input only) - - - - 611 Table 7-34. DIP Switch Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 619 Table 7-35. 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation- - - - - - - - - 620 Table 7-36. DIP Switch Settings for troubleshooting test procedures - - - - - 622 Table 7-37. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause between each pattern) 624 xxx List of Tables C4229-90911, Table 7-38. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test - - - - - - - - - - - 625 Table 7-39. Patterns of Flashing LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 627 Table 7-40. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation - - - - - - - - - - - - - 633 Table 7-41. Power On Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 652 Table 7-42. Display and Communication Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 653 Table 7-43. Boot Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 655 Table 7-44. Equipment Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 656 Table 7-45. Temporary Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 658 Table 7-46. Error Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 661 Table 7-47. Copy Processor LED Test Results - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 665 Table 7-48. Icon Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 666 Table 7-49. Other Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 669 Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components - - - - - - - - - - - - 677 Table 8-2. Printer Covers and Doors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 681 Table 8-3. Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 683 Table 8-4. Printer Internal Components (2 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 685 Table 8-5. Printer internal Components (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 687 Table 8-6. Printer Internal Components (4 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 689 Table 8-7. Detail of Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 691 Table 8-8. PCB Assembly Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 692 Table 8-9. Face-up Solenoid Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 693 Table 8-10. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 695 Table 8-11. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 697 Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components- - - - - - - - - - 699 Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - 703 Table 8-14. 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 707 Table 8-15. 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 709 Table 8-16. 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 711 Table 8-17. Stapler Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 713 Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 714 Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 724 Table 8-20. Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 737 Table 8-21. Flatbed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 738 Table 8-22. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 740 Table 8-23. Carrier Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 743 Table 8-24. ADF Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 744 Table 8-25. Optical Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 746 Table 8-26. Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 747 Table 8-27. Screws (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 748 Table 8-28. Screws (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 748 Table 8-29. Screws (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 749 Table 8-30. Screws (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 749 Table 8-31. Alphabetical Parts List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 750 Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 754 C4229-90911 xxxi, xxxii List of Tables C4229-90911, 1 Product Information

Chapter Contents

Features of the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 Product Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 Paper Capacities and Sizes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11 Mopier Media Selection Guidelines - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13 Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines- - - - - - - - - - 17 Identification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 22 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options - - - - - 23 Technical Assistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 32 Regulatory Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34 C4229-90911 Chapter Contents 1,

Features of the HP Digital Copy 320

Figure 1-1 Copy System

Features of the Mopier

Table 1-1. Features of the Mopier Engine Feature Description Print Speed 32 ppm letter or A4 17 ppm ledger (11 x 17) 18 ppm A3 20 ppm legal 20.5 ppm B4 Duplex Speed 12 ppm letter or A4 8.4 ppm ledger (11 x 17) or A3 9.0 ppm legal or B4 2 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Table 1-1. Features of the Mopier Engine (continued)

Feature Description Text and Graphics Resolution 600 dpi with FastRes FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed plus Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) Standard Printer Languages: Enhanced PCL 6 PCL 5e for compatibility PostScript™ Level 2 emulation Duty Cycle (Monthly Usage) Up to 150,000 images Internal Typefaces 45 PCL, 35 PostScript Cartridge Slots None Power Control PowerSave Mode Control Panel 6 Keys, 3 LEDs, LCD Display (2-line, 16 characters per line) EconoMode Yes (draft quality) Memory:1 48 MB2 Standard Interfaces IEEE 1284 ECP Parallel A to C connector JetDirect EIO Duplexer Standard Hard Disk Standard

C4229-90911 Features of the HP Digital Copy 320 3

, 1. Printer memory is optimized with Memory Enhancement technology (MEt). Printer has 16 MB RAM on board. DIMMs available for use include 4, 8, 16, and 64 MB modules. See Chapter 8 for option product numbers. SDRAM available includes 4, 8, 16, and 64 MB modules. EDO RAM available includes 4, 8, and 16 MB modules. 32 MB SD RAM modules are compatible, but not available from HP. A maximum of 192 MB RAM can be configured. 2. 16 MB on-board RAM, and one 32 MB DIMM.

Features of the Copy Module

● Straight-through paper path ● Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) - load original facedown ● One pass duplex scanning/2 complete optical systems ● 32 images per minute letter/A4 and 16 images per minute 11x17/ A3 ● Touch screen LED panel with keypad ● Copy module’s 400 x 300 and 400 x 600 8-bit grayscale is converted to the Mopier’s 600 x 600 dithered black and white (FastRes is sideband, 2-bit grayscale) ● Auto/Photo/Text modes ● IEEE 1394 high speed serial connection (Copy Processor Board to Copy Connect EIO) ● Job Interrupt (at mopy boundaries) ● N-up layout (printing multiple pages per sheet) ● Auto-configure to Mopier settings ● Copy books ● Custom stapling ● Power Save ● Copy module firmware is stored on the Mopier’s hard disk for easy upgrades ● Copy module can be placed on an optional copy stand (preferred configuration) or tabletop 4 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Product Overview External View of Mopier

Figure 1-2 Mopier - Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open 1 Left Output Bin 2 Control Panel 3 Standard Output Bin 4 Adjustable Paper Stop 5 Top Cover 6 Envelope Feeder (optional) 7 Tray 1 (multipurpose) 8 Tray 1 Extensions C4229-90911 Product Overview 5, 9 Tray 1 Paper Width Guides 10 Front Door 11 Tray 2 12 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) (not shown) 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 & 5) 13 Tray 3 14 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler 15 On/Off Switch 16 Duplexer (internal) 17 Stapler 6 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Formatter Assemblies

Figure 1-3 Rear and Left Side View 1 Formatter Pan Assembly 2 Parallel IEEE 1284 Interface Port 3 EIO Slot 3 Location 4 EIO Slot 2 Location [Hard Disk Location] 5 External Paper Handling Controller Port (behind EIO Slot 2/Hard Disk Accessory Location) 6 EIO Slot 1 Location 7 Firmware DIMM 8 DIMM Slots (3) 9 AC Power Connector 10 Model and Serial Number Label C4229-90911 Product Overview 7,

External View of HP Digital Copy 320

Automatic document Automatic feeder (ADF) Paper guides document feeder Paper output bin loaded LED Automatic document feeder Extension input tray Extension Power switch (back right) ADF lever Document cover and holding pad Graphical display panel Front panel Flatbed Figure 1-4 Front view of HP Digital Copy 320 Power switch Power inlet Power supply and main board tray handle Interface connector Copy processor board Figure 1-5 Rear view of HP Digital Copy 320 8 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Configurations

HP Digital Copy 320 Optional HP Digital Copy 320 Stand Optional Output Devices (A): HP Mopier 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler A or 8-bin Mailbox or 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox B Optional Input on Stand Devices (B): or 3000-sheet Stapler/ 2000-sheet Input Tray Stacker (when or available) 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Figure 1-6 Preferred Configuration Note The HP Mopier 320 comes with the HP Digital Copy 320 in Europe. All other components are optional. C4229-90911 Product Overview 9, HP Mopier Optional Output Devices (C): HP Digital Copy 320 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler or C 8-bin Mailbox or 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox on Stand D or 3000-sheet Stapler/ Stacker (when available) Optional Input Devices (D): Table 2000-sheet Input Tray or2x500-sheet Input Tray or Printer Stand Figure 1-7 Tabletop Configuration Note The preferred configuration is the HP Digital Copy 320 and the HP Mopier on the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand with an optional A and B device. The Printer Stand cannot be used with the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand. 10 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Paper Capacities and Sizes Mopier and Paper-handling Devices

Table 1-2. Paper Capacities and Sizes Tray or Bin Capacity Paper Weight Tray 1 up to 100 ● Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 53 lb Bond (multipurpose) sheets Executive, A5, Legal, 11 x 17, (60 to 199 g/m2) ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4, Two-sided: JPostD 16 to 28 lb Bond ● Custom sizes: (60 to 105 g/m2) Minimum: 3.67 x 7.5 in. (93 x 191 mm) Maximum: 11.7 x 17.7 in. (297 x 450 mm) Note: Duplex printing is available for paper sizes from5x7.5 in. to 11 x 17 in. (127 x 191 mm to 297 x 420 mm). ● Other media types: transparencies, envelopes, and labels Note: Envelopes, transparencies, and labels are supported only from Tray 1. Tray 2 up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb sheets Legal, JIS B4 (60 to 105 g/m2) Tray 3 up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb sheets Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 x 17 (60 to 105 g/m2) Face-down up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5, (Output bin) sheets Executive, Legal, 11 x 17, ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4 Face-up up to 100 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5, (Output bin) sheets Executive, Legal, 11 x 17, ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4 Optional up to 2,000 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb 2000-sheet sheets Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 x 17 (60 to 105 g/m2) Input Tray (Tray 4) Optional Tray 4 up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb (2 x 500-sheet sheets Legal, JIS B4 (60 to 105 g/m2) Input Tray) C4229-90911 Paper Capacities and Sizes 11, Table 1-2. Paper Capacities and Sizes (continued) Tray or Bin Capacity Paper Weight Optional Tray 5 up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb (2 x 500-sheet sheets Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 x 17 (60 to 105 g/m2) Input Tray) 5-bin Mailbox up to 250 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb with Stapler and sheets per Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 x 17, (60 to 105 g/m2) 8-bin Mailbox bin envelopes, transparencies, and labels Note: Envelopes, transparencies, and labels are only supported in the Face-up (left) output bin. The staple bin only supports A4 and Letter paper sizes. 7-bin Tabletop up to 120 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, Legal 16 to 28 lb Mailbox sheets per Note: B5, JIS B4, 11 x 17, ISO (60 to 105 g/m2) bin A3, envelopes, transparencies, and labels are only supported in the Face-up Bin. Envelope Feeder up to 100 Envelope sizes: Commercial #28, 16 to 24 lb envelopes C5, DL, Monarch, ISO B5, JPostD (60 to 90 g/m2) Duplexer Paper sizes: Letter, Legal, 16 to 28 lb 11 x 17, A3, A4, B4 (60 to 105 g/m2) 12 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Mopier Media Selection Guidelines

Note More detailed specifications are in the HP Mopier 320 User Guide and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. See Documentation in “Accessories and Options” on page 24.

Paper

To achieve the best possible print quality and avoid paper jams, follow these guidelines for selecting paper: ● Use only copier grade paper that meets all specifications in the paper specification guide. Avoid paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or texture that is too smooth or too rough. ● Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white photocopy paper. The pigments must withstand the fusing temperature of 392° F (200° C) for 0.1 second without deterioration. Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced. ● Pre-printed forms must be printed with non-flammable, heat- resistant inks that do not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the fusing temperature of 392° F (200° C) for 0.1 second. ● A small sample of a new print media should be tested before purchasing large quantities.

Envelopes

CAUTION To prevent severe damage to the printer, do not use envelopes that have windows, clasps, snaps, or any non-paper materials. Print Envelopes to the Face-up Bin ONLY. Envelopes can be printed from Tray 1 and from the optional Envelope Feeder. Choose envelopes that are well-constructed. They should lie flat and be sharply creased. They should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged. Envelope adhesive must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. C4229-90911 Mopier Media Selection Guidelines 13,

Adhesive Labels

Use the following guidelines when selecting labels: CAUTION Tray 1 is required for printing adhesive labels. Print labels to the Face-up Bin only. This printer does not support use of labels with any exposed spaces. Do not attempt to print on label sheets after any of the labels have been removed from the sheet. Damage to the printer may result. ● Labels must be arranged on the carrier sheet so that there are no exposed spaces on the sheet. Using label stock with spaces between rows or columns of labels can often result in labels peeling off during printing, causing serious jamming and possible damage to the printer. ● The top sheet (printing surface) must be of copier quality and provide good toner adhesion. ● The carrier sheet (backing sheet) must be compatible with the temperature and pressure of the fusing process, and must be coated for easy release of the top sheet. ● The adhesive must be stable at the 392° F (200° C) temperature encountered for 0.1 second in the fusing process, and must not produce emissions that exceed exposure levels or threshold limits established by OSHA and other safety agencies. Adhesives must not come into direct contact with any part of the printer. A wide selection of suitable labels may be ordered through Hewlett- Packard. Available sizes are listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. 14 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Transparencies

CAUTION Tray 1 is required for printing transparencies. Print transparencies to the Face-up Bin only. Transparencies used in HP LaserJet printers must be able to withstand the 392° F (200° C) temperature encountered in the printer's fusing process for 0.1 second. Suitable transparency film is available through Hewlett-Packard. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide for details.

Storing Print Media

Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing print media: ● Store paper in its wrapper until ready to use. ● Re-wrap partially used packages of media before storing. ● Stack each carton upright and squarely on top of the other. ● Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the edges of the envelopes. ● Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity extremes. ● DO NOT store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they will absorb a higher moisture content. Instead, place cartons on a pallet or on shelves. ● DO NOT store individual reams in a manner that causes them to curl or warp along the edges. ● DO NOT stack more than six cartons on top of each other. ● DO NOT place anything on top of media, regardless of whether the paper is packaged or unpackaged. ● DO NOT store printed documents in vinyl folders (which may contain plasticizers) or expose the documents to petroleum- based solvents.

Shipping Print Media

When shipping print media through different environments, plastic wrap all cartons on the shipping pallet. When shipping media across bodies of water, wrap individual cartons as well. Packaging must protect the media from physical damage. C4229-90911 Mopier Media Selection Guidelines 15,

Paper Weight Equivalence Table

Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb. Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade. Table 1-3. Paper Weight Equivalence U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. Tag Europe Japan Post Bond Text/ Cover Bristol Index Weight Metric Metric Card1 Weight Book Weight Weight Weight (lb) Weight Weight thick- (lb) Weight (lb) (lb) (lb) (g/m2) (g/m2) ness (lb) (mm) 1 16 41 22 27 33 37 60 60 2 17 43 24 29 35 39 64 64 3 20 50 28 34 42 46 75 75 4 21 54 30 36 44 49 80 80 5 22 56 31 38 46 51 81 81 6 24 60 33 41 50 55 90 90 7 27 68 37 45 55 61 100 100 8 28 70 39 49 58 65 105 105 9 32 80 44 55 67 74 120 120 10 34 86 47 58 71 79 128 128 11 36 90 50 62 75 83 135 135 12 .18 39 100 55 67 82 91 148 148 13 .19 42 107 58 72 87 97 157 157 14 .20 43 110 60 74 90 100 163 163 15 .23 47 119 65 80 97 108 176 176 16 53 134 74 90 110 122 199 199 1. U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only. 16 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines Paper Specifications

This section explains specifications of paper that can be used for the ADF unit. Any type of paper can be used on the flatbed.

Paper Size

Figure 1-8 shows the acceptable paper sizes.

B

letter/A4

A

Paper feeding direction 11x17/A3

A B

Figure 1-8 Paper size specification Maximum MinimumABAB8in. (210 mm) 6 in. (148 mm) 12 in. (297 mm) 17 in. (432 mm) 6 in. (148) 8 in. (210 mm) C4229-90911 Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines 17,

HP Digital Copy 320 Supported Sizes

● Ledger - 11 x 17 in. (279 x 432 mm) ● Executive - 7.3 x 10.5 in. (191 x 267 mm) ● Letter - 8.5 x 11 in. (216 x 279 mm) ● Legal - 8.5 x 14 in. (216 x 356 mm) ● A3 - 11.7 x 16.5 in. (297 x 419 mm) ● A4 - 8.3 x 11.7 in. (210 x 297 mm) ● A5 - 5.8 x 8.2 in. (148 x 210 mm) ● B4 (JIS) - 10.1 x 14.3 in. (257 x 364 mm) ● B5 (JIS) - 7 x 9.9 in. (176 x 250 mm)

Paper Conditions Ream Weight

Plain paper: 16 to 34 lb (52 to 127 g/m2) Recycled paper: 17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2) Bond paper: 16 to 28 lb (64 to 104 g/m2) Note The ADF holds up to 50 sheets of 24 lb. paper. Capacity will be less for thicker paper. For example, 24 lb HP LaserJet Paper has a capacity of 43, and 28 lb Xerox 4024 paper has a capacity of 32.

Document Quality

Do Not Load the following into the ADF: ● Carbonless paper or forms ● Paper with clips or staples ● Paper with wet ink or correction fluid ● Labels 18 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Precautions

The following documents might be hard to feed through the ADF. If the document slips in the ADF (Jam Error) or a double-feed occurs often, use the HP Digital Copy 320’s flatbed. ● Paper of unequal thickness, such as envelopes ● Paper with folds, tears, large wrinkles, or curl ● Paper with clips or staples ● Paper with wet ink ● Mixed paper sizes ● Color copied paper ● Tracing paper ● Coated paper ● Carbon paper ● Paper smaller than6x4in. (148 x 105 mm) or larger than A3 or 11 x 17 in. ● Other than paper • cloth • metal foil • transparency film ● Photographic paper ● Paper with notches on the side ● Paper that is not rectangular ● Thin paper CAUTION Use the flatbed for delicate paper or paper that does not meet specifications for the ADF. Carbonless papers have the chemical composition which damages the Separation Pad and Pick Roller. Therefore, note the following remarks. ● Cleaning: If mispicks occur frequently, clean the Separation Pad and Pick Roller more often. See “Cleaning the ADF” on page 122. ● Replacement of parts: The Separation Pad and the Pick Roller should be replaced more often. See page 126. Note Paper should be stacked in the chute as shown in figure 1-9. C4229-90911 Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines 19, More than More than 1 in. 1 in. (30 mm) Feed direction (30 mm) Feed direction Less than Less than .2 in. .1 in. 5 mm (3 mm) Top of the paper Read surface Top of the paper Read surface Figure 1-9 Paper orientation 20 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Perforated Paper

Perforations in the areas shown in figure 1-10 may cause problems when the paper is fed through the ADF. If so, use the flatbed to read perforated paper. Figure 1-10 Areas of the Paper that Should Not Be Perforated C4229-90911 Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines 21,

Identification Model and Serial Numbers

The model and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the Mopier. The model number is alphanumeric, such as C4229A. The serial number contains information about the Country of Origin, the Revision Level, the Production Code, and production number of the Mopier. The label also contains power rating and regulatory information as shown in figure 1-11. Figure 1-11 Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the Mopier Note The locations of the labels may change. The identification labels for the copy module are located on the back cover, below the ADF. The identification labels for the 2000-sheet Input Tray and2x500-sheet Input Tray are located on the back panel, directly below the identification labels on the Mopier. To locate the identification labels for the 8-bin Mailbox and 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, detach the paper-handling device from the Mopier. The identification labels are located on the bottom right of the front side (side that attaches to Mopier). To locate the identification labels for the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, detach the paper-handling device from the Mopier. The identification label is located on the bottom side of the back cover. 22 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options

The accessories and optional equipment for the Mopier are shown in figure 1-12 and described in table 1-4. The duplexer is standard. All the paper-handling devices in figure 1-12 and in table 1-4 are optional. Figure 1-12 Paper Handling Devices 1 Envelope Feeder 2 Duplexer (standard, internal) 3 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) (Not shown) 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) 4 8-bin Mailbox (provides mailbox, job separation, collating, and job stacking) 5 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (provides mailbox, job separation, job stacking, collating and stapling) Not shown: ● 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Stand ● 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox C4229-90911 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 23,

Ordering Information

Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. To order an accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. Table 1-4. Accessories and Options Item Description or Use Order Number Paper2x500-sheet Input Tray Two 500-sheet Input Trays. C4236A Handling 2000-sheet Input Tray 2000-sheet Input Tray. C4237A Envelope Feeder Automatically feeds up to C4242A 100 envelopes. Duplex Printing Allows automatic printing on C4782A Accessory (duplexer - both sides of paper. standard on DN model) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Each of the 7 Face-down C4238A output bins holds 120 sheets of paper. One Face-up Bin holds 100 sheets of paper. Designed for tabletop use. 8-bin Mailbox Each of the 8 output bins holds C4240B 250 sheets of paper. 5-bin Mailbox with Each of the 5 output bins holds C4241A Stapler 250 sheets of paper. Provides job separation by stapling jobs. 24 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use Order Number Printer Stands Printer Stand Used in place of the C2975A 2000-sheet Input Tray or the2x500-sheet Input Tray when an 8-bin Mailbox or a 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler is attached. Stand for 7-bin Allows 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox C4239A Tabletop Mailbox to be used when printer is mounted on2x500-sheet Input Tray, 2000-sheet Input Tray, or printer stand. C4229-90911 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 25, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use Order Number Printing HP Multipurpose HP brand paper for a variety HPM1120 Supplies Paper of uses (1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets each). To order a (Other HP media is sample, in the U.S. call available where office 1-800-471-4701. products are sold.) HP LaserJet Paper Premium HP brand paper for HPJ1124 use with HP LaserJet printers (Other HP media is (1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets available where office each). To order a sample, in products are sold.) the U.S. call 1-800-471-4701. Toner Cartridge Replacement HP Microfine C4182X (20,000 images) toner cartridge. 26 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use Order Number Memory, Dual In-line Memory Boosts the ability of the printer Fonts, and Module (DIMM) to handle large print jobs Mass Storage (100-pin) (maximum 192 MB with HP brand DIMMs). EDO DIMMs 4 MB C4135A (100-pin) 8 MB C4136A 16 MB C4137A SDRAM DIMMs 4 MB C4140A (100-pin) 8 MB C4141A 16 MB C4142A 32 MB C4143A 64 MB C3913A Flash DIMM Permanent storage for fonts (100-pin) and forms: 2 MB C4286A 4 MB C4287A Font DIMM 8 MB Asian ROM: (100-pin) traditional Chinese C4292A simplified Chinese C4293A Hard Disk Permanent storage for fonts C2985A and forms (1.4 MB maximum storage for fonts). Enables Raster Image Processor (RIP) ONCE mopying of print jobs that are too large to RIP ONCE mopy in RAM. Cable and Parallel Cables 3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable C2946A Interface 10 Meter IEEE-1284 cable C2947A Accessories Macintosh Network For PhoneNET or LocalTalk 92215N Cable Kit connection. C4229-90911 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 27, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use Order Number Cable and Enhanced I/O Cards HP JetDirect print server multi- Interface protocol EIO network cards: Accessories Ethernet (RJ-45 only) J3110A Ethernet (RJ-45 and BNC) and LocalTalk J3111A Token Ring (RJ-45 and DB-9) J3112A Fast Ethernet 10/100Base-TX (RJ-45 only) J3113A Power Box For connecting an 8-bin C4789A mailbox to the printer when the printer is on a printer stand. This item is included with the 2000-sheet Input Tray and the2x500-sheet Input Tray. Maintenance Preventive Maintenance For 110V units C3914A Accessory Kit C3914-69001 For 220V units C3915A C3915-69001 Documentation HP LaserJet Printer A guide to using paper and 5040-9092 Family Paper other print media with Specification Guide HP LaserJet printers. HP JetDirect Print A guide to installing and using 5967-2244 Server Software the JetDirect Print Server (English) Installation Guide software with HP LaserJet printers. Contains information for multiple operating systems. PCL 5/PJL Technical A guide to using printer 5021-0377 Reference commands with HP LaserJet Documentation printers. Package HP Mopier 320 User This is an online user guide C4229-60101 Guide provided on compact disc. 28 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use Order Number Documentation HP Mopier 320 Getting An additional copy of the C4229-90901 Started Guide getting started guide. HP Digital Copy 320 An additional copy of the copy C4230-90901 Getting Started Guide module getting started guide. User Documentation An additional copy of the C4214-99001 Bundle getting started guide and the (English) ready reference guide. HP Mopier 320 Service Service Manual. C4229-90911 Manual C4229-90911 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 29,

Hard Disk

The Mopier comes with a hard disk to permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the printer. Unlike the standard printer memory, permanently downloaded items remain on the hard disk even when the printer is powered off. Fonts downloaded to the hard disk are available to all users of the printer.

HP LaserJet Resource Manager

The HP LaserJet Resource Manager allows you to control hard disk and flash memory features not found in the drivers. Use the HP LaserJet Resource Manager to initialize disk and flash memory and to download, delete and manage fonts to disk, across networks. It is also used to update firmware for the HP Digital Copy 320. HP LaserJet Resource Manager is not available for the Macintosh. Macintosh users can use the HP LaserJet Utility, and Windows® users can use the HP printer driver to download fonts. The printer hard disk can also be write-protected through software for additional security. See the online help associated with your HP software for more information. For the Macintosh environment, see the online help in the HP LaserJet Utility Guide included with the HP LaserJet Utility software. For the Windows environment, see your HP Windows driver online help.

Determining Memory Requirements

The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you print. With the PCL printer language, the printer can print most text and graphics at 300 or 600 dpi without additional memory. Add memory to your printer if you ● Commonly print complex graphics. ● Use many downloaded fonts. ● Print complex documents. ● Use advanced functions (such as I/O Buffering and Resource Saving). You can remove the 32 MB DIMM and add up to 3 64 MB DIMMs for a total of 192 MB of usable memory. 30 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911, Table 1-5 presents the amount of memory required for the most common print jobs performed with the HP Mopier using 600-dpi printing. Table 1-5. Minimum Memory Requirements Print Job Paper Size PCL Minimum PostScript Memory Emulation Requirements Minimum Memory Requirements single-sided printing Letter, A4, Legal 16 MB 16 MB 11 x 17 in, A3 16 MB 16 MB two-sided printing Letter, A4 16 MB 16 MB Legal 16 MB 16 MB 11 x 17 in, A3 24 MB 24 MB C4229-90911 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 31,

Technical Assistance

HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) provides free technical support information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The ASAP system includes HP FIRST, explained below. The ASAP service requires a touchtone phone.

HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology)

HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a phone-in fax service providing technical information for HP LaserJet users as well as service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a type 3 facsimile machine or fax card. Service related information includes: ● Service notes (HP Authorized dealers) ● Application notes ● Product Data Sheets ● Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) ● Typeface and accessory information ● Printer support software information ● Toner information ● Driver request form and Software Matrix.

HP FIRST, U.S.

Call the HP ASAP system (1-800-333-1917) and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST.

HP FIRST, Europe

Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers: ● U.K., 0800-96-02-71 ● Netherlands, 06-02-22-420 ● Belgium (Dutch), 078-11-19-0 ● Germany, 0130-810061 ● Switzerland (German), 155-1527 ● Austria, 0660-8128 For English service outside the above countries, (31) 20-681-5792. 32 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Internet

Anonymous FTP library service is available for around-the-clock access to drivers, software, and technical support information for HP peripheral and computer products. Please note that paths may change without notice. Access the Internet or FTP address and use the menus to locate the software or support of your choice. URL for Access HP: http://www.hp.com URL for Software and Support: http://www.hp.com/go/cposupport FTP address: ftp.hp.com Login: anonymous Password: your Internet name (or user identification) FTP Path for Drive Software: /pub/printers FTP Path for Network Software: /pub/networking

World Wide Web

Download printer driver software using www.hp.com/cposupport/ eschome.html.

HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line

(US Only) The Hardware Technical Support Center (HTSC) is available for technical support to assist Hewlett-Packard authorized service technicians. The HTSC can be reached at 1-800-544-9976 between 7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Mountain Standard Time, Monday, Tuesday, Thursday, and Friday. On Wednesdays the office closes at 4:00 P.M.

Other Areas

Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support. C4229-90911 Technical Assistance 33,

Regulatory Information FCC Regulations

The HP Digital Copy 320 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. The Mopier 320 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase separation between equipment and receiver. ● Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located. ● Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. Note Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. 34 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Environmental Product Stewardship Protecting the Environment

Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally-sound manner. The Mopier has been designed to minimize impacts on the environment. The Mopier design eliminates: Ozone Production The Mopier uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (03). CFC Usage Class I U.S. Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone-depleting chemicals (chlorofluorocarbons [CFCs], for example) have been eliminated from the manufacturing of the Mopier and packaging. The Mopier design reduces: Energy Consumption Energy usage drops from 500/505 (110V/220V units) watts (W) during printing to as little as 35/40 (110V/220V units) W while in low-power (Power Save) mode. This saves energy without affecting the high performance of the Mopier. This product qualifies for the ENERGY STAR Program (U.S. and Japan). ENERGY STAR is a voluntary program established to encourage the development of energy-efficient office products. The ENERGY STAR name is a registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. Toner Consumption EconoMode uses about 50% less toner. Paper use The Mopier’s optional duplexing feature, which provides for two- sided printing, reduces paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources. C4229-90911 Regulatory Information 35, The design of the Mopier facilitates the recycling of: Plastics Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to international standards, which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the Mopier’s life. HP Toner Cartridges In many countries, this product’s toner cartridge/drum can be returned to HP using the prepaid shipping label and instructions included inside each new HP Toner Cartridge box. If your country is not listed in the recycling guide, call your local HP Sales and Service Office for further instructions. HP Cartridge Recycling Program information: Since 1990, the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program has collected more than twelve million cartridges that otherwise may have been discarded into landfills. Once a cartridge is returned, it is disassembled and reusable components are cleaned and inspected for quality conformance. After passing strict inspection procedures, materials such as nuts, screws, and clips are reclaimed and used to produce new cartridges. Remaining materials are melted down and used as raw materials for a variety of other products. Over 95 percent (%) of the weight of returned materials is recycled. For more information in the U.S., call (1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http://ljsupplies.com/planetpartners. Non-US customers can call the local HP Sales and Service Office for further information regarding the HP Toner Cartridge Recycling Program. Paper The Mopier is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide. To ensure Mopier longevity, HP provides the following: Spare Parts and Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be Consumables made available for at least five years after production has Availability stopped. 36 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Material Safety Data Sheet

The Toner Cartridge/Drum MSDS can be obtained by calling the U.S. HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) at (1) (800) 231-9300. Use Index number 7 for a listing of the Toner Cartridge/Drum Material/Chemical Safety Data Sheets. Non-U.S. customers should refer to the HP Support pages at the front of this user guide for appropriate phone numbers and information. For more information in the U.S., call (1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http://ljsupplies.com/planetpartners. C4229-90911 Regulatory Information 37,

Environmental Conformity

Plastics Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to international standards, which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the Mopier’s life. The plastics used in the Mopier housing and chassis are technically recyclable. Mopier and Parts Design for recycling has been incorporated into the Mopier and its accessories. The number of materials has been kept to a minimum while ensuring proper functionality and high product reliability. Dissimilar materials have been designed to separate easily. Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate, access, and remove with common tools. High priority parts have been designed to be accessed quickly for efficient disassembly and repair. Plastic parts have been primarily designed in two colors to enhance recycling options. A few small parts are colored specifically to highlight customer access points. HP disposes of returned products in an environmentally sound manner. Many of the functional parts are recovered, tested, and reused as fully-warrantied service parts. Used Mopier parts are not placed into new product manufacturing. The remainder of the product parts are recycled, if possible. For product take-back information, contact your local HP Sales and Service Office. Paper The Mopier is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide. The Mopier is suited for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19 309. Acoustics It is advisable to place printers with a sound power level of Lwad of 6.3 Bel (A) or higher into a separate or divided up room. 38 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Declarations of Conformity Table 1-6. Declaration of Conformity (HP Mopier 320)

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP Mopier 320 Model Number: C4229A Product Options: ALL conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety: IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4/ EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4 IEC 825-1:1993/EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) EMC: CISPR 22:1993 / EN 55022:1994 Class B1

C4229-90911 Regulatory Information 39

,

Table 1-7. Declaration of Conformity (HP Digital Copy 320)

according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP Digital Copier 320 Model Number: C4230A Product Options: ALL conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety: IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4/ EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4 IEC 825-1:1993/EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED) EMC: CISPR 22:1993 / EN 55022:1994 Class A1) EN 50081-1:1992 EN 50082-1:1992 IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -3 kV CD, 8 kV AD IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 - 3 V/m IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 - 1.0 kV Power Lines 0.5 kV Signal Lines FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A2 / ICES-002, Issue 2 40 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Table 1-7. Declaration of Conformity (HP Digital Copy 320) (continued)

AS / NZS 3548:1995 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly. 1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2) This Device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation Boise, Idaho USA June 03, 1998 Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31- 41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett- Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Straße 130, D-71034 Böblingen (Germany) (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143). USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID, 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000).

C4229-90911 Regulatory Information 41

,

Safety Statements Laser Safety Statement

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The Mopier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the Mopier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user’s guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.

Canadian DOC Regulations

Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. <>.>>

VCCI Statement (Japan)

HP Mopier 320 (Model C4229A) HP Digital Copy 320 (Model C4230A) 42 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911,

Korean EMI statement

HP Mopier 320 (Model C4229A) HP Digital Copy 320 (Model C4230A)

Laser Statement for Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT HP Mopier 320-laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1993) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. C4229-90911 Regulatory Information 43,

HUOLTO

HP Mopier 320-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 770-795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser 44 Chapter 1 Product Information C4229-90911, 2 Site Requirements

Chapter Contents

Operating Environment- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 46 Space Requirements- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 47 Environmental Requirements- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50 Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51 C4229-90911 Chapter Contents 45,

Operating Environment

The electrical specifications listed in Table 2-4 on page 53 must be maintained to ensure proper operation of this Mopier. Consider the following points before installing the Mopier. ● Install the Mopier in a well-ventilated, dust-free area, away from any open windows. ● Install the Mopier and peripherals on a hard, flat and continuous surface, with all feet level. Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces. We recommend the use of the HP Digital Copy 320 with the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand. ● Ensure adequate, stable power is supplied. Mopier power requirements are listed in table 2-4, “Electrical Specifications,” on page 53. ● Install the Mopier where there is stable temperature and humidity, away from water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances (see table 2-1 on page 50). ● Install the Mopier away from direct sunlight, open flames, or chemicals. If the Mopier is placed near a window, make sure the window is closed and has a curtain or blind to block any direct sunlight. ● Install the Mopier with enough space around the Mopier for proper access and ventilation (see “Space Requirements” on page 47). ● Install the Mopier away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation, heating, or air conditioning systems. Note Be sure to leave enough space to completely extend the optional output accessory away from the Mopier. 46 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4229-90911,

Space Requirements

46.75 in. (1187 mm) 11.5 in. (292 mm) Figure 2-1 Mopier Space Requirements (Top view) 13.75 in. (350 mm) 11.5 in. (292 mm) Figure 2-2 Mopier Space Requirements (Side view) 14.5 in. (368 mm) 29.5 in. (749 mm) 35 in. (889 mm) C4229-90911 Space Requirements 47, 66.25 in. (1683 mm) 14.5 in. (368 mm) 19.5 in. (485 mm) 33 in. (838 mm) Figure 2-3 Mopier Space Requirements (with Mailbox and Input Device) 35 in. (889 mm) 48.4 in. (1229 mm) 48 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4229-90911, 73 in. (1854 mm) 43 in. (1092 mm) 11 in. 14.5 in. (279 mm) (368 mm) (document cover open) 19.5 in. (495 mm) Top and Side Views 33 in. (838 mm) (preferred configuration) Figure 2-4 Mopier and Copy Module Space requirements 35 in. (889 mm) 64 in. (1626 mm) C4229-90911 Space Requirements 49,

Environmental Requirements

Keep the Mopier within the following environmental conditions for optimum performance. Table 2-1. Mopier and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions Operating Storage Temperature 10° to 32.5° C 0° to 40° C (50° to 90.5° F) (32° to 105° F) Humidity 20 to 80% RH 15 to 90% RH (with no condensation) (with no condensation) For printer weights, see table 2-2, “Dimensions of Mopier and Paper- handling Devices,” on page 51. 50 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4229-90911,

Specifications Mopier and Paper-handling Devices

This section contains information on physical and electrical characteristics of the printer. For information on the printer site and environmental requirements (such as operating temperature and humidity, ventilation, etc.), see Chapter 2. Table 2-2. Dimensions of Mopier and Paper-handling Devices Item Height Width Depth Weight Mopier only 21.30 in. 22.3 in. 20.50 in. 106 lbs. (48 kg) (541 mm) (566.42 mm) (520 mm) (without toner cartridge and with paper trays) Mopier with 40.20 in. 24.76 in. 20.50 in. 160-164 lbs. 2 x 500-sheet (1021 mm) (629 mm) (520 mm) (72.6-74.4 kg) Input Tray or 2000-sheet Input Tray Toner cartridge n/a n/a n/a 1Full: 114.3 oz (3,200 g) Empty: 78.6 oz (2,200 g) 2 x 500-sheet 18.89 in. 24.76 in. 20.50 in. 61 lbs. Input Tray (480 mm) (629 mm) (520 mm) (27.9 kg.) Including without paper Transfer Door: 25.59 in. (650 mm) 2000-sheet 18.89 in. 24.76 in. 20.50 in. 65 lbs. Input Tray (480 mm) (629 mm) (520 mm) (29.5 kg) Including Transfer Door: 25.59 in. (650 mm) C4229-90911 Specifications 51, 1. Some toner will reside in the waste toner area of a toner cartridge when the toner supply is exhausted. Therefore toner cartridge weight may be an unreliable indication of remaining toner supply. Table 2-3. Dimensions of Output Devices Item Height Width Depth Weight 8-bin Mailbox 35.23 in. 18.0 in. 20.0 in. 42.32 lbs. (895 mm) (457 mm) (508 mm) (19.2 kg) Stapler 14.17 in. 19.68 in. 14.56 in. 10.50 lbs. (360 mm) (500 mm) (370 mm) (4.8 kg) Duplexer 37.40 in. 15.31 in. 16.73 in. 7.93 lbs. (950 mm) (389 mm) (425 mm) (3.6 kg) Envelope Feeder 5.11 in. 15.31 in. 14.37 in. 7.71 lbs. (130 mm) (389 mm) (365 mm) (3.5 kg) 7-bin Tabletop 20.87 in. 15.0 in. 18.50 in. 30 lbs. Mailbox (530 mm) (381 mm) (470 mm) (14 kg.) Stand (only for 18.90 in. 16.90 in. 18.90 in. 32.00 lb. the 7-bin (480 mm) (430 mm) (480 mm) (14.5 kg) Tabletop Mailbox) 52 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4229-90911, Figure 2-5 Dimensions of Paper Handling Devices Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications Volts Frequency Amps1 Watts (average) Mopier 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 11.2 maximum, printing = 710 100 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 6.0 average standby= 155 PowerSave Mode = 45 220 Vac ± 10% 50 Hz ± 2 Hz 5.9 maximum, printing = 700 240 Vac ± 10% 50 Hz ± 2 Hz 3.0 average standby= 155 PowerSave Mode = 45 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum, 45 Watts Maximum 0.3 average 240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.3 maximum, 45 Watts Maximum 0.2 average 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler 100-240 Vac 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 @ 120v 45 Watts Maximum 0.25 @ 240v2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.9 maximum 47 Watts Maximum 240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum 47 Watts Maximum C4229-90911 Specifications 53, Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications (continued) Volts Frequency Amps1 Watts (average) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum 28 Watts Maximum 240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.3 maximum 28 Watts Maximum 1. Operating current requirements. Table 2-5. Acoustic Emissions Operation position per ISO 9296 Printer Printer System1 (stand-alone) Printing LPA dB(A) 59 db 62 db Standby LPA dB(A) 41 db 44 db Bystander 1m per ISO 9296 Printing LPA dB(A) 53 db 56 db Standby LPA dB(A) 36 db 39 db Sound Power per ISO 9296 Printing LWAD 6.9 bels (A) 7.2 bels (A) Standby LWAD 5.2 bels (A) 5.5 bels (A) 1. Printer System includes the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) or2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5), 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder. Note Printer system values are an estimate determined from the baseline values. 54 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4229-90911,

Copy Module

Table 2-6. Specifications for Copy Module Item Specification Dimensions (mm) Width: Depth: Height: 43 in. (1092 mm) 26 in. (660 mm) 22 in. (559 mm) Weight 49 lb. (22 kg) Input power Voltage and 100 to 120 Volts ±10%, 50 or 60 Hz ±2 Hz frequency 127 Volts, 60 Hz NOM or 220 to 240 Volts ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 2 Hz 220 Volts ± 10%, 60 Hz ± 2 Hz Phases Single Phase Power consumption approximately 30 Watts Environmental Device status Operating Not Operating condition Temperature 50° F to 91° F 32° F to 95° F (10° C to 32.5° C) (0° C to 35° C) Humidity (no 20% to 80% RH 10% to 90% RH condensation) C4229-90911 Specifications 55, 56 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4229-90911, 3 Operating Overview

Chapter Contents

HP Mopier 320 Using the Mopier Control Panel- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 Performing a Cold Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 Control Panel Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65 Mopier Service Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 85 Testing the Mopier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 89 HP Digital Copy 320 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel - - - - - - - - - 90 Copy Module Service Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 105 HP Resource Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 107 C4229-90911 Chapter Contents 57,

Using the Mopier Control Panel Control Panel Layout

The control panel contains a 2-line, 16-character-per-line display SDQHOsix keys, and three indicator lights. Cancel GO Job Menu Item - Value + Select Ready Data Attention Figure 3-1 Control Panel Layout Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys Key Function GO ● Places the mopier either online or offline. ● Prints any data residing in the mopier’s buffer. ● Allows the mopier to resume printing after being offline. Clears most mopier messages and places the mopier online. ● Allows the mopier to continue printing with an error message such as TRAY x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE. ● Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE has been set from the Paper Handling Menu in the mopier’s control panel. ● Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting paper from the next available tray. ● Exits the control panel menus. (To save a selected control panel setting, first press SELECT.) MENU Cycles through the control panel menus. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward. 58 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys (continued) Key Function ITEM Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward. Menu items that appear depend on the options installed and the configuration of other menu choices. ? Provides an online help tool with more details on display error messages. Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press + to move forward or - to move backward. -VALUE+ Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press + to move forward or - to move backward. SELECT Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default settings remain when the printer is switched off or reset (unless you reset all factory defaults from the Resets Menu). Prints one of the printer information pages from the control panel. CANCEL Cancels the print job that the mopier is processing. The time it JOB takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job. (Press it only once.)

Indicator Lights

The control panel indicator lights are described in the following table. Table 3-2. Indicator Lights Indicator= State Explanation Action Ready On Ready to receive data. No action required. Flashing Going offline. No action required. Off Printer is offline. Press GO to place printer online. Data On Data is resident in the No action required. printer and processed as far as possible. More data is expected, but no activity on the channel at this time. Flashing Data is being received or No action required. processed. Off No data is being received No action required. or processed in the printer. C4229-90911 Using the Mopier Control Panel 59, Table 3-2. Indicator Lights (continued) Indicator= State Explanation Action Attention On Catastrophic error. Turn printer off, then Printer system is halted. on. If problem persists, see Chapter 7. Flashing The printer needs Read and respond to attention. display panel message. Off There are no messages No action required. or error conditions requiring attention.

Settings and Defaults

The printer makes most printing decisions based on either temporary settings or factory (permanent) defaults. Note Settings you send from software applications override printer defaults. Temporary Settings are the values set for the current print job by your software application. Temporary settings remain in effect until the current print job is finished. Control Panel Defaults are the values entered by selecting a control panel item and pressing SELECT. An asterisk (*) next to the item name indicates that it is now the default. The printer retains default settings even when power is turned off. Factory Defaults are the permanent default values for each menu item set at the factory. These values are listed in table 3-3 on page 63.

Printer Driver Information

When you change a setting from the printer control panel, the new setting becomes the printer default value. You can override any Printing Menu setting through most software applications and from the printer driver. 60 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Paper Source Default

The printer paper source is specified by the print job, not the printer control panel. The following paragraphs apply when the current job does not specify a paper source. Unless changed or not specified by the current job, the software application, or the printer driver, the paper source default is determined by the “Cold Reset Paper Size” (letter or A4) set in the Service Mode Menu. ● If Tray 1 is set to cassette, it will look for the default size. ● If there is no paper in Tray 1, and Tray 4 of the 2000-sheet Input Tray is installed and loaded with the Cold Reset Paper Size, the printer will pull from Tray 4. ● The printer pulls paper from Tray 5 first if the Optional2x500-sheet Input Tray is installed. ● If there is no paper in Tray 1, and Tray 4 is not installed, the printer will pull from the first tray containing the Cold Reset Paper Size. ● If none of the trays contain the Cold Reset Paper Size, the printer will prompt the user to put letter or A4 paper in Tray 1. C4229-90911 Using the Mopier Control Panel 61,

Performing a Cold Reset Cold Reset

Cold Reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the defaults back to the factory settings. CAUTION Performing a Cold Reset resets the JetDirect configuration. To avoid making changes to your configuration, remove the JetDirect card before performing a Cold Reset. If possible, print a Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset. This will document current settings for later reference. To perform a Cold Reset: 1. Turn off the printer. 2 While pressing GO, turn the printer on. COLD RESET appears briefly on the display, then INITIALIZING appears. After a few seconds, RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the display, followed by OFFLINE. The Cold Reset is complete. 3. Press GO to return the printer online. READY appears on the display.

Setting the Display Language

1 Press and hold SELECT while powering on. Hold SELECT until SELECT LANGUAGE appears. 2 Release SELECT. INITIALIZING appears briefly. Wait for LANGUAGE=ENGLISH to appear. 3 Press + repeatedly until the desired language appears. 4 Press SELECT to save your choice. An asterisk (*) will appear beside your language selection. 5 Press GO to return to a READY state. Note The language that appears on the HP Digital Copy 320 display is customized through the language selected on the Mopier. If the Mopier language is set to a language other than the six offered by the HP Digital Copy 320, then the HP Digital Copy 320 will default to English. (See the Mopier online user guide for more information.) 62 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings APPEND CR TO LF NO AUTO CONTINUE= ON CFG NETWORK NO CLEARABLE WARNINGS JOB CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER NO CONFIGURE FUSER MODE NO COPIES 1 COURIER REGULAR CREATE CLEANING PAGE NO DUPLEX= OFF ECONOMODE= OFF FORM 60 LINES I/O TIMEOUT= 15 SECONDS IO BUFFER= AUTO JAM RECOVERY= AUTO MANUAL FEED OFF NEW TONER CARTRIDGE NO ORIENTATION= PORTRAIT OVERRIDE A4/LETTER NO PAPER DEST= STANDARD OUTPUT BIN PAPER= LETTER PARALLEL ADV FUNCTIONS ON PARALLEL HIGH SPEED SETTING= YES PCL FONT NUMBER 0 PCL FONT PITCH 10 PCL FONT SOURCE INTERNAL PCL SYMBOL SET PC-8 PERSONALITY= AUTO POWERSAVE ON= 1 HOUR C4229-90911 Performing a Cold Reset 63, Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings (continued) PRINT PS ERRORS OFF RAM DISK AUTO RAM DISK SIZE 800K RESOLUTION= FASTRES 1200 RESOURCE SAVE= OFF RET= MEDIUM TONER DENSITY= 3 TONER LOW= CONTINUE TRAY 1 MODE FIRST TRAY 2 TYPE PLAIN TRAY 3 TYPE PLAIN WIDE A4 NO 64 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Control Panel Menus

Press MENU to cycle through the control panel menus. Each menu is described in a separate table in this section. Figure 7-15 on page 588 provides a map of all the menus and their associated items. Menu items are displayed only if their associated option is installed, or their function is activated. All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer is online. In menu mode, if no keys are pressed for approximately 30 seconds, the system will automatically return to the top level and display either an existing error, or one of the following: ● READY, if the printer was online. ● OFFLINE, if the printer was offline.

To select a menu item

1 Press MENU repeatedly until the desired menu appears. 2 Press ITEM repeatedly until the desired item appears. 3 Press + repeatedly (or hold down + to scroll) until the desired setting appears. 4 Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection, indicating that it is now the default. 5 Press MENU or GO to exit the menus. Note Shaded items appear only if the associated option or function is installed and activated. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 65,

Quick Copy Jobs Menu

This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel. Note If there are no quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk, this menu is not displayed on the control panel. Table 3-4. Quick Copy Jobs Menu Item Value Explanation [USERNAME] The name of the person who owns the quick copy job. COPIES=1 1 to 999 The number of additional copies the user wants to print. DELETE 1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the job. DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk.

Private/Stored Jobs Menu

This menu provides a list of the private and stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel. Note If there are no private and stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk, this menu is not displayed on the control panel. Table 3-5. Private/Stored Jobs Menu Item Value Explanation [JOBNAME] The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard disk. PIN:0000 To print the job, the user must enter the Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned to the job in the driver. COPIES=1 1 to 999 The number of additional copies the user wants to print. DELETE 1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the job. DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk. Note The Quick Copy Jobs Menu and the Private/Stored Jobs Menu will only appear if you have a Hard Disk, if you have selected a Job Retention Option, and if you have sent jobs to the printer. 66 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Information Menu

This menu contains printer information pages that give details about the printer and its configuration. To print a page from the information menu, scroll to the desired page and press SELECT. Table 3-6. Information Menu Item Explanation PRINT The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the MENU MAP control panel menu items. PRINT The configuration page shows the printer’s current configuration. CONFIGURATION If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed, a JetDirect configuration page will print out as well. PRINT The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the PCL FONT LIST printer. PRINT The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the PS FONT LIST printer. PRINT The file directory shows information for all of the installed mass FILE DIRECTORY storage devices. PRINT The event log lists printer events or errors. EVENT LOG SHOW This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the EVENT LOG control panel display. Press - VALUE + to scroll through the event log entries. PRINT The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is PAPER PATH TEST working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper. Choose the input tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and number of copies. NOTE: Feeding paper from Tray 1 will not allow the user to send paper to the Face-down output bins during this test. PRINT USAGE PAGE Only shown when hard disk is installed. Primarily used for Mopier page tracking. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 67,

Paper Handling Menu

When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper from the printer driver or software application. Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. Table 3-7. Paper Handling Menu Item Values Explanation TRAY 1 MODE= FIRST Determine how the printer will use Tray 1. FIRST CASSETTE FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, the printer will pull paper from that tray first. CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to Tray 1 using the TRAY 1 SIZE option (the next item in this menu when TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE). This allows Tray 1 to be used as a reserved tray. TRAY 2 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in Tray 2. see table 1-2. TRAY 3 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in Tray 3. see table 1-2. *TRAY 4 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray see table 1-2. (Tray 4) or Tray 4 of the Optional2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5). *TRAY 5 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in Tray 5 of the Optional2x500-sheet see table 1-2. Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5). PAPER DEST= STANDARD This item appears when an output device is installed. STANDARD OUTBIN OUTBIN Set the value to correspond to the appropriate bin. LEFT OUTBIN Additional output bins appear in the menu with the installation of output devices.

OPTIONAL BIN

MANUAL OFF Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than FEED=OFF ON automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a print job and displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE]. 68 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-7. Paper Handling Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation *DUPLEX=OFF OFF This item appears only when a duplexer is installed. ON Set the value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper. OVERRIDE NO Choose YES to print on letter-size paper when an A4 A4/LETTER=NO YES job is sent, but no A4-size paper is loaded in the printer (or to print on A4-size paper when a letter job is sent, but no letter paper is loaded in the printer). CONFIGURE NO Default is NO. Choose YES to configure. Press - VALUE FUSER MENU YES + or to make your selection, and press SELECT to save the setting. NORMAL = 32 ppm. LOW = slightly lower temperature at 32 ppm. HIGH1 = slightly higher than normal at 32 ppm. HIGH2 = slightly higher than normal at 24 ppm. This allows more time to fuse toner for special types of media (i.e. heavy, rough stock) HIGH3 = slightly hotter fusing than H1 or H2 at 16 ppm, for media needing more time in the fusing process. Note Items marked with an * only appear in the menu if the2x500-sheet Input Tray, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, or the duplexer are installed. To see the default fuser mode for each paper type, select YES, scroll back to the Information Menu, and print a menu map. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 69,

Print Quality Menu

Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. Table 3-8. Print Quality Menu Item Values Explanation RESOLUTION= 300 Select the resolution from the following values: FASTRES 1200 600 300: Produces draft print quality at the printer’s FASTRES 1200 maximum speed (32 ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is recommended for some bitmapped fonts and graphics, and for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of printers. 600: Produces high print quality at the printer’s maximum speed. FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (comparable to 1200 dpi) at the printer’s maximum speed. Note It is best to change the resolution from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) RET=MEDIUM OFF Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement technology LIGHT (REt) setting to produce print with smooth angles, MEDIUM curves, and edges. All print resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit

DARK

from REt. Note It is best to change the REt setting from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) 70 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-8. Print Quality Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation ECONOMODE=OFF OFF Turn EconoMode on (for draft mode) or off (for high ON quality). EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50%.

CAUTION

HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. (If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge.) Note It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) TONER DENSITY=3 1 Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the 2 toner density setting. The settings range from 1 (light) to35(dark), but the default setting of 3 usually produces the best results. Use a lower toner density setting to save toner. Note It is best to change the toner density from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) CREATE No value to Press SELECT to print a cleaning page (for cleaning CLEANING PAGE select. excess toner from the paper path). In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper). Follow the instructions on the cleaning page. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 71,

Printing Menu

Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. Table 3-9. Printing Menu Item Values Explanation COPIES=1 1 to 999 Sets the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 999. Press - VALUE + once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 10. Note It is best to set the number of copies from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) PAPER= For supported Sets the default image size for paper and envelopes. LETTER paper types, (The item name will change from paper to envelope as see table 1-2. you scroll through the available sizes.) Note The defaults indicated here are for 110V printers. The default paper size for 220V printers is A4. The default envelope size for 220V printers is DL. CONFIGURE NO NO: The custom paper menu items are not accessible. CUSTOM PAPER=NO YES YES: This menu item allows the user to configure a custom size when printing from Tray 1. The increments can be set to inches or millimeters. FORM=60 LINES 5 to 128 Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size. Press - VALUE + once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 10. 72 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-9. Printing Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation ORIENTATION= PORTRAIT Determines the default orientation of print on the page. LANDSCAPE Note It is best to set the page orientation from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) PCL FONT INTERNAL INTERNAL: Internal fonts. SOURCE=INTERNAL SOFT SOFT: Permanent soft fonts. SLOT 1, 2, or SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three 3 DIMM slots. PCL FONT 0 to 999 The printer assigns a number to each font and lists NUMBER= them on the PCL Font List. The font number appears in 0 the Font # column of the printout. PCL FONT PITCH= 0.44 to 99.99 This item might not appear, depending on the font 10.00 selected. Press - VALUE + once to change setting by increments of 0.01 for pitch, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 1. PCL SYMBOL PC-8 Select any one of several available symbol sets from SET=PC-8 many others the printer’s control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for line draw characters. COURIER=REGULAR REGULAR Select the version of Courier font to use: DARK REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet 4 series printers. DARK: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet III series printers. Both fonts are not available at the same time. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 73, Table 3-9. Printing Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation WIDE A4=NO NO The Wide A4 setting changes the number of YES characters that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. APPEND CR TO LF= NO Select YES to append a carriage return to each line NO YES feed encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line using only the line feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed. PRINT PS OFF Select ON to print the PS error page when PS errors ERRORS=OFF ON occur. 74 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Configuration Menu

Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer according to your printing needs. Table 3-10. Configuration Menu Item Values Explanation POWERSAVE ON= OFF Set the printer to enter PowerSave after it has been idle 1 HOUR 15 MINUTES for a specified amount of time. Turning PowerSave off is 30 MINUTES not recommended. The PowerSave feature does the following: 1 HOUR Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer 2 HOURS when it is idle. 3 HOURS Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic components. (Turns off the display’s backlight.) When you send a print job, press a control panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode. Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display, but the display is still readable. PERSONALITY= AUTO Select the default printer language (personality). AUTO PCL Normally you should not change the printer language PS (the default is AUTO). If you change it to a specific printer language, the printer will not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the printer. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 75, Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation RESOURCE SAVE= OFF This item dedicates printer memory to save each OFF ON language’s permanent resources. (You might need to AUTO add memory to the printer in order for this item to appear.) The amount of memory set aside can be different for each installed language. Some languages might have memory set aside for resource saving without requiring all languages to do so. Any time the amount of memory dedicated to a specific language is changed, all languages will lose all saved resources, including any unprocessed print jobs. OFF: No language resource saving is performed, and language-dependent resources, such as fonts and macros, are lost when language or resolution changes. ON: An item will appear for each installed language that allows the user to allocate a particular amount of memory to that language’s resource saving area. (See the items below.) AUTO: The printer automatically determines the amount of memory to use for each installed language’s resource saving area. PCL MEMORY+ 0K and up This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. 400K (This value Select the amount of memory used for saving PCL depends on resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of the amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL. installed Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10 memory.) (up to 100KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100KB). PS MEMORY= 0K and up This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. 400K (This value Select the amount of memory used for saving PS depends on resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of the amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL. installed Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10 memory.) (up to 100KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100KB). 76 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation PAGE PROTECT= AUTO This item appears only after a 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX, AUTO ON PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message displays. Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) attempts to guarantee that all pages will print. If the page does not print, turn PAGE PROTECT to ON. This might increase chances of a 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PRESS GO TO OONTINUE message. If this occurs, simplify the print job or install additional memory. CLEARABLE JOB Set the amount of time that a clearable warning is WARNINGS=JOB ON displayed on the printer’s control panel. JOB: Warning messages display on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. ON: Warning messages display on the control panel until GO is pressed. AUTO CONTINUE= ON This item determines how the printer reacts to errors. ON OFF ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will display, and the printer will go offline for 10 seconds before returning online. OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will remain on the display and the printer will remain offline until GO is pressed. TONER CONTINUE This item determines how the printer behaves when LOW=CONTINUE STOP toner is low. The TONER LOW message will first appear when the toner cartridge is almost out of toner. (About 100 to 300 images can still be printed.) CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print while the TONER LOW message is displayed. STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for further action. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 77, Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation RAM DISK=AUTO ON This item determines how the RAM disk is configured. OFF This item appears only if there is no hard disk installed AUTO and the printer has at least 12 MB of memory. OFF: The RAM disk is disabled. ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the amount of memory to be used with the item RAM DISK SIZE. Note If the setting is changed from OFF to ON or from OFF to AUTO, the printer will automatically reinitialize when it becomes idle. RAM DISK 0K and up. (This This item determines the size of the RAM disk. This SIZE=xxxK value depends item appears if RAM DISK=ON or AUTO. on the amount of Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of installed 100. memory.) Note This setting cannot be changed if RAM DISK=AUTO. Changing this value will cause the printer to reinitialize when it becomes idle. JAM RECOVERY= AUTO This item determines how the printer behaves when a AUTO ON paper jam occurs. OFF AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for printer jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default setting. ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a paper jam is cleared. OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a paper jam. Printing performance might be increased with this setting. 78 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation MAINTENANCE OFF This item appears only after the PERFORM PRINTER MESSAGE=OFF MAINTENANCE message displays. OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be cleared. If you do not replace the maintenance kit, the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be displayed again after approximately 17,500 pages. The message should not be turned off unless the printer maintenance has been performed. If the required maintenance is not performed, the printer’s performance will degrade. NEW TONER NO YES: Resets the printer to recognize new cartridge, and CARTRIDGE=NO YES resets the toner gauge on the configuration page. QUICK COPY JOBS 1 to 50 Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that can be =32 stored on the printer’s hard disk. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 79,

I/O Menu

Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication between the printer and the computer. Table 3-11. I/O Menu Item Values Explanation I/O TIMEOUT=15 5 to 300 Select the I/O time-out period in seconds. (I/O time-out refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer waits before ending a print job.) This setting allows you to adjust time-out for best performance. If data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job, increase the time-out value. Press - VALUE + once to change settings by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 10. I/O BUFFER=AUTO AUTO Allocate memory for I/O buffering. ON AUTO: The printer automatically reserves memory for OFF I/O buffering. Additional configurations are not required and the I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not appear. ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZE item appears (see below). Specify the amount of memory to be used for I/O buffering. OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the I/O BUFFER SIZE item does not appear. When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on the hard disk or a flash DIMM. PARALLEL HIGH YES Select the speed at which data is transmitted to the SPEED=YES NO printer. YES: The printer accepts faster parallel communications used for connections with newer computers. NO: The printer accepts slower parallel communications used for connections with older computers. 80 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-11. I/O Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation PARALLEL ADV ON Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. FUNCTIONS=ON OFF The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284). This setting allows the printer to send status messages to the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced functions on might slow language switching.) C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 81,

EIO Menu

EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer contains an HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin. Table 3-12. EIO Menu Item Values Explanation CFG NETWORK=NO NO NO: The JetDirect Menu is not accessible. YES YES: The JetDirect Menu appears. NOVELL=ON ON Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack (in Novell OFF NetWare networks, for example) is enabled (on) or disabled (off). DLC/LLC=ON ON Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is enabled OFF (on) or disabled (off). TCP/IP=ON ON Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is enabled OFF (on) or disabled (off). ETALK=ON ON Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol stack is OFF enabled (on) or disabled (off). 82 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-12. EIO Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation CFG IPX/SPX=NO NO NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible. YES YES: The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the IPX/SPX Menu, you can specify the frame type parameter used on your network. The default is AUTO, to automatically set and limit the frame type to the one detected. For Ethernet cards, frame type selections include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP. For Token Ring cards, frame type selections include TR_8022, TR_SNAP. In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards, you can also specify NetWare Source Routing parameters, which include SRC RT=AUTO (default), OFF, SINGLE R, or ALL RT. CFG TCP/IP=NO NO NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible. YES YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the TCP/IP Menu, you can specify BOOTP=YES for TCP/IP parameters to be automatically loaded from a bootp or DHCP server when the printer is turned on. If you specify BOOTP=NO, you can manually set selected TCP/IP parameters from the control panel. You can manually set each byte of the IP address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM), Syslog Server (LG), and Default Gateway (GW). Also, you can manually set the Timeout time period. CFG ETALK=NO NO NO: The EtherTalk Menu is not accessible. YES YES: The EtherTalk Menu appears. In the EtherTalk Menu you can set the AppleTalk phase parameter (ETALK PHASE=1 or 2) for your network. C4229-90911 Control Panel Menus 83,

Resets Menu

CAUTION Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when you select these items. Only reset the printer under the following circumstances: ● You want to restore the printer’s default settings. ● Communication between the printer and computer has been interrupted. ● You are having problems with a port. The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer, while CANCEL JOB clears only the current job. Table 3-13. Resets Menu Item Explanation RESET MEMORY This item clears the printer buffer and the active I/O input buffer, and makes the control panel defaults current. Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss. RESTORE FACTORY This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory SETTINGS (default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active I/O. Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss. RESET ACTIVE I/O This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output CHANNEL buffers (for the active I/Os only). Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss. RESET ALL I/O This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output CHANNELS buffers for all I/Os. 84 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Mopier Service Mode

The Service Mode should be used only by authorized service personnel. While in Service Mode, you can: ● Verify and set the Page Count and serial number. These are displayed on the Configuration Page. ● Set the Cold Reset Paper Size Default. (This sets the factory default paper size to either Letter or A4.) ● Clear the Event Log. Initiate the Service Mode as follows: 1 Hold down SELECT and JOB CANCEL while powering on the printer, until all lights are illuminated and the Display is blank. (If the Display Panel reads INTERNAL TEST at this point, the keys were released too soon. Repeat this step until successful.) 2 Press MENU, then SELECT. The message SERVICE MODE is displayed briefly, then the printer automatically begins an INTERNAL TEST. After several seconds, both Control Panel Indicators turn off. (The printer may display WARMING UP if it has not warmed up completely.) After the printer has warmed up and passed the self test, SERVICE MODE is displayed. 3 Press MENU once to display SERVICE MENU. To exit the Service Mode press GO. Table 3-14. Service Mode Menu Items Service Mode Item Actions Menu Items Choices Required PAGES= 0000000 Displays total number of pages printed by the printer. Press + to step through values above cursor. Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit. Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting. Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system. Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item. C4229-90911 Mopier Service Mode 85,

Table 3-14. Service Mode Menu Items (continued)

Service Mode Item Actions Menu Items Choices Required

MAINTENANCE 0000000 Displays the page count when the next preventative

maintenance should be performed (maintenance should be

COUNT=

performed every 350,000 pages). Press + to step through values above cursor. Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit. Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting. Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system. Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item.

MAINTENANCE 350000 Allows a service technician to change the page count when the INTERVAL= PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE 350,000 is the default

value. This is provided for customers with printing environments that require more frequent maintenance cycles.

SERIAL xxxxxxxxxx Displays printer serial number (also located on the printer back

cover).

NUMBER=

Press + to step through values above cursor. Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit. Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting. Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system. Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item.

COLD RESET LETTER * Press + to change setting.

Press SELECT to activate choice.

PAPER= A4 DIAGNOSTICS= OFF * For factory test purposes ONLY.

DO NOT change.

ON CLEAR EVENT Press SELECT to activate. LOG Printer returns to READY when completed.

86 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count,

and Serial Number The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial numbers are stored in Non-Volatile Memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer, MAINTCOUNT is the page count when the next preventative maintenance should be performed (every 350,000 images), and SERIAL NUMBER= is the printer serial number (also located on the printer back cover). If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine. The procedures for setting these values are listed in table 3-14. Before removing the old Formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to verify the current values. Note If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page, try to verify the values before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3, below. After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA. 1 Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter. 2 When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press MENU to access the Service Menu. 3 Press ITEM to display PAGECOUNT=, MAINTCOUNT=, and SERIAL NUMBER=. 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item. 5 Press GO to exit Service Mode. C4229-90911 Mopier Service Mode 87,

Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size

When replacing a Formatter PCA with a default paper size setting of A4, set COLD RESET PAPER= to A4. 1 Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter. 2 Press MENU to access the Service Menu. 3 Press ITEM to step through the menu until COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER* is displayed. 4 Press + to toggle between Letter and A4 paper. 5 Press SELECT to activate your choice. 6 Press GO to exit Service Mode. 7 Perform a Cold Reset to activate new choice. 88 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Testing the Mopier Paper Path Test

You can test printer operation with the Paper Path Test. It will print 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500 (single or 2-sided) pages from any of the paper trays (or the Envelope Feeder) and deliver them to a previously specified output bin. First, select PAPER DESTINATION and 2-SIDED printing (if a duplexer is installed) in the Configuration Menu (table 3-10), and then run the Paper Path Test from the Information Menu (table 3-6). Note If feeding from Tray 1, the default output will always be the Face-up Bin. 1 Press MENU. 2 Press (-)ITEM twice. 3 Press SELECT and continue making your desired paper path test. 4 Press SELECT to execute the test.

Configuration Page

When you print a Configuration Page, the printer checks its internal controller and I/O interface, then prints a page showing the overall printer configuration (see figure 7-16 on page 590), and a Menu Map showing the current menu settings (see figure 7-15 on page 588). You can review these printouts to verify proper installation of installed accessories, options, and personalities. 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the configuration pages. For sample information pages, see “Information Pages” on page 587. C4229-90911 Testing the Mopier 89,

Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel Install the Front Panel Overlay

1 1 Choose the Front Panel overlay printed with your language. 2 Press the overlay in place on the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel until it clicks. 3 To remove the Front Panel overlay, pull it up and off. Note The language that appears on the HP Digital Copy 320 display is customized through the language selected on the Mopier. If the Mopier language is set to a language other than the six offered by the 3 HP Digital Copy 320 (English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, and Dutch), then the HP Digital Copy 320 will default to English. (See the Mopier online user guide for more information.) 90 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel Front Panel Layout and Display Settings

Device Status Number of Context-sensitive Reset Start Message Copies Help Paper Reduce/En Numerical large Keypad 2-sided/N-up Output/Staple Copy Quality More Features Stop Figure 3-2 Front Panel Layout Table 3-15. Status Bar The Status Bar displays the current: ● "device status message" ● "number of copies selected" ● "context-sensitive help button" (available for certain features) device status The READY TO COPY, COPYING, or ACCEPTING COPY message JOBS message is displayed. ACCEPTING COPY JOBS indicates that the Mopier is busy. You can configure the next copy job when the Mopier is busy. number of copies The current number of copies selected for the selected copy job is displayed. This setting defaults to 1. context-sensitive This button remains present on the Front Panel help button display when available. When selected, help for the function appears. C4229-90911 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel 91, Table 3-16. Menu Tabs Menu Tabs allow access to any of the HP Digital Copy 320 settings. Each tab shows related job settings. Select OK or EXIT to make changes as you move from tab to tab. Press OK to exit the menu tabs and start a copy job. Press EXIT to return to the default display tab. You can also select START to begin a copy job before exiting the menu tabs. Menu tabs ● "paper tab" ● "reduce/enlarge tab" ● "2-sided/N-up tab" ● "output/staple tab" ● "copy quality tab" ● "book copy tab" ● "job binding tab" ● "configuration tab" ● "about tab" paper tab Allows you to choose paper for the copy job based on size, tray, or type. ● Size - Shows the current size selected. When a selection is made, the Tray list will update automatically. ● Tray - Shows the current tray selected. If the selected paper size is currently installed in multiple trays, the Tray selection text will highlight AUTOMATIC. This indicates that the Mopier will make the tray selection based on its auto-selection criteria. If the selected paper size is located in only one tray, the location will be shown by the list text. When a selection is made, the Size and Type will update automatically. Note If you choose a paper type that is not already loaded in the Mopier, the Mopier will prompt you to load Tray 1 with the correct paper before the job is printed. 92 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-16. Menu Tabs (continued) reduce/enlarge tab Allows you to enlarge or shrink the size of the document. Allows you to choose the paper size for your original document and specify a different size for the copy. For example, copying from A4 to letter. You may also specify the output paper size and then choose a scaling percent to reduce or enlarge a region of the source document. You may choose to copy a fully bled page onto the printable region of the output paper. You are presented with the following controls for selecting the desired paper scaling percent: ● Reduce/Enlarge - Shows input-to-output paper sizes. When a size is selected, the proper scaling percent for the currently selected input and output paper sizes is displayed. ● Percent - Shows the current page scaling percent. C4229-90911 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel 93, Table 3-16. Menu Tabs (continued) reduce/enlarge tab ● Custom Media Reduction - This setting allows (continued) you to switch between the standard/enlargement settings and the custom mode. This allows you to choose your original and copy document sizes independently. When the Custom Media Reduction box is checked, you can select a paper size under the Original list for your original document and then select the paper size in the Copy list for the size you want to copy. The percent text box automatically calculates page scaling percent. When the Custom Media Reduction box is unchecked, you may select from a list of standard reduction or enlargement settings, such as Letter (LTR) to Legal (LGL). Also, you may select the Manual setting in order to adjust the scaling percent by hand. When Manual is selected you may increase or decrease the scaling percent by one percent increments. You may reduce a document by up to 25 percent or enlarge a document by up to 200 percent. When you have chosen Manual, you may also choose the size of your original document. The copier will reduce that document by the percent you have selected. ● Shrink Page to Printable Region - This allows you to copy a fully bled page onto the printable region of the currently selected output paper size. There are limits to how far out to the edge of the page the Mopier can print. If you are copying a page that has printing all the way out to the edges (full bleed), then checking this box will cause the image to be reduced slightly so that the entire edge-to-edge image may print within the printable region of the output paper. 94 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-16. Menu Tabs (continued) 2-sided/N-up tab This tab has four controls for setting up the options and a preview image that graphically illustrates the current settings. ● 2-sided Copying - Shows the currently selected 2-sided mode. Choose the two-sided mode you need. The preview image will update to display your choice. ● Flip Pages Up - This setting is active if the you choose to copy onto both sides of the output paper. By default, the pages of the two-sided binding are flipped to the left, like a book, when viewed from the backside of the job. When the setting is checked, the pages are bound, appearing flipped up when viewed from the backside of the job. The preview image will update to display your choice. ● N-up Copying - Shows the currently selected number of input pages to be printed on each output page. Choose the number of input pages needed to print on each output page. The preview image will update to display your choice. ● Print Page Borders - This setting is active when you select two or more pages for each sheet. When checked, page borders will print around each page image on the output page. The preview image will update to display your choice. output/staple tab ● You can configure the output and stapling options using the two main controls on this tab. ● Output Bin - Shows the currently selected output bin. Choose which bin the copy job will be delivered to. If the output bin is set to the stapling bin and a stapling option is selected, then changing the output bin to another location will turn off the stapling option. ● Stapling - Allows you to choose stapling options. The number of options displayed will depend on the stapling device installed. If you select an option to have the output stapled, then the Output Bin setting will change to display that stapling can only take place in the staple bin. C4229-90911 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel 95, Table 3-16. Menu Tabs (continued) copy quality tab ● Copy Mode - You may change the copy quality settings from this tab. There are three settings to choose from in Copy Mode: Photo - This mode is optimized for photo clarity. Text - This mode is optimized for text sharpness. This is the default mode. ● Brightness - You may change the brightness setting from this tab. Press the left or right arrow to increase or decrease the brightness level as indicated by the slider. There are five settings for brightness. book copy tab Allows you to make a copy of an open book with a single page of output for each page of the book. Align the spine of the book with the book markings on the flatbed paper guides. ● Follow the prompts provided on the Front Panel when using this mode. ● You can copy multiple pages from a book and bind them together as one job. See the "job binding tab" description for more information. job binding tab Takes multiple copies from the flatbed and binds them together as one job. This allows the user to duplex, print n-up pages, and staple jobs from the flatbed. ● Follow the prompts provided on the Front Panel when using this mode. configuration tab Provides configuration settings for the HP Digital Copy 320. For example: ● Allows you to turn on or off the audible key feedback. ● Allows you to adjust the Front Panel display contrast. 96 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-16. Menu Tabs (continued) about tab Used to find available help topics. Displays: ● system version information. ● current page counts for the flatbed and ADF. ● number of pages until the next required service. Table 3-17. Context-sensitive Help Press the to enter the HP Digital Copy 320 help system. Follow the prompts provided in the help system to find additional descriptions of certain features and functions. Table 3-18. Default Configurations If the HP Digital Copy 320 is idle and unattended for one minute, the HP Digital Copy 320 settings will return to the default configuration. Press the Reset key on the Front Panel to return all of the HP Digital Copy 320 settings to the default configuration. The setting changes that you make will remain for one minute before they reset to a default setting. For example, if you walk up to the HP Digital Copy 320 and press the 5 key, the number of copies selected will be set to five. If you do not make any other setting changes and do not initiate a job by pressing the Start key within one minute, then the number of copies selected will automatically return to one. After a copy job is completed, the current settings will not change until after another minute expires. This makes it possible to set up the HP Digital Copy 320 settings in a particular manner only once for a number of jobs. C4229-90911 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel 97,

Button/LED Functions

Paper Sensor LED RESET START Keys 0-9

STOP

Start Button LED C Figure 3-3 Button/LED Functions Table 3-19. Functions of Buttons and LEDs Name of the button or LED Function Button 0-9 Use to enter the number of copies you desire. May also be used periodically to enter a numerical value (for example, in service mode). RESET Resets all of the copier settings to the default values. START Begins a copy job or continues a copy job that has been interrupted because of an error. STOP Stops a copy job. C Clears the number of copies setting. (Does not clear the other copy module settings.) LED Paper Sensor Illuminates when paper is loaded correctly in the LED ADF. Start Button LED See “Start Button LED” on page 99 for a detailed description of this LED. 98 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Start Button LED

Table 3-20. Start Button LED States LED color On Flashing Slow Flashing Fast Green The copy module is The copy module is in The copy module is ready to make copies. Power Save mode. making copies. Amber The copy module has a The copy module has an The copy module has an critical error. Turn the error and requires error that requires Mopier and copy module attention. attention from your off, and then turn the service provider. Mopier and copy module on. Note When the copy module is in Power Save mode, the back light of the display panel will be turned off and the Start LED (green) will flash at a slow rate to indicate that the system is turned on. To bring the system out of Power Save mode, place paper in the ADF, press any key on the numerical keypad, or touch the touch screen. C4229-90911 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel 99,

HP Digital Copy 320 Settings

Table 3-21. Default Settings Feature Description Default Number of copies 1 to 999 1 Paper Source Selection of paper tray Auto-select (any tray) Select Selection by paper size Letter/A4 Plain Collation Collated Collated Grouped (uncollated) Stapled Select output bin Reduce/Enlarge 25% to 200% in 1% 100% increments Support standard presets, such as Legal to Letter. Copy quality text, photo text Duplex 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 1-1 If the Mopier does not have a duplexer installed, then 1-2 and 2-2 are not available. N-up 1-up, 2-up, 4-up 1-up 2-up documents will be rotated. 100 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Table 3-21. Default Settings (continued) Feature Description Default Book copy Copies an open book with Not selected a single page of output for each page of the book. Brightness 5 levels (2 lighter, normal, Normal 2 darker) Job binding This allows the user to Not selected duplex, print n-up pages, and staple jobs from the flatbed. C4229-90911 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel 101,

Loading documents into the ADF

1A1Pull up on the ADF input tray (A) and place the bar (B) in operating position. 2 Square up and insert originals face down into the input tray. Load to the line indicator on the paper guide.

B

Note The system will exit Power Save when 2 you place the document into the ADF. The LED will light up and a tone will sound when paper is loaded correctly. Remove paper clips and staples. Flatten the staple holes. 3 If the document size exceeds A4 or Letter size, extend the input tray and 3 output bin by flipping out the extensions. Continued on next page. 102 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, 4 4 Set the guides so that there is a little amount of clearance between the side edges and the guides. Adjust the guides to the document size. Note Squeeze the guide lever to free the guides. Load documents so that the thickness is less than 0.32 inches (8 mm). 5 Set the guides so that they touch the document sides. 5 After a document is copied, remove the original from the copy module and the copy from the Mopier output bin. Note Letter and A4-size originals fed through the ADF will be rotated automatically to print correctly. C4229-90911 Using the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel 103,

Loading documents onto the Flatbed

1 1 Open the document cover. 2 Place the document face down and align the top left with the reference mark. Carefully close the document cover and press START. 104 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

Copy Module Service Mode

Figure 3-4 Copy Module Service Mode To enter service mode, hold down the RESET, 0 and 1 keys while you turn on the power. The copy module skips its normal power up self-tests. ● Reset the ADF cleaning counter and maintenance counter to zero when you perform cleaning and maintenance procedures. ● In case of a failed EEPROM, reprogram the copy module’s serial number from the Serial Number Management Menu. ● Use the Calibration Menu to recalibrate the copy module when you replace the following parts: • Lamps • Optics • ADF Assembly • Carrier Unit • Flatbed Cover Assembly • Control PCA with EEPROM C4229-90911 Copy Module Service Mode 105, Note The EEPROM stores all calibration settings. If you replace the Control PCA, be sure to retain the EEPROM from the bad Control PCA and install it in the replacement Control PCA. ● Test sensors, Front Panel and the ADF from the Tests Menu. 106 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911,

HP Resource Manager

Use the Custom Install option when you load the software to obtain the HP Resource Manager. Use the HP Resource Manager as shown in the figures below to redownload the copy module firmware.

Accessing the HP Resource Manager

HP Resource Manager is available for Windows 9x and Windows NT only. 1 From the Start Menu, click Programs. 2 Click HP Mopier. 3 Click HP Resource Manager. HP Resource Manager searches for installed printers. C4229-90911 HP Resource Manager 107,

Downloading Copy Module Firmware

Drag icon to Printers folder Select communication channel Figure 3-5 HP Resource Manager (1 of 2) 1 Select the preferred communication channel at the bottom of the screen: TCI/IP, IPX/SPX, or Local. 2 Drag the icons for the printers to be updated into the Printers folder. Multiple printers can be updated at the same time. 108 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, Download button Verify that “Downloaded” appears here Drag the icons of the printers to be updated to the Firmware folder Figure 3-6 HP Resource Manager (2 of 2) 3 Obtain the new firmware file from www.hp.com. Browse to the newly downloaded firmware file from the lower right window. Drag the file icon from the lower right window to the Firmware folder. 4 The upper right window is updated to reflect the mopier’s firmware status. 5 Click the Download button and wait for the operation to complete. 6 Verify that “Downloaded” appears as shown. 7 Power cycle the Mopier and copy module. C4229-90911 HP Resource Manager 109, 110 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4229-90911, 4 Maintenance and Adjustments

Chapter Contents

HP Mopier 320 Cleaning the Mopier and Accessories - - - - - - - - - - 112 Preventive Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 115 Tray Adjustment Procedure- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure - - - - - - - 118 HP Digital Copy 320 Cleaning the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - - 120 Cleaning ADF and Glass - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121 Complete Optics Cleaning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 124 Maintaining the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - 126 Calibrating the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - 126 C4229-90911 Chapter Contents 111,

Cleaning the Mopier and Accessories

To maintain print quality and paper performance, thoroughly clean the printer and the paper handling devices: ● Every time you change the toner cartridge. ● After printing approximately 20,000 images. ● Whenever print quality problems occur. Clean the outside surfaces with a lightly dampened cloth. Clean the inside with only a dry, lint-free cloth. Use the guidelines listed in table 4-1. Observe the warnings and cautions below. WARNING! Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard. Be careful when cleaning around the Fusing Assembly area. It may be HOT. CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the toner cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. Do not touch the transfer roller with your fingers. This can cause print quality problems. 112 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911,

Cleaning the Mopier

1 Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all cords. 2 Open the top cover of the printer and remove the toner cartridge. WARNING! Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It may be HOT.

CAUTION

Do not touch the transfer roller (A). Oils from your hands can contaminate the roller and reduce print quality. If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 3 With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any residue from the paper path area, the registration roller (B), and the toner cartridge cavity. Use the brush supplied with the printer to remove residue from tight areas. 4 Replace the toner cartridge, close the printer, reconnect all cables, and turn the printer on. C4229-90911 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments 113, Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer Component Cleaning Method/Notes Outside Covers Use a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or ammonia-based cleaners. Inside General Use a dry, lint free cloth. Remove all dust, spilled toner, and paper particles. Paper Pickup, Feed, Use a water-dampened lint-free cloth. and Separation Rollers Separation Pad Use a dry lint-free cloth. Registration Roller Use a dry lint-free cloth. Transfer Roller Use a dry, lint-free cloth. DO NOT TOUCH the transfer roller with your fingers. Fusing Assembly Use a water-dampened lint-free cloth.

Cleaning Spilled Toner

Defective toner cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam has occurred, there may be some toner remaining on the rollers and guides inside the printer. The images that print immediately after the jam may pick up this toner. Clean spilled toner with a cloth slightly dampened in cold water. Do not touch the Transfer Roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers. Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro-fine particle filter. Note If toner gets on your clothing, use cold water to remove it. Hot water sets toner stains into fabric. 114 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911,

Preventive Maintenance

The user-conducted preventive maintenance cycle for this printer is every 350,000 images. The part numbers for the preventive maintenance kits are C3914A for the 100V printers, and C3915A for the 220V printers. The kits contain the following replacement parts: one Fusing Assembly, one Transfer Roller Assembly, and eight Feed/ Separation Rollers [two each for Trays 2, 3, the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4), and the2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5)]. See Chapter 6 of this manual, and the instructions included in the kits for detailed replacement procedures. The control panel message, PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE, indicates that the 350,000 image maintenance is due. Upon completion of the maintenance procedures, go to the control panel Configuration Menu and set the SERVICE MESSAGE= to OFF. The default (350,000) maintenance message interval can be set to lesser values if needed (50K, 150K, 250K), for printers requiring more frequent maintenance. This feature is provided for customers using heavy, rough, or generally out-of-specification media that prematurely wears out the maintenance parts. C4229-90911 Preventive Maintenance 115,

Tray Adjustment Procedure

This procedure applies to Trays 2 and 3 (the standard paper trays in the printer) and Trays 4 and 5 in the2x500-sheet Input Tray. To adjust the 2000-sheet Input Tray see “2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure” on page 118. The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory. Perform this procedure ONLY if a paper tray has been replaced with a tray other than the original factory installed tray, or if the top margin of the image area is off-center more than 0.5 mm (0.02 inch). The adjustment procedure is identical for Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 from the2x500-sheet Input Tray. Note Before performing this procedure, check that the margins in your software application are properly set. 1 Load the paper tray being tested with letter or A4 size paper. 2 Perform a 1-sheet Paper Path Test from that tray (see Paper Path Test under Test Menu in Chapter 3). 3 See figure 4-1 and compare distance A to distance B. (Top Of Page) Figure 4-1 Image Area Margins 116 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911, Note See figure 4-2. Each adjustment notch changes the physical position of the tray by 0.5 mm (0.02 inch). Moving the lever counter-clockwise moves the tray inward and increases distance A. Moving the lever clockwise moves the tray outward and decreases distance A. Figure 4-2 Tray Position Adjustment 1 If distance A is greater than distance B by more than 0.5 mm (0.02 inch), move the adjustment lever clockwise one notch. 2 If distance A is less than distance B by more than 0.5 mm (0.02 inch), move the adjustment lever counter-clockwise one notch. 3 After adjusting: • Reinstall the tray. • Re-run the Paper Path Test. • Recheck the measurements. • Re-adjust as necessary. C4229-90911 Tray Adjustment Procedure 117, 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure This procedure applies to the 2000-sheet Input Tray. To adjust Trays 2 and 3 (the standard paper trays in the printer) and the2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) see page 116. In some cases, the registration from the 2000-sheet Input Tray causes print to start too close to the edge of the paper. This situation is not a typical occurrence. In most cases the 2000-sheet Input Tray offset is fine. Although this may or may not be within specification, it is unacceptable to some users. Perform the following adjustment procedure to correct the situation. 1 With the 2000-sheet Input Tray stand-alone, remove left, right and rear covers from the tray. 2 Remove the vertical transfer unit. 3 Open the 2000-sheet Input Tray paper tray. 4 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the right side of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 4-3). Figure 4-3 Tray 4 Position Adjustment 118 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911, 5 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (right side) (see figure 4-3). 6 Slide the bracket so that the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole. 7 Tighten both screws. 8 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the left side of the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 9 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (left side). Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole. 10 Tighten both screws. 11 Reassemble the vertical transfer unit. 12 Make sure all the cables (vertical transfer unit and paper deck drive assembly) are reconnected. 13 Reinstall left, right, and rear covers to the tray. Note The locating pin position at the middle could still be unacceptable for some customers’ applications. If so, repeat the procedure by moving the locating pin further back and testing the margin obtained. C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure 119,

Cleaning the HP Digital Copy 320

Clean the ADF Assembly, including the Rollers and Separation Pad, every 6,000 pages, or more frequently with certain paper types. To check the “ADF Scans Since Last Cleaning” counter, print a Configuration Page from the Mopier Information Menu. You must reset the cleaning counter in the Mopier’s service mode after you clean the copy module (see page 87). Symptoms indicating that it is time to clean the copy module include increasing mispicks and an optical failure.

Materials

● Dry, lint-free cloth ● Isopropyl alcohol (any concentration, including denatured alcohol) ● Vacuum (see below) ● Blow brush ● Glass cleaner (for flatbed glass only) ● Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) ● Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) CAUTION Do not use organic solvents such as thinner. Never use glass cleaner on any part of the copy module except the flatbed glass. Be sure no liquid enters the copy module from the edges of the Glass Plate Assembly. (See page 490.)

Vacuum Specifications

Use the same type of vacuum used for printer maintenance. Be sure to use a vacuum with adequate filtration so that microfine toner is not released into the air. Paper dust and unfused toner particles can accumulate in the ADF and on the Carrier Unit. The type of narrow attachments that are used with printer and copier machine vacuums are particularly useful for cleaning. CAUTION When using the vacuum be careful not to damage paper sensors. Never use the vacuum for the Carrier Unit or Optical Unit. These should be hand cleaned only. 120 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911,

Cleaning ADF and Glass

A quick clean takes approximately 15 minutes and should be performed every 6,000 pages.

Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass

isopropyl paint thinner - Document alcohol do not use! Cover Document Holder Flatbed Glass Cloth Figure 4-4 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass Use a cloth that is either dry or dampened with a small amount of the appropriate cleaning material listed in Table 4-2 below to remove dirt from the Document Cover, Document Holder, and flatbed glass. Table 4-2. Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass Part Cleaning Materials Document Cover non-abrasive, neutral detergent or alcohol Document Holder Flatbed Glass alcohol or glass cleaner DO NOT USE DETERGENT C4229-90911 Cleaning ADF and Glass 121,

Cleaning the ADF

1 Unplug the copy module. 2 Press the latch and lift open the ADF. Pick Spring Feed Rollers Pick Rollers Separation Pad Exit Rollers ADF Latch Idle Rollers (Feed) Paper Guide ADF Glass Figure 4-5 Parts of the ADF Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF Part Cleaning method Problem with dirty or worn part Separation Pad Using a cloth with isopropyl alcohol, Double-feeds wipe the Separation Pad in a downward direction. Be careful not to hook the Pick Springs. ADF Glass Wipe the glass lightly with a cloth and Vertical streaking when you isopropyl alcohol or glass cleaner to scan from the ADF remove any paper dust or toner. 122 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911, Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF (continued) Part Cleaning method Problem with dirty or worn part Pick Rollers Remove the Pick Rollers. Using a cloth Misfeeds, paper slippage, and dampened with isopropyl alcohol, jams firmly and thoroughly wipe each Pick Roller in a horizontal direction, from end to end to remove dirt. Do not touch the rubber part of the rollers. Skin oils can damage the rollers. Feed, Exit, and Using a cloth with isopropyl alcohol, Paper jams Idler Rollers wipe the rollers in a horizontal direction, making sure to remove any built-up toner or ink. Make sure the rollers are dry before scanning. Paper Guide Gently wipe the Paper Guide area with Vertical streaking when a soft cloth. copying from the ADF C4229-90911 Cleaning ADF and Glass 123,

Complete Optics Cleaning

An optics clean takes approximately 30 minutes and should be performed every 12,000 pages.

Cleaning the ADF Lamp and Mirrors

CAUTION Use a lint free cloth with isopropyl alcohol to clean the Lamp and to clean fingerprints, toner, or paper dust from the mirror. Be careful not to scratch the mirror. Do not use glass cleaner. 1 Open the ADF. 2 Remove the ADF Latch (page 451) and ADF Cover (page 452). 3 Remove the ADF Unit and ADF Lamp (pages 487 to 479). 4 Clean the mirrors with a blow brush. See the Caution above. 5 Clean the Lamp with a dry or alcohol-dampened, lint-free cloth. Do not touch the Lamp with your fingers. 6 Replace the Lamp, ADF Unit, ADF Cover, and ADF Latch Cap.

Lubricating the ADF Gears

If necessary, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) on the teeth of the ADF Gears as needed. 124 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911,

Cleaning the Carrier Unit and Mechanical Assemblies

1 Remove the skins (starting on page 445) and the Glass Plate Assembly (page 490). 2 Clean any dirt from the back of the Glass Plate Assembly, especially under the ADF Unit and the White Reference Strip. 3 Vacuum any dirt from the inside of the Mechanical Frame. 4 Remove the Lamp from the Carrier Unit (page 494). 5 Remove any dirt from the Carrier Unit Mirrors with a blow brush. CAUTION Use a lint free cloth with isopropyl alcohol to clean fingerprints, toner, or paper dust from the mirror. Be careful not to scratch the mirror. Do not use glass cleaner. 6 If the Carrier Unit Shaft is dirty, wipe it off with a cloth, then relubricate it (see below). Otherwise, be careful not to remove the lubricant.

Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft

If necessary, or if the Carrier Unit shaft has been cleaned, place an even coating of Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) on the Carrier Unit Shaft as needed (for example, if paper dust or other material interferes with movement of the Carrier Unit, or if you have cleaned the shaft). See page 498.

Lubricating the Top of the Carrier Guide Rail

If necessary, or if the Carrier Guide Rail has been cleaned, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) on the top of the Carrier Guide Rail as needed.

Lubricating the Flatbed Motor Gears

If necessary, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) on the teeth of the Flatbed Motor Gears as needed.

Cleaning the Front Panel

Use a dry cloth to clean the Front Panel Display. C4229-90911 Complete Optics Cleaning 125,

Maintaining the HP Digital Copy 320

The Separation Pad and Pick Rollers must be replaced every 60,000 pages through the ADF. To check the “ADF Scans Since Last Maintenance” counter, print a Configuration Page from the Mopier’s Information Menu. You must reset the maintenance counter in service mode after you replace the maintenance parts (see page 87). For removal and replacement procedures, see “Copy Module Maintenance Parts” on page 440. The procedures take approximately 15 minutes. Symptoms that indicate it is time to replace the maintenance parts include increasing mispicks and visible wear or polish on the surface of the Separation Pad or Pick Rollers. Note If highly abrasive papers or papers high in calcium carbonate content are used, replacement intervals may be shorter.

HP Digital Copy 320 Maintenance Parts

● 2 Pick Rollers PA03002-C120FJ ● 1 Separation Pad PA03002-C122FJ

Calibrating the HP Digital Copy 320 Types of Calibration

● Automatic offset adjustment (Flatbed, ADF front, and ADF back) ● Density adjustment (do this when Lamps or the Optical Unit are replaced) ● ADF vertical magnification (only do this when you replace the ADF Assembly) Note The value of vertical magnification is unique to every ADF Assembly and is noted on a page included with the replacement ADF Assembly. 126 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911,

When to Calibrate

Perform calibration after any of the following tasks: ● Removing or replacing any of the Lamps or optics ● Replacing the ADF Assembly ● Replacing the Carrier Unit ● Replacing the Flatbed Cover Assembly ● Replacing the Control PCA with EEPROM

Calibration Target

Obtain the Calibration Target Kit from HP (part number PA03002- C261FJ) or Blacken a .4 inch (10mm) border around a standard A3 size sheet of white paper to create an offset target. A sample offset target is shown in figure 4-6. 11.7 in. ± .02 in. 297 mm ± .5 mm Area to be colored black 16.5 in. ± .08 in. .4 in. (10 mm) all around 420 mm ± 2 mm Figure 4-6 Creating an Offset Target

Entering the Calibration Menu in Service Mode

1 Start the copy module in service mode (hold down RESET, 0 and 1 keys while you turn on the power). 2 Select the calibration menu. C4229-90911 Calibrating the HP Digital Copy 320 127,

How to Perform an Offset Adjustment Calibration

1 Obtain or create a calibration target (page 127) and enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 127). 2 Select the appropriate offset calibration you wish to perform (flatbed, ADF front or ADF back). 3 Load the target and follow the prompts on the front panel. Changes will be saved automatically when the adjustment is complete.

How to Perform a Density Calibration Adjustment

1 Obtain a calibration target (part number PA03002-C261FJ) and enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 127). 2 Select Density Adjustment. 3 Load the target and follow the prompts on the front panel. Changes will be saved automatically when the adjustment is complete.

How to Perform an ADF Vertical Magnification Adjustment

1 Locate the page that shipped with the replacement ADF unit. 2 Enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 127). 3 Select ADF Vertical Magnification. 4 Enter the hexadecimal number from the page that shipped with the replacement ADF unit. 128 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4229-90911, 5 Functional Overview

Chapter contents

HP Mopier 320 Printer Functional Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - 130 Power Distribution System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 131 Formatter System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 134 DC Controller System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 137 Image Formation System- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 139 Paper Paths and Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 150 Paper Jam Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 182 Printer Timing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 182 IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information- - - - - - - - - - - 184 HP Digital Copy 320 Copy Module Functional Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - 185 Power Up Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 189 ADF Simplex Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 193 ADF Duplex Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194 Flatbed Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194 Image Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 196 Communication to the Mopier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 198 C4229-90911 129,

Printer Functional Block Diagram

Figure 5-1 is a functional block diagram of the printer showing the basic paths for signal, control, and media. Figure 5-1 Printer Functional Block Diagram 130 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Power Distribution System

The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image formation are generated by the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). The LVPS and Distribution System is illustrated in figure 5-2. See the Reference Diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for more details. Figure 5-2 Low Voltage Power Distribution System C4229-90911 Power Distribution System 131,

AC Power Distribution

The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord is connected, and the power switch is on. A toner cartridge must be installed and the top access door must be closed before AC voltage is supplied to the DC power circuits or the Fusing Assembly.

Overcurrent/Overvoltage Protection

There are two overcurrent/overvoltage devices in this printer: ● The resettable circuit breaker (CB101) shuts off AC input power to the LVPS in case of an AC overcurrent condition. To reset, remove the LVPS and press in the circuit breaker button (figure 5-3, callout 1). ● Fuse 101 interrupts AC input power to the +24V DC and +5V DC power circuits. Figure 5-3 Low Voltage Power Supply 132 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

High Voltage Power Distribution

The High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS, see figure 5-4) applies a DC- biased AC voltage to the primary charging roller and the developing roller, and a programmed DC voltage (depending upon the phase of the printing process) to the Transfer Roller. See the General Timing Diagram (figure 5-29 on page 183) for HVPS timing information.

Toner Cartridge Detection

A toner level detector inside the toner cartridge is connected to the HVPS when the toner cartridge is installed. If the toner level drops below a predefined level, the TONER LOW message will appear on the display panel. If the toner cartridge is missing, INSTALL TONER CARTRIDGE will be displayed.

Print Density Adjustment

The high voltage power supply also controls the image density by varying the voltages applied to the developing cylinder in the toner cartridge. These voltages determine the amount of toner applied to the photosensitive drum. Print density is adjusted from the control panel (Print Quality Menu) or from the driver software. Primary Charging Roller Toner Registration/ Toner Sensor Drum Ground Developing Roller Bias Post Transfer Bias Transfer Roller Fuser Bias Figure 5-4 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts C4229-90911 Power Distribution System 133,

Formatter System

The Formatter PCA is responsible for the following: ● Controlling the PowerSave mode. ● Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces. ● Monitoring Control Panel inputs and relaying printer status information (through the Control Panel and the bidirectional I/O). ● Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine. ● Storing font information. ● Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional Interface. The Formatter PCA receives a print job from the bidirectional parallel port (IEEE 1284) and separates it into image information and instructions which control the printing process. The DC Controller synchronizes the Image Formation System with the Paper Input and Output Systems, and then signals the Formatter to send the print image data. The Formatter sends the print image data (dots) in the form of a VIDEO signal to start the printing process. The Formatter PCA also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for three EIO cards, additional memory DIMMs, the Disk Accessory, the 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, and the2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5).

PowerSave

This user-adjustable feature (Configuration Menu) conserves power by shutting down the fuser and exhaust fans after the printer has been idle for 15 minutes; 30 minutes; 1, 2, or 3 hours. The printer retains all printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros while in PowerSave mode. The default setting is PowerSave on, with a 1-hour idle time. (PowerSave can also be turned off from the control panel.) The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs: • A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the parallel port or an EIO card. • A Control Panel key is pressed. • Any printer door (except the front access door) is opened and then closed. 134 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, • A paper tray is opened and then closed. • The Engine Test microswitch is pressed. Note Printer error messages override the PowerSave message. The printer will enter PowerSave mode at the appropriate time, but the error message will continue to be displayed.

Resolution Enhancement (REt)

The Formatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the DC Controller to produce “smoothed” black-to-white boundaries. REt is user-controllable (on or off) from the control panel, or from some software applications. The default setting is on. Note REt settings sent from software applications or printer drivers override the control panel settings. C4229-90911 Formatter System 135,

EconoMode

The EconoMode setting uses less toner than the normal printing mode by reducing the dot density. EconoMode, which is a draft- quality printing mode, is user selectable via the control panel (Print Quality Menu) and some software applications. The default setting is off. Note EconoMode does not affect print speed, memory usage, nor extend toner cartridge life. Figure 5-5 Normal Mode vs EconoMode 136 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

DC Controller System

The following systems and functions are controlled by the DC Controller PCA: ● DC Power Distribution (+3.3V DC, +5V DC, +24V DC) ● Laser and Scanner Drive ● Paper Motion Monitoring and Control (photosensors and flags) ● Clutches (registration, tray pickup, and Tray 1 feed) ● Engine Test ● Motors (Main Drive, Scanner, and Fans) Figure 5-2 on page 131 shows the Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System. See the wiring diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for detailed listings of the DC Controller inputs and outputs.

Laser and Scanner Drive

Based on information received from the Formatter, the DC Controller sends signals to the Laser/Scanner Assembly to modulate the laser diode on and off and to drive the Laser/Scanner motor. See “Image Formation System” later in this chapter for more information.

Paper Motion Monitoring and Control

The DC Controller PCA controls paper motion by continuously monitoring the various paper sensors and coordinating paper movement with the other print processes.

Clutches

The DC Controller PCA provides drive signals for the Registration Assembly Clutch (CL1), Paper Input Unit Clutch (CL2), and the Tray 1 Feed Clutch. The External Paper Handling PCA mounted on the Formatter Assembly provides the control signals for the clutches in the 2000-sheet Input Tray, 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, and 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox. Note Refer to figure 5-2 for details. C4229-90911 DC Controller System 137,

Engine Test Microswitch

The Engine Test Microswitch, located on the top side of the DC Controller PCA, is activated manually through the square access hole at the top right side of the printer (Figure 6-6). This switch causes the print engine to perform an internal self test diagnostic which bypasses the Formatter PCA and then prints a full page of black parallel lines. This test is useful for troubleshooting printer problems because it isolates the print engine from the Formatter PCA. The engine test printout prints from Tray 3 only and can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed. A continuous test is performed indefinitely if the test button is held in. For more information, see Engine Test in Figure 7-10.

Motors

See the General Timing Diagram (figure 5-29 on page 183) for specific timing details for the printer motors. The Main Motor, MT1, is controlled by the DC Controller PCA. The Main Motor drives the Main Gear Assembly and rotates during the Initial Rotation period (following power-on), the Print period, the Last Rotation Period, or whenever the printer front door is opened and closed. The Scanner Motor is controlled and monitored by the DC Controller. It rotates the laser/scanner mirror during the Initial Rotation period and the Print period. The Fan Motors are controlled and monitored by the DC Controller PCA. All five fans operate at full speed during the printing modes. All five fans turn off in the PowerSave mode after the Fuser cools down. The drive signal for the Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor, SMT1, is provided by the DC Controller PCA through the Paper Input Unit (PIU) PCA mounted on the right side of the PIU. When the job instructions call for paper to be supplied by Tray 2, SMT1 rotates in a forward direction and drives the Pickup roller for Tray 2. When paper is supplied by Tray 3, SMT1 rotates in the reverse direction and drives the Pickup roller for Tray 3. 138 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Image Formation System

Laser printing requires the interaction of several different technologies (such as electronics, optics, and electrophotographics) to provide a printed page. Each process functions independently and must be coordinated with the other printer processes. The image formation process consists of six steps: 1 Drum Cleaning 2 Drum Conditioning 3 Image Writing 4 Image Developing 5 Image Transferring and Media Separation 6 Image Fusing Figure 5-6 Image Formation Block Diagram C4229-90911 Image Formation System 139,

Toner Cartridge

The toner cartridge is the “heart” of the Image Formation System. It houses the cleaning, conditioning, and developing steps of the process. The toner cartridge contains the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing station, toner cavity, and cleaning station. Including the components that wear, degrade, or are consumed in a customer-replaceable toner cartridge eliminates the need for a service call when replacement is required.

Toner Cartridge/High Voltage Power Supply Contacts

The toner cartridge has three contacts that route voltage from the HVPS PCA. They are: • Upper: Primary Charge • Middle: Developing Bias • Lower: Toner Sensing/Toner Recognition 140 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

The Photosensitive Drum

The image from the Laser/Scanner Assembly is written on the drum surface, developed, and transferred to the media. The drum is an aluminum cylinder. The aluminum base of the photosensitive drum is electrically connected to ground potential. The outside of the cylinder is coated with a layer of non-toxic organic-photoconductive (OPC) material. The OPC material becomes electrically conductive when exposed to light. The drum surface is first cleaned of excess toner, then conditioned with a uniform negative charge. When an area on the drum surface is exposed to the laser light beam, the negative charge in that area is conducted to the ground potential of the drum base and thus becomes more positive. Areas not exposed to light remain non-conductive and maintain their negative charge. Figure 5-7 Photosensitive Drum C4229-90911 Image Formation System 141,

Drum Cleaning

The cleaning blade inside the toner cartridge is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times. As the drum rotates during printing, excess toner is removed from the drum surface and stored in the waste toner receptacle inside the toner cartridge. Figure 5-8 Drum Cleaning 142 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Drum Conditioning

After the drum is physically cleaned, it is conditioned by applying a uniform negative charge across the surface of the drum with the primary charging roller, located in the toner cartridge. The primary charging roller is coated with conductive rubber, charged with an AC current that erases any residual charges, and produces a uniform drum surface potential. The AC current is centered around a negative DC bias which changes according to the Print Density setting. Figure 5-9 Primary Charging Roller C4229-90911 Image Formation System 143,

Image Writing

During the writing process, a modulated laser diode projects a beam onto a rotating six-sided scanning mirror. As the scanning mirror rotates, the beam is directed through a set of focusing lenses to another mirror that reflects it through a slot on the top of the toner cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum. The beam sweeps across the drum and discharges the negative potential wherever it strikes the surface. This creates a latent (invisible) electrostatic image, which is developed into a visible image as the drum rotates (see figure 5-10). Figure 5-10 Image Writing Because the beam is sweeping the entire length of the drum and the drum is rotating, the entire surface area of the drum can be covered. The speed of the laser/scanner motor (which turns the scanning mirror) and the speed of the main motor (which turns the drum) are synchronized, and each successive sweep of the beam is offset 1/600th of an inch. The beam can be turned on and off to place a dot of light every 1/600th of an inch. This is how the printer achieves its 600 x 600 dpi resolution. After the writing process, the drum surface has a latent (invisible) electrostatic image. At the end of each sweep, the beam strikes the beam detect lens, generating the Beam Detect (BD) signal. The BD signal is sent to the DC Controller, where it is converted to an electrical signal used to synchronize the output of data (VDO) for one sweep (scan line) and to diagnose problems with the laser diode or laser/scanner motor. 144 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

FastRes 1200

FastRes 1200 (PCL 6 only) is an HP developed technology that can represent each dot space as one of four different levels of black. However, FastRes 1200 uses only 2 data bits to store information for the same dot space. This means that only half as much RAM is needed to print an image. FastRes 1200 takes advantage of HP’s new smaller toner particle (less than 5 microns) to provide superb test and image quality. C4229-90911 Image Formation System 145,

Image Developing

The developing process changes the latent electrostatic image into a visible image by depositing negatively charged toner particles on the exposed areas of the drum. The developing station is located inside the toner cartridge and consists of a metallic cylinder that rotates around a fixed magnetic core. The developing cylinder is charged with an AC current that is centered around a negative DC bias. The AC current improves density and contrast by decreasing the attraction between the toner particles and the magnetic core of the cylinder. This increases the repelling action of the toner against the areas of the drum not exposed to laser light. The negative DC bias applied to the developing cylinder is also changed according to the Print Density setting. Both the primary charging roller and developing cylinder DC bias voltages are changed in response to the density setting. These changes in DC bias cause either more or less toner to be attracted to the drum, thus increasing or decreasing print density. The toner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles. The toner particles are attracted to the magnetic core of the developing cylinder. A rubber blade “brushes” the toner on the developing cylinder to a uniform thickness. 146 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, The toner particles obtain a negative static charge by rubbing against the developing cylinder, which is charged with a negative DC bias. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged (exposed, more positive) areas of the drum and repelled from the negatively charged (non-exposed) areas. Figure 5-11 Image Development C4229-90911 Image Formation System 147,

Image Transferring and Media Separation

During the image transferring process, the toner image on the drum surface is transferred to the media. A positive charge applied to the back of the media by the transfer roller causes the negatively charged toner particles on the drum surface to be attracted to the media. The small diameter of the drum, combined with the stiffness of the media, causes the media to separate easily from the drum. The static eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the drum. The static eliminator teeth weaken the attractive forces between the negatively charged drum surface and the positively charged paper. This action keeps thin media from wrapping around the drum. After separation, the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next image. Figure 5-12 Image Transferring and Media Separation 148 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Image Fusing

The Fusing Assembly bonds the toner particles into the media with a heated fusing roller and a soft pressure roller. There are two levers on the Fusing Assembly that adjust roller pressure for single sheets (down position) or envelopes (up position). Both levers must be set to the same position. The fusing roller contains two quartz-halogen lamps that provide heat for the fusing process. Fusing temperature is monitored by the DC Controller PCA via thermistor TH1. The DC Controller maintains a temperature of about 190° C during print mode. If the fusing system overheats (about 230° C), TH1 opens, interrupting power to the fusing heater, causing a 50.X FUSER ERROR. If the fusing system exceeds 230° C, the thermal fuse opens, moving power away from the fuser. Figure 5-13 Image Fusing C4229-90911 Image Formation System 149,

Paper Paths and Components Printer, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder

The components of the printer paper path are illustrated in figure 5-14. Figure 5-15 and table 5-1 illustrate and describe all of the printer sensors, solenoids, clutches, motors, and fans. Figure 5-14 Printer Paper Paths 150 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans Control Device Title Location

CL1 Registration Clutch PIU (right side) CL2 Paper Input Unit Feed Clutch PIU (right side) CL3 Tray 1 Feed Clutch Tray 1 Drive Unit Fan 1 Laser/Scanner Fan Under Top Cover Fan 2 Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS Fan 3 Formatter Fan Below Formatter Fan 4 Face-down Delivery Unit Fan Under Top Cover Fan 5 Tray 1 Fan Tray 1 Assembly MT1 Main Motor Behind HVPS PS1 Registration Paper Sensor Registration Assembly (center) PS2 Paper Input Unit Paper Sensor Paper Input Unit (top, center) PS1201 Tray 3 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1202 Tray 2 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1203 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1204 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1205 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1206 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1207 Tray 3 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1208 Tray 2 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1301 Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA PS1302 Tray 1 Lifting Plate Position Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA PS1401 Face-down Bin Full Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA PS1402 Face-down Bin Delivery Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA PS1403 Fuser Delivery Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA SL1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Solenoid PIU (right side) SL2 Tray 1 Lifting Plate Solenoid Tray 1 Drive Unit SL3 Face-up Bin Delivery Solenoid Left Rear Corner of Chassis (behind diverter door) SMT1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor PIU (right side) SW1401 Doors Open Switch Switch/Sensor PCA Tray 2, SW1601 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 2, SW1602 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS

C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 151

, Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans (continued) Control Device Title Location Tray 2, SW1603 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 2, SW1604 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1601 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1602 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1603 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1604 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Note See figure 5-15 for the locations of sensors, solenoids, clutches, motors and fans in table 5-1. Figure 5-15 Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans 152 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Paper Size Switches (Trays 2 and 3)

The paper guides in Trays 2 and 3 operate four levers at the back of the trays that activate the size sensing switches (SW1601 through SW1604) mounted in the printer chassis. Paper sizes are compared to switch conditions in table 5-2. Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 Ledger (portrait) OFF OFF OFF OFF A3 (portrait) OFF ON OFF OFF B4 (portrait) ON OFF OFF OFF Legal (portrait) ON ON OFF OFF Letter (landscape) OFF OFF OFF ON A4 (landscape) OFF OFF ON OFF

Printing from Tray 1

The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor (PS1301). The lifting plate pressurization solenoid (SL2) is then activated, releasing the plate that applies upward pressure on the paper and causing it to contact the Tray 1 pickup roller. The Tray 1 Feed Clutch (CL3) turns on at this time and feeds the paper from Tray 1 to the registration position. The remainder of the Tray 1 print process is identical to the Tray 2 and 3 process, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 153.

Printing from Trays 2 and 3

The Pickup, Feed, and Separation rollers start rotating when the DC Controller receives the /PRNT signal from the Formatter PCA. Then, the DC Controller activates the Pickup Solenoid (SL1) and starts feeding paper through the Paper Input Unit (PIU), triggering photosensors PS2 and then PS1. These sensors inform the DC Controller that paper has passed through the PIU and is present at the Registration Assembly. When the Laser/Scanner and Fuser are ready, the DC Controller sends the /VSREQ signal to the Formatter. When the Formatter has processed the print data, it sends the /VSYNC and /VDO signals to the DC Controller. The paper is then released from the Registration Assembly (by CL1) and fed to the photosensitive drum, starting the C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 153, image transfer and fusing processes. After the paper passes through the Fuser, it triggers PS1403 and PS1402 to the specified type, size, and destination of the paper being fed through the printer.

Printing from the Envelope Feeder

The Envelope Feeder mounts in slots above Tray 1. The printer can print from Tray 1 even during the installation of the Envelope Feeder. When the print job calls for an envelope, it is fed directly to the Registration Assembly. From there, the print process is identical to the Tray 2 and 3 process, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 153.

Printing with the Duplexer

The duplexer mounts inside the printer below the Fusing Assembly. The back side of the paper is printed first, the paper is turned over, and then fed back to the Registration Assembly for front side printing. When the print job calls for 2-sided printing, a solenoid in the duplexer operates the duplex flipper in the Diverter Assembly and routes the paper to the duplexer. The paper does not exit the printer when being turned over for 2-sided printing. It is routed through a slot in the back of the duplexer, down inside the left cover and under Tray 3. When the duplexer senses the trailing edge of the paper, it reverses direction and feeds the paper back through the duplexer to the Registration Assembly. 154 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) Components The HP 2000-sheet Input Tray now supports variable engine input speeds, ranging from 6 to 32 ppm. The 2000-sheet Input Tray also automatically senses paper size. Figure 5-16 illustrates the paper path components in the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Table 5-3 and figure 5-17 describe and illustrate the sensors, switches, clutches, and motors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 5-16 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Path C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 155, Table 5-3. 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches and Motors Control Device Description Location CL31 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) Clutch CL32 Main Drive Clutch VTU MT31 Main Motor Paper Deck Drive Assembly PS31 Paper Entry Sensor VTU PS32 Paper Exit Sensor VTU PS33 Paper Tray Empty Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly PS34 Paper Tray Raised Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly PS35 VTU Closed Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly SW601-SW602 Paper Quantity Switches Lower Chassis SW701-SW704 Paper Size Switches Lower Chassis Power Supply Switch Normal/Diagnostic Mode Power Supply Switch VTU Motor Vertical Transfer Unit Motor VTU for entry and exit rollers 156 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, Figure 5-17 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches, and Motors 2000-Sheet Input Tray Operation

Pickup and Feed System

When the 2000-sheet Input Tray is loaded with paper and the paper tray is closed, the paper stack moves into position under the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. This operation is detected by the PS34 sensor in the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s Pickup Assembly. The presence of paper in the paper tray is detected by the PS33 sensor. The paper level is detected by switches SW601 and SW602 in the Paper Quantity Switch Assembly. The paper size is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 in the Paper Size Switch Assembly. Tables 5-4 and 5-5 show the paper quantity and paper size switches on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 157, Table 5-4. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Quantity Switches SW601 SW602 Remaining Paper Off Off 100% On Off 75% On On 50% Off On 25% Table 5-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size Switches Paper Size SW701 SW702 SW703 SW704 Ledger Off On Off Off (portrait) A3 (portrait) On On Off Off B4 (portrait) Off Off On Off Legal Off On On Off (portrait) Letter Off On Off On (landscape) A4 On On Off On (landscape) When the Paper Handling Controller on the printer sends an input command to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray, the Paper Deck Driver runs the Pickup Motor to rotate the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. As the Pickup Roller turns, the paper feeds into the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and passes through the PS31 and PS32 sensors. If the paper fails to reach the PS31 and PS32 sensors in the VTU within the allotted time, the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The 2000-sheet Input Tray stops the operation and reports the paper jam to the Paper Handling Controller on the printer. A paper jam message appears on the printer control panel display. Hardware malfunctions are also displayed on the printer control panel. 158 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Lifter Operation

The lifter plate in the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s paper tray is held by two wires that are wound on four pulleys by the Lifter Motor. When the paper tray is open, the pulley gears disengage from the motor gears, and the Lifter lowers by its own weight. The presence or absence of the tray is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 on the unit’s Paper/Tray Size Switch Assembly. After the paper tray is closed, the Lifter Motor lifts the paper stack into position; this action is detected by the PS34 sensor. The PS34 sensor also maintains the height of the paper stack. As paper is picked up by the rollers, the number of sheets decreases. Once the paper stack decreases to a certain level, the PS34 sensor registers a low condition. Then the Paper Deck Driver turns on the Lifter Motor again and lifts the paper stack until the PS34 sensor registers sufficient paper in the tray.

Power Supply

The 2000-sheet Input Tray has an internal Power Supply that activates when the printer’s power switch is turned on. The Paper Handling Controller on the printer sends a power-on signal to the Power Supply on the 2000-sheet Input Tray through the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. When the signal is high, the Power Supply provides both +24V and +5V to the Paper Deck Driver. The +24V drives the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the lifter, feed, and pickup systems. The +5V drives the sensors and PCA electronics.

Printing from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) or 2 x

500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) Trays 4 and 5 feed the paper upward through a guide slot in the Lower Right Door Assembly to the Paper Input Unit. Once there, the operation is the same as printing from Trays 2 and 3, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 153. C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 159, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray The2x500-sheet Input Tray is an input paper handling device that provides two additional input trays that hold up to 500 sheets each. The device is designed to support different printer platforms with variable engine input speeds, from 6 to 32 pages per minute, and provide storage space for printer supplies or consumables. The device has automatic paper size sensing and enhanced network management capabilities. The2x500-sheet Input Tray paper path is shown in figure 5-18. Figure 5-182x500-sheet Input Tray Paper Path 160 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Table 5-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, and Motors Control Device Title Location

PS1203 Lower Cassette Paper Level Sensor 1 Pickup Assembly PCA PS1204 Lower Cassette Paper Level Sensor 2 Pickup Assembly PCA PS1201 Lower Cassette Sensor Pickup Assembly PCA PS 1208 Upper Cassette Paper Out Sensor Pickup Assembly PCA PS 1206 Upper Cassette Paper Level Sensor 2 Pickup Assembly PCA PS 1205 Upper Cassette Paper Level Sensor 1 Pickup Assembly PCA PS2 Paper Jam Sensor Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) CL31 VTU Clutch VTU PS35 VTU Closed and Open Sensor Pickup Assembly SW1601-SW1604 Paper Size Switches Back Lower Chassis Power Supply Switch Normal/Diagnostic Mode Switch Power Supply VTU Motor Vertical Transfer Unit for entry and exit VTU rollers

Figure 5-192x500-sheet input Tray Sensors and Switches C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 161

, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Operation Communication and control of the input device are made through the Paper Handling Controller by a sequence of instructions controlled into the2x500-sheet Input Tray controller PCA.

Pickup and Feed System

When each tray in the2x500-sheet Input Tray is loaded with paper and the paper tray is closed, the paper stack moves into position under the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. The trays are detected by the PS1202 sensor in the upper tray and by the PS1201 sensor in the lower tray. The presence of paper is detected in the upper paper tray by the PS1208 sensor, and in the lower tray by sensor PS1207. The paper level is detected by switches SW1205 and SW1206 in the upper tray, and by switches SW1203 and SW1204 in the lower tray. The paper size is detected by switches SW1601 through SW1604 installed in each tray. Table 5-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Switches Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 Ledger (Portrait) OFF OFF OFF OFF A3 (Portrait) OFF ON OFF OFF B4 (Portrait ON OFF OFF OFF Legal (Portrait) ON ON OFF OFF Letter (Landscape) OFF OFF OFF ON A4 (Landscape) OFF OFF ON OFF When the Paper Handling Controller in the printer sends an input command to the Controller PCA on the2x500-sheet Input Tray, the2x500-sheet Input Tray driver engages the Pickup Motor to rotate the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. The direction of rotation of the Pickup motor determines which set of rollers are activated. When the motor rotates clockwise, the paper is picked up from the upper tray, and when the motor rotates counterclockwise, the paper is picked up from the lower tray.The2x500-sheet Input Tray driver also engages the2x500-sheet Input Tray motor to activate the Pickup Solenoid, which lowers the rollers to the level of the paper. As the Pickup Roller turns, the paper feeds into the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and passes through the PS1 and PS2 sensors. 162 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, If the paper fails to reach the PS1 and PS2 sensors in the VTU within the allotted time, the Controller PCA on the2x500-sheet Input Tray assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The2x500-sheet Input Tray stops the operation and reports the paper jam to the Paper Handling Controller on the printer. A paper jam message appears on the printer control panel display. Hardware malfunctions are also displayed on the printer control panel.

Lifter Operation

The2x500-sheet Input Tray drive motor lifts the paper when a tray is installed and when the pickup roller is lowered as a result of a partially filled tray. When a tray is installed, the Paper Pickup Solenoid SL3 is turned on. The movements of the shaft drive arm and the lift-up release arm free the lift-up cam. This advances the lifter gear one tooth at a time, raising the lifting plate. When the paper on the lifting plate engages the pickup roller, the lift-up cam is stopped from rotating, and the lifting operation is completed. When the paper falls below a set level, the actions are the same to lift the plate, except the position of the pickup roller (which is lowered as paper is used) triggers the lift-up release arm to free the lift-up cam, advancing the lifter gear. The lifting operation terminates the same way in both cases, triggered by contact between the paper in the tray and the pickup roller.

Power Supply

The2x500-sheet Input Tray has an internal power supply activated when the printer power switch has been turned on. The Paper Handling Controller sends a power-on signal to the power supply through the2x500-sheet Input Tray controller. When the signal is high, the power supply provides +24V and +5V to the paper deck driver. The +24V is used to drive the lifter, Feed, Pickup motors, clutches, and solenoids; +5V drives sensors and PCA electronics. C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 163, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components Components of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox paper path, including mailbox sensors, switches and motors, are illustrated in figure 5-20 and figure 5-21 and described in table below. Figure 5-20 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (1 of 2) 164 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Table 5-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors, Switches, and Motors Control Device Title Location

M Motor Upper back side S1 Face-up/down Diverter Solenoid Upper front side S2 Reversing mechanism solenoid Right side of the motor S3 Diverters solenoid (bins 1, 3, and 5) Bottom back side S4 Diverters solenoid (bins 2, 4, and 6) Bottom back side BES1 to 7 Bin empty sensors (1 to 7) Surface of every Face-down Bin BFS1 to 7 Bin full sensors (1 to 7) Upper left side of every Face-down Bin entrance FUBFS Face-up Bin full sensor Upper center of the Face-up Bin entrance ES Paper entry sensor Paper entrance FUDS Face-up Delivery Sensor Rev. assembly. (top cover) PPS1 Paper path sensor 1 Inside the unit, down the entry rollers. PPS2 Paper path sensor 2 Paper path (right cover) ILSW Interlock switch Bottom right side

Figure 5-21 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (2 of 2) C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 165

, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation The 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox is a low cost output device designed to support different printer platforms at variable engine input speeds and to increase office productivity. The mailbox has a total capacity of 940 sheets distributed in 7x120 Face-down bins and a 1x100 Face-up Bin, and works with four intelligent and configurable operating modes. An additional optional product, the Stand for the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, allows the customer to attach the mailbox in a floor stand configuration when an input device is attached to the printer.

Power-on Sequence

During the power-on sequence, the mailbox runs an initialization routine. The motor will perform a complete cycle and solenoid S2, S3, and S4 will be activated in that order. At the end of this routine, the front cover LED will display a fixed green light, but if there is a problem, the LED will flash red. The information from the paper handling controller is carried by the C-link cables that connect the controller board for all of the C-link protocol-supported devices. The C-link protocol supports up to 5 devices connected to the paper handling controller in a Daisy Chain. Each device controller has an input and output port that provides them the flexibility of connection in different configurations. However, HP recommends using the configuration shown in figure 5-28 on page 181 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device numbering and confusion when evaluating the event log.

Receiving Paper

The engine delivers paper to the mailbox through the Face-up Delivery Slot (input paper guide) at 107 mm/sec. The entry sensor (ES) senses paper arrival, and then the Face-up/down Diverter Solenoid actuates only if the paper is going to the Face-up Bin. If the paper has to reach any Face-down Bin, this solenoid will not actuate and the paper will go into the reversing area. 166 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Delivering Paper

If the paper is going to the Face-up Bin, the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) waits for the paper to reach the Face-up Bin. When the bin is full, the paper will actuate the Face-up Bin full sensor (FUBFS). If the paper is sent to any of the Face-down bins, the reversing mechanism will be activated by the reversing mechanism solenoid (S2). The paper path sensor 1 (PPS1) will wait for paper, and the correct diverter solenoid will actuate to deliver the paper in the correct bin (S3 if the paper is going to bin numbers 1 through 3 or S4 for bin number 2). If the paper has to reach other bins, then the paper path sensor 2 (PPS2) will be waiting for it. In the same way, S3 will be activated if the paper final destination is bin number 5, and if not, then S4 will be activated to reach bins 4 through 6. Finally, if the paper destination is bin number 7, none of the solenoids will be actuated. When a specific bin is full, then the paper will actuate the corresponding Face-down Bin full sensor (BFS1 to 7). The unit can report an empty bin condition to the engine based on the empty bin sensors (BES1 to 7).

Configuring the Operating Modes

The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an HP network configuration utility, such as HP JetAdmin or HP LaserJet utility. You must set up your printer driver to reflect the mode chosen by the administrator. Bidirectional environment: The printer automatically selects the mode established by the network administrator. Unidirectional environment: The mode of operation can be changed in the driver. The method for changing the mode varies with the driver and type of operating system. For additional information, see the online help for the printer software.

Configurable Mailbox Mode (Default Configuration)

In this mode, each bin can be addressed individually as the output destination and can have a name assigned to it by the network or mopier administrator. All the jobs are placed in the Face-down bins. If the assigned bins are full, the printer halts or sends the next pages to the overflow bin, as defined by the MIS manager. C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 167,

Job Separator Mode

● Print jobs are automatically sent one job per bin to the first empty bin beginning with the top bin. Non-empty bins are skipped. If all bins have paper, then the job will be sent to the first non-full bin starting at the top. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates that paper needs to be removed before delivery to that bin can continue. Delivery of the job resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.

Virtual Stacker Mode

In Virtual Stacker Mode, printed sheets are stacked face down in the bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of job boundaries. This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the mailbox bins. The software sees the mailbox as one logical bin. When the mailbox is full, the system will halt until all bins are emptied.

Collator Mode

● Mopies of a print job are automatically sent one mopy per bin beginning with the top bin. ● If there are more mopies than bins, the delivery resumes sequentially from the top bin until all mopies are delivered. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates which bin is full, and will display a request to remove paper. Delivery of the mopy resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins. 168 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, Figure 5-22 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Block Diagram C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 169, 8-bin Mailbox Components The 8-bin Mailbox is an output unit designed for variable speeds, ranging from 6 to 32 ppm. The 8-bin Mailbox holds up to 2,100 sheets distributed in eight 250-sheet Face-down bins and one 100-sheet Face-up Bin. The 8-bin Mailbox also features four intelligent and configurable operating modes.Table 5-9 and figure 5-24 illustrate and describe the 8-bin Mailbox sensors, switches, motors, and Controller PCA. Figure 5-23 illustrates the components of the 8-bin Mailbox paper path. Figure 5-23 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path 170 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, Table 5-9. 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA Control Description Location Device M1 Delivery Head Motor Upper-back side M2 Flipper Roller Motor with Flipper Assembly (upper back) Encoder M3 Delivery Head Roller Motor Delivery Head Assembly (upper back) M4 Ejector Motor Under Delivery Head Assembly M5 Transport Belt Motor Lower-back side PSBinEmpty Paper Bin Empty Sensor Delivery Head Assembly (upper back) PSBinFull/ Paper Bin (below) Full Delivery Head Assembly (upper Head Sensor back) Position PSEject Delivery Rollers Extended Delivery Head Assembly (upper Sensor back) PSEntry Paper Entry Sensor Flipper Assembly (top, center) PSExit1 Paper Delivered to Head Delivery Head Assembly (upper Sensor back) PSExit2 Paper Delivered to Bin Delivery Head Assembly (upper Sensor back) PSFaceUp Reverse Stepper Motor Flipper Assembly (top, center) Sensor PSFaceFull Face-up Bin Full Sensor Flipper Assembly (top, center) SW1 Interlock Switch Middle-back Side IR LED Infrared Light-emitting Delivery Head Assembly (left, Diode (for Stapler center) Assembly) C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 171, Figure 5-24 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA 172 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, 8-bin Mailbox Operation

Power-on Sequence

During the power-on sequence, the Delivery Head Assembly moves first to the top “home” position at the Face-up Bin. From that position the delivery head moves down, scanning to determine if all the Mailbox bins are installed, if they contain paper, and if they are full. Then the Delivery Head proceeds upward again to the home position and remains there for about 7 seconds. Finally, the Delivery Head Assembly moves to the bottom bin, where it waits for the next command from the Paper Handling Controller. Note If one of the bins has been removed or is not seated correctly, the Delivery Head Assembly will not complete the scan and will send an error message to the printer control panel.

Receiving Paper

The printer delivers paper to the 8-bin Mailbox through the left output delivery slot (Input Paper Guide) at a rate of 107 mm per second. Paper arrival is sensed by the PSEntry sensor, which activates the Flipper Roller Motor (M2), causing the paper to move through the 8- bin Mailbox transport and delivery system. See figure 5-23 on page 170.

Delivering Paper

The Delivery Head Assembly on the 8-bin Mailbox moves or stays in the indicated bin according to the commands coming from the Paper Handling Controller on the printer. If paper is designated for the Face- up Bin, the 8-bin Mailbox feeds it through the Flipper Assembly. If paper is designated for one of the Face-down bins, the 8-bin Mailbox feeds it through the Flipper Assembly until the trailing edge is sensed by the PSFaceUp sensor. Then the Flipper Roller Motor (M2) reverses and feeds the paper down between the Transport Belt and the Metal Tape until it reaches the Delivery Head Assembly.

Configuring the Operating Modes

The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an HP network configuration utility, such as the HP JetAdmin utility or the HP LaserJet utility for the Macintosh. Additionally, on all workstations that print to the printer, the printer driver might need to be set up to reflect the chosen operating mode. C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 173,

Mailbox Mode

In Mailbox Mode, the network administrator can address each bin as an output destination with a name assigned to it. The printer sends a print job to the selected bin. If the assigned bin is full, the printer either stops printing or sends subsequent pages to the overflow bin, which is also defined by the network administrator.

Job Separator Mode

● Print jobs are automatically sent one job per bin to the first empty bin beginning with the top bin. Non-empty bins are skipped. If all bins have paper, the job will be sent to the first non-full bin starting at the top. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates that paper needs to be removed before delivery to that bin can continue. Delivery of the job resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.

Virtual Stacker Mode

In Virtual Stacker Mode, printed sheets are stacked face down in the bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of job boundaries. This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the mailbox bins. The software sees the mailbox as one logical bin. When the mailbox is full, the system will halt until all bins are emptied. 174 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Collator Mode

● Mopies of a print job are automatically sent one mopy per bin beginning with the top bin. ● If there are more mopies than bins, the delivery resumes sequentially from the top bin until all mopies are delivered. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates which bin is full, and will display a request to remove paper. Delivery of the mopy resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.

Finisher Components

The 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler is an output-Finisher paper-handling device designed to work with different HP LaserJet printers. It has both mailbox and stapling capability. The stapler unit output bin staples up to 20 sheets (letter and A4,) 20-lb paper), and has a total capacity of 350 stapled sheets. In addition, this component has 5 Face-down bins with a capacity of 250 sheets each, and 1 Face-up Bin with a capacity of 100 sheets, for a total capacity of 1350 non-stapled sheets. The 8-bin Mailbox and the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler have similar functionality, performance, and parts. The stapler fits into the Mailbox by removing the three upper bins and the blind cover (see figure 8-14 on page 706 for location of the blind cover). C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 175, Figure 5-25 Finisher Paper Path Figure 5-26 Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches 176 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Stapler Unit Operation

All communication and control of the mailbox, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, and the stapler unit is through the Paper Handling Controller. These instructions are sent to the stapler controller PCA located in the lower part of the stapler. Power is provided to the stapler by the 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin mailbox with Stapler external 24V DC power supply through the C-link cable. It handles letter and A4 sizes of plain paper. The stapler can staple up to a maximum of 20 sheets. Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches Control Title Location Device M1 Stapler DC Motor Stapler Assembly M2 Rack Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly M3 Slider Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly M4 Retainer DC Motor Stapler bed Assembly IR Sensor Infra Red Sensor Stapler bed Assembly STL Sensor Stapler Sensor Stapler Assembly PSRack Rack Sensor Top Cover Assembly PSSlider Slider Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSRetainer Retainer Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSBinFull Output Bin Full Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSNBinFull Next Bin Full Sensor Housing STLout Staples Out Stapler Assembly SW1 Top Cover Interlock Switches (2 in Right Hinge serial) C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 177,

Power-On or Reset Sequence

At power-on or reset, events are performed in the following sequence: 1 Stapler Assembly is set to a ready state. 2 Retainer Assembly is turned to its initial position. 3 Rack Assembly is moved to find its home position, which is in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly. 4 Slider Assembly is moved to find its home position, which is inside of the stapler bed. 5 Slider Assembly is moved fully out from the stapler bed to the eject position. 6 Rack Assembly is moved to activate the Exit Flap Assembly. 7 Slider Assembly is moved to its home position. 8 Rack Assembly is returned to its home position. 178 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler (Internal Paper Path)

Figure 5-27 Stapler Cycles

Paper Feed Cycle

The stapler bed assembly receives the paper from the 8-bin Mailbox/ 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler Head assembly. The IR Sensor detects when the paper arrives in the stapler. The Retainer (a shaft holding two rubber flexible fingers or anti-curl fingers) rotates once to apply pressure down and backward. This action forces the paper to register against the rear wall of the stapler bed, as well as reduces paper curl. The Registration Pusher (located in the right side of the Top Assembly) registers the paper against the left wall of the stapler bed. This cycle is repeated until the amount of sheets to be stapled is reached (with a maximum of 20). C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 179,

Stapling Cycle

The Sliders move the stack of sheets to the stapling position. The Registration Pusher applies slight pressure to the stack of sheets toward the left wall of the stapler bed where the stapler is located. Then the stack of sheets is stapled.

Eject Cycle

The stapler bed sliders offset the stacks or jobs. The Off-Set Pusher (located in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly) pushes the stack towards the right side of the stapler bed, whenever it applies. The Sliders move the stack of paper from stapling position to eject position, which is out of the stapler bed (reaching the Wire Frame level). The Wire Frame directs the stack of paper. The Exit Flap Assembly moves down to prevent the job from returning to the stapler bed. The Sliders retract to home position, letting the stack of sheets fall into the output bin. The capacity of the output bin is 350 stapled sheets in jobs of five sheets or equivalent combinations.

Communication Link (Daisy Chain)

Communication Link (C-link) devices include: ● C-link Input Devices: • 2000-sheet Input Tray • 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray ● C-link Output Devices: • 8-bin Mailbox • 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (Includes a Finisher) • 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Communication and control of the C-link devices is through the paper handling controller mounted on the printer's formatter PCA. The C-link devices (C-link protocol) have their own power supply and controller board that receives signals and commands from the paper handling controller. This communication is illustrated in figure 5-28. 180 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, Figure 5-28 Recommended C-link Configuration (Daisy Chain) C4229-90911 Paper Paths and Components 181,

Paper Jam Detection

The PIU Sensor (PS2), the Registration Sensor (PS1), the Fuser Delivery Sensor (PS1403), and the Face-down Delivery Sensor (PS1402) detect paper moving through the printer (see figure 5-15 on page 152 and table 5-1 on page 151 for a description of each sensor and illustration of its locations). If a paper jam is detected, the DC Controller immediately stops the printing process and causes a 13.x PAPER JAM message to be displayed on the control panel. If a paper jam occurs in the Envelope Feeder, Duplexer, 2000-sheet Input Tray, 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, or 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, the 13.x Paper Jam message will indicate the approximate location. See Chapter 7 for more details.

Printer Timing

The Formatter PCA and the DC Controller PCA share information during printer operation. This information consists of printer status, command, and dot-image data. Figure 5-29 shows the general timing of the printer events. Table 5-11 lists the events that take place during normal printer operation. Table 5-11. Printer Timing Period Timing Purpose WAIT From power on to the end of Main Motor initial Clear the drum surface potential rotation. and clean the Transfer Roller. STBY From the end of the WAIT or the LSTR period until Maintain the printer in the READY (standby) the input of the PRNT signal from the Formatter state. PCA. Or from the end of the LSTR period to power off. INTR From the input of the PRNT signal from the Stabilize the photosensitive drum (initial rotation) Formatter PCA until the laser diode intensity has sensitivity in preparation for been stabilized. printing. Clean the Transfer Roller. PRNT From the end of the initial rotation until the Scanner Form images on the photosensitive (print) Motor stops. drum based on the /VDO signal from the Formatter PCA. Transfer the image to the media. LSTR From the primary voltage (DC) off until the Main Deliver the last sheet of paper and (last rotation) Motor stops. clean the Transfer Roller. If another PRNT signal is sent from the Formatter PCA, the printer returns to the INTR period. If not, it returns to the STBY period. 182 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, Figure 5-29 General Timing Diagram C4229-90911 Printer Timing 183,

IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information

This cable is IEEE compliant with A-to-C connectors. To take advantage of its enhanced capabilities such as bidirectional communication between the computer and printer, faster transmission of data, and auto configuration of printer drivers, the customer must have the following: ● Support in software applications for these features. ● A parallel cable with the correct pin configuration (see below).

Parallel Cable Pin Configuration

For best results, use the C2946A (3 meter) or C2947A (10 meter) cable or equivalent. CAUTION Ensure that all power and interface cables on the printer and host computer are properly grounded in compliance with local codes. Table 5-12. Parallel Cable Pin Assignments Signal Name Printer Pin Number Computer Port Number nSTROBE 15 1 DATA062DATA173DATA284DATA395DATA4 10 6 DATA5 11 7 DATA6 12 8 DATA7 13 9 nACKNLG 3 10 BUSY 1 11 CALL (PE) 5 12 SELECT 2 13 NAutoFd 17 14 O VDC (GND) 19-35 18-25 nFAULT 4 15 nSe/In 16 17 nINIT 14 16 PERIPHLH 36 N.C. 18 184 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Copy Module Functional Overview Copy Module System

Figure 5-30 Copy Module System Block Diagram Note The copy module consists of everything inside the large dotted line. The copy engine consists of the copy module minus the Copy Processor Board. Mopier ● The Mopier’s hard disk stores the copy module firmware. ● The Copy Connect Extended Input/Output (EIO) Card functions as a pass-through device. C4229-90911 Copy Module Functional Overview 185,

Copy Module

● Power Supply and Main Board Tray Assembly • The Fan Assembly activates while the copy module is turned on. It may run slower if Power Save is on. • The Power Supply provides AC to DC power conversion. • The Control PCA controls copy module electromechanical functions, imaging system, and errors. It also has an EEPROM which stores the default factory settings particular to each copy module, such as serial number and calibration settings. • When you replace the Control PCA, retain the EEPROM from the old PCA and replace it on the new PCA in order to retain the default settings for the HP Digital Copy 320. • The Back PCA Board provides a connection between the Copy Processor Board and the Control PCA. • The Copy Processor Board is explained on page 187. ● ADF Unit • The ADF Assembly provides all mechanics to move paper. • The LED Assembly provides feedback from the paper empty sensor to the user. If paper is loaded correctly, the LED is green and a tone sounds. • The ADF Motor Unit drives the ADF’s paper handling mechanics. • The Sensor Unit Assembly has 8 sensors (4 paper width sensors to detect standard paper types; 1 ADF open sensor, and 3 paper-handling sensors). • Charge Coupled Device (CCD)/Optics convert reflected light to electronic signals. Also includes mirrors and lenses to point the reflected light. • The ADF Lamp illuminates the original document. • The Lamp Inverter PCA controls and provides power to the ADF Lamp. 186 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, ● Carrier Unit (a movable optics system under the flatbed glass, used to copy the front side of ADF jobs and flatbed jobs) • Charge Coupled Device (CCD)/Optics convert reflected light to electronic signals. Also includes mirrors and lenses to point the reflected light. • The Carrier Unit Lamp illuminates the original document. • The Lamp Inverter PCA controls and provides power to the Flatbed Motor Unit with Belt. • The Flatbed Motor Unit drives the Carrier Unit back and forth under the flatbed glass. ● Front Panel (LC touch screen and keypad interface) ● Home Position Sensor (detects obstruction of Carrier Unit, a bad Flatbed Motor or Belt) ● Junction PCA (a pass-through connection from the Control PCA to the Carrier Unit, Flatbed Motor Unit, Front Panel, and Home Position Sensor)

Function and Layout of the Copy Processor

Figure 5-31 Copy Processor and key components Note The Copy Processor is a replaceable unit. C4229-90911 Copy Module Functional Overview 187,

Functions

● Controls the Front Panel display ● Monitors touch screen inputs ● Controls communication from the copier engine (no unsolicited data flows from the copier engine) ● Performs image processing (grayscale to dithered black and white) ● Initiates and controls communication to the Mopier • The interface is IEEE 1394 based, 200 MB per second total bus speed. • Copy module firmware is downloaded from the Mopier’s hard disk to the Copy Processor. • The user inputs settings through the touch screen Front Panel to the Copy Processor to the Mopier. • The Mopier sends status responses to the Copy Processor. • Mopier control commands go from the Copy Processor to the Mopier. • Image data is sent to the Mopier, essentially printer ready strip buffer data.

Key Components

● 2 PM44s [Image processing Digital Signal Processor (DSP)] ● 1 16-bit Motorola 68306 micro-controller ● 1 boot ROM, which provides code to start 1394 communication and begin to download the operating system ● 1 1394 interface and connector ● 1 DRAM 188 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Power Up Process Copy Processor Board

There are 4 main stages of the power-up process of the Copy Processor. Each of the four stages are represented by an icon displayed on the Digital Copy 320's front panel. If a Digital Copy 320 does not successfully boot up, the icons displayed will assist the field technician in diagnosing the failure. While first power-up icon is displayed: 1 The 16-bit Motorola 68306 microprocessor boots itself from the ROM. 2 The Copy Processor performs minimum checks (Level-1 checks) on ROM. 3 The Copy Processor polls the keypad for initial key status (to determine whether to start up in Service Mode). 4 The Copy Processor begins performing self-checks. (During Level II checks on the Copy Processor, the user can let go of any keys held down. This is a short phase with no animation.) While second power-up icon is displayed: 5 The connection to the HP Mopier 320 starts over the IEEE 1394 interface and looks for the HP Mopier 320. This stage may take more time if the printer is not powered on and ready. If the HP Mopier 320 is not available, the Copy Processor continuously monitors the bus to find one. Therefore, the power-on order between the HP Mopier 320 and the Copy Module does not matter. While third power-up icon is displayed: 6 The unit begins download of the Copy Module Firmware (CMF) from the HP Mopier 320's hard disk to the Copy Processor's DRAM. This may take up to two minutes, although 60-70 seconds is most typical. The hourglass icon is animated during this time and a progress bar is displayed. C4229-90911 Power Up Process 189, While fourth power-up icon is displayed: 7 When the download is complete, the unit begins a checksum test on download, initializes the system, and continues to display the icons until it can display the HP Digital Copy 320 Module's main menu. 8 Initial key state and Level II failure (if any) are written to the Display Manager and are reported to the Front Panel as Boot Error XXXX. See “Boot Errors” on page 655 for a definition of XXXX. 9 The microprocessor jumps to the code in DRAM and never returns to the code in ROM. Then the Copy Module Operating System starts up in Service Mode, if the user was pressing the appropriate keys when power-up began (see Step 3), or the main menu is displayed. Note Icons are drawn at the start of the stage. If the stage fails, the icon will be overdrawn with the error icon. 190 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Copy Module

▼ The fan comes on. ▼ The start button LED lights yellow and then goes off. ▼ The Carrier Unit moves to the home position, as detected by the Home Position Sensor. (A grinding noise indicates the shipping lock is in place or an object is blocking the Carrier Unit.) ▼ The ADF clears any paper loaded or partially in the paper path. ▼ The back light on the Front Panel turns on. (Stopping here indicates that the unit has a bad display or connection. This is particularly true if the Copy Processor is functional.) ▼ HP Digital Copy 320 displays on the screen to confirm that the display and connections are good and the Copy Processor is able to boot from ROM. ▼ The copy module polls for an HP Mopier 320. If it is not there, the copy module will continuously monitor the bus for one. (The power on order does not matter for the Mopier or copy module.) ▼ The four icons and the status bar display. ▼ The main menu displays. ● The copy module awaits the start command. C4229-90911 Power Up Process 191,

Mopier

▼ The Mopier performs startup procedures. Note The Scanner Service Agent is part of the copy module firmware that loads from the Mopier's hard disk drive into the Mopier's RAM on power up. When this happens, you see Loading Program 1 on the front panel of the Mopier. This program runs continuously, instructing the Mopier how to handle requests and information from the copy module. ▼ The Mopier loads the Scanner Service Agent from the Mopier hard disk drive. Loading Program 1 displays on the Mopier’s Front Panel. Additional programs may be added later for support of additional functionality. ● The Scanner Service Agent checks the printer’s product ID field to see if the printer is an HP Mopier 320. If it is not, the Scanner Service Agent will ignore requests from the copy module. Loading Program 1 will still display on the printer’s Front Panel, but the program remains dormant. See “Notes About the HP Mopier 320 Product ID” below. Note The units must be power cycled once the copy module firmware is installed. The copy module firmware will not work with any printer other than an HP Mopier 320.

Notes About the HP Mopier 320 Product ID

The product ID for the Mopier 320 is stored in NVRAM. If NVRAM fails or the formatter is replaced, the product ID is not lost because it is backed up on the printer’s hard disk drive, beneath the FAT so that it is not lost if the disk is initialized. In the case of a hard disk failure and subsequent replacement, the product ID will be backed up again to the new hard disk. CAUTION Do not replace the Mopier’s hard disk drive and Formatter at the same time. Doing so will cause the printer’s product ID to revert to the HP LaserJet 8100, causing the Scanner Service Agent to be dormant, which in turn will cause the HP Digital Copy 320 to not boot up. In the unlikely event that an HP Mopier 320 reverts to a LaserJet 8100 (confirmed by printing a configuration page), contact HP support for assistance to reprogram the printer’s product ID. Another reason not to replace the hard disk drive and Formatter at the same time is the loss of page counting. 192 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

ADF Simplex Operation

▼ The user inputs commands (through the touch screen and buttons) which are then sent to the Copy Processor Board. ▼ The Copy Processor displays the appropriate screens on the copy module’s LCD based on the user’s inputs. The screens displayed are based on the screens downloaded from the Mopier. ▼ The user presses the START button and the copy module receives the ADF read command. (The ADF or flatbed is determined by the ADF paper loaded sensor.) ▼ The bottom document placed face-down in the chute is fed through the ADF. Paper size is detected by the Paper Size Sensor (A3, A4, B4, B5). This will tell the ADF Motor when to stop. ▼ The Carrier Unit reads the white reference and then moves to the ADF read position. ▼ The ADF Motor starts to feed the paper. The top sensor detects the edge of the page. ▼ The copy module counts the number of motor pulses to reach the end of the page. It also determines mispicks, double or misfeeds, and end of page when the data ends. ▼ The image is scanned by the copy module engine, as explained on page 196. ▼ The page is stacked in the output tray. This process repeats until the chute is empty. ● The ADF Motor stops and the copy module awaits the next command. C4229-90911 ADF Simplex Operation 193,

ADF Duplex Operation

▼ The user inputs the duplex command from the touch screen on the Front Panel. ▼ Frontside data is the same as simplex operation. ▼ Both the backside and frontside are copied simultaneously by two Charge Coupled Device (CCD) arrays on the HP Digital Copy 320. (A Charge Coupled Device is a miniature photometer that measures light and converts the measured value to analog voltage.) ▼ Backside data is copied and stored into the backside image buffer residing on the copy engine. ● After the frontside buffer has been sent to the Copy Processor, the data stored in the backside buffer is then sent to the Copy Processor.

Flatbed Operation

▼ The user inputs commands (through the touch screen and buttons) which are then sent to the Copy Processor Board. ▼ The Copy Processor displays the appropriate screens on the copy module’s LCD based on the user’s inputs. The screens displayed are based on the screens downloaded from the Mopier. ▼ The user presses the START button and the copy module looks for paper loaded in the ADF. If no paper is found, the copy module receives the flatbed read command. Note The user interface is identical from ADF copy to flatbed copy. ▼ The Carrier Unit reads the white reference and then moves to the right to read from the flatbed glass and proceeds in steps for user specific paper length. ▼ The copy engine scans the image (see page 196). ● The Carrier Unit returns to the home position and the HP Digital Copy 320 awaits the next command. 194 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, Checks Executed when the Start Button is Pressed ● Paper jam ● ADF open ● Lamp intensity ● Lamp fuse ● Motor fuse ● Detect paper loaded (on ADF) C4229-90911 Flatbed Operation 195,

Image Path

Figure 5-32 Image path (1 of 2) Step 1: The light source illuminates a horizontal strip of the image called the raster line. Step 2: Reflected light is gathered and guided by lenses and a series of mirrors and is then captured by a 4864 pixel element Charge Coupled Device (CCD) array. The CCD converts analog voltages into raw digital grayscale information. Step 3: Raw digital image data is sent from the copy module’s CCD to PM-44s. The PM-44s convert raw digital information into a Mopier ready bit stream, dithered black and white with layouts such as N-up, duplex, staple, and so forth, and sends it to the Mopier via the 1394 cable. Data format is strip buffer raster data. The copy module firmware on the Mopier adds Printer Job Language (PJL) control commands later. 196 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, Repeat: One horizontal line or raster line of the image is captured in a step and the Carrier Unit or ADF mechanically moves to the next step. The distance moved determines the subscan sampling rate (1/300 inch = 300 ppi, 1/600 = 600 ppi). Note Pages load face down on the ADF. The backside optics are in the ADF above the frontside optics, which are in the Carrier Unit, below the glass. C4229-90911 Image Path 197,

Communication to the Mopier

Note The Copy Connect EIO is essentially a pass through device. ▼ Data is handed from the Copy Connect EIO to the Scanner Service Agent (SSA), which is part of the copy module firmware that runs in the Mopier’s RAM and shows Loading Program 1 on the Mopier’s Front Panel when loaded successfully. ▼ The copy module firmware adds several Printer Job Language (PJL) control codes to set resolution, printer language and page layout. ● The data stream goes around the Mopier’s normal image processing system directly into page memory. This allows for the high speed at which copied pages can be printed.

Communication Channels

● Image data: high speed uni-directional 1394 channel ● All other communications: bidirectional 1394 channel

Print Job Interrupt

There are two levels at which a user can interrupt a network print job to make a copy on the copy module: ● Low priority - when you place a document in the ADF or touch any of the buttons on the copy module, all incoming network jobs are held until the copy module is finished copying. ● High priority - Select JOB INTERRUPT on the touch screen. The current mopy job is interrupted at the copy boundary. For instance, if the Mopier is printing copy 3 of 5, it will finish copy 3 and hold copies 4 and 5 until the copy module is finished copying. 198 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911,

Paper Path and Sensors

ADF cover ADF empty open sensor OMR sensor B5sensor A4 B4 size A3 sensor Top of paper sensor Figure 5-33 Locations of ADF Sensors C4229-90911 Communication to the Mopier 199, Figure 5-34 ADF Sensors functional diagram 200 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4229-90911, 6 Removal and Replacement

Chapter contents

Removal and Replacement Strategy - - - - - - - - - - - 202 Required Tools- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 203 User Installable Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 204 Hardware Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212 HP Mopier 320 Engine Removal and Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - 214 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement - - - - 2852x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement - - - 314 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement - - - - 347 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement- - - - - - - - - 384 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement- - - - - - - 416 HP Digital Copy 320 HP Digital Copy 320 Removal and Replacement - - - - - 429 Installing the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - - 430 Copy Module Maintenance Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - 440 Copy Module Skins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 445 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies - - - 464 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies- - - - - - - - - - - - 475 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - 488 C4229-90911 Chapter contents 201,

Removal and Replacement Strategy

This chapter documents the removal and replacement of major assemblies. Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included. WARNING! Unplug the power cord from the power outlet before attempting to service the printer. If this warning is not followed, severe injury may result. Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. This printer has some sharp sheet metal edges that can cause injury.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions CAUTION

The printer and accessories contain parts that are sensitive to ESD. Always service printers at an ESD-protected workstation or wear an anti-static wrist wrap. Watch for the ESD reminder symbol on illustrations. 202 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Required Tools

● #2 magnetized Phillips screwdriver (6-inch shaft) ● Small flat-blade screwdriver ● Small pair needle-nose pliers ● T-10, T-15, and T-20 Torx driver (6-inch shaft) All components in the printer, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, and the2x500-sheet Input Tray use Phillips head screws that require a #2 size Phillips screwdriver. Make sure to use a Phillips screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver. Figure 6-1 shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver. Note that the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces. All screws used in the field-replaceable units of the 8-bin Mailbox and the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler components require a T-10, T-15 or T- 20 Torx driver. Figure 6-1 Phillips vs. Posidriv Screwdrivers Note See table 6-1 on page 212 and Chapter 8 for a list of the screws and other common hardware used in the printer. CAUTION To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counter-clockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, then carefully turn clockwise to tighten. Do not over-tighten. If a self-tapping screw-hold becomes stripped, repair of the screw-hole or replacement of the affected assembly is required. C4229-90911 Required Tools 203,

User Installable Accessories Memory and Personality Upgrade CAUTION

DIMMs and the Formatter PCA can be damaged by small amounts of electrostatic discharge (ESD). Wear an anti-static wrist wrap. Print a configuration page (page 589). 1 Turn the printer off. Unplug the power cord, and disconnect any cables. Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the back of the printer. Grasp the screws and pull the formatter board out of the printer. Place it on a flat, non-conductive surface. 2 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Hold the DIMM with fingers against the side edges and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.) 3 Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). 4 Make sure the locks on each side of the DIMM snap inward into place. (To remove a DIMM, the locks must be released.) Slide the formatter board back into the printer, and tighten the two screws. Plug in the power cord and connect all cables. Turn the printer on. 204 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Disk Drive

Figure 6-2 Disk Drive

To remove the disk drive:

1 Turn the printer off, and unplug it. 2 Loosen the 2 captive screws, and remove the disk drive from slot #2 (figure 6-2, callout 1).

To reinstall the disk drive:

1 Turn the printer off. 2 Install the disk drive in slot #2 (figure 6-2, callout 1), and tighten the 2 captive screws. 3 Print a configuration page to verify the settings. C4229-90911 User Installable Accessories 205,

Duplexer

1 With the printer turned off and unplugged, open the Diverter door on the left side of the printer. 2 Push down the green release lever located at the lower right of the Duplexer and slide it straight out of the printer.

Envelope Feeder

1 With the printer turned off and unplugged, slide the Envelope Feeder up and out of the printer. 206 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray 1 With the printer turned off and the power cable unplugged, disconnect all C-link cables from the Formatter Assembly and from the input device. WARNING! The printer weighs approximately 106 pounds (48 kg). Use four people to lift it. 2 Lift the printer off of the Tray 4 assembly and place it on a smooth, sturdy surface.

To Reinstall:

3 Match the locator pins as illustrated in step 3. 4 Make sure that the printer is aligned on all corners. 5 Reconnect all power and C-link cables. C4229-90911 User Installable Accessories 207, 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin

Mailbox with Stapler

1 With the printer turned off and unplugged, disconnect the power cable and C-link cable from the input device and power box. 2 Carefully slide the 8-bin Mailbox/5- bin Mailbox with Stapler away from the printer until the locator tabs and the lower guide rail are clear. See Figure 2. 3 Press in the green tabs and remove the bracket installed underneath the input device. See Figure 3.

To Reinstall:

1 Reinstall bracket underneath input device.Reinstall C-link and power cables. See Figure 1. Note Attach and secure the C-link cable to the lower connector on the input device. Route the mailbox’s power cord beneath the printer to the transfer-door side of the printer and connect it to the bottom of the powerbox. 208 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox 1 With the printer turned off and unplugged (A), disconnect the C-link cable from the top and bottom (B) connectors. 2 Remove the Face-up Bin (A) from the top slot of the mailbox. Depress the handle mechanism on the front of the mailbox (B). Pull the mailbox away from the printer until the tray is fully extended (C). 3 Release the plastic alignment guide from the latching mechanism. 4 Remove the wingnuts from the studs beneath the tray extension on the stand. 5 Slide the mailbox away from the printer. Raise the alignment guide and tape it in place before moving the mailbox. C4229-90911 User Installable Accessories 209,

To Reinstall:

1 Place the mailbox onto the stand by aligning the threaded studs on the connector plate with the two holes on the top of the stand. 2 With the tray on the stand fully extended, lower the alignment guide onto the locking mechanism. 3 Slide the mailbox toward the printer. Note Use your thumbs to do this and keep the tray on the stand fully extended. 210 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, 4 Secure the mailbox to the stand by tightening the thumb fastener onto the studs beneath the tray extension on the stand. 5 Push the mailbox toward the printer until it snaps in place. 6 Connect the C-Link cable. Plug the power cord into the mailbox and an AC power outlet. C4229-90911 User Installable Accessories 211,

Hardware Table

Note The screws listed in table 6-1 are also listed in Chapter 8 with their respective assemblies. Table 6-1. Hardware Table Example Reference Description Part Number Usage CH101 and CH102 Screw, w/washer, XA9-0872-000CN General, Metal to M3x8 metal CH103 Screw, M4X8 XB6-7400-807CN Main Motor CH104 Screw, CT, M3X3 XB5-6303-007CN Fan 1, Fan 2 CH105 Screw, w/washer, XA9-0817-000CN Laser/Scanner M3X20 CH106 Screw, tapping, XB4-7401-809CN HVPS, DC truss head, M3X8 Controller CH107 Screw, tapping, pan XB4-7401-009CN Diverter Assembly, head, M4X10 Face-up Solenoid Assembly 212 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Table 6-1. Hardware Table (continued) Example Reference Description Part Number Usage

Kit 1 Complete hardware RY7-5044-000CN 2000-sheet Input screw kit for Tray, general use 2000-sheet Input Tray Kit 3 Complete hardware C4785-60521 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin screw kit for Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler, Elevator Head

C4229-90911 Hardware Table 213

,

Engine Removal and Replacement

Control Panel- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 215 Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 217 Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 226 Diverter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 229 Diverter Door Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 230 Lower Right Door Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 231 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) - - - - - - - 234 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust)- - - - - - - - 236 Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake) - - - - - - - - 237 Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 238 Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 239 Tray 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 241 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 244 Feeder Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 248 Formatter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 250 Fusing Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 252 Laser/Scanner Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 254 Main Gear Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 256 Main Motor Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 259 Paper Input Unit (PIU) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 260 PCA, DC Controller- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 261 Output Paper Sensor PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 262 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) - - - - - - - - - - - - 269 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) - - - - - - - - - - - - 270 Registration Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 271 Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad - - - - - - - - - - 274 Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - 276 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 277 Registration Sensor (PS1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 279 Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3) - - - - - - - - - - - - 281 Transfer Roller Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 282 Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 284 214 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Control Panel

Figure 6-3 Control Panel (1 of 2) 1 While pushing in on the center area (figure 6-3, callout), lift up on the forward edge of the control panel to release the plastic retaining tab. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 215, Figure 6-4 Control Panel (2 of 2) 2 Press down on the back while pushing up on the front of the Control Panel to free it from the chassis.

To Reinstall:

Plug in the cable, replace the cable in its retainer, insert the rear edge of the control panel under the top cover lip, and press down on the forward edge to snap it into place. 216 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Covers

There are five cover assemblies in this printer: ● AC Access Cover, located at the left rear of the printer. ● Back Cover, provides access to the High Voltage Power Supply, DC Controller, Low Voltage Power Supply, and Main Motor. ● Front Cover, including front access door. ● Left Lower Cover, located below the Diverter Access Door. ● Top Cover, provides access to the Face-down Delivery Unit and Laser/Scanner Assembly. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 217,

AC Access Cover

Figure 6-5 AC Access Cover 1 Remove the Formatter PCA. 2 Remove 3 screws (figure 6-5, callout 1).

To Reinstall:

1 Insert the panel edge (figure 6-5, callout 2) inside the back cover (if installed). 2 Be sure to insert the three alignment tabs (figure 6-5, callout 3) into their slots before replacing the screws. 218 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Back Cover

Figure 6-6 Back Cover Note Remove the metal back cover and the plastic panel at the right rear as a single unit. The square opening at the upper rear corner on the right- side plastic panel is the engine test access (callout 6). 1 Remove 5 screws (figure 6-6, callout 1). 2 Open the top cover door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-6, callout 2). 3 Open the 2000-sheet Input Tray transfer door (if installed), Tray 1, and the Right Lower Door Assembly (callout 7). 4 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-6, callout 3) from the plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover. 5 Carefully release the cover around the AC input connector (figure 6-6, callout 4) at the lower right of the back cover, and slide the right side of the cover slightly forward. 6 Carefully release the retaining tabs (figure 6-6, callout 5) on the plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover by gently pulling the cover to the left while moving both pieces away from the printer chassis. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 219,

Front Cover

Figure 6-7 Front Cover (1 of 2) 1 Open all access doors and remove the Duplexer if installed. 2 Open the front access door, and remove 3 screws (figure 6-7, callout 1). 220 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-8 Front Cover (2 of 2) 3 Open the Diverter Access Door and release the two plastic retaining tabs inside the Duplexer cavity (figure 6-8, callout 2). CAUTION Be careful; the plastic upper retaining tabs will break off if the cover is tilted too far out. 4 Carefully pull the bottom of the cover away from the chassis while moving it to the right to release the retaining tab (figure 6-7, callout 3). 5 Carefully tilt the bottom edge of the cover away from the chassis to release the upper retaining tabs. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 221,

Left Lower Cover

Figure 6-9 Left Lower Cover CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic guides on the inside of the lower left cover. They are part of the Duplexer paper path. 1 Remove the Diverter Assembly access door (see figure 6-15). 2 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-9, callout 1). 3 Press down firmly on the top cover outer ends to release the retaining tabs on the inside of the cover (figure 6-9, callout 2) and the retaining tabs at the lower edge of the cover (figure 6-9, callout 3). 4 Pull the cover away from the chassis, left side first.

To Reinstall:

1 Relocate the right side of the cover behind the plastic edge piece first. 2 Slide the cover toward the chassis and insert the two retaining tabs into position. Lift up to snap the cover into place. 222 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Top Cover

Figure 6-10 Top Cover (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Control Panel (see figure 6-3 on page 215), then remove 1 screw (figure 6-10, callout 1). 2 Open the Diverter Assembly access door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-10, callout 2). C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 223, Figure 6-11 Top Cover (2 of 2) 3 Open the top cover door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-11, callout 3). CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag (figure 6-11, callout 4) when removing the top cover. 4 Lift (and hold) the top cover door up, and carefully pull out on the cover to release the retaining tab (figure 6-10, callout 5). 5 Hold the Face-down Bin (figure 6-10, callout 6) down while carefully and slowly lifting the top cover straight up until it clears the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag and the Delivery Unit. 224 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag (figure 6-11, callout 4) when replacing the top cover. 1 Hold the top cover door up and the Face-down Bin (figure 6-10, callout 6) down while lowering the cover into position. 2 Slide the Face-down Bin under the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag, and make sure that the cam (figure 6-11, callout 4) at the rear of the top cover door is properly positioned while lowering the top cover into place. 3 Make sure that the top cover is seated properly and that the retaining tabs are in place before replacing the screws. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 225,

Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin)

Figure 6-12 Delivery Unit (1 of 2) 1 Remove the following components: • Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 251) • AC Access Cover (see figure 6-5 on page 218) • Top Cover (see figure 6-10 on page 223) • Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 220) 2 Unplug and re-route the fan cable out of the way (figure 6-12, callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 2) to loosen the grounding strip. 4 Remove 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 3), and remove the metal fan shield. 5 Open the Diverter Assembly access door, remove 2 screws (figure 6-12, callout 4), release the plastic retaining tabs (figure 6-12, callout 5), and remove the metal mounting bracket (figure 6-12, callout 6). 226 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-13 Delivery Unit (2 of 2) 6 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-12, callout 5) and 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 7). CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit. 7 Lift the left end of the Delivery Unit approximately 1/8 inch to clear the alignment pin, and carefully rock it forward and backward while sliding it out of the chassis. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 227,

To Reinstall:

CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit. 1 Place the plastic edge on the right end of the Delivery Unit into the chassis. Make sure that the plastic support tab on the right end of the Delivery Unit slides on top of the chassis. 2 Make sure that the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit can move freely. 3 Replace the metal mounting bracket (figure 6-12, callout 6) before replacing the Delivery Unit screws. Make sure that the plastic clips (figure 6-12, callout 5) are snapped into place before tightening the mounting screws (figure 6-12, callout 4). 228 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Diverter Assembly

Figure 6-14 Diverter Assembly CAUTION Support the Diverter Assembly access door during this procedure to prevent damage to the plastic hinge pins. 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and release the support struts (figure 6-14, callout 1) by sliding the strut ends forward and downward. 2 Remove 6 self-tapping screws (figure 6-14, callout 2). Note The access door support struts will fall free when the Diverter Assembly is lifted away from the access door. 3 Lift the Diverter Assembly up and away from the access door. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 229,

Diverter Door Assembly

Figure 6-15 Diverter Door Assembly 1 Open the Diverter access door, and release the support struts (figure 6-15, callout 1) by sliding the strut ends forward and downward. 2 Rotate the door up to align the flat sides of the right hinge pin with the retaining slot (figure 6-15, callout 2), and lift upwards to release it from the retaining slot. 3 Continue lifting up on the right side of the door while pushing it to the left to rotate the left hinge pin out of its locating cavity.

To Reinstall:

1 Insert the left side of the door into position first, and then rotate the right side down to snap the hinge pins into position. 2 Reconnect the support struts to the chassis. 230 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Lower Right Door Assembly

Figure 6-16 Lower Right Door Assembly (1 of 3) 1 Remove the back cover assembly (see figure 6-6). 2 Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3. 3 Open the Lower Right Door, and release the lower end of the support strap (figure 6-16, callout 1). C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 231, Figure 6-17 Right Lower Door Assembly (2 of 3) 4 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-17, callout 2). 232 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-18 Right Lower Door Assembly (3 of 3) 5 Release two retainer tabs from the inside of the Tray 3 cavity (figure 6-18, callout 3). 6 Slide the door assembly away from the printer chassis. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 233,

Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) Fan Housing

Figure 6-19 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (1 of 2) 1 Remove the toner cartridge. 2 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10 on page 223). 3 Remove and re-route the cables away from fan housing (figure 6-19, callout 1). 4 Release the housing retainer clip located inside the toner cartridge cavity (figure 6-19, callout 2), and lift the housing up and out of the chassis. 234 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Fan 1 Motor

Figure 6-20 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (2 of 2) 1 Unplug the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA. 2 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-20, callout 3), and lift the fan and bracket assembly out of the chassis. 3 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-20, callout 4) to separate the fan motor from the bracket. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 235,

Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust)

Figure 6-21 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219). 2 Remove the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA (figure 6-21, callout 1). 3 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-21, callout 2). 236 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake) Fan Motor

Figure 6-22 Fan 3, Formatter Fan Note The fan motor (FM3) can be removed without removing the housing assembly. 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219). 2 Unplug the fan connector (figure 6-22, callout 1). CAUTION Do not bend the fan retainer clips upward. Release them by pinching. 3 Release the 2 retainer clips (figure 6-22, callout 2), and slide the fan out of the housing assembly.

Fan Housing

4 Remove 2 screws and remove housing.

To Reinstall:

Make sure that the fan cable exits from the upper left corner. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 237,

Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust)

Figure 6-23 Fan 4, Delivery Unit 1 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10). 2 Unplug the fan cable (figure 6-23, callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw (figure 6-23, callout 2), and remove the metal fan shield. 4 Release 4 retainer clips (figure 6-23, callout 3), and slide the fan forward out of the Delivery Unit Assembly. 238 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake)

Figure 6-24 Fan 5 Removal (1 of 2) 1 Remove Tray 1. 2 Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Unit. 3 Remove 1 screw (callout 1). 4 Disconnect the cable (callout 2). Cable is shown disconnected. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 239, Figure 6-25 Fan 5 Removal (2 of 2) 5 Insert the flat blade of a screwdriver along the line indicated by callout 1. 6 Turn the screwdriver counter-clockwise slightly to free the fan housing from the fan duct. Then, slide the fan housing out of the duct. 7 Slide the fan out of the housing to replace it. 240 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Tray 1

Figure 6-26 Tray 1 Removal (1 of 3) 1 To remove Tray 1, open the tray fully, then partially close it until the distance between the retaining tab (callout 1) and the stop on the chassis (callout 2) is 1/4”. 2 Pull the right side of the tray outward to free the clip (callout 3) from the pin (callout 4). C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 241, Figure 6-27 Tray 1 Removal (2 of 3) 3 Raise the right side of the tray and guide the white tab around the stop. 242 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-28 Tray 1 Removal (3 of 3) 4 Slide the tray to the right, to free the tray on the left side of the chassis. 5 Remove the tray. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 243,

Tray 1 Pickup Assembly

Figure 6-29 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (1 of 4) 1 Remove the Front Cover. 2 Remove the Rear Cover. 3 Remove Tray 1(see page 241). 4 Open the Pickup Unit door. 5 Remove 4 screws (callout 1). 244 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-30 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (2 of 4) 6 Disconnect the cables (callouts 1 and 2) on the right side of the printer. 7 Remove the cable from the cable guide (callout 3). C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 245, Figure 6-31 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (3 of 4) 8 Tilt the Pickup Assembly out of the chassis from the top (callout 1), then lift up to free it from the chassis (callout 2). 9 Remove the Pickup Assembly from the chassis. 246 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-32 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (4 of 4)

To Reinstall:

First, seat the 3 tabs (callout 1) behind the metal rail on the chassis. Then, pivot the Pickup Unit into place. The Pickup Unit has 4 locating pins that will engage guide holes in the chassis wen the unit is properly aligned. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 247,

Feeder Assembly

Figure 6-33 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2) 1 Open the left access door and remove the Duplexer (if installed). 2 Remove the Fusing Assembly (see figure 6-36 on page 252). 3 Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge. 4 Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page 282). 5 Remove the Registration Assembly (see figure 6-53 on page 271). 6 Unplug the sensor cable at the right side of the Feeder Assembly (figure 6-33, callout 1). 7 Remove 2 screws at the front of the Feeder Assembly (figure 6-33, callout 2). 248 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-34 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2) 8 Remove 1 screw at the back of the Feeder Assembly (figure 6-34). Note Removing the High Voltage Power Supply is recommended to ease the removal of the Feeder Assembly, primarily because of the contact points. 9 Release 4 plastic retaining tabs by moving them in the directions indicated in figure 6-34 while carefully lifting upwards on the Feeder Assembly. 10 Remove the Feeder Assembly by lifting it upwards out of the Toner Cartridge cavity.

To Reinstall:

Make sure that the plastic retaining tabs are all properly seated before replacing the screws. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 249,

Formatter Assembly Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count,

and Serial Number The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number are stored in Non-Volatile Memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer, MAINTCOUNT is the page count when the next preventive maintenance should be performed (every 350,000 images), and S.N. is the printer serial number (also located on the printer back cover). CAUTION DIMMs and the Formatter PCA can be damaged by small amounts of electrostatic discharge (ESD). Wear an anti-static wrist wrap. If necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the usage of the print engine. The procedures for setting these values are listed in table 3-14 on page 85. Before removing the old Formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to verify the current values. Note If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page, try to verify the values before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3, below. After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA. 1 Enter Service Mode as described in “Mopier Service Mode” on page 85. 2 When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press MENU to access the Service Menu. 3 Press ITEMS to display PAGECOUNT=, MAINTCOUNT=, and S.N.=. 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item. 5 Press GO to exit Service Mode. Note The page count interval can be changed to a value less than 350, 000 for special media situations. 250 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Removing and Replacing the Formatter Assembly

Figure 6-35 Formatter Assembly 1 If the Formatter is to be replaced, make sure to note the page count. 2 Loosen the two captive screws (figure 6-35, callout 1), and slide the Formatter PCA out of the chassis. 3 After installation of a replacement Formatter, be sure to re-enter the serial number, page count, and maintenance count. (See table 3-14 on page 85 for more information.) C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 251,

Fusing Assembly

Figure 6-36 Fusing Assembly 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door, and remove the Duplexer if installed. CAUTION Use the upper levers to release the Fusing Assembly, NOT the lower levers. The lower levers set the pressure rollers inside the Fusing Assembly for envelope printing (down for single sheets, up for envelopes). 2 To release the Fusing Assembly rotate the upper levers down (figure 6-36, callout 1). 3 To remove the Fusing Assembly lift up on the finger handles (figure 6-36, callout 2) while pulling outward. 252 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

1 Make sure that the Fuser Output sensor flag (figure 6-36, callout 3) on the upper left corner of the Fusing Assembly rotates freely. 2 Make sure that the lower levers are set down for single sheets. If having trouble printing envelopes, move the levers up. Move the levers back down when done. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 253,

Laser/Scanner Assembly CAUTION

The Laser/Scanner diode is extremely sensitive to ESD. 1 Remove the toner cartridge. 2 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10). Figure 6-37 Laser/Scanner Assembly 3 Unplug three cable connectors (figure 6-37, callout 1). 254 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, 4 Re-route the cable running across the top of the assembly so that it is out of the way. CAUTION Do not touch the laser/scanner mirror located under the forward edge of the assembly. Use approved ESD handling procedures when touching the Beam Detect PCA. 5 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-37, callout 2).

To Reinstall:

Make sure that the locator pins are properly seated. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 255,

Main Gear Assembly

1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Tray 1 • Tray 2 • Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page 282) • Back Cover Assembly (see figure 6-6 on page 219) • Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 241) • Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 231) • Paper Input Unit (PIU) (see figure 6-42 on page 260) • High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) (see figure 6-51 on page 269) • Main Motor (see figure 6-41 on page 259) Figure 6-38 Main Gear Assembly (1 of 3) 2 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-38 on page 256, callout 1). CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic gears when removing the Main Gear Assembly. 256 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help free the Main Gear Assembly from the printer. 3 From inside of the PIU cavity, carefully tilt the bottom of the Main Gear Assembly away from the chassis and down to free the gear mechanisms.

To Reinstall:

Figure 6-39 Main Gear Assembly (2 of 3) Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help install the Main Gear Assembly as it is rotated into place. 1 Observe the gear assembly position from inside the toner cartridge cavity (figure 6-39, callout 2). C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 257, Figure 6-40 Main Gear Assembly (3 of 3) 2 Tilt the top of the assembly inward and insert the upper back part of the assembly in place (figure 6-40, callout 3). 3 Continue rotating the assembly upwards into place. 4 Make sure that the locating pins are properly aligned and that the gear assembly fits tightly against the chassis before replacing the screws (figure 6-38, callout 4). 258 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Main Motor Assembly

Figure 6-41 Main Motor 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219). 2 Remove the HVPS (see figure 6-51 on page 269). 3 Unplug the connector (figure 6-41, callout 1). CAUTION Be careful when removing the Main Motor. The steel drive shaft can damage the plastic gears. 4 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-41, callout 2).

To Reinstall:

Align the Main Motor to the chassis with the locator tab (figure 6-41, callout 3) and the machined ring around the output shaft. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 259,

Paper Input Unit (PIU)

Figure 6-42 Paper Input Unit 1 Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3. Remove both trays to prevent damage to the PIU plastic sensor flags. 2 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219). 3 Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (see figure 6-29 on page 244). 4 Remove the Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 231). 5 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-42, callout 1). 6 Slide the assembly out from the chassis approximately 3 inches, and unplug the connector inside the right end (figure 6-42, callout 2). 7 Continue sliding the assembly out of the chassis.

To Reinstall:

Make sure that Trays 2 and 3 are removed when reinstalling the Paper Input Unit. 260 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

PCA, DC Controller

Figure 6-43 DC Controller PCA 1 Remove the Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 251). 2 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219). 3 Remove the High Voltage Power Supply (see figure 6-51 on page 269). 4 Unplug 19 connectors from the PCA (figure 6-43, callout 1). 5 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-43, callout 2) from the left side of the PCA and 2 self-tapping screws (figure 6-43, callout 3) from the right side of the PCA. 6 Release two retaining clips (figure 6-43, callout 4) and carefully tip the left side of the PCA outward to clear the Formatter PCA connector from the card cage.

To Reinstall:

Make sure the retaining clip posts (figure 6-43, callout 4) and the two locator pins (figure 6-43, callout 5) are properly aligned. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 261,

Output Paper Sensor PCA

1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 251) • AC Access Cover (see figure 6-5 on page 218) • Top Cover (see figure 6-10 on page 223) • Back Cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219) • Fan 3 and Housing Assembly (see figure 6-22 on page 237) • High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) (see figure 6-51 on page 269) • DC Controller PCA (see figure 6-43) Figure 6-44 Output Paper Sensor PCA (1 of 4) 2 Remove 7 screws (figure 6-44, callout 1), and remove the Formatter PCA cage. 262 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-45 Output Paper Sensor PCA (2 of 4) 3 Remove 5 screws (figure 6-45, callout 2), and remove the Formatter PCA grounding strip. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 263, Figure 6-46 Output Paper Sensor PCA (3 of 4) 4 Remove 3 screws (figure 6-46, callout 3), and remove the plastic PCA shield. (Note the positioning of the metal grounding fingers at the left of the shield.) 264 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-47 Output Paper Sensor PCA (4 of 4) 5 Unplug the connector (figure 6-47, callout 4). 6 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-47, callout 5), and unplug the connector on the back side of the PCA.

To Reinstall:

Make sure that the sensor flags rotate freely and that the top cover and Diverter doors operate the microswitch (SW1401). C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 265,

Paper Size PCA

Figure 6-48 Paper Size PCA (1 of 3) 1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Trays 2 and 3 • Back Cover (see figure 6-6) • Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) (see figure 6-52) 2 Unplug the fan cable from the left side of the connector (figure 6-48, callout 1), remove 1 screw (figure 6-48, callout 2), and remove the plastic shield (figure 6-48, callout 3). 266 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-49 Paper Size PCA (2 of 3) Note The Paper Size PCA for Tray 2 (figure 6-49, callout 4) is identical to the PCA for Tray 3 (figure 6-49, callout 5). The removal procedure for both PCAs is the same. 3 Unplug the connector (figure 6-49, callout 6), remove 3 screws (figure 6-49, callout 7), and remove the PCA and actuating fingers. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 267, Figure 6-50 Paper Size PCA (3 of 3)

To Reinstall:

Make sure that the actuating fingers are aligned with the locating pins (figure 6-50, callout 8). 268 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

Figure 6-51 High Voltage Power Supply 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219). 2 Unplug the cable from the LVPS to the DC Controller PCA (figure 6-51, callout 1), and move it out of the way. 3 Unplug the connector from the bottom of the HVPS (figure 6-51, callout 2). Note Do NOT remove the screw indicated in Figure 6-51, beneath the null symbol. 4 Remove 1 self-tapping screw (figure 6-51, callout 3) and 2 screws (figure 6-51, callout 4).

To Reinstall:

Make sure that the plastic alignment pin (figure 6-51, callout 5), the connector pins, and the high voltage contacts are properly aligned before replacing the screws. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 269,

Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

Figure 6-52 Low Voltage Power Supply 1 Remove the Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 251). 2 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 219). 3 Remove Fan 3 and its Housing Assembly (see figure 6-22). 4 Unplug 3 LVPS connectors (figure 6-52, callout 1). 5 Unplug the LVPS fan (FM1) cable from the DC Controller (figure 6-52, callout 2). 6 Remove 7 screws (figure 6-52, callout 3). 270 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Registration Assembly

Figure 6-53 Registration Assembly (1 of 3) 1 Open the top cover door and remove the toner cartridge. 2 Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page 282). 3 Remove the Main Gear Train Shield. Release the retainer clip (figure 6-53, callout 1), and lift the forward end up. 4 Remove 2 screws at rear of assembly (figure 6-53, callout 3). C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 271, Figure 6-54 Registration Assembly (2 of 3) 5 Unplug the clutch cable from the clutch on the right end of the Registration Assembly (figure 6-54, callout 2). 272 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-55 Registration Assembly (3 of 3) 6 Lift the registration guide and remove 2 screws at the front of the assembly (figure 6-55, callout 4).

To Reinstall:

1 Lift the registration guide, and place the Registration Assembly into position. 2 Lift the registration guide and make sure that the locator pin near the right screw is properly positioned. 3 Make sure that the grounding strap is under the left screw. 4 Be sure to connect the clutch cable connector. 5 After replacing the 4 screws, replace the Main Gear Train Shield. Tilt the top outward, reinstall the lower tabs in place, and snap the cover down into position. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 273,

Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad

Feed Roller Figure 6-56 Tray 1 Feed Roller 1 Open the Tray 1 door, and remove the plastic shield. 2 Pinch the retainer tabs together (figure 6-56, callout 1), and slide the roller to the left off of the shaft. 274 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Tray 1 Separation Pad

Figure 6-57 Tray 1 Separation Pad 1 Open the Tray 1 door, and remove the Feed Roller. 2 Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot (figure 6-57, callout 2), and carefully pry the separation pad upwards out of its retaining notches.

To Reinstall:

Make sure the metal edge of the Separation Pad faces forward. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 275,

Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers

Figure 6-58 Tray 2 and 3, Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers There are three rollers for each tray: the Pickup Roller, the Feed Roller, and the Separation Roller. The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between trays. The Pickup Rollers are interchangeable between trays. ● Tray 2 Pickup Roller: figure 6-58, callout 1 ● Tray 2 Feed Roller: figure 6-58, callout 2 ● Tray 2 Separation Roller: figure 6-58, callout 3 ● Tray 3 Pickup Roller: figure 6-58, callout 4 ● Tray 3 Feed Roller: figure 6-58, callout 5 ● Tray 3 Separation Roller: figure 6-58, callout 6 Note The Feed and Separation rollers have protruding tabs, and the pickup rollers have recessed retaining tabs. Be careful not to lose the plastic torque limiters located behind the Separation Rollers (figure 6-58, callout 7). 1 Remove trays. From inside the tray cavity, remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft. 276 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2)

1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Trays 2 and 3 • Transfer Roller (see figure 6-62 on page 282) • Registration Assembly (see figure 6-54 on page 272) • Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 220) • Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 241) • Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 231) Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above, and the sensor is removed and replaced from below. 2 Refer to the following page for the removal and reinstallation procedure for the PS2 sensor. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 277, Figure 6-59 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) 3 Release the retaining tabs (figure 6-59, callout 1) on the right end of the sensor, and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end. 4 Unplug the connector from the sensor.

To Reinstall:

1 Plug in the connector before reinstalling. 2 Holding the sensor flag out of the way, first hook the tabs on the left end in first. Snap the right end of the sensor upward into place. 278 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Registration Sensor (PS1)

1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Trays 2 and 3 • Transfer Roller (see figure 6-62 on page 282) • Registration Assembly (see figure 6-54 on page 272) • Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 220) • Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 241) • Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 231) • Paper Input Unit (see figure 6-42 on page 260) Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above, and the sensor is removed and replaced from inside the Paper Input Unit cavity. 2 Follow the procedure on the following page to remove and reinstall the PS1 sensor. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 279, Figure 6-60 Registration Sensor (PS1) 3 Release the retaining tabs (figure 6-60, callout 1) on the right end of the sensor and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end of the sensor. 4 Unplug the connector from the sensor.

To Reinstall:

1 Plug in the connector. 2 Holding the sensor flag out of the way, first hook the tabs on the left end in first. Snap the right end of the sensor upward into place. 280 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3)

Figure 6-61 Face-up Solenoid Assembly, SL3 1 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10 on page 223). 2 Remove the Delivery Unit (see figure 6-12 on page 226). 3 Remove 1 self-tapping screw (figure 6-61, callout 1). CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic arm when removing the assembly. 4 Pull the forward end of the assembly away from the chassis to clear the locating pin, and slide it forward to clear two retaining tabs. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 281,

Transfer Roller Assembly

Figure 6-62 Transfer Roller Assembly CAUTION Handle the Transfer Roller from the ends only. Do not touch the surface of the Transfer Roller. Skin oils will affect its electrical characteristics, resulting in poor image transfer. 1 Open the top cover door, and remove the toner cartridge. 2 Grasp the gear (figure 6-62, callout 1) on the left end, and carefully lift upward just enough to clear the retainer clip. 3 Slide the Transfer Roller Assembly to the left to release the shaft on the right end (figure 6-62, callout 2). 282 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

1 Place the right end of the shaft into its retaining cavity. 2 Hold the Transfer Roller wiper up (figure 6-62, callout 3) and slide the assembly to the right until the gear on the left end is in position. 3 Carefully press the left end of the shaft into the retainer clip. 4 Press the Transfer Roller wiper down (figure 6-62, callout 3) until the retaining clips snap into place. C4229-90911 Engine Removal and Replacement 283,

Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies

Note The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory. If you are replacing Tray 2 or Tray 3 with a tray other than the original factory installed unit, you may have to adjust the new tray. For details, see “Tray Adjustment Procedure” on page 116. 1 Open the tray, and pull it out to the stop. 2 Press the colored tab at the right side of the tray, and continue to pull the tray slightly upwards and out of the chassis.

To Reinstall:

1 Align the left rear corner of the tray and the locating track at the lower rear center of the tray with their respective guides, and insert the tray no more than two inches into the chassis. 2 Carefully lift up on the outer end of the tray while pulling the tray stop mechanism, located at the right rear of the tray opening, out and over the tray roller and guide assembly. 3 Carefully slide the tray into the printer until it latches into place. 284 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement WARNING! For the procedures in this section, the printer and all paper-handling devices must be unplugged. Before attempting to service the 2000- sheet Input Tray, unplug the power cord from the power source; otherwise, severe injury may result. The printer and paper-handling devices may have sharp edges that could cause injury. Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 286 Front Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 287 Back Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 288 Left Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 289 Right Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 290 Main Drive Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 291 Paper Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 293 Main Cable Harness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 294 Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 296 Front LED PCA Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 298 Pickup Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 300 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 302 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - - - - - 304 Paper Quantity Switch Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - 306 Paper Size Switch Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 306 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 308 Tension Springs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 310 Locating Pins- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 311 Casters and Stabilizing Feet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 312 Adjustable Foot- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 313 C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 285,

Orientation

Figure 6-63 shows the orientation of the 2000-sheet Input Tray as it is referred to in this section. Figure 6-63 2000-sheet Input Tray Orientation To remove the 2000-sheet Input Tray from the printer, see page 207. 286 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Front Cover

Figure 6-64 2000-sheet Input Tray Front Cover 1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops (figure 6-64). 2 Remove the Paper Limit Back Plate from the paper tray (callout 1). 3 Remove the 4 screws in the front of the tray: 3 screws at the top of the tray and 1 screw on the front-right side of the tray (callout 2). 4 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tabs at the left- and right-front sides of the tray (callout 3). 5 Carefully lift up on the Front Cover, and then pull it out to release the plastic retaining tabs that secure the bottom of the Front Cover to the tray chassis (callout 4).

To Reinstall:

1 Replace all the plastic retaining tabs properly (callout 4). 2 Reinstall the front adjustable plate, and configure it properly (callout 1). Reinstall the tray size labels. C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 287,

Back Cover

1 Make sure that the power cord for the 2000-sheet Input Tray is unplugged from the power source. 2 Remove the 4 screws that secure the Back Cover of the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the chassis: 1 screw on each corner (figure 6-65, callout 1). 3 Pull the Back Cover out from the chassis. Figure 6-65 2000-sheet Input Tray Back Cover

To Reinstall:

1 Insert the tab on the lower-left corner into its alignment slot. 288 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Left Cover

1 Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 2 Remove the 2 screws that are located at the top of the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s Left Cover: 1 screw near each corner (figure 6-66, callout 1). 3 Remove the Left Cover from the unit: a Pull out on the top of the Left Cover, and then lift up on the Left Cover’s right side to clear the retaining tabs that are along the Left Cover’s bottom edge (callout 2). b Pull out on the Left Cover’s lower-left corner to release the plastic retainer tab that secures that corner of the cover to the chassis (callout 3).

To Reinstall:

Figure 6-66 2000-sheet Input Tray Left Cover 1 Replace the left side of the Left Cover first (callout 3). 2 Tilt the right side of the Left Cover down and toward the chassis to place the lower retaining tabs over the chassis rail (callout 2). C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 289,

Right Cover

1 Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-78). 2 Remove the 2 screws that are located near the middle of the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s Right Cover: 1 screw on each side (figure 6-67, callout 1). 3 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab that secures the Right Cover’s upper-left corner to the chassis (figure 6-67, callout 2). 4 To remove the Right Cover, carefully pull out on the top of the cover while lifting it upward to clear the retaining tabs that are along the cover’s bottom edge.

To Reinstall:

1 Place the retaining tabs that are along the Right Cover’s bottom edge over the chassis rail. 2 Reinstall the VTU (see figure 6-78). Figure 6-67 2000-sheet Input Tray Right Cover 290 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Main Drive Assembly

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65). Figure 6-68 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Main Drive Assembly on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA. Disconnect the cable from the J206 connector on the Controller PCA (figure 6-68, callout 1). 3 Release the cable from the 2 cable clips that hold the cable to the chassis (figure 6-68, callout 2). 4 Remove the 2 screws that connect the Main Drive Assembly to the chassis: 1 screw on top of the Main Drive Assembly and 1 screw on the bottom (figure 6-68, callout 3). 5 Pull the Main Drive Assembly away from the chassis. 6 Inspect the Paper Deck Drive Bushing on the Main Drive Assembly. If the bushing is damaged, it can be replaced without replacing the whole drive assembly. Note Reassembly notes are on the next page. C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 291,

To Reinstall:

1 Reroute the cable through the cable clips (figure 6-68, callout 2) and reconnect the cable to the J206 connector on the Controller PCA (figure 6-68, callout 1). 292 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Paper Tray

1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray and remove any unused paper. 2 Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-78). 3 Remove the Left and Right Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-66 and figure 6-67). Figure 6-69 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray 4 Remove the 2 screws and metal retaining tabs from the sides of the unit’s chassis: 1 screw and retaining tab on each side of the chassis (figure 6-69, callout 1). 5 Slide the paper tray straight out of the chassis while carefully supporting the rear of the paper tray.

To Reinstall:

1 Make sure that the retaining tabs are tightly secured to the unit’s chassis (figure 6-69, callout 1). 2 After replacing the tray, print a test page. If the print is too close to the paper’s edge, adjust the tray. C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 293,

Main Cable Harness

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65). 2 Locate and disconnect the 6 cable connectors that connect the Main Cable Harness to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray (figure 6-70, callout 1). 3 Locate and disconnect the 5 cable connectors that connect the Main Cable Harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 2). 4 Release the cable harness from the 4 cable clips that hold the harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 3).

To Reinstall:

1 Properly replace all 11 cable harness connectors (callouts 1 and 2). 2 Reattach the harness to the 4 cable clips that hold the harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 3). 294 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-70 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Cable Harness C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 295,

Controller PCA

1 Remove the Back and Left Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65 and figure 6-66). Figure 6-71 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA 2 Disconnect the 11 cables from the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray (figure 6-71, callout 1). 3 Remove the 4 hex screws that secure the 2 C-link cable connectors to the metal base (callout 2). 4 Remove the 2 screws that secure the right side of the Controller PCA to the metal base (callout 3). 5 Release the 2 plastic retaining posts that secure the left side of the Controller PCA to the metal base (callout 4), and then pull the Controller PCA out from the unit’s chassis. 296 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

1 Seat the Controller PCA firmly onto the plastic retaining posts that secure the left side of the Controller PCA to the metal plate on the chassis (callout 4). 2 Properly reconnect all 11 cables to the Controller PCA (callout 1). 3 Make sure that the DIP switches on the Controller PCA are in the normal setting (off) (callout 5). (See table 7-34 on page 619.) C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 297,

Front LED PCA Assembly

1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray halfway to the stops. 2 On the upper-left corner of the front of the unit’s chassis, locate and remove the 1 screw that secures the LED PCA Assembly to the chassis (figure 6-72, callout 1). 3 Reach behind the LED PCA Assembly and pull it away from the chassis. 4 To remove the LED PCA from the cable connector, release the 3 plastic retaining tabs that secure the LED PCA to the connector (figure 6-72, callout 2). 5 Pull the LED PCA from the connector.

To Reinstall:

1 Reconnect the LED PCA to the connector (callout 2). 298 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-72 2000-sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 299,

Pickup Assembly

1 Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-78). 2 Remove the Right Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-67). 3 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops. Figure 6-73 2000-sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly 4 Disconnect the 3 cables that are located at the bottom-right side of the Pickup Assembly (figure 6-73, callout 1). 5 Remove the 5 screws that secure the Pickup Assembly to the unit’s chassis: 3 screws along the top, and 1 screw on each side (callout 2). 6 Slide the Pickup Assembly straight out of the chassis. 300 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

1 Make sure that the paper tray is open to easily slide the Pickup Assembly into the chassis. 2 Make sure that the Pickup Assembly is seated properly in the locating slots (callout 3). 3 Reconnect the 3 cables that are located at the bottom-right side of the Pickup Assembly (callout 1). C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 301,

Power Supply

1 Remove the Back and Left Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65 and figure 6-66). Figure 6-74 2000-sheet Input Tray Power Supply 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Power Supply (Figure 6-74, callout 1). Disconnect the cable from the Power Supply by pushing on the retaining tab that is located behind the cable connector (callout 2). 3 Remove the 2 screws that secure the Power Supply to the chassis (callout 3). 4 Lift the Power Supply upward to clear the locating tabs underneath, and then slide the Power Supply to the left to free it from the chassis (callout 4). 302 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

1 Carefully align the locating tabs so that they are positioned correctly. 2 Reconnect the cable that runs from the Power Supply to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray (callout 1). The cable connector is seated properly when it clicks. C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 303,

Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers

Three rollers in the 2000-sheet Input Tray pick up paper and feed it to the printer: ● The Pickup Roller is the upper-forward roller (Figure 6-75, callout 1). ● The Feed Roller is the upper-rear roller (callout 2). ● The Separation Roller is the lower roller (callout 3). Note The Feed and Separation Rollers in the 2000-sheet Input Tray are interchangeable with each other and with the Feed and Separation Rollers in trays 2 and 3 on the printer. Additionally, the Pickup Roller in the 2000-sheet Input Tray is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in trays 2 and 3 on the printer. The Feed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs that secure the rollers to their respective shafts. The retaining tab on the Pickup Roller is recessed. The Feed and Separation Rollers must be replaced every 350,000 images. The two rollers are included in the printer maintenance kit C3914A (110V), C3915A (220V). The kit contains all the necessary parts for the required user maintenance procedure. Figure 6-75 2000-sheet Input Tray Rollers: Pickup, Feed, and Separation 304 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Remove the Feed and Separation Rollers

1 Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 2 Locate the rollers inside the tray cavity. To remove a roller, pinch the retainer tabs together and slide the roller off the shaft. Remove the Feed Roller (upper-rear roller) first. Then remove the Separation Roller (lower roller).

To Remove the Pickup Roller

1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops. 2 Remove the Left Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-66 on page 289). 3 Locate the Pickup Roller inside the tray cavity. 4 Pinch the recessed retainer tab on the roller, and slide the roller off the shaft. Note Reassembly notes are on the next page.

To Reinstall:

1 If all three rollers were removed, reinstall the Pickup Roller first (callout 1). 2 When reinstalling the Feed and Separation Rollers, install the Separation Roller (lower roller) first (callout 3). Then install the Feed Roller (upper-rear roller) (callout 2). 3 When installing a roller, listen for a click. It signals that the roller is secured onto the shaft. C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 305,

Paper Quantity Switch Assembly

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65 on page 288). 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Paper Quantity Switch Assembly on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA. Disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (J205 connector), and then free the cable from the cable clips that secure it to the chassis (Figure 6-76, callout 1). 3 Remove the 1 screw (callout 2) and the metal retaining spring (callout 3) that hold the switch assembly in place. 4 Pull the switch assembly out of its cavity (Figure 6-77, callout 1).

To Reinstall:

1 When reinstalling the metal retaining spring that holds the switch assembly in place (Figure 6-76, callout 2), seat the retaining spring onto the locating pins that are on the chassis. 2 Reconnect the switch assembly’s cable to the J205 connector on the Controller PCA (Figure 6-76, callout 1).

Paper Size Switch Assembly

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see Figure 6-65). 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Paper Size Switch Assembly on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA. Disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (J204 connector) (Figure 6-76, callout 4). 3 Remove the 1 screw (callout 5) and the metal retaining spring (callout 6) that hold the switch assembly in place. 4 Pull the switch assembly out of its cavity (Figure 6-77, callout 2).

To Reinstall:

1 When reinstalling the metal retaining spring that holds the switch assembly in place (Figure 6-76, callout 5), seat the retaining spring onto the locating pins on the chassis. 2 Reconnect the switch assembly’s cable to the J204 connector on the Controller PCA (Figure 6-76, callout 4). 306 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-76 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch Figure 6-77 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch Assemblies (2 of 2) C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 307,

Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)

Figure 6-78 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) 1 Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 2 Rotate the 2 plastic cams on the VTU hinges toward the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the secure position (Figure 6-78, callout 1). WARNING! Do not release the plastic cams from the secure position while the VTU is off. The springs on the cams are very strong and may cause injury. 3 Locate the 2 cables that run from the VTU to the chassis at the right side’s upper-back corner (Figure 6-78, callout 2) and disconnect the 2 cables from the chassis. 4 Remove the 2 screws that secure the VTU to the chassis: 1 screw near each end of the VTU (Figure 6-78, callout 3). 5 Lift the VTU straight up to clear the metal locating tabs on the chassis. Note Reassembly notes are on the next page. 308 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

WARNING! Release the plastic cams only after tightening the screws that secure the VTU to the chassis. 1 Before tightening the screws, make sure that the metal locating tabs are in place. 2 Reconnect the cables that run from the VTU to the chassis at the right side’s upper-back corner (callout 2). C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 309,

Tension Springs

1 Remove the Left Cover of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-66 on page 289). Figure 6-79 2000-sheet Input Tray Tension Springs 2 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray all the way to the stops. 3 Inside the tray cavity, locate and remove the 2 springs on the tray runners: 1 spring on left runner (left side of the chassis) and 1 spring on the right runner (right side of the chassis) as shown in Figure 6-79. 310 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Locating Pins

1 Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 6-80 2000-sheet Input Tray Locating Pins 2 Locate the 3 Locating Pins on the top of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Figure 6-80, callout 1), and remove the 2 screws on each Locating Pin. 3 To remove the Locating Pins lift them straight up. C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 311,

Casters and Stabilizing Feet

1 Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 6-81 2000-sheet Input Tray Casters 2 Tip the 2000-sheet Input Tray onto its left side. 3 Locate the 4 Casters, 1 on each corner of the chassis (Figure 6-81, callout 1). 4 Remove a Caster by removing the 2 screws that hold the Caster to the chassis (callout 2). Note To remove the stabilizing feet press as shown in callout 3, and release the stabilizing feet.

To Reinstall:

1 Tighten the screws securely when reinstalling each caster (callout 2). 312 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Adjustable Foot

1 Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 6-82 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustable Foot 2 Tip the 2000-sheet Input Tray onto its left side. 3 Locate the Adjustable Foot (Figure 6-82, callout 1), and remove the 2 screws that secure the Adjustable Foot to the chassis (callout 2). C4229-90911 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 313, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal and

Replacement

Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray - - - - - - - - 315 Back Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 316 Left Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 317 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 318 Right Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 321 Front Top Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 324 Trays 4 and 5- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 327 Pickup Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 329 Paper Deck Drive Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 331 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - - - - - 333 Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 334 Tray-Size Sensing PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 335 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 337 Main Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 338 Storage Paper Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 340 Front Door (Storage Area) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 341 Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 342 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet) - - - - 343 Locating Pins- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 344 Front LED PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 345 314 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray

Figure 6-83 Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray To remove the2x500-sheet Input Tray from the printer, see page 207. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 315,

Back Cover

Figure 6-84 Back Cover 1 Remove 4 screws (callout 1). 2 Release and pull out the Back Cover. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 316 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Left Cover

Figure 6-85 Left Cover 1 Unplug the power cord and C-link interface cables, and remove the Back Cover (page 316). 2 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). 3 Release the tab next to the power supply (callout 2). 4 Tip the cover outward to release the screw holders (callout 3). 5 Lift the cover up to clear the bottom tabs (callout 4). Note Align the screw holes with their holders when you replace the cover. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 317,

Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)

Figure 6-86 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (1 of 3) 1 Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the2x500-sheet Input Tray. 2 Unplug the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis (callout 1). WARNING! Do not release the plastic cams from the secure position while the VTU is off. The springs on the cams are very strong and may cause injury. 3 Slide the 2 plastic cams on the VTU hinges to the secure position (callout 2). 318 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-87 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (2 of 3) 4 Remove the 2 screws that secure the VTU to the chassis: 1 screw near each end of the VTU (callout 1). 5 Lift the VTU straight up to clear the metal tabs on the chassis. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 319,

To reinstall:

Figure 6-88 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (3 of 3) WARNING! To avoid injury, tighten the screws that secure the VTU to the chassis before you release the plastic cams. 1 Insert the metal tabs into the slots of the chassis (callout 1). 2 Tighten the screws (callout 2). 3 Release the cams (callout 3). 4 Plug in the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis (callout 4). 320 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Right Cover

Figure 6-89 Right Cover (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 316) and the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (page 318). 2 Remove 3 screws (callout 1). C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 321, Figure 6-90 Right Cover (2 of 3) 3 Release the left side of the Right Cover from the tabs, and remove it (callout 1). 322 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-91 Right Cover (3 of 3) 4 Release the tab from the right side of the Right Cover as shown in figure 6-91 (callout 1). 5 Lift the Right Cover up to clear the tabs at the bottom. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 323,

Front Top Cover

Figure 6-92 Front Top Cover (1 of 3) 1 Remove the printer from the2x500-sheet Input Tray. 2 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). 3 Remove Top Cover. The Top Cover has a label. 324 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-93 Front Top Cover (2 of 3) 4 From inside of the unit release the central tabs, as shown in figure 6-93. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 325, Figure 6-94 Front Top Cover (3 of 3) 5 Push the front top cover to the left to release the remaining tabs. Note Align the pins when you replace the Top Front Cover. 326 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Trays 4 and 5

Figure 6-95 Trays 4 and 5 (1 of 2) 1 Open the tray and pull it out to the stop (callout 1). 2 As you pull out the tray, tip up the end as shown in callout 2 to release the stop mechanism at the right rear of the tray. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 327, Figure 6-96 Trays 4 and 5 (2 of 2)

To Reinstall:

1 Tip the end of the tray downward. Align the guides with the left rear corner of the tray and the arrow at the lower rear center of the tray (callout 1). 2 Insert the tray no more than 2 inches (5 centimeters) into the chassis. 3 Tip the end of the tray up to engage the tray stop mechanism (located at the right rear of the tray opening). 4 Slide the tray until it latches into place. 328 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Pickup Assembly

Figure 6-97 Pickup Assembly (1 of 2) 1 Remove trays 4 and 5 (page 327), the Right Cover (page 321), and the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) page 318. 2 Remove 6 screws (callout 1). 3 Remove the cable from the bracket (callout 2). C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 329, Figure 6-98 Pickup Assembly (2 of 2) 4 Carefully slide the Pickup Assembly straight out, supporting it until you can reach the connector (callout 1). 5 Unplug the connector (callout 2). 330 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Paper Deck Drive Assembly

Figure 6-99 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 316), Trays 4 and 5 (page 327), and the Pickup Assembly (page 329). 2 Remove 3 screws (callout 1). 3 Unplug the connector (callout 2). C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 331, Figure 6-100 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (2 of 2) 4 Reach into the right side of the input device. Pull the paper deck drive assembly to the left, and then pull it straight out (callout 1). 332 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers

There are three rollers in this assembly. The upper forward roller is the Pickup Roller, the upper rear roller is the Feed Roller, and the lower roller is the Separation Roller. The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between the trays. The Pickup Roller is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in Trays 2 and 3. ● Pickup Roller: figure 6-101, callout 1 ● Feed Roller: figure 6-101, callout 2 ● Separation Roller: figure 6-101, callout 3 Figure 6-101 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers 1 Remove the paper tray. Note The Feed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs, and the Pickup Roller has recessed retaining tabs. 2 From inside the tray cavity, remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 333,

Controller PCA

Figure 6-1022x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 316) and the Left Cover (page 317). 2 Unplug all 7 connectors. 3 Remove 4 hex screws from the C-link connectors (callout 1). 4 Remove the 2 screws that hold the PCA to the metal base (callout 2). 5 Release the tabs at the left side (callout 3), and remove the PCA. 334 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Tray-Size Sensing PCA

Figure 6-103 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 316) and the Controller PCA (page 334). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1) from the size-sensing PCA’s holder. 3 To remove the size-sensing PCA’s holder, use a flat blade screwdriver to release the top and bottom tabs (callout 2) from the slots in the metal. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 335, Figure 6-104 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (2 of 2) 4 To remove the size-sensing PCA, unplug the cable from the PCA, remove 3 screws from each PCB, and remove the PCA (callout 1). 336 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Power Supply

Figure 6-105 Power Supply 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 316) and the Left Cover (page 317). 2 Unplug the connector (callout 1) from the power supply. (Notice that the release tab is at the rear of the connector.) 3 Remove 2 screws (callout 2). 4 Lift the power supply off the locating pins, and slide it to the left to free it from the chassis.

To Reinstall:

1 Align the power supply with the locating tabs. 2 Plug in the power supply connector. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 337,

Main Cable

Figure 6-106 Main Cable (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 316), the Left Cover (page 317), and Trays 4 and 5 (page 327). 2 Unplug both size-sensing connectors inside the2x500-sheet Input Tray cavity (callout 1). 338 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-107 Main Cable (2 of 2) 3 Unplug 4 connectors from the controller PCA (callout 1), 3 from the Vertical Transfer Unit (callout 2), 1 from the Paper Deck Assembly (callout 3), and 2 from the size-sensing PCAs (callout 4). 4 Remove the main cable from the plastic clips. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 339,

Storage Paper Tray

Figure 6-108 Storage Paper Tray 1 Remove Trays 4 and 5 (page 327). 2 Open the storage tray door. 3 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs inside the holes indicated in figure 6-108 (callout 1). Note Be sure to align the door’s latch when you replace the Storage Paper Tray. 340 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Front Door (Storage Area)

Figure 6-109 Front Door (Storage Area) 1 Remove the storage tray (page 340). 2 Release the tabs on both ends (callout 1). 3 Release the storage tray's door from the center tab (callout 2). C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 341,

Casters

Figure 6-110 Casters 1 Remove the printer from the input device (page 207). 2 Place the2x500-sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the casters (callout 1). 3 Remove 2 screws from each caster and release the casters from the frame. Note Be sure to tighten the screws securely when you re-install the new caster. 342 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet)

Figure 6-111 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip 1 Remove the printer from the input device (page 207). 2 Place the2x500-sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the Adjustable Foot Tip (callout 2). 3 Press at the location of callout 1 and slide the foot out to remove it. 4 Remove 2 screws that hold the stationary Foot Tip to the frame (callout 3). Remove the stationary Foot Tip. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 343,

Locating Pins

Figure 6-112 Locating Pins 1 Remove the printer from the input device (page 207). 2 Remove 2 screws each from the 3 locating pins (callout 1). 344 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Front LED PCA

Figure 6-113 Front LED PCA 1 Remove the printer from the input device. 2 Remove the Front Top Cover. See table 6-92 on page 324. 3 Remove 1 screw (callout 1). 4 Release the tabs and remove the LED PCA (callout 2). 5 Unplug the cable from the PCA (callout 3). Note Guide the cable into the correct position when you replace it. C4229-909112x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 345, 346 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and

Replacement

Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox - - - - - - - - - 348 Front Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 349 Back Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 352 Top Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 354 Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 358 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 359 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) - - - - - - - - - 360 Face-down Bins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 364 Empty Bin Sensor PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 367 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - 369 LED PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 371 Face-up Sensors PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 372 Reversing Mechanism Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 373 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) - - - - - - - - - - - 375 Short Tray 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 378 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 379 Flipper Solenoid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 Handle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 381 Latching Mechanism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 382 Cover Latch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 383 C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 347,

Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox

Figure 6-114 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Note Before you begin any removal or replacement procedure, turn off all equipment and unplug the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox power supply cable. To remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox from the printer, see page 209. 348 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Front Cover

Figure 6-115 Front cover (1 of 3) 1 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 349, Figure 6-116 Front cover (2 of 3) 2 Loosen the right side of the Front Cover and pull it toward you approximately 0.5 inch (1.5 centimeters) to clear the tabs (callout 1). 3 Release and clear the tabs on the left side of the Front Cover (callout 2). 350 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-117 Front cover (3 of 3) CAUTION Be careful not to damage the handle as you remove or replace the cover. The handle can easily catch on the cover. 4 To clear the handle, rotate the Front Cover to the right, and remove it as shown in figure 6-117.

To replace

Note the Caution above. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 351,

Back Cover

Figure 6-118 Back cover (1 of 2) 1 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). 352 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-119 Back cover (2 of 2) 2 Pull the Back Cover toward you to remove it. Release corner indicated by callout 1 first. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 353,

Top Cover

Figure 6-120 Top cover (1 of 4) 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 349) and the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Open the Top Cover, and remove the Top Cover's screw and bushing (callout 1). 3 Remove the grounding screw (callout 2). 354 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-121 Top cover (2 of 4) 4 Remove the screw from the Face-up Bin-Full PCA (callout 1). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 355, Figure 6-122 Top cover (3 of 4) 5 To take out the flag, push down the plastic shaft carefully, as shown in callout 1. 356 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-123 Top cover (4 of 4) 6 To remove the Top Cover lift the right side first as shown. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 357,

Controller PCA

Figure 6-124 Mailbox Controller PCA 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Unplug 8 connectors from the Controller PCA (callout 1). 3 To unplug connector J202, pry it open with a flat blade screwdriver (callout 2). 4 Remove 1 screw from the Controller PCA below Connector J3 (callout 3). 5 Remove the PCA from its 2 plastic pins (callout 4). 6 Remove 1 screw from the plate (callout 5). 7 Remove 4 hex screws from the connectors on the metal plate (callout 6). 8 Remove the PCA controller. Note When you replace the Controller PCA, be sure to replace connector J202 (callout 1 in Figure 6-125). 358 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Power Supply

Figure 6-125 Mailbox Power Supply 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Release connector J202 with a flat blade screwdriver and unplug it (callout 1). 3 At the bottom of the power supply, unplug J201 (callout 2). 4 Remove 2 screws (callout 4). 5 Pull the power supply from its 3 plastic pins (callout 3). Note Be sure to replace connector J202 (callout 1) and the Power Supply Connector (callout 2). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 359,

Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover)

Figure 6-126 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (1 of 5) 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 349) and the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Remove 1 screw from the front side and the bushing below the handle (callout 1). 360 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-127 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (2 of 5) 1 Grasp the green handle and pull up slightly, then out, to open the Paper Path Cover. Figure 6-128 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5) C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 361, Figure 6-129 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5) 2 Remove the screw of the holding arm (callout 1) and release the arm from the Right Door Assembly. 362 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-130 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (4 of 5) 3 Release the plastic pin on the right end, and remove the paper path cover as shown in figure 6-130 (callout 1). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 363,

Face-down Bins

Figure 6-131 Face-down Bins (1 of 3) Note Bins 1, 3, and 5 each have one rear roller. Bins 2, 4, and 6 each have 2 rear rollers. The procedure for removing and replacing each of the bins is the same. 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 349) and the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Open the right door assembly (paper path cover) (callout 1) Or Remove the right door assembly to remove bin 5 or 6. 3 Remove 3 screws at the right side of the unit from the bin that needs to be replaced (callout 2). 364 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-132 Face-down Bins (2 of 3) 4 From the back side of the device, push the bin as it is shown in callout 1. 5 Grasp the bin from the right side, and pull it straight out. Note the position of the tab (callout 2). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 365, Figure 6-133 Face-down Bins (3 of 3) To Reinstall: 1 Guide the empty bin sensor in the slot at the back side (figure 6-132, callout 1). 2 Make sure that the tabs are in place as shown in figure 6-133 callout 1. 3 Make sure that the holes for the 3 screws align with the holes of the tray. 4 Replace 3 screws (figure 6-131, callout 2). 366 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Empty Bin Sensor PCA

Figure 6-134 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Unplug J305 (the topmost connector) from the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (callout 1). 3 Remove 2 screws and the metal plates that hold the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (callout 2). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 367, Figure 6-135 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (2 of 2) 4 Lift up the Empty Bin Sensor PCA to free it from the sensor flags, and pull it out as shown. 368 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA

Figure 6-136 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 352) and the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (page 367). 2 Unplug 4 connectors (J301, J302, J303, and J304). See callout 1. 3 Remove 4 screws from the Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA and one screw from the harness (callout 2). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 369, Figure 6-137 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (2 of 2) 4 Rotate the PCA toward the right, and then pull it out as shown. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 370 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

LED PCA

Figure 6-138 LED PCA 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 349). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1). 3 Unplug J307 from the LED PCA, and remove the LED PCA (callout 2). Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 371,

Face-up Sensors PCA

Figure 6-139 Face-up Sensors PCA 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 349). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1). 3 Unplug J306 from the Empty Bin Sensor PCA, and remove the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (callout 2). 372 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Reversing Mechanism Motor

Figure 6-140 Reversing Mechanism Motor (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Remove 1 screw from the metal plate (callout 1). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 373, Figure 6-141 Reversing Mechanism Motor (2 of 2) 3 Unplug the motor's connector (callout 1). 4 Remove 2 screws (callout 2) and the motor. CAUTION Do not damage the belt as you remove the motor. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 374 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper)

Figure 6-142 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 349) and the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Open the Top Cover as shown. 3 Remove the grounding screw (callout 1) at the top back side (figure 6-142). C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 375, Figure 6-143 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (2 of 3) 4 Using pliers, release the springs at each end of the assembly (second figure on this page, callout 1). 376 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-144 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (3 of 3) 5 Rotate the assembly upward, and then release side 1 (callout 1) first and side 2 (callout 2) second. Remove the assembly as shown. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 377,

Short Tray 7

Figure 6-145 Short Tray71Place the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox on its side as shown. 2 Remove 2 screws from the bottom (callout 1). 3 Remove the tray. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 378 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Solenoid Reversing Mechanism

Figure 6-146 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 352). 2 Unplug the cable from inside the bracket (callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw and the solenoid (callout 2). Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 379,

Flipper Solenoid

Figure 6-147 Flipper Solenoid 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 349). 2 Unplug the cable (callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw and the solenoid (callout 2). 4 Release the solenoid along with the plastic actuator. 380 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Handle

Figure 6-148 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle 1 Release the left end of the spring (callout 1). 2 Release the 2 tabs (callout 2), and re the handle out.

To Reinstall:

Be sure the tabs of the handle are properly in place. Push the handle into place until it clicks. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 381,

Latching Mechanism

Figure 6-149 Latching Mechanism 1 Remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle (page 381). 2 Remove the E-clip in figure 6-149 (callout 1). 3 Move the bushing by sliding it over the shaft, to put it closer to the latching system (callout 2). 4 Slide the Latching Mechanism to the front of the device, and remove it.

To Reinstall:

Note Guide the pin through the hole. First slide the shaft into the hole located at the front bottom of the device. The tab on the bushing should be on the top during reinstallation. 382 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Cover Latch

Figure 6-150 Cover Latch 1 Remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle (figure 6-148). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1), and remove the Cover Latch. C4229-90911 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 383, 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement WARNING! For the procedures in this section, the printer and all paper-handling devices must be unplugged. Before attempting to service an 8-bin Mailbox, unplug the power cord from the power source; otherwise, severe injury may result. This printer and paper-handling devices may have sharp edges that could cause injury. Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 385 Front and Back Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 386 Top Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 387 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 388 Paper Bins and Blind Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 389 Flipper Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 390 Delivery Head Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 393 Transport Belt Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 394 Input Paper Guide - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 396 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - 398 Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 400 Anticurl Strings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 402 Delivery Head Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 404 Interlock Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 409 Diagnostic LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 410 User Status LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 412 Adjustable and Fixed Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 414 Attachment Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 415 384 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Orientation

Figure 6-151 shows the orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox as it is referred to in this section. Top Back Right Left Front Bottom Figure 6-151 Orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 385,

Front and Back Covers

Note The procedures for removing the Front and Back Covers are the same. However, before removing the Back Cover, disconnect the Power Supply cable that connects the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply to the 8- bin Mailbox Controller PCA. WARNING! Unplug the power cord from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply, and then unplug the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply cable from the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA. 1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer (page 207). Figure 6-152 8-bin Mailbox Covers (Front and Back) 2 For each cover, using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the 3 retaining tabs that secure the cover to the right side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 1), and rotate the cover outward to release it from the frame.

To Reinstall:

1 Insert the retaining tabs that secure each cover to the left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, and then snap the opposite edge of each cover into position. 386 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Top Cover

1 Remove the Front and Back Covers from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). Figure 6-153 8-bin Mailbox Top Cover 2 Remove the 2 screws closest to the upper-right side of the 8-bin Mailbox: 1 screw on the front, next to the user LED, and the other at the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). 3 Slide the Top Cover to the left side of the device, and lift it up.See table 6-151 on page 385. C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 387,

Power Supply

Figure 6-154 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply 1 Locate the cable that runs from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-154, callout 1). 2 Remove the Power Supply from the Back Cover of the 8-bin Mailbox by pressing the plastic retaining tabs that are on each side of the Power Supply (callout 2).

To Reinstall:

1 Align the Power Supply with the mounting holes that are on the Back Cover so that the retaining tabs on the Power Supply (callout 2) fit into their respective slots. 2 Reconnect the Power Supply Cable to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 1). 388 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Paper Bins and Blind Cover

The procedure for removing a paper bin and the Blind Cover is the same. Each bin rests in its labeled slot. Figure 6-155 8-bin Mailbox Paper Bins and Blind Cover 1 Remove the Face-up Bin first. Lift up on the outer edge of the bin to clear the retaining notch in the frame, and then pull the bin away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 1). 2 Remove the Blind Cover. 3 Remove each Face-down Bin, starting at the top and working down in sequence.

To Reinstall:

1 Slide a bin into its designated slot, and then lower the bin into the retaining notch in the frame. 2 Replace the paper bins, beginning with the bottom Face-down Bin and continuing upward in order. 3 Place the Blind Cover between Face-down Bin 1 and the Face-up Bin. C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 389,

Flipper Assembly

1 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). 2 Remove the Front, Back, and Top Covers from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152 and Figure 6-153). Figure 6-156 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (1 of 3) 3 Remove the 2 screws closest to the upper-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox: 1 screw on the front and back sides of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-156, callout 1). 390 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-157 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (2 of 3) 4 Hold down the Jam Access Door while unplugging the ground wire that runs from the Input Paper Guide to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-157, callout 2). 5 Unplug the Flipper Assembly’s 3 cables from the connectors that are located on the 8-bin Mailbox unit’s back side (Figure 6-156, callout 3). 6 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab that secures the Flipper Assembly to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-158, callout 4). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 391, Figure 6-158 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (3 of 3) 7 Hold down the Jam Access Door, and pull out the Flipper Assembly (Figure 6-158, callout 5).

To Reinstall:

1 Hold down the Jam Access Door to reconnect the ground wire to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-157, callout 2). 2 Route the Flipper Assembly’s 3 cables through the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame and reconnect the 3 cables to the connectors (Figure 6-156, callout 3). CAUTION Do not over-tighten the screws that secure the Flipper Assembly to the 8-bin Mailbox frame. The nuts in the Flipper Assembly could rotate in their slots. 392 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Delivery Head Motor

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). Figure 6-159 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Motor 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Delivery Head Motor down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the connector in the middle of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-159, callout 1). 3 Remove the 2 screws that secure the Delivery Head Motor to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 2). 4 Pull the Delivery Head Motor away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame.

To Reinstall:

1 Position the motor in the 8-bin Mailbox frame so that the cable grommets face down. 2 Reconnect the motor’s cable to the connector in the middle of the frame (callout 1). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 393,

Transport Belt Motor

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 2 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). 3 Release the Controller PCA Assembly from the bottom of the 8- bin Mailbox frame (see figure 6-165 on page 400, steps 1 through 7). Figure 6-160 8-bin Mailbox Transport Belt Motor 4 Locate the cable that runs from the Transport Belt Motor to the 8- bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the J8 connector on the Controller PCA (Figure 6-160, callout 1). 5 Remove the 2 screws (and washers) that secure the Transport Belt Motor to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-160, callout 2). CAUTION When pulling out the motor, be careful to not damage the internal drive belt. 6 Gently pull out the motor. 394 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To Reinstall:

1 Reroute the cable on the Transport Belt Motor behind the flat cable, and connect it to the J8 connector on the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 1). 2 Reinstall the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly (see Figure 6-165). 3 Replace the internal drive belt onto the Transport Belt Motor’s gear before replacing and tightening the screws that secure the motor to the frame. C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 395,

Input Paper Guide

1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer. 2 Remove the Face-up Bin and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). Figure 6-161 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (1 of 2) 396 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-162 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (2 of 2) 3 Hold down the Jam Access Door while unplugging the ground wire that runs from the Input Paper Guide to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-161, callout 1). 4 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the retaining tabs that secure the Input Paper Guide to the upper-right side of the 8-bin Mailbox (Figure 6-162, callout 2). 5 Pull the Input Paper Guide free of the frame (callout 3) while routing the ground wire that connects to the end of the paper guide through the wire’s access hole (callout 4).

To Reinstall:

1 Reroute the ground wire through its access hole (Figure 6-162, callout 4). 2 Reconnect the ground wire to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-161, callout 1). 3 Replace the Face-up Bin and the Blind Cover (see Figure 6-155). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 397,

Metal Tape and Housing Assembly

1 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). Figure 6-163 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (1 of 2) WARNING! The Metal Tape’s sharp edges can cause serious injury. When rewinding the Metal Tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and rewind it slowly. 2 With the Delivery Head Assembly at the top of the 8-bin Mailbox, hold the Metal Tape near the end, and push and release the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-163, callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing. 3 Remove the 1 screw that secures the Static Brush to the Delivery Head Assembly (callout 2), and then move the Static Brush out of the way. 4 Lower the Delivery Head Assembly halfway to the stops. 398 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-164 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (2 of 2) 5 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tabs located on each side of the tape housing (Figure 6-164, callout 3). 6 Gently pull on the Delivery Head Assembly to remove the end of the tape from behind the rollers that hold the tape in its track (callout 4). Then pull the tape housing toward you to remove it.

To Reinstall:

1 Thread the end of the Metal Tape behind the rollers (callout 4), and then pull the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox and reinsert it into place (Figure 6-163, callout 1). 2 Use the guide pins to reinstall the tape housing (Figure 6-164, callout 3). When the housing is correctly positioned, it will click into place. 3 Reinstall the static brush (Figure 6-163, callout 1). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 399,

Controller PCA

1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer. Figure 6-165 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (1 of 2) 2 Locate the power cable that runs from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-165, callout 1). 3 Disconnect the C-link cable from the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 2). 4 Remove all paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). 5 Carefully lay the 8-bin Mailbox onto its front side. 6 Loosen the 1 grounding screw and the 2 self-tapping screws that secure the Controller PCA to the bottom-right side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). 7 Remove the 2 self-tapping screws that secure the Controller PCA to the bottom-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 4). One of the screws is connected to a grounding cable. 8 Open the metal box to reveal the Controller PCA. 400 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-166 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (2 of 2) 9 Disconnect the 8 cables from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-166, callout 5).

To Reinstall:

1 Reconnect the 8 cables to the connectors on the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 5). 2 Be sure to reinstall the grounding cable beneath its corresponding screw. C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 401,

Anticurl Strings

1 Remove the Back Cover, all the paper bins, and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152 and Figure 6-155). Figure 6-167 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (1 of 2) 2 At the lower-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, locate the Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings, and remove the 2 screws that secure the springs to the frame (Figure 6-167, callout 1). 3 Remove the Anticurl Strings from the lower pulleys (callout 2). 4 Remove the Delivery Head Assembly from the 8-bin Mailbox frame (see Figure 6-169). 402 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-168 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (2 of 2) 5 Release the upper ends of the Anticurl Strings from the Jam Access Door by pushing the retaining tabs that secure the strings to the Jam Access Door (Figure 6-168, callout 3).

To Reinstall:

1 Reverse the procedure given above. C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 403,

Delivery Head Assembly

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 2 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). Figure 6-169 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (1 of 4) WARNING! The Metal Tape’s sharp edges can cause serious injury. When rewinding the Metal Tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and rewind it slowly. 3 With the Delivery Head Assembly at the top of the 8-bin Mailbox, hold the Metal Tape near the end, and release the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-169, callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing. 404 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-170 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (2 of 4) 4 At the lower-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, locate the Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings, and remove the 2 screws that secure the springs to the frame (Figure 6-170, callout 2). 5 Remove the Anticurl Strings from the lower pulleys (callout 3). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 405, Figure 6-171 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (3 of 4) 6 On the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox, release the flat ribbon cable from the cable clip that secures the cable to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-171, callout 4), and gently disconnect the flat ribbon cable from the Delivery Head Assembly (callout 5). 7 Raise the Delivery Head Assembly to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame. 8 Hold up the Delivery Head Assembly, and remove the 2 screws that secure it to the elevator mounts: 1 screw on each end of the assembly (Figure 6-169, callout 6). The screw that secures the back end is captive. 406 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-172 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (4 of 4) 9 Rotate the Delivery Head Assembly clockwise while guiding the back end out of its access opening (see page 6-172). 10 Release the Anticurl Strings from the pulleys on each end of the Delivery Head Assembly (Figure 6-172, callout 7). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 407,

To Reinstall:

1 Replace the Anticurl Strings into the pulleys on the ends of the Delivery Head Assembly. 2 Reinstall the Delivery Head Assembly onto its elevator mounts and secure it with the screws. Make sure that the locating pins are in place. 3 Replace the Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings at the bottom of the frame with the T-10 Torx screws (Figure 6-170, callout 2). 4 Snap the Anticurl Strings into the pulleys at the bottom of the frame (Figure 6-170, callout 3). 5 Reconnect the flat ribbon cable to the Delivery Head Assembly, and secure the cable to the frame with the cable clip (Figure 6-171, callouts 4 and 5). 6 Make sure that the Delivery Head Assembly moves up and down freely. 408 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Interlock Switch

1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). Figure 6-173 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch CAUTION Before removing the wires from the 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch, note the location of each wire. Replacing the wires incorrectly can damage the Interlock Switch. 2 Inside the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, disconnect the 2 wires from the Interlock Switch (Figure 6-173, callout 1). 3 Remove the Interlock Switch by pressing together the 2 retaining tabs that hold the switch in place (callout 2).

To Reinstall:

1 Reconnect the wires in the correct positions (callout 1). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 409,

Diagnostic LED PCA

Figure 6-174 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (1 of 2) 1 Locate the Diagnostic LED that is on the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox (Figure 6-174, callout 1). 2 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 410 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-175 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (2 of 2) 3 Disconnect the 2 flat cables from the Diagnostic LED PCA (Figure 6-175, callout 2). 4 Remove the 1 screw that secures the Diagnostic LED PCA to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). 5 Pull the Diagnostic LED PCA away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame. C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 411,

User Status LED PCA

Figure 6-176 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (1 of 2) 1 Locate the User Status LED PCA that is on the upper-front side of the 8-bin Mailbox (Figure 6-176, callout 1). 2 Remove the Front Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 412 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-177 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (2 of 2) 3 Disconnect the cable from the User Status LED PCA (Figure 6-177, callout 2). 4 Pull the LED PCA away from its frame. 5 Remove the 1 screw that secures the LED PCA frame to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 413,

Adjustable and Fixed Casters

Note The procedures for removing the Adjustable and Fixed Casters are the same. 1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer. 2 Carefully lay the 8-bin Mailbox onto its front side. Figure 6-178 8-bin Mailbox Adjustable and Fixed Casters 3 Remove the 1 screw that secures the caster to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-178, callout 1). 4 Remove the Caster. 414 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Attachment Assembly

1 Disconnect the power cable and the C-link cable from the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (see Figure 6-165, callouts 1 and 2). 2 Release the Controller PCA from the 8-bin Mailbox frame, but leave the wire cables connected to the Controller PCA (see Figure 6-166). Figure 6-179 8-bin Mailbox Attachment Assembly 3 Set the Controller PCA on top of the 8-bin Mailbox unit (Figure 6-179, callout 1). 4 Remove the E-clip (callout 2). 5 Release the pivot pin that holds the Attachment Assembly’s rod to the 8-bin Mailbox frame. 6 Remove the attachment assembly.

To Reinstall:

1 Replace the E-clip. 2 Reconnect the C-link cable and the power cable to the Controller PCA. C4229-90911 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 415,

Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement

Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation - - - 417 Back Plate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 419 Stapler Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 421 Top Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 424 Stapler Bed Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 425 Hinges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 427 416 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation

Figure 6-180 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation The Stapler Assembly is mounted in the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, replacing the three Face-down bins and the blind cover. 1 Turn off the printer. 2 Make sure the Delivery Head Assembly is not in the stapler area. It should be in the bottom portion of the mailbox. You can move the Delivery Head Assembly downward gently with your hand. C4229-90911 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 417, 3 Disconnect the C-link cable connecting the mailbox to the stapler. See figure 6-181. Figure 6-181 C-link Cable on Mailbox with Stapler 4 Remove the Face-up Bin (figure 1-2 on page 5). Lift the bin gently to remove it. 5 Lift up on the outer edge of the stapler to clear the retaining notches, and pull the stapler forward out of the frame (figure 6-180).

To Reinstall:

1 Slide the stapler into the 4th slot from the top, and lower it into its retaining notches (figure 6-180). 2 Replace the Face-up Bin. 3 Connect the C-link cable from the mailbox to the stapler. Turn the printer on. 418 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Back Plate

Figure 6-182 Back Plate (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180). 2 Remove the Scan Bar by carefully pressing the tab on the scan bar backwards and downwards through the hole of the Stapler Bed (see figure 6-182) with a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift the bar. C4229-90911 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 419, Figure 6-183 Back Plate (2 of 2) 3 Remove the Torx screw joining the Back Plate with the Stapler (see figure 6-183, callout 2). 4 Release the ground cable that is connected to the Back Plate (see figure 6-183, callout 1).

To Reinstall:

CAUTION Do not overtighten the screws when replacing the Back Plate. Do not touch the metallic plate edges. 420 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Stapler Controller PCA

Figure 6-184 Stapler Controller PCA (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180). 2 Remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182). 3 Remove 2 screws located on the right side of the Stapler (see figure 6-184, callout 1). C4229-90911 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 421, Figure 6-185 Stapler Controller PCA (2 of 3) 4 Unplug the cables that are connected to the PCA. Identify their color and size and the ground cables (see figure 6-185, callouts 1 and 2). 422 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-186 Stapler Controller PCA (3 of 3) 5 The board is supported by a hooked tab at the top of the card (see figure 6-186, callout 1). Slide the board to the left and then down.

To Reinstall:

1 Slide the board up and then to the right. 2 Reconnect all cables. C4229-90911 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 423,

Top Cover Assembly

Figure 6-187 Top Cover Assembly 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 417). 2 Open the Top Cover Assembly, and remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182 on page 419). 3 Unplug the ground and signal cables from the right side of the Stapler Controller board, being careful to keep them in the cable holder. See callout 1 and 3 on figure 6-185. 4 On each side of the assembly, pull the hinge to release the 2 posts from the retaining notches (see figure 6-187).

To Reinstall:

CAUTION Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables. Cable damage could occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly. 424 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Stapler Bed Assembly

Figure 6-188 Stapler Bed Assembly 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 417). 2 Remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182 on page 419). 3 Remove the Stapler Unit Controller PCA (see figure 6-188 on page 425, callout 1). 4 Remove the Top Cover Assembly (see figure 6-187 on page 424). 5 Remove the wire frame by pushing both arms of the wire frame toward the center to clear the retaining notches and lift. 6 Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches and lifting upwards. 7 Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the top of the Stapler Bed Assembly and push gently to release the latches in the front of the stapler bed (see figure 6-188 on page 425, callout 2). 8 Remove 3 Torx screws that join the stapler bed with the rest of the unit (see figure 6-188 on page 425, callout 3). 9 To remove the Stapler Bed Assembly, lift the edge of the assembly where the stapler unit resides, then gently lift the entire Stapler Assembly. C4229-90911 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 425,

To Reinstall:

Replace the Stapler Bed. Replace the Stapler Controller. Replace the actuator for the paper bin empty sensor. CAUTION Make sure that the actuator is oriented as shown in its proper place before replacing the Stapler Bed Assembly (see figure 6-189 on page 427, callout 3). 426 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Hinges

Figure 6-189 Hinges 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 417). 2 Remove the Top Cover Assembly (see figure 6-187 on page 424). 3 Remove the Stapler Bed Assembly (see figure 6-188 on page 425). 4 Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches, and lift upwards. 5 Remove 2 screws joining each hinge to the housing (see figure 6-189, callout 1). 6 Disconnect the 2 cables in the hinge containing cables from the Stapler Controller PCA (see figure 6-185 on page 422, callout 2). C4229-90911 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 427, 428 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

HP Digital Copy 320 Removal and Replacement

WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been disconnected before servicing. Note Unplug the HP Digital Copy 320, separate it from its stand, and place it on a table to perform removal and replacement procedures. Installing the HP Digital Copy 320- - - - - - - - - - - - - 430 Hardware Table- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 437 Orientation of the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - 439 Copy Module Maintenance Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - 440 Copy Module Skins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 445 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies - - - 464 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - 475 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies- - - - - - - - - - - - - 488 For required tools, see page 203. C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Removal and Replacement 429,

Installing the HP Digital Copy 320

1 Install the HP Digital Copy 320 on the Optional

HP Digital Copy 320 Stand

For detailed instructions on setting up the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand, see the installation guide that came with the stand. 1 Place the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand near the desired location. Note Be sure to leave space for the installation of the accessories. See “Space Requirements” on page 47 for 2 dimensions. It is also important to leave space between the stand and the desired location to allow access to the cables during installation. WARNING! 3 Use caution when completing the following steps. Once you place the HP Digital Copy 320 on the stand, bumping or moving may cause it to tip. The Mopier must be moved into position immediately after installation of the HP Digital Copy 320 is complete. 2 With one other person, lift the HP Digital Copy 320 and align it with the screws on the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand. 3 With a flathead screwdriver, screw the HP Digital Copy 320 onto the stand. 430 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

CAUTION

Operating the HP Digital Copy 320 with the shipping lock in place might damage the device. It is important that you perform steps 4 and 5. 4 Unscrew and remove the shipping 5 lock. 5 Rotate the shipping lock and reinsert it into the HP Digital Copy 320 in the unlocked position. Note When you replace the shipping lock, you may need to power cycle the Mopier to 6 move the Carrier Unit into position. 6 To install the output bin, hold the bin vertically (as shown) and push down to attach the bin to the metal guides. 7 Pull the output bin down. For longer paper, flip the bin extension out as shown. 7 8 Lift the input tray up to lock it into place. For longer paper, flip the tray extension out as shown. C4229-90911 Installing the HP Digital Copy 320 431,

Install the Mopier on the Optional Input Accessory

For detailed instructions on installing the Mopier onto the optional input 1 accessory, see the installation guide that comes with the accessory.

Roll the Mopier onto the Optional

rear view HP Digital Copy 320 Stand 1 Lift both sides of the Mopier and gently rock the Mopier back and 2 forth as you push it onto the stand. 2 When the Mopier is in place, lock the wheels and rotate the levelers up or down to stabilize the Mopier. front view 432 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Install the Optional Output Accessory

Note For detailed information on installing the optional output accessory, see the installation guide that came with the accessory and the online Mopier user guide that came with the Mopier. 1 Roll the optional output accessory onto the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand. Note Be sure to properly align the mounting bracket as you roll the optional output accessory onto the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand. 2 After the front two rollers are on the base of the HP Digital Copy 320 Stand, attach the mounting bracket (called out below). 3 Roll the optional output accessory toward the Mopier until it clicks into place. mounting bracket Figure 6-190 Optional Output Accessory Note Be sure to leave enough space to completely extend the optional output accessory away from the Mopier. See “Space Requirements” on page 47. For cabling information, see “Communication Link (Daisy Chain)” on page 180. C4229-90911 Installing the HP Digital Copy 320 433,

Install the Copy Connect EIO Board into the Mopier

CAUTION Make sure that the Mopier is turned off. Insert the Copy Connect EIO Board that came with the HP Digital Copy 320 into slot 3 (the top slot) on the Mopier. (Use the screws that are in the existing EIO cover to install the Copy Connect EIO Board.) Note If a cover is on slot 3, use a phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws. Remove the cover and install the Copy Connect EIO Board. Figure 6-191 Copy Connect EIO Board (slot 3) 434 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Install the Copy Connect Cable

1 Plug the Copy Connect cable into the HP Digital Copy 320 (A). Note See the icon on the back of the HP Digital Copy 320 for correct orientation of the cable. 2 Plug the other end of the Copy Connect cable into the Copy Connect EIO Board (B). 3 Wrap the excess cable as shown in figure 6-192(C).

A B C

Figure 6-192 View with HP Digital Copy 320 Stand (preferred configuration)

A B

Figure 6-193 View with HP Digital Copy 320 on Tabletop C4229-90911 Installing the HP Digital Copy 320 435, 1 Install the Y Power Cord

CAUTION

Y cord main Turn off the Mopier and HP Digital Copy 320 before you install the Y power cord. main Mopier power long cord short Y cord short 1 Plug the main end of the Y power cord into the HP Digital Copy 320. 2 Unplug the power cord from the 3 Mopier. Plug the power cord into the short end of the Y power cord. 3 Plug the long end of the Y power Y cord long cord into the Mopier. 436 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Hardware Table

Note The numbers in the “Reference” column are used in the diagrams in Chapter 8. Table 6-2. Hardware Table Part Number Example Reference Description (for kits of 20) B1 TP Screw m3x8PA03002-C282FJ B2 TP Screw m3x6PA03002-C281FJ B3 TP Screw m4x8PA03002-C288FJ B4 Machine Screw w/washer m3x6PA03002-C283FJ B5 Machine Screw w/washer m3x8PA03002-C284FJ B6 Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 PA03002-C285FJ C4229-90911 Installing the HP Digital Copy 320 437,

Table 6-2. Hardware Table (continued) Part Number Example Reference Description (for kits of 20)

B10 Machine Screw w/washer m4x8PA03002-C286FJ B15 Flathead Screw PA03002-C287FJ m3 x6 B20 E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) PA03002-C254FJ B21 E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) PA03002-C253FJ B22 Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) PA03002-C255FJ Thumb Screw for Document Cover PA03002-C290FJ Thumb screws for Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C123FJ

NEED EXAMPLES OF SCREWS

438 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Orientation of the HP Digital Copy 320

Figure 6-194 Orientation of the HP Digital Copy 320 1 Front 2 Left 3 Back 4 Right WARNING! Remove the power cord before you begin service procedures. C4229-90911 Installing the HP Digital Copy 320 439,

Copy Module Maintenance Parts Separation Pad Assembly

Figure 6-195 Separation Pad Assembly CAUTION Do not bend the pick spring (metal tabs) as you remove the Separation Pad Assembly. 1 Open the ADF. 2 Push the Separation Pad Assembly in the direction of the imprinted arrow (callout 1). 3 Rotate the Assembly down, free of the pick spring (callout 3). To replace Reverse the above procedure. 440 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Pick Roller Assembly

Figure 6-196 Pick Roller Cover CAUTION As you remove the Pick Roller Cover, do not bend the plastic parts in the middle of the cover (callout 1). 1 Remove 2 Flathead M3x6 thumb screws (callout 2) and remove the Pick Roller Cover. C4229-90911 Copy Module Maintenance Parts 441, Figure 6-197 Pick Rollers (1 of 2) 2 Lift the white tab (callout 1) and push the collar toward the black roller (callout 2). This allows the brass bushing to slide along the shaft. 3 Slide the whole shaft and roller forward to release the shaft from the hole in the rear (callout 3). 442 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-198 Pick Rollers (2 of 2) 4 Lift out the rear end of the roller and release the shaft from the hole in the front. Lift out the entire roller and shaft assembly. CAUTION Do not touch the rubber part of the new rollers. Skin oils or gear lubricant can damage the rollers. Note Important! Retain the brass bushings. Replacement Pick Rollers include the white collar but not the bushings. When you replace the brass bushings on the roller, note that they are keyed flat on the sides to fit correctly in the holes. 5 Remove the front and rear brass bushings if they are not worn and place them on the new roller. Note To remove the second roller, follow the steps above. Note the difference between the rollers to replace the correct roller in its place. C4229-90911 Copy Module Maintenance Parts 443,

To replace

1 Reverse the above procedure. CAUTION Do not touch the rubber part of the new rollers. Skin oils or gear lubricant can damage the rollers. 2 Place the brass bushings on the new roller and replace the front end first. 3 Align the rear end of the Pick Roller Cover with the gears first and then replace the cover. 444 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Copy Module Skins Document Holding Pad

Figure 6-199 Document Holding Pad Pull apart the Velcro pads and remove the Document Holding Pad. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 445,

Paper Chute Flip-out

Figure 6-200 Paper Chute Flip-out CAUTION Do not attempt to remove the screws that hold the paper chute onto the FB Cover Assembly. If the screws are removed, the chute cannot be realigned properly by field service personnel. 1 Bow the tray slightly to free the pins from the hinges (callout 1). 2 Lift the tray out of the slots (callout 2). 446 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Output Tray Flip-out

1 Bow the tray slightly to free the pins from the hinges. 2 Lift the tray out of the slots. Note This procedure is not shown because it is similar to removing the Paper Chute Flip-out (above).

Output Tray

Figure 6-201 Output Tray 1 To remove the Output Tray, close the Output Tray Flip-out and raise the tray to the vertical position. 2 Lift the tray straight up. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 447,

Flatbed (FB) Cover Assembly

CAUTION Do not attempt to remove the screws that hold the paper chute onto the FB Cover Assembly. If the screws are removed, the chute cannot be realigned properly. The Rubber Stop, Paper Chute Flip-out, and Document Holding Pad can be replaced. Do not remove any other parts of the FB Cover Assembly. Figure 6-202 FB Cover Assembly 1 Push in the metal support and lower the chute to the storage position. Open the cover. 448 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-203 Thumb Screw for Document Cover Assembly 2 Remove the thumb screw. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 449, Figure 6-204 Removing the Cover from the Posts CAUTION Do not hit the glass as you remove the FB Cover Assembly. 3 The FB Cover Assembly rests on two posts. Slide the assembly to the right to release it, then lift it straight up. 450 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

ADF Latch Cap

Figure 6-205 ADF Latch Cap CAUTION A magnetic screwdriver is required to remove the ADF Latch Cap. 1 Open the ADF. 2 Locate the screw inside the ADF Latch Cap. 3 Depress the ADF Latch Cap until you can reach the screw with a magnetic screwdriver. CAUTION Be careful not to drop the screw. 4 Remove the TP screw (m3x8).

To replace

1 Depress the lever for the ADF Latch Cap until the screw hole is accessible. 2 Use a magnetic screwdriver to place the screw in the hole. 3 Replace the ADF Latch Cap and tighten the screw. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 451,

ADF Cover

Figure 6-206 ADF Cover (1 of 2) 1 Open the ADF and remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1). 2 Close the ADF. Note Note the location of the LED (callout 2). Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly underneath when you remove the ADF Cover. 452 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-207 ADF Cover (2 of 2) CAUTION Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly when you remove the ADF Cover. 3 To remove the ADF Cover, pry outward to release the plastic tabs, and then pry the cover upward with your fingers as shown. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 453,

Front Panel

Figure 6-208 Front Panel (1 of 2) 1 Pry up the corner of the Front Panel overlay with a flat-blade screwdriver. 2 Lift off the overlay. Note The Front Panel can be removed while still attached to the Panel Cover. If this assembly is being removed to access the Flatbed Assemblies, go to “Panel Cover” on page 459. 454 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-209 Front Panel (2 of 2) 3 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) (callout 1). 4 Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the slot and push the handle to the right (callout 2) to pry the Front Panel loose, as shown by the arrow. CAUTION Be careful not to pull the connecting cable when you remove the Front Panel. 5 Remove the Front Panel. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 455, Figure 6-210 Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate 6 Remove 3 screws. Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate in order to remove the Ribbon Cable.

To replace

Be sure to place the top part of the Front Panel Cable Clamp on the exposed metal. 456 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-211 Front Panel Ribbon Cable CAUTION Handle the Ribbon Cable with care. Always release the connector before you pull on the cable. See the next page. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 457, Figure 6-212 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable 7 To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable. Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is not twisted.

To replace

1 Plug the cable into the connector. When the cable is inserted in the connector, the contacts point toward the middle of the Front Panel as shown in Figure 6-211. This also allows the cable to lie flat. 2 Press down the upper center of the Front Panel to engage the tabs as you push the Front Panel to the left, into place. 458 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Panel Cover

CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copy 320. Figure 6-213 Panel Cover (bottom view) CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copy 320. Slide it to the edge of the table just far enough to access the screws. 1 Slide the HP Digital Copy 320 to the edge of the table. 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) underneath the Front Panel. 3 Lift up and pull out the Panel Cover. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 459,

Front Panel Brackets

Figure 6-214 Front Panel Brackets (1 of 2) 1 Remove 3 (brass machine screw m4x8 with washer) screws. 460 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copy 320. Figure 6-215 Front Panel Brackets (2 of 2) CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copy 320. Slide it to the edge of the table to access the bottom. 2 Slide the HP Digital Copy 320 to the edge of the table. Remove the brackets. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 461,

Upper Cover

Figure 6-216 Upper Cover (1 of 2) 1 Remove the TP screw (m3x8) from the front right corner. 462 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-217 Upper Cover (2 of 2) 2 Remove 3 screws [two TP screws (m3x6) and one TP screw (m3x8)]. Note For replacement, the screws in the ADF are longer. The ADF is shown open to locate the screws. Always close the ADF to remove the Upper Cover. CAUTION Be careful of the LED PCA and Front Panel ribbon cable when you remove the cover. 3 Lift the Upper Cover straight up to remove it.

To replace

Carefully feed the Front Panel ribbon cable through the slot. C4229-90911 Copy Module Skins 463,

Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies

WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been disconnected before servicing. See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions” on page 202. The Power Supply and Main Board Tray contains the Copy Processor Board, the Power Supply, and the Control PCA.

Copy Processor Board

Figure 6-218 Copy Processor Board CAUTION The Copy Processor Board is ESD sensitive. 1 Remove 2 thumb screws. 2 Slide the Copy Processor Board out. 464 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Power Supply and Main Board Tray

WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been disconnected before servicing. See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions” on page 202. Figure 6-219 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (1 of 2) 1 Remove 2 brass machine screws with washers (m3x8) (callout 1). 2 Pull the Assembly out by the handle (callout 2) approximately 2.5 inches (6 centimeters). C4229-90911 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 465, Figure 6-220 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (2 of 2) 3 Unplug 3 connectors. 4 Remove the tray. 466 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

RFI Cover

Figure 6-221 RFI Cover (inside/rear view) Remove the RFI Cover (Radio Frequency Interference shield) in order to replace the Control PCA, the Power Supply, or the Fan Assembly. 1 Remove 4 TP screws (m3x8) from the rear of the RFI Cover. C4229-90911 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 467, Figure 6-222 RFI Cover (outside/front view) 1 Remove 3 TP screws (m3x8) from the front of the RFI Cover. 2 Remove the RFI Cover. 468 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Control PCA

Figure 6-223 Control PCA 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. 2 Remove 7 TP screws (m3x8). 3 Unplug 2 connectors. 4 Remove the Control PCA. Retain the EEPROM (page 471), Back PCA (page 474) and the Card Cage (page 470). C4229-90911 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 469,

Card Cage

Figure 6-224 Card Cage Note To remove the Card Cage, flip over the Control PCA and remove 4 TP screws (m3x8). 470 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

EEPROM

Figure 6-225 EEPROM When you replace the Control PCA, retain the EEPROM from the old PCA and replace it on the new PCA in order to retain the default settings (such as calibration) for the HP Digital Copy 320. C4229-90911 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 471,

Fan

Figure 6-226 Fan 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1). 3 Unplug the connector (callout 2). 472 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Power Supply

Figure 6-227 Power Supply 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. 2 Remove 4 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1). 3 Remove 2 brass machine screws m4x8 with washer (callout 2). C4229-90911 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 473,

Back PCA

Figure 6-228 Back PCA 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. Remove the Control PCA (page 469). 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 3 Pull out the Back PCA. Note The board is keyed for correct insertion. 474 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies

Note To access the ADF Unit Assemblies, remove the skins down to the ADF Cover (pages 445 to 452).

Optical Unit

Figure 6-229 Optical Unit (1 of 2) CAUTION The Optical Unit is ESD sensitive. 1 Unplug 3 connectors (callout 1). Remove the cables from their routing guides. Note the routing of the cables in order to replace them in the correct positions. (Routing is also shown on page 486.) 2 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) and the Optical Unit Tie-down with Pad (callout 2). CAUTION Do not remove the CCD PCA or any of the screws on the Optical Unit other than the screws mentioned. Do not disassemble the Optical Unit. C4229-90911 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 475, Figure 6-230 Optical Unit (2 of 2) 3 Holding the Optical Unit, release the ADF lever and open the ADF Assembly 45°. Rotate the Optical Unit as shown (the green board is on top and level) (callout 1). 4 Slide the Optical unit to the left off the slots in the metal bar (callout 2). Note The replacement Optical Unit includes a Back Side Lamp and Lamp Inverter PCA, but not an Optical Unit Tie-down with Pad. 476 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

ADF Lamp PCA

Figure 6-231 ADF Lamp PCA (1 of 2) Note It is not necessary to remove the Optical Unit to reach the ADF Lamp PCA. CAUTION Be careful not to damage the PCA as you remove it. 1 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to pry the tab loose. CAUTION Do not touch the Optical Unit Mirrors. Fingerprints will affect image quality. C4229-90911 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 477,

To replace

Figure 6-232 ADF Lamp PCA (2 of 2) Note the orientation of the PCA to replace it in the correct position. The PCA fits under the tabs. 478 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

ADF Lamp

Figure 6-233 ADF Lamp Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). CAUTION Remove the Lamp carefully; it is fragile. Do not disassemble the Optical Unit beyond removal of the Lamp and Lamp PCA; it will be irreparably damaged!

To replace

Replace the screw nearest the Lamp cable first. CAUTION Do not over-tighten the screws holding the Lamp in place. Over- tightening the screws can damage the plastic. C4229-90911 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 479,

Sensor Unit Assembly

Figure 6-234 Sensor Unit Assembly (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Optical Unit. 2 Remove the Separation Pad (page 440). 3 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) as shown. 480 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-235 Sensor Unit Assembly (2 of 3) 4 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each of the 2 cable holders and remove the cables from the cable holders (callout 1). 5 Unplug 1 connector from the motor (callout 2). 6 Remove the cables from the wiring harness sleeve. C4229-90911 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 481, Figure 6-236 Sensor Unit Assembly (3 of 3) 7 Remove the Sensor Unit Assembly. 482 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

ADF Motor Unit

Figure 6-237 ADF Motor Unit 1 Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 451) and the ADF Cover (page 452). 2 Unplug the connector from the ADF Motor. 3 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 4 Move the belt out of the way. 5 Remove the ADF Motor. 6 Remove the belt (see the next page). C4229-90911 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 483,

ADF Belt

1 Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 451) and the ADF Cover (page 452). Figure 6-238 ADF Belt 2 Loosen 2 screws (callout 1) and remove the ADF Belt.

To replace

1 Place a new belt on pulleys 2 and 3 as shown. 2 Place the belt on pulley 4. 484 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

To adjust belt tension

1 Make sure the 2 screws (callout 1 in Figure 6-238) on the ADF Motor Unit are loose when you adjust the belt tension. 2 To adjust the belt tension, pull the motor up firmly (by hand only). Note It is very difficult to overtighten the belt tension by hand. A belt that is too loose, however, can adversely affect image quality. 3 Maintaining upward pressure on the motor, tighten the 2 screws (callout 1) on the ADF Motor Unit. C4229-90911 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 485,

LED Assembly PCA

Figure 6-239 LED Assembly PCA 1 Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 451) and the ADF Cover (page 452). 2 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) (callout 1). 3 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each of the 2 cable holders (callout 2) and remove the cables from the cable holders. CAUTION Do not attempt to unplug the connector from the PCA. It is permanently attached to the PCA on one end. Unplug the other end from the Main Board. 4 Unplug 1 connector from the Main Board. 5 Remove the cable (callout 3) from the wiring harness sleeve.

To replace

Note the PCA has 2 holes, one for the screw and one for the locating pin. Be sure to orient the PCA properly with the 2 holes. 486 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

ADF Unit

Figure 6-240 ADF Unit (shown without Optical Unit) Note To get to the Glass Plate assemblies, you can remove the ADF Unit with the Optical Unit intact. (An Optical Unit is not included with a replacement ADF Assembly.) 1 Remove 4 TP screws (m3x6) (callout 1) and unplug 3 cables from the Main Board Tray (shown in Figure 6-220 on page 466). WARNING! Once the ADF latch is removed, if the lever is triggered the ADF can spring open rapidly and pinch your fingers. CAUTION Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly (callout 2) when you are working around the ADF Unit. 2 Lift off the ADF Unit.

To replace

1 The ADF is keyed to the Glass Plate Assembly. Make sure it fits properly in its place before you replace the screws. 2 Always perform an offset adjustment whenever you replace the ADF. See “Calibrating the HP Digital Copy 320” on page 126. C4229-90911 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 487,

Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies

Note To access the Flatbed Assemblies, remove the skins (starting on page 445), including the Front Panel (starting on page 454) and the ADF Unit Assemblies (starting on page 475).

Front Panel Frame Ground Spring

Figure 6-241 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring 1 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 2 Remove the spring. 488 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Output Tray Brackets

Figure 6-242 Output Tray Brackets Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each bracket and remove the bracket. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 489,

Glass Plate Assembly

Figure 6-243 Glass Plate Assembly 1 Remove the ADF Unit (page 487). Output Tray Brackets and open the Power Supply and Main Board Tray. 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) as shown. CAUTION Remove the Glass Plate Assembly carefully; it is breakable. 3 Remove the Glass Plate Assembly. 490 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-244 Idle Roller Coil Spring Remove the Idle Roller Coil Spring.

To replace

Align the Idle Roller Coil Spring on the pin and press it into place. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 491,

Home Position Sensor

Figure 6-245 Home Position Sensor (1 of 2) 1 Move the Carrier Unit away from the sensor. 492 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-246 Home Position Sensor (2 of 2) 2 From underneath, pry the tabs to release the sensor. 3 Unplug the connector. (The cable is included with the Junction PCA.) C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 493,

Carrier Unit Lamp

Figure 6-247 Dust Cover 1 Remove the Carrier Unit Dust Cover.

To replace

Place the dust cover shiny side down and underneath the long metal tab. 494 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Figure 6-248 Lamp (1 of 2) 1 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8). C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 495, Figure 6-249 Lamp (2 of 2) 2 Unplug 1 connector. CAUTION When you replace the Lamp, be sure to replace the cable as far as possible into the recess of the corner of the Carrier Unit so it will not get pinched or cut. Note For replacement, the rear end of the Lamp goes in first. 496 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Carrier Unit

CAUTION Do not disassemble the Carrier Unit. Figure 6-250 Carrier Unit (1 of 2) 1 Remove 1 screw from the end of the Carrier Shaft. Note When you replace the Carrier Unit, check the alignment of the rail and rail bushing. The metal bushing should fit into the rail instead of sitting on top. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 497, Figure 6-251 Carrier Unit (2 of 2) 2 Move the Carrier to the center (callout 1). 3 Pull out the Carrier Shaft.

Cleaning and Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft

1 If the Carrier Unit Shaft is dirty, wipe it off with a cloth, then relubricate it (see below). Otherwise, be careful not to remove the lubricant. 2 Place an even coating of Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) on the Carrier Unit Shaft as needed (for example, if paper dust or other material interferes with movement of the Carrier Unit, or if you have cleaned the shaft). 498 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, Carrier Unit Figure 6-252 Carrier Belt 3 Slide the belt off the Carrier Unit. CAUTION Handle the Ribbon Cable with care. Always release the connector before you pull on the cable. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 499, Figure 6-253 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable 4 To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable. Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is not twisted. CAUTION During reassembly, when you insert the Carrier Shaft, be careful not to dislocate the Felt Pad in the Carrier Frame. See page 501. 5 Remove the Carrier Unit. Note The replacement Carrier Unit includes a Lamp, Dust Cover, and pre- lubricated Felt Pad. A ribbon cable is not included. CAUTION If the brass bushing comes off the rail, be sure to replace it so that the rail fits into the bushing’s groove, and the bushing does not sit on top of the rail. If the bushing sits on top of the rail, it can block the Carrier Unit. 500 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Felt Pad

Figure 6-254 Felt Pad 1 Remove the Carrier Unit Lamp. 2 Insert the Felt Pad as shown. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 501,

Feet

Figure 6-255 Feet Pinch the tabs to remove the foot. 502 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Frame Ground Spring

Figure 6-256 Frame Ground Spring 1 Lift out the Frame Ground Spring.

To replace

Align the spring and the grounding plate. CAUTION Do not forget to replace the Frame Ground Spring when you reassemble the HP Digital Copy 320. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 503,

Front Lamp PCA

Figure 6-257 Front Lamp PCA 1 Remove the Carrier Unit. The Front Lamp PCA is located on the underside of the Carrier Unit. 2 Unplug 1 connector. 3 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8). 504 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Junction PCA and Cover

Figure 6-258 Junction PCA Cover 1 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 2 Remove the Junction PCA Cover. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 505, Figure 6-259 Junction PCA 3 Unplug 2 connectors. Note For replacement, note the routing of the cables. 506 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Front Panel Ribbon Cable

Figure 6-260 Front Panel Ribbon Cable CAUTION Do not bend the metal Front Panel Cable Cover. 1 Gently peel off one side of the Front Panel Cable Cover. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 507, Figure 6-261 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable 2 Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate (figure 6-210 on page 456). 3 To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable. Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is not twisted.

To replace

CAUTION You must remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate in order to replace the cable. The cable will be crushed if you place it over the top of the clear cover. 1 Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate. 2 Replace the Ribbon Cable and the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate. 3 Make sure the Front Panel Cable Clamp lies as flat as possible, allowing the Carrier Unit to pass over without touching the clear part. 508 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911,

Carrier Belt and Motor

Figure 6-262 Carrier Belt and Motor (1 of 2) 1 Remove 1 machine screw with washer (m3x35) to release the pulley shaft and pulley spring. 2 Remove the Carrier Belt from the pulley. C4229-90911 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 509, Figure 6-263 Carrier Belt and Motor (2 of 2) CAUTION Do not disassemble the Carrier Motor Assembly. 3 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x6) from the bracket by the motor. 4 Lift the motor and unplug 1 connector from underneath the motor. Note The replacement Flatbed Motor Unit includes a replacement motor, a short belt, and a long belt. The cable, pulley shaft, and spring are ordered separately.

To replace

1 Reverse the above procedure. 2 To adjust the tension of the Carrier Belt, tighten or loosen the screw shown in Figure 6-262. 510 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4229-90911, 7 Troubleshooting

Chapter contents

Service Approach - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 512 Troubleshooting Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 515 Troubleshooting the Mopier System- - - - - - - - - - - - 522 Troubleshooting the Mopier and Paper-handling Devices - 534 Step 1 Power On - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 534 Step 2 Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 538 Step 3 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 542 Step 4 Paper Path Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - 581 Step 5 Information Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 587 Step 6 Image Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 597 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices - - - - - - - 617 Diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 638 Troubleshooting the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - 651 Step 1 Power On - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 652 Step 2 Display and Communication - - - - - - - - - 653 Step 3 Error Messages and Problems - - - - - - - - 654 Step 4 Image Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 661 Step 5 Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 660 Testing the HP Digital Copy 320 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 664 C4229-90911 Chapter contents 511,

Service Approach

Repair of the complete Mopier system normally begins with a four- step process: ● Step 1: Isolate the problem to the major system, i.e. the host computer, the network and/or server, or the printer system. See “Mopier System Troubleshooting Process” on page 517. ● Step 2: Determine if the problem is located in the paper-handling devices or in the printer engine. See “Mopier/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process” on page 518. ● Step 3: Determine if the problem is located in the copy module. See “Copy Module Troubleshooting Process” on page 520. ● Step 4: Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in this chapter. Once a faulty part is located, repair is usually accomplished by assembly level replacement of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies may be repaired at the subassembly level. Replacement of components on the printed circuit assemblies is not supported by Hewlett-Packard.

Ordering Parts

Field replaceable part numbers are listed in Chapter 8 of this manual. Replacement parts may be ordered from HP's Support Materials Organization (SMO), or Support Materials Europe (SME).

Phone numbers

PSD/SMO (Product Support Division/Support Materials Organization) 1-800-227-8164 (U.S. Only) PSD/SME (Product Support Division/Support Materials Europe) (49 7031) 142253 HP's Distribution Center (HPD) 1-303-353-7650 512 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Exchange Program

HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Parts Direct Ordering (PDO), Support Materials Organization (PSD/SMO), or Support Materials Europe (PSD/SME).

Consumables

The Mopier has two consumables; the toner cartridge and staple cartridges, which may be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See Chapter 8 for ordering information.

Toner Cartridge Life

The Toner Cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major “consumable” parts. The toner cartridge contains the printing mechanism and a supply of toner. At 5% page coverage, a toner cartridge is guaranteed to print approximately 20,000 images. The toner cartridge may print less than 20,000 images if routinely printing very dense print. Conversely, when routinely printing images with less coverage (such as short memos), or in EconoMode, the toner cartridge may print more than 20,000 images. However, EconoMode does not extend toner cartridge component life. Note For best results, always use a new toner cartridge before the expiration date stamped on the toner cartridge box. C4229-90911 Service Approach 513,

Refilled Toner Cartridges and Non-HP Staple Cartridges

While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges and non-HP staple cartridges, their use is not supported for the following reasons: ● Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge or non-HP staple cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge or HP LaserJet staple cartridge. Also, Hewlett-Packard cannot predict the long term reliability effect on the printer when using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges. ● The print quality of HP LaserJet toner cartridges influences the customer's perception of the printer. Hewlett-Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge.

Recycling Toner Cartridges

In order to reduce waste, Hewlett-Packard uses a recycling program for used toner cartridges. Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled, as are plastics and other materials. Hewlett-Packard pays the shipping costs from the user to the recycling plant. For each cartridge returned, HP donates one U.S. dollar to be shared by the Nature Conservancy and the National Wildlife Federation. To join this recycling effort, follow the instructions inside the toner cartridge box. 514 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Troubleshooting Process

The troubleshooting process is a systematic approach that addresses the major problems first and then other problems as you identify the causes for printer malfunctions and errors. If you know the cause of a problem in the Mopier system, go directly to that area. Otherwise, use the troubleshooting process diagrams starting on the next page. The diagrams illustrate the major steps for troubleshooting the printing system. In the diagrams starting on page 517, each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step. A YES answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step. A NO answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the referenced location and follow the directions for that area. After completing the additional testing, proceed to the next major step. To avoid replacing parts that are not broken, use figure 7-1 below to isolate the problem. Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Process C4229-90911 Troubleshooting Process 515, See the flowcharts on the following pages for each of the components of the troubleshooting process: ● Mopier System Troubleshooting Process (page 517) ● Mopier/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (page 518) ● Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (page 520) 516 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Mopier System Troubleshooting Process

Figure 7-2 Mopier System Troubleshooting Process 1 Mopier/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (page 518) 2 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (page 520) C4229-90911 Troubleshooting Process 517,

Mopier/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process

Figure 7-3 Mopier and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) 518 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-4 Mopier and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) 1. Power On (page 534) 3. Paper Path Troubleshooting (page 581) 2. Event Log (page 538) 4. Image Quality (page 597) C4229-90911 Troubleshooting Process 519,

Copy Module Troubleshooting Process

123Figure 7-5 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) 1. Power On (page 652) 3. Error Messages and Problems (page 654) 2. Display and Communication (page 653) 520 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 456Figure 7-6 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) 4. Information Pages (page 659) 6. Image Quality (page 661) 5. Paper Path (page 660) C4229-90911 Troubleshooting Process 521,

Troubleshooting the Mopier System Preliminary Operating Checks

Prior to troubleshooting a specific printer problem, you should ensure that: ● The printer is being maintained on a regular basis as described in Chapter 4. ● The customer is using acceptable paper as specified in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide. ● The printer is positioned on a solid, level surface. ● The line voltage does not vary more than 10% from the nominal rated value as specified on the Power Rating Label. ● The operating environment for the printer and paper is within the temperature and humidity specifications listed in Chapter 1 of this manual. ● The printer is never exposed to ammonia fumes such as those produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials. ● The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight. ● Non-HP components (such as refilled Toner Cartridges, font cartridges, and memory boards) are removed from the printer. Note When moving the printer into a warm room from a cold location such as a warehouse, various problems can occur due to condensation in the printer. For example, if the photosensitive drum is cold, the resistance of the photoconductive layer will be high. This will lead to incorrect contrast. Leave the printer running for 10 to 20 minutes. 522 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Communication

Ask the customer to run a print job from the host system. If the print job is successful, communication to the printer is ensured.

Interface Troubleshooting

Figure 7-7 Communications Link (C-link) Cables, Supported Daisy Chain Connections Note If the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox is sitting on a tabletop instead of on a stand, it is the first device in the daisy chain. All C-link cables have a single dot molded into the device output connector cable end, and two dots molded into the device input connector cable end. Note It is important that the C-link cables are installed in the supported daisy chain configuration as shown in figure 7-7. This is so that the devices are recognized and correctly reported on the Event Log. It is possible, but not recommended, to attach the C-link cables in other configurations. This will rearrange the supported device numbering. Keep this configuration in mind when evaluating the Event Log. C4229-90911 Troubleshooting the Mopier System 523, If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration page, verify that the C-link cabling is correctly connected and functional (figure 7-7) and that DC power is available to the paper handling devices. Check and reseat suspect cable connections. If any of the cables are replaced, you must cycle the power to have the printer recognize the device again. 524 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Network Troubleshooting

This section provides an overview of the printer’s interface requirements. Note Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility. Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems.

Test Message

After the printer is installed, verify communications between the printer and the IBM-compatible computer. Enter the following at the DOS prompt: C:\DIR>LPT1 ENTER (for printing to parallel port #1) The printer should print a directory listing of the C:\ directory.

EIO Troubleshooting

The JetDirect Configuration Page shown in figure 7-8 on page 526 contains valuable information about the current status of the EIO accessories. Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or notifying your network consultant of a problem, always print a Configuration Page from the Control Panel’s Information Menu. If an EIO accessory is installed, the JetDirect Configuration Page prints too. See the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for detailed explanations of network issues. C4229-90911 Troubleshooting the Mopier System 525, Network statistics I/O card status IP address IPX/SPX status Node name Figure 7-8 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page 526 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, ● If the EIO JetDirect Card has successfully powered up and completed its internal diagnostics, the I/O CARD READY message will appear. If communication is lost, an I/O NOT READY message appears followed by a two digit error code. Consult the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details and recommended action. ● The “Network Statistics” column indicates the status of network activity. Bad packets, framing errors, un-sendable packets, and collisions should be minimal. If a high percentage (greater than one percent) of these occur, contact the network administrator. All of the statistics are set to zero when the printer is powered off. ● A “Novell Status” block should state the Novell printer server name to which the printer is connected. If the Node Name reads “NPIxxxxxx” (xxxxxx = last six digits of the EIO's LAN address), the EIO card has not been configured for a Novell server (as in figure 7-8). This could indicate that the card is operating under an IPX protocol other than Novell. Consult with the network administrator if the Node Name is not present. ● In the TCP/IP protocol block, the default IP address is “192.0.0.192.” It is acceptable to operate the printer with this default address. The error message, ARP DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS may appear in this block. This is also an acceptable error code if the TCP/IP protocol is not being used. Please check with the network administrator to determine the correct IP address for the printer.

Verify Host System Operation

Try to print to another known working printer or move the failing printer to a known working location. Verify that the correct driver is installed and operating properly.

Verify Network and Server Operation

● Try to print the job to the printer's parallel port. ● Try to print from the host system through the network to another printer. Contact the network administrator for assistance. C4229-90911 Troubleshooting the Mopier System 527,

General Troubleshooting Information Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions

The following lists symptoms and typical solutions to those problems. Abnormal noises are evident, such as grinding or chattering when main motor energized. From the toner cartridge area: 1 Replace the toner cartridge. 2 Replace the Main Gear Assembly. See “Main Gear Assembly” on page 256 for instructions. From Tray 2 or 3: 1 Verify proper paper loading, acceptable media. 2 Inspect the “fingers” on the paper trays to ensure proper paper size detection. 3 Replace the Paper Input Unit. See “Paper Input Unit (PIU)” on page 260 for instructions. 4 Replace the Main Gear Assembly. See “Main Gear Assembly” on page 256 for instructions. From 2000-sheet Input Tray: 1 Check the white plastic bushing on Tray 4. The bushing is located on the Tray 4 main drive assembly. The bushing accepts the Tray 4 pilot pin when Tray 4 is closed. Replace if broken. 2 Replace 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Assembly. 3 Replace the 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly. From 8-bin Mailbox: 1 Verify pawls are riding above the output rollers (see figure 7-24 on page 639). 528 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Will not feed from Tray x when printing from application; paper path test works fine. Verify the correct paper size: 1 Tray 1: From Control Panel Paper Handling Menu. 2 Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5: Remove and reseat the paper fences in the correct position in the failing tray. Excessive Image Skew 1 Remove and reseat the paper fences (front fence in paper trays). 2 Image Skew Specifications: • 1 mm over 260 mm length • First line to leading edge 5.0 +/- 2.5 mm • Text Stretching 1% simplex 1.5% duplex Envelope • Skew 6.0 over 260 mm length • First line on envelopes to leading edge/ left margin 15 +/- 4.5 mm Loses Page Counts, Serial Number. Print the Event Log and look for a 68 error with a page count of zero. Using the Event Log, take the page count shown at the top of the page and add the page count from any/all errors preceding any 68 errors. Use this number and enter it into the Control Panel from Service Mode. Will not print from 2000-sheet Input Tray or2x500-sheet Input Tray. 1 Print the Configuration Page. Make sure that the Paper Handling Controller and 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray are listed in the Paper Handling Options section. 2 Verify that power is supplied the to the 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray. C4229-90911 Troubleshooting the Mopier System 529, 3 Run a paper path test from Tray 4 or 5. If the test is successful, the paper size detection switches may have failed or an incorrect size is specified in the application software. 4 Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the Configuration Page. 5 Verify that the C-link cables are connected as shown in figure 7-7 on page 523. 6 Reseat the C-link Cable, and inspect for pushed in pins. 7 Replace the C-link Cable. 8 Replace the 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA. Jams when printing envelopes, transparencies, or labels to the 8-bin Mailbox or 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler. The 8-bin Mailbox does not support these media. Direct these media to the Face-up Bin (top bin of the 8-bin Mailbox). Stops printing and hangs on certain jobs. 1 Remove any non-HP Memory DIMMs and retry. 2 Set to 300 DPI and retry. Top 2/3 of portrait page is lighter. 1 Replace the Toner Cartridge and retry. 2 Replace the Transfer Guide. Will not print to Mailbox. 1 Print the Configuration Page. Make sure that the Paper Handling Controller, 2000-sheet Input Tray, and 8-bin Mailbox are listed in the Paper Handling Options section. 2 Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the Configuration Page. 3 Inspect the C-link Cables for pushed out pins. 4 Replace the C-link Cables. 5 Connect the 8-bin Mailbox directly to the printer. If it is now recognized on the Configuration Page, replace the 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller. 6 Replace the 8-bin Mailbox Controller. 7 Replace the 8-bin Mailbox External Power Supply. 8 Replace the entire 8-bin Mailbox. 530 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Wrinkling Envelopes 1 Place the Fusing Levers in up position and retry the envelopes. 2 Try new media. Make sure that the envelopes are within specifications. See the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specifications Guide. Poor Fusing 1 Make sure that the Fusing Levers are in the down position for cut sheet paper. 2 Try new media. Make sure that the media is within specifications. See the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specifications Guide. 3 Make sure that the AC power does not fluctuate out of range during the print cycle. See table 2-4 on page 53. Feeds from incorrect tray when selecting different media for the first page of the job. First you must determine if it is a hardware or a software issue. Run a paper path test from each paper tray to eliminate the hardware. See page 584. If the paper path test fails, troubleshoot the error message. Make sure that the most current printer driver is installed. Select the Print Quality Tab from the printer driver. Click on About. You may find the most current driver in various electronic locations. Check with HP Service and Support. If the paper path test works, it may be a software or user related issue. Perform the following steps: 1 Define the media types that are loaded in each paper tray. This can be done from either JetAdmin or the front control panel of the printer. From JetAdmin 1 Select the Trays tab. 2 Select the correct media type for each tray listed. 3 Click on OK save your changes and exit JetAdmin. C4229-90911 Troubleshooting the Mopier System 531, From the Control Panel Note To set the paper type for Tray 1, set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the Paper Handling Menu. 1 From the Paper Handling Menu, press ITEM to select a specific tray. 2 Press + until you get to the correct type of media. 3 Press SELECT. 4 Repeat this step for each paper tray. 5 Press GO. 6 From inside your application, choose the page setup option for that application. 7 Select the paper source/type option. 8 Select the correct media source/type for the first page. 9 Select the correct media source/type for all other pages. Note You must have the HP Mopier 320 selected in your application in order for your application to provide you with the correct paper tray and media type selections. CAUTION Do not make changes to the driver unless the application does not provide this option. Print job settings selected through your application always override settings made through the printer driver. Printer settings made in the application or print driver always override the corresponding setting made on the printer Control Panel. 10 Print the document. 532 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Paper Curl

Paper curl is inherent to the laser printing processes, as it occurs when paper is subjected to heat. Paper curl tends to relax as the paper cools while resting on a flat surface. The specification for maximum paper curl when the paper is lying flat before print is 0.2 inches (5 mm). Although paper curl cannot be totally eliminated, some steps can be taken to lessen its impact, as suggested in the following table. Table 7-1. Paper Curl Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper Path Try using Tray 1 and output the paper to the Face-up Bin. 2. Paper Surface The recommended printing surface of the page is usually marked on the end of a ream of paper, indicated by a small arrow and the phrase “print this side first.” Load paper in Tray 1 with the recommended printing surface facing up (facing down in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5). 3. Paper Storing and Over time, paper assumes the characteristics of its storage environment (in a Handling humid environment, paper absorbs moisture; in a dry environment, paper loses moisture). Paper with higher moisture content will tend to curl more. Evaluate the storage conditions of the paper. 4. Paper Type All paper is manufactured differently (different textures, moisture content, drying processes, composition, etc.). Change the type of paper being used and re- evaluate the paper curl results. C4229-90911 Troubleshooting the Mopier System 533,

Troubleshooting the Mopier and Paper-handling Devices Step 1 Power On

It is important to have the printer's Control Panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the printer's diagnostics can assist in locating printer errors. Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display Problem Action 1. Is AC power available at Verify. See table 2-4 on page 53. the printer's power receptacle? 2. Is the printer's on/off Push the switch to the on position. switch set to on? 3. Are the printer's fans on? Note: Fan operation is significant since all fans are controlled by the printer's DC Controller PCA. When the printer is in PowerSave mode, the (See figure 7-9 on page 536 fans are off. Make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode. Press to locate the fans.) GO. Operational fans indicate: 1. AC power is present in the printer. 2. DC power supply is functional (both 24V DC and 5V DC are being generated). 3. DC Controller PCA's micro-processor is functional. NO If the fans are NOT working, turn off the printer and remove the printer's Formatter PCA. Disconnect all the printer's paper handling options. Then turn on the printer and check the fans again. If the fans are still not working, perform the following steps: 1. Verify that all fans are connected to the DC Controller PCA according to figure 7-29 on page 644. 2. Replace the low-voltage DC power supply. See “Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)” on page 270 for instructions. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCA. See “PCA, DC Controller” on page 261 for instructions. 534 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display (continued) Problem Action

If the fans are working but the printer's Control Panel is blank, print an YES engine test. See “Engine Test” on page 537. If the engine test was successful, perform the following steps: 1. Reseat or replace the cable from the Control Panel that is connected to J203 of the DC Controller PCA (see the main wiring diagram in the back of the manual). 2. Replace the printer's Formatter PCA. See “Formatter Assembly” on page 250 for instructions. 3. Replace the Control Panel assembly. See “Control Panel” on page 215 for instructions. If the engine test was not successful, verify that there is no paper in the paper path. Retry the engine test. If the engine test is still unsuccessful, replace the DC Controller PCA. See “PCA, DC Controller” on page 261 for instructions.

C4229-90911 Power On 535

, Figure 7-9 Fan Location and Airflow Table 7-3. Fans Fan Name Fan Location Fan 1: Laser/Scanner Fan Exhaust air flows from the back of the printer, on the left-hand side of the fusing assembly. Fan 2: Low-voltage Power Lower right-hand corner of the printer. Supply Fan Fan 3: Formatter Fan (intake) Intake fan below the formatter. Fan 4: Standard Output Directly above the center of the fusing assembly. Delivery Fan Fan 5: MP Tray (Intake) Right side of MP (Tray 1) Assembly Fan Note Control Panel numbers do not correspond to fan numbers (i.e., a fan error ending in .1 does NOT refer to Fan 1). 536 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Engine Test

The engine test verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly. This test is very useful for isolating printer problems since the Formatter PCA is completely bypassed during an engine test. The engine test prints a full page of horizontal lines across the entire printable area. The engine test prints from Tray 3 ONLY and can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed. Note Tray 3 must be installed and loaded with paper to perform an engine test. Also, make sure that the EP toner cartridge is installed in the printer.

Engine Test Button Location

The engine test button is located on the DC Controller PCA. It is accessible through a hole at the right rear of the printer. See figure 7-10.

Printing an Engine Test

To print an engine test, use a non-metallic object (such as a pencil) to press the engine test button (see figure 7-10). A single test page will print. The engine test will be continuous as long as the button is held in. Figure 7-10 Engine Test Button C4229-90911 Power On 537,

Step 2 Display

The Control Panel should display READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON. For information about errors displayed, access the Event Log. If the display is blank, see “Power On Defects or Blank Display” on page 534.

Event Log

Use the Event Log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and intermittent failures. You can either print or display the Event Log from the Control Panel’s Information Menu. (Select PRINT EVENT LOG or SHOW EVENT LOG.) (The Configuration Page lists the maximum number of entries in the Event Log.) See figure 7-11 on page 539 for a sample Event Log. The Event Log shows the current page count at the left side of the page, with the printer's serial number directly to the right of the page count. The left column is the error sequence number, with the error listed on the right (the highest sequence number is the most recent event logged). The next column is the page count at the time of the error, and the last column is the Personality (PCL or PostScript) column or the Jam Cause at the time of the error. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 544 for more information about correcting Event Log messages in the printer and paper handling devices. 538 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-11 Sample Event Log

Print the Event Log

The printer’s internal Event Log stores the most recent errors and can be printed at any time. To print the Event Log: 1. Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press Item until PRINT EVENT LOG appears. 3 Press Select to print the Event Log. C4229-90911 Display 539,

Display the Event Log

If the printer cannot print or move any paper, follow these steps to display the Event Log. Otherwise, print the Event Log. 1. Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press Item until SHOW EVENT LOG appears. Press Select to show the Event Log. 3. Press - Value + to scroll through the Event Log. 4. Write down the error messages. For example: Error number Error code 13.3 PAPER JAM 01 13.3 CHECK RIGHT DOOR 0000006 Page count Appears on display panel Appears in the Event Log 5. Check the Event Log for specific error trends in the last 10,000 printed pages. 6. Ask the customer for any observed error trends. (For example, do paper jams tend to occur in a specific area of the printer?) 7. Record any specific error trends. 8. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 544 and follow the recommended action. 9. If the Control Panel displays READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON, go to the next section. If it displays any other message, repeat this procedure starting from step 1. 540 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Interpret the Event Log

See figure 7-11 on page 539 for a sample Event Log. The errors on the control panel and the Event Log codes may not be the same. For example, 13.11 on the control panel may be 13.11 1B in the Event Log. The 1B provides more information about the error. Likewise, if a 50.1 FUSER ERROR is displayed on the Control Panel, the Event Log will record a 50.02.01 error, with the 02 signifying that 2 sensors were blocked. Make sure that you refer to the correct number in “Printer Message Tables” on page 544. When an error is detected in an Optional Paper Handling Device, a 13.11, 11.zz, 22.zz to 13.12,13.22, or 66.xy.zz will be displayed on the Control Panel. Hint Whenever a 13.xx appears on the Control Panel, a good practice is to clear the jammed paper from the printer, press GO to take the printer offline, and print the Event Log. If you cannot print the Event Log, you can still display it on the Control Panel. The last error is the error at the top of the Event Log printout with the highest number in the left-most column. Write the error next to the last error logged. To interpret the Event Log: ● Each individual entry in the log is called an “error,” while all errors occurring at the same page count are called an “event.” See the Recommended Action in “Printer Message Tables” on page 544 for each error comprising an event to gain a clear picture of what took place during that event. Events usually conclude with a time- out or no response from the device (error 66.xy in the Event Log). Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. ● Use the Event Log table in this section to associate errors in the Event Log with the Control Panel error message. Follow the Recommended Action listed in the Event Log Table starting on page 544 for each error or event. Note It is assumed that any Paper Handling Devices are connected as shown in the C-link Cable Diagram (figure 7-7 on page 523). The errors will be logged with different device numbers if any non-standard cabling is installed. C4229-90911 Display 541,

Step 3 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages

Be sure to read the exact text of the control panel message, including the error message number and the text, in order to locate the error message in the tables. This printer has enhanced information in the control panel. Printer messages displayed on the control panel provide five categories of information. Each message category is assigned a priority. If more than one condition occurs at the same time, the highest priority message is displayed. When it has been cleared, the next priority message will be displayed, and so on. The displayed messages and their priorities are: ● Printer Status ● Warning messages ● Error messages ● Critical error messages ● External Paper Handling Device Messages

Control Panel and Event Log Message Format

The format of Control Panel messages is: ● 13.xy PAPER JAM IN INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE ● INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE CONDITION xy.zz ● 66.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE The Event Log messages have the following format: ● 13.xy zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE PAPER JAM ● 65.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE CONDITION ● 66.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE HARDWARE MALFUNCTION Note The following are two examples of Control Panel messages, the corresponding Event Log messages, and what the messages mean. These examples do not show the recommended action to follow to fix the problem. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 544 for the recommended actions for these messages. 542 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Control Panel Message Event Log Page Meaning 13.11 PAPER JAM IN INPUT 13.11 1B A paper jam occurred in the first C-link device configured. It is an input device

DEVICE

(2000-sheet Input Tray or2x500-sheet Input Tray) with an error code 1B. This is normally a timeout at an entry or exit sensor. 66.22.09 OUTPUT DEVICE 66.22.09 A hardware malfunction occurred in the second C-link device configured. It is an

FAILURE

output device (Mailbox) with an error code 09. This is an external memory error. Note Be sure to print a configuration page to properly identify the input or output device configured. Notice that the error format only identifies the C-link device number and the device type; it does not identify which input or output device is used in the system. Figure 7-12 Error Format for Paper Handling C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 543,

Printer Message Tables

Printer messages are grouped according to the device generating the error. Within the groupings listed below, the alphabetic error messages are listed first, followed by the numeric messages. ● “Engine Error Messages” (page 545) ● “Duplexer Error Messages” (page 579) Input Devices ● “Envelope Feeder Error Messages” (page 564) ● “2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages” (page 557) ● “2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages” (page 561) Output Devices ● “7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages” (page 565) ● “8-bin Mailbox Error Messages” (page 570) ● “Stapler Error Messages” (page 576) ● “Paper Handling Device Controller Messages” (page 580) The following is an example of the format for numerical control panel messages. 13.yy PAPER JAM Device number in Device Type: the daisy chain Input or output device 544 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Engine Error Messages

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 13.1 PAPER JAM 13.1 zz Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. Paper Use the “Paper Path Test” on did not reach PS2. page 89 to see if a problem CHECK RIGHT exists from both engine trays. If

DOOR

PS2 is bad, it will fail when printing from Tray 2 or 3. Verify flag movement by manually inserting paper in the sensor path. Replace PS2 or the Paper Input Unit (PIU) Assembly. See “Paper Input Unit (PIU)” on page 260 for instructions. C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 545,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.3 PAPER JAM 13.3 XX Paper delay jam. Paper did not reach 1. Remove the toner cartridge, PS1 at the registration area. lift the green handle, and verify

CHECK RIGHT

the sensor flag operation.

DOOR

2. Make sure that the sensor is alternates with not broken.

THEN OPEN AND 3. Replace the registration CLOSE TOP assembly if necessary. See COVER “Registration Assembly” on

page 271 for instructions. 13.5 FUSER 13.5 XX Fuser output, paper late jam. Paper Remove the toner cartridge, and never reached PS1403 at the fusing check the path between the

OUTPUT, PAPER

assembly. registration and fusing

STOPPED JAM

assemblies. PS1403 on the sensor PCA may be faulty. 13.6 FUSER 13.6 XX PS1402 did not sense the paper. 1. Check the fuser flag at the Fuser output, paper stopped jam. sensor board area.

OUTPUT PAPER

Paper never exited the fusing 2. Check the fuser access door.

STOPPED JAM

assembly. 3. Make sure that the flag is not broken. PS1403 on the sensor PCA, or the delivery exit spring gears, may be faulty. 13.9 CHECK 13.9 XX Face-down bin paper late jam. Paper did not arrive at PS1402 when expected. Inspect the path

LEFT DOOR

between the fuser and delivery assemblies. Check the diverter assembly. 13.20 PAPER 13.20 XX The engine could not eject a page in Remove the jam from the the printer. The front panel message location indicated on the control

JAM CHECK ...

(...) will indicate the sensor closest to panel. the paper. 13.A PAPER JAM 13.A XX Paper stopped at the Face-down bin. Check the paper path. This jam is sensed by PS1402 on the

CHECK LEFT

sensor PCA.

DOOR

20 Error The printer received more data than 1. Press GO to print the can fit in its available memory. You transferred data (some data

INSUFFICIENT

might have tried to transfer too many might be lost).

MEMORY

macros, soft fonts, or complex 2. Simplify the print job, or install alternates with graphics. additional memory.

PRESS GO TO CONTINUE

546 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

21 PAGE TOO Error The data (dense text, rules, raster or 1. Press GO to print the vector graphics) sent to the printer transferred data. (Some data

COMPLEX

alternates with was too complex. might be lost.) 2. To print the job without losing

PRESS GO TO

data, from the Configuration

CONTINUE Menu in the printer control

panel, set PAGE PROTECT=ON, print the job, and then return to

PAGE PROTECT=AUTO. Do not

leave PAGE PROTECT=ON; it might degrade performance. If this message appears often, simplify the print job. 22 EIO x Error Too much data was sent to the EIO 1. Press GO to clear the card in the specified slot (x). An message. (Data will be lost.)

BUFFER

improper communications protocol 2. Check the host configuration.

OVERFLOW

may be in use. alternates with

PRESS GO TO CONTINUE

22 PARALLEL Error Too much data was sent to the 1. Check for a loose cable parallel port. connection and be sure to use a

I/O

This error can occur if the driver you high-quality cable. (Some non-

BUFFER

are using is not IEEE-1284 HP parallel cables might be

OVERFLOW compliant. For best results, use an missing pin connections or might

alternates with HP driver that came with the printer. otherwise not conform to the

PRESS GO TO IEEE-1284 specification.) CONTINUE This error can occur if the driver

you are using is not IEEE-1284 compliant. For best results, use an HP driver that came with the printer. 2. Press GO to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.) 22 SERIAL I/0 Error Too much data was sent to the serial 1. Make sure that the correct port. serial pacing option is selected

BUFFER

from the I/O Menu in the printer’s

OVERFLOW

control panel. alternates with 2. Print a Menu Map, and verify

PRESS GO TO that the serial pacing item (from CONTINUE the I/O Menu in the printer’s

control panel) matches the setting on the computer. 3. Press GO to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 547

,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

40 BAD SERIAL Error The printer encountered an error 1. Verify the cable connections. while transferring data from the Make sure that the printer’s

TRANSMISSION

alternates with computer. The error might have serial configuration is set the occurred for several reasons: same as the computer from the

PRESS GO TO

• The computer was powered on or I/O Menu in the printer’s control

CONTINUE off while the printer was online. panel.

• The printer’s serial configuration 2. The serial baud rate setting was not the same as the computer’s. can be accessed from the I/O Menu in the printer’s control panel. 3. Press GO to clear the error message and continue the printing. 4. Turn the printer off. 5. Reseat the EIO card, and turn the printer on. 40 EIO x BAD Error The connection has been broken 1. Turn the printer off, and reseat between the printer and the EIO card the card.

TRANSMISSION

alternates with in the specified slot. 2. Press GO to clear the error message and continue printing.

PRESS GO TO CONTINUE

41.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. Press GO. The page containing X Description the error will automatically be

PRINTER ERROR

alternates with 1 Unknown misprint error. reprinted. 2 Beam detect misprint error.

PRESS GO TO 3 See error 41.3. If this message persists: CONTINUE 4 No VSYNC error. 1. Reseat the connections to the

5 Media feed error. Laser/Scanner and the Engine 9 Noise VSREQ error. Controller Board. 2. Replace the Laser/Scanner. See “Laser/Scanner Assembly” on page 254 for instructions. 3. Replace the Engine Controller Board. 41.3 Error The paper size you are trying to print 1. Make sure that the control is not the same as the control panel panel setting for Tray 1 or the

UNEXPECTED

setting for Tray 1. Envelope Feeder is correctly

PAPER SIZE

adjusted for size. (The printer will continue trying to print the job until the size settings are correct.) 2. Press GO. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. (Or, you might want to press CANCEL JOB to clear the job from the printer’s memory.) 548 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

50.x FUSER Critical Error A fuser error has occurred. Turn the printer off for at least 20 X Description minutes, and then turn the

ERROR

1 Low Fuser temperature. printer on. 2 Fuser warm up service. 3 High Fuser temperature. If the error continues: 4 Faulty Fuser. 1. Make sure that the Fusing 5 Inconsistent Fuser. Assembly is installed correctly and is fully seated into its connectors (no bent pins or pins outside their receptacles). 2. Reseat or replace the fuser cable assembly. 3. Replace the DC Controller. 51.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Press GO. The page X Description containing the error will

PRINTER ERROR

1 Beam detect error. automatically be reprinted. 2 Laser error. 2. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. 3. Reseat the cables. See the wiring diagrams at the back of this manual. 4. Replace the Laser/Scanner. See “Laser/Scanner Assembly” on page 254 for instructions. 52.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Press GO. The page X Description containing the error will

PRINTER ERROR

0 Laser/scanner error. automatically be reprinted. 1 Laser/scanner startup error. 2. Turn the printer off, and then 2 Laser/scanner rotation error. turn the printer on. 3. Reseat the cables. See the wiring diagrams at the back of this manual. 4. Replace the Laser/Scanner. See “Laser/Scanner Assembly” on page 254 for instructions.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 549

,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

53.xy.zz Critical Error There is a problem with the printer’s 1. Turn the printer off, and reseat memory. The DIMM that caused the or replace the specified DIMM.

PRINTER ERROR

error will not be used. Values of x, y, 2. Try the DIMM in another slot. and zz are as follows: 3. Replace the DIMM that caused the error. x = DIMM type 0 = ROM 1 = RAM y = Device location 0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM) 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 zz = Error number 0 = Unsupported memory (for example, presence detect bad) 1 = Unrecognized memory (for example, presence detect bad) 2 = Unsupported memory size 3 = Failed RAM test 4 = Exceeded maximum RAM size 5 = Exceeded maximum ROM size 6 = Invalid DIMM speed 7 = DIMM reporting information incorrectly 8 = DIMM RAM parity error 9 = ROM needs to be mapped to an unsupported address 10 = DIMM address conflict 11 = PDC XROM out of bounds 12 = Unable to make a temporary mapping 550 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

55.x Error A printer error has occurred. Press GO to clear the error X Description message.

PRINTER ERROR

0 NO_RESET_REPORT alternates with 1 NO_ENGINE_RESPONSE

PRESS GO TO 2 EXCESSIVE_GLITCHES CONTINUE 3 LOST_PPRDY_SIGNAL

4 COMMUNICATION_TIMEOUT 5 BAD_TRAY_BIN_REPORTS 6 ECC7_COMMAND_ERROR 7 INCOMING_PARITY_ERROR 8 OUTGOING_PARITY_ERROR 9 MISSED_INTERRUPT A HUNG_COMMUNICATIONS B LOST_XISR_ERROR C INVALID_BUS_TIMEOUT D VERY_LATE_ECOMM_ISR 56.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Press GO. The page X Description containing the error will

PRINTER ERROR

1 Illegal input. automatically be reprinted. alternates with 2 Illegal output. 2. Turn the printer off, and then

CYCLE POWER TO turn the printer on. CONTINUE 3. Check the printer’s

configuration. 57.X Critical Error A fan motor failure occurred. All fans Turn the printer off, and then turn are enabled to low speed operation the printer on.

FAN FAILURE

at power on. Fans will go into high If the message continues, check speed operation during the print and reseat the cabling between cycle. the fan motors and the DC X Description Controller PCA. 2 Fan 3 - Formatter Fan (intake) 3 Fan 2 - Low-voltage power supply (exhaust) 5 Fan 1 -Laser/scanner (exhaust)Low-voltage power supply (exhaust) 6 Fan 4 - Face-down delivery (exhaust) 9 Fan 5 - Tray 1 fan 58.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn X Description the printer on.

PRINTER ERROR

1 Tray 1 lifter malfunction. alternates with 2 Tray 2 lifter malfunction.

CYCLE POWER TO 3 Tray 3 lifter malfunction. CONTINUE 4 Tray 4 lifter malfunction.

X Tray X lifter malfunction.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 551

,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

59.x Critical Error A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn X Description the printer on.

PRINTER ERROR

0 Motor error. 1 Motor startup error. 2 Motor rotation error. 62.x Critical Error There is a problem with the printer’s Reseat or replace the specified

PRINTER ERROR memory. The x value refers to the DIMM.

location of the problem: 0 = Internal memory 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 64 Critical Error A scan buffer error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.

PRINTER ERROR

If this message persists, replace the Formatter. 68 NVRAM ERROR Error An error occurred in the printer’s 1. Print a configuration page and nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and check the printer settings to

CHECK SETTINGS

one or more printer settings has determine which values have been reset to its factory default. changed. 2. Remove EIO card. It will be reset if not removed. 3. Hold down CANCEL JOB while turning the printer on. This will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used. 68 NVRAM FULL Error The printer’s nonvolatile memory 1. Print a configuration page and (NVRAM) is full. Some settings check the printer settings to

CHECK SETTINGS

might have been reset to the factory determine which values have defaults. changed. 2. Remove EIO card. It will be reset if not removed. 3. Hold down CANCEL JOB while turning the printer on. This will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used. 69.x Critical Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Turn the printer off, and then X Description turn the printer on.

PRINTER ERROR

0 The duplex mechanism has failed. 2. Reseat the duplexer. 1 The duplex slide adjust has failed. 552 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

79.xxxx Critical Error The printer detected an error. The 1. Turn the printer off, and then numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific turn the printer on.

PRINTER ERROR

type of error. 2. Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the first application and try printing a different file. (If the message only appears with a certain software application or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.) If the message persists, try the following: 1. Cycle power. 2. Reseat or replace the interface cable and cycle power. 3. Remove the DIMMs one at a time and cycle power. 4. Try using the parallel interface, if possible. 5. With the EIO cards removed from the printer, perform a cold reset. 6. Remove the Hard Disk and cycle power. 7. If the error persists, replace the Formatter. 8X.YYYY Critical Error The EIO accessory card in slot X 1. Move the EIO card to another has encountered a critical error as slot.

EIO ERROR

specified by YYYY. 2. If the error persists, replace the EIO card. 3. If the error is corrected, reseat the EIO card in the original slot.

BAD OPT TRAY Error The optional tray is not connected 1. Re-install the optional tray.

properly. 2. Make sure the optional tray is

CONNECTION

connected and the connector is not damaged. 3. Replace the optional tray.

CHECK INPUT Error The optional input tray cannot feed Check the doors and paper

paper to the printer because a door guides.

DEVICE

alternates with or paper guide is open.

PAPER PATH OPEN PLEASE CLOSE IT C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 553

,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message CHECK OUTPUT Error The paper path between the printer Close the paper path.

and the external paper handling

DEVICE

alternates with output device is open and must be closed before printing can continue.

CLOSE OUTPUT DELIVERY PATH EXTERNAL Status When an external paper handling No action required.

device is connected to the printer, it

DEVICE

must have 10 seconds to initialize

INITIALIZING

after boot or after coming out of PowerSave mode.

MANUALLY FEED Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified Load the specified type of paper

size paper. into Tray 1. [SIZE]

MANUALLY FEED Error One of the following occurred: 1. Load the requested paper into

• A manual feed was requested. Tray 1. [TYPE] [SIZE] • There is no paper in Tray 1. 2. Press GO if the desired paper • The wrong size paper is loaded. is already loaded in Tray 1. • The control panel is not set for the 3. Press - VALUE + to scroll kind of paper loaded. through the available types and sizes. 4. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.

MANUALLY FEED Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified Load the specified type of

type of envelope. envelope into Tray 1. [TYPE] ENV

MANUALLY FEED Error Tray 1 does not contain an envelope. Load an envelope into Tray 1. TRAY 1 ENVELOPE OUTPUT BIN Error The output bin is full and needs to be 1. Remove the media from the

emptied. Face-down bin.

FULL

alternates with 2. Make sure that the sensor flag moves freely.

CLEAR PAPER FROM [BINNAME] TRAY X Warning The media type in the specified tray Load known media, or set the

cannot be determined. correct media type.

CONTAINS UNKNOWN MEDIA

554 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message TRAY X EMPTY Warning The paper tray is empty. Paper is 1. Load the empty tray (x) to

sensed in the tray by black plastic clear the message. flags and photosensors. If paper is If you do not load the specified not in a tray, the flags will rotate tray, the printer will continue through an access in the upper tray. printing from the next available When paper is present, the flags are tray, and the message will blocked from rotating through this continue to display. access. 2. Make sure that the paper out flag is not stuck in the down position by rough media. Do this before opening the tray. To check this flag without opening Tray 2, remove the Duplexer if it is present. 3. Open the Front Access Door. This provides you with a clear view of the Tray 2 paper out sensor flag. To check this flag without opening Tray 3, use a flashlight to observe the paper out flag. If either paper flag is damaged, replace the paper flag or the paper input tray. If the printer is using Tray 2 or 3 and the message is accompanied by a clicking noise every few seconds, replace the Paper Input Unit Assembly. See “Paper Input Unit (PIU)” on page 260 for instructions.

TRAY X LIFTING Error Displays when tray X is in the 1. If the message does not go

process of lifting the paper to the top away, verify that the media can of the tray for proper feeding. be pulled from another tray. 2. The Paper Input Unit may need to be replaced. See “Paper Input Unit (PIU)” on page 260 for instructions.

TRAY XX LOAD Error Tray X does not contain the specified Load the specified size of paper

size of paper. into Tray X. [SIZE]

TRAY XX LOAD Error Tray X does not contain the specified Load the requested paper into

size of paper. the indicated tray, or press [SIZE] SELECT to override the message and to print on a loaded paper size.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 555

,

Table 7-4. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message TRAY xx LOAD Error One of the following occurred: 1. Load the requested paper into

• There is no paper loaded in the the specified tray (x). [TYPE] [SIZE] specified tray, or the paper is not the Make sure that the trays are size requested, or the control panel correctly adjusted for size. is not set for the size of paper The tray type settings (and size loaded. for Tray 1) must be set from the • The tray is not properly adjusted for printer’s control panel. size. If you are trying to print A4 or • The default paper size is set letter size paper and this incorrectly. message appears, make sure • If this message appears and the that the default paper size is set tray contains the correct size of correctly from the Printing Menu paper, a sensor could be damaged in the printer’s control panel. or a paper sensor lever could be 2. Press GO to print from the stuck. next available tray. 3. Press - VALUE + to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size. 5. Inspect the switches in the tray. 6. Turn the printer on with the tray removed and push the switches by hand to see if they register.

TRAY X OPEN Warning The specified tray is open. Close the tray to continue. UNSUPPORTED Error An external paper handling device Load a supported paper size in

detected an unsupported paper size. the tray.

SIZE IN TRAY

The printer will go offline until the [YY] condition is corrected.

USE [TYPE] Error If the requested paper size or type is 1. Press - VALUE + to scroll

not available, the printer asks if it through the available types and [SIZE] should use another paper size or sizes.

INSTEAD?

type instead. 2. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size. 556 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Input Device Messages

2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Table 7-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message Input Device 65.11.01 The detected tray is not consistent 1. Make sure the size, source, with the paper size specified by the and type of paper selected from Condition Paper Handling Controller. the software configuration is 11.01 correct. 2. Pull out Tray 4 to verify that the size and type of paper loaded matches to the size and type specified in the software configuration. C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 557,

Table 7-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.11 PAPER 13.11 11 Timeout at Entry sensor (PS31) on 1. Open the Vertical Transfer the 2000-sheet Input Tray Unit (VTU) and remove media.

JAM IN INPUT

2. Make sure that the ENTRY

DEVICE 13.11 1B Timeout at Exit sensor (PS32) on the Sensor (PS31) can move freely.

2000-sheet Input Tray. 3. Make sure that the three feed, 13.11 21 Page stays longer at Entry sensor separation, and pickup rollers (PS31) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. are properly seated. 4. If the problem persists, open 13.11 2B Page stays longer at Exit sensor the VTU and override its Open/ (PS32) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Close Door Sensor (PS35), perform a Paper Path Test feeding from the 2000-sheet Input Tray, and make sure the feed rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do not rotate, verify the connections at the Pickup Assembly and the Controller PCA in the input device. 5. If the rollers rotate and drop down, but do not advance the paper, replace the feed and separation rollers using the maintenance kit. 6. If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down, replace the Pickup Assembly. 7. If the problem persists, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) where sensor (PS31) is located. 13.11 PAPER 13.11 31 At power on, Entry sensor (PS31) at 1. Open the Vertical Transfer the VTU is active. Unit (VTU) and remove media.

JAM IN INPUT

2. Verify that sensor (PS31 and

DEVICE

PS32) moves freely. 3. If any of the sensors (PS31 or PS32) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 13.11 PAPER 13.11 3B At power on, Exit sensor (PS32) at 1. Open the Vertical Transfer the VTU is active. Unit (VTU) and remove media.

JAM IN INPUT

2. Verify that sensor (PS31 and

DEVICE

PS32) moves freely. 3. If any of the sensors (PS31 or PS32) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 558 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

66.11.01 INPUT 66.11.01 Lifting motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no objects or fragments of paper in

DEVICE FAILURE

the free area at the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4). 2. Make sure that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand. 3. Make sure that the paper size plates are installed correctly, and that they are not bent. 4. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly's Bushing, if broken. 5. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 6. Replace the 2000-sheet Input Tray's (Tray 4) paper tray. 66.11.02 INPUT 66.11.02 Feed motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no objects or fragments of paper in

DEVICE FAILURE

the free area at the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4). 2. Check Paper Tray Raised Sensor (PS34) that is working properly (perform a sensor test). 3. Check for proper installation of the Pick up roller. 4. Check the Pickup assembly and Paper Deck Drive Assembly cabling. 5. Replace the Pickup assembly or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly, if necessary.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 559

,

Table 7-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

66.11.03 INPUT 66.11.03 Lifting and feed motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no objects or fragments of paper in

DEVICE FAILURE

the free area at the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4). 2. Make sure that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand. 3. Make sure that the paper size plates are installed correctly, and they are not bent. 4. Check for broken Paper Deck Drive Assembly's Bushing, if so replace it. 5. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 6. Check Paper Tray Raised Sensor (PS34) is working properly (perform a sensor test). 7. Check for proper installation of the Pickup roller. 8. Check Pickup Assembly cabling. 9. Replace the Pickup Assembly. 560 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Table 7-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message Input Device 65.11.01 The detected tray is not consistent 1. Make sure the size, source, with the paper size specified by and type of paper selected from Condition Paper Handling Controller. the software configuration is 11.01 correct. 2. Pull out tray 4 or 5 to verify that the size and type of paper loaded matches to the size and type specified in the software configuration. C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 561,

Table 7-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message Input Device 65.11.04 Lifter malfunction. 1. Make sure that the lifting plate

lifts up freely by hand.

Condition

2. Make sure that the paper size 11.04 plate is installed correctly, and is not bent or broken. 3. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly's Bushing, if broken. 4. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 5. Replace the2x500-sheet Input Tray's corresponding paper tray.

Input Device 65.11.06 Requested to feed more than 4 1. Check for proper installation

pages at a time. of the Pickup roller.

Condition

2. Check the Pickup assembly 11.06 and the Paper Deck Drive Assembly cabling. 3. Replace the Pickup assembly or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly, if necessary. 562 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.11 PAPER 13.11 11 Page did not arrive at entry sensor. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and remove media.

JAM IN INPUT 13.11 1B Page did not arrive to exit sensor. 2. Make sure that the ENTRY DEVICE

13.11 21 Page stays longer at entry sensor. Sensor (PS1) can move freely. 3. Make sure that the three feed, 13.11 2B Page stays longer at exit sensor. separation, and pickup rollers are properly seated. 4. If the problem persists, open the VTU and override its Open/ Close Door Sensor (PS35), perform a Paper Path Test feeding from the2x500-sheet Input Tray, and make sure the feed rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do not rotate, verify the connections at the Pickup Assembly and the Controller PCA in the input device. 5. If the rollers rotate and drop down, but do not advance the paper, replace the feed and separation rollers using the maintenance kit. 6. If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down, replace the Pickup Assembly. 7. If the problem persists, Replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) where sensor (PS31) is located. 13.11 PAPER 13.11 31 At power on, entry sensor is active. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and remove media.

JAM IN INPUT

2. Verify that sensor (PS1 and

DEVICE

PS2) moves freely. 3. If any of the sensors (PS1 or PS2) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 13.11 PAPER 13.11 3B At power on, exit sensor is active. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and remove media.

JAM IN INPUT

2. Verify that sensor (PS1 and

DEVICE

PS2) moves freely. 3. If any of the sensors (PS1 or PS2) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 563

,

Envelope Feeder Error Messages Table 7-7. Envelope Feeder Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message ENVELOPE Warning The envelope feeder is empty. Refill the envelope feeder.

Printing of the current job is not

FEEDER EMPTY

interrupted.

ENV FEEDER Error The envelope feeder does not have Put the requested paper into the

the requested paper. envelope feeder.

LOAD [SIZE] ENV FEEDER Error There is no envelope in the feeder, 1. Load the requested envelope

the wrong size is loaded in the type and size into the envelope

LOAD [TYPE]

feeder, or the type and size is set feeder. [SIZE] incorrectly in the control panel. 2. Make sure that the envelope size and type are set correctly from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. 3. Press GO if the desired envelope is already loaded in the feeder. 4. Press - VALUE + to scroll through the available types and sizes. 5. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.

WRONG ENVELOPE Error The envelope feeder you are trying Install the correct envelope

to install will not work for this printer. feeder.

FEEDER INSTALLED

564 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Output Device Messages

7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages Table 7-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 13.12 or 13.22 13.12 01 Unexpected page at (ES) Entry 1. Open the Top Cover and or Sensor. remove any jammed paper. PAPER JAM IN 13.22 01 2. Make sure that the Entry OUTPUT DEVICE Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If a problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 13.12.11 or Page did not reach the Entry Sensor 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22.11 (ES) on time. remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 565,

Table 7-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.12 or 13.22 13.12 12 Page did not reach the Paper Path 1. Open the Paper Path Cover or Sensor 1 (PPS1) on time. and remove any jammed paper.

PAPER JAM IN

13.22 12 2. Make sure that the Paper Path

OUTPUT DEVICE

Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely. (continued) 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 1(PPS1) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 15 Page did not reach the Paper Path 1. Open the Paper Path Cover or Sensor 2 (PPS2) on time. and remove any jammed paper. 13.22 15 2. Make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 17 Page did not reach the Face-up 1. Open the Top Cover and or Delivery Sensor (FUDS) on time. remove any jammed paper. 13.22 17 2. Make sure that the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (FUDS) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 13.12 21 or Page stays at Entry Sensor (ES). 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 21 remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 566 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.12 or 13.22 13.12 22 or Page stays at Paper Path Sensor 1 1. Open the Paper Path Cover 13.22 22 (PPS1). and remove any jammed paper.

PAPER JAM IN

2. Make sure that the Paper Path

OUTPUT DEVICE

Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely. (continued) 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 1(PPS1) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 25 or Page stays at Paper Path Sensor 2 1. Open the Paper Path Cover 13.22 25 (PPS2). and remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 27 or Page stays at Face-up Delivery 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 27 Sensor (FUDS). remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (FUDS) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 13.12 31 or Page found at Entry Sensor (ES) 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 31 during power on sequence. remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 567

,

Table 7-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.12 or 13.22 13.12 32 or Page found at Paper Path Sensor 1 1. Open the Paper Path Cover 13.22 32 (PPS1) during power on sequence. and remove any jammed paper.

PAPER JAM IN

2. Make sure that the Paper Path

OUTPUT DEVICE

Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely. (continued) 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 1(PPS1) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 35 or Page found at Paper Path Sensor 2 1. Open the Paper Path Cover 13.22 35 (PPS2) during power on sequence. and remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 37 or Page found at Face-up Delivery 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 37 Sensor (FUDS) during power on remove any jammed paper. sequence. 2. Make sure that the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (FUDS) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 66.12.16 or 66.12 16 or Solenoid Malfunction. 1. Check that the 2 parallel black 66.22.16 bars that are connected to the 66.22.16 Diverter Solenoids (S3 and S4)

OUTPUT DEVICE

have free movement.

FAILURE 2. Check for proper installation

of the C-link cables. 3. Replace the C-link cables. 4. Replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 568 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 66.12.32 or 66.12 32 or Solenoid Malfunction. 1. Check that the 2 parallel black 66.22.32 bars that are connected to the 66.22.32 Diverter Solenoids (S3 and S4) OUTPUT DEVICE have free movement. FAILURE 2. Check for proper installation of the C-link cables. 3. Replace the C-link cables. 4. Replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 569, 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages Table 7-9. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 22.1 or 12.1 65.22.01 The Face-up Bin is too full. 1. Empty the Face-up Bin. or 2. Check that sensor flag moves OUTPUT DEVICE 65.12.01 freely. (PSFaceFull.)

CONDITION

3. Check for proper cable connection in flipper area. 4. If the problem persists, replace the Flipper assembly. 570 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-9. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message OUTPUT DEVICE 65.22.02 Elevator Problem (Home not Found). 1. Check that the blind cover or

or scan bar is installed properly. CONDITION 22.2 65.12.02 2. Check for jammed paper in or 12.2 the delivery head assembly. 3. Check for free movement of the delivery head assembly. 4. Check that all paper bins are seated correctly. 5. Check that paper bins or the blind cover are not broken. 6. Replace the delivery head motor. 7. Replace the MBM controller PCA. 8. Replace the delivery head assembly.

OUTPUT DEVICE 65.22.03 Elevator Problem Scanning bins 1. Check that the blind cover or

or Error. scan bar is installed properly. CONDITION 22.3 65.12.03 2. Check for jammed paper in or 12.3 the delivery head assembly. 3. Check for free movement of the delivery head assembly. 4. Check that all paper bins are seated correctly. 5. Check that there is no paper bin or blind cover broken. 6. If the error message persists, replace the delivery head motor (M1), the MBM controller PCA, or the Delivery Head Assembly.

OUTPUT DEVICE 65.22.04 Slider Jam in the head assembly. 1. Perform a paper path test.

or 2. Check for damaged sensor CONDITION 22.4 65.12.04 (PSExit 1) or (PSExit 2) in the or 12.4 delivery head assembly. 3. Check fingers in the head assembly, they must be over the ejector rollers. 4. Replace the Head Assembly.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 571

,

Table 7-9. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.22 or 13.12 13.22 01 Flipper Entry Sensor (PSEntry) Jam. 1. Open the Jam Access Door or and remove any jammed paper.

PAPER JAM IN

13.12 01 2. Make sure that the Full Bin

OUTPUT DEVICE

Sensor Flag (PSFaceFull) moves freely. 3. Make sure that the Flipper's shaft is not out of place. 4. If the problem persists, replace Flipper Assembly. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 13.22 02 Flipper Face-up Sensor (PSFaceup) 1. Open the Jam Access Door or Jam. and remove any jammed paper. 13.12 02 2. Make sure that the Full Bin Sensor Flag (PSFaceFull) moves freely. 3. Make sure that the Flipper's shaft is not out of place. 4. If the problem persists, replace the Flipper Assembly. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 13.22 03 Belt Jam (Transport Belt Motor (M5) 1. Check for jammed paper at or stop for an unexpected reason). the double-belt system and 13.12 03 Delivery Head Assembly. 2. Ensure free movement of the double belt (both belts). 3. Ensure parallel position of the double belt system. 4. Check that the Metal Tape is in place and in good condition. 5. Replace the Transport Belt Motor (M5). 6. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 7. Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. 572 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-9. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.22 or 13.12 13.22 04 Jam in Head Assembly at (PSExit 1). 1. Check for jammed paper in or the Delivery Head Assembly.

PAPER JAM IN

13.12 04 2. Ensure free movement in

OUTPUT DEVICE

(PSExit 1) sensor flags on the delivery head assembly. 3. Check the delivery roller's fingers. They must be over the ejector rollers on the delivery head assembly. 4. Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller PCA. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 6. Replace Delivery Head Assembly. 13.22 or 13.12 13.22 05 Jam in Head Assembly at (PSExit 2). 1. Check for jammed paper in or the Delivery Head Assembly.

PAPER JAM IN

12.12 05 2. Ensure free movement in

OUTPUT DEVICE

(PSExit 2) sensor flags on the delivery head assembly. 3. Check the delivery roller's fingers. They must be over the ejector rollers on the delivery head assembly. 4. Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller PCA. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 6. Replace Delivery Head Assembly.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 573

,

Table 7-9. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13.22 or 13.12 13.22 06 Elevator (Head Assembly) Jam when 1. Check for jammed paper in or scanning and looking for home the delivery head assembly.

PAPER JAM IN

13.12 06 position. 2. Check that the blind cover is

OUTPUT DEVICE

properly installed. 3. Check that the Scan Bar (if stapler unit is installed) is properly seated. 4. Check for free movement of the delivery head assembly. 5. Check that all paper bins are seated correctly. 6. Check for broken paper bins, blind cover, or Scan Bar. 7. Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller PCA. 8. Replace the delivery head motor (M1). 9. Replace the MBM controller PCA. 10. Replace the delivery head assembly. 13.22 or 13.12 13.22 0A Communication problem. Wrong 1. Make sure that all the C-link or Page Request. cables are properly installed and

PAPER JAM IN

13.12 0A the connectors of this cables are

OUTPUT DEVICE

tight enough. 2. Move the 8-bin Mailbox away from the Engine and resend the job. 3. Replace the C-link cables. 4. Perform a Power Cycle. 5. If the error condition persists, replace the Formatter board. 66.12.08 or 66.12.08 Flipper Motor Malfunction. 1. Check for jammed paper in or the Flipper Assembly area. 66.22.08 66.22 08 2. Replace Flipper assembly.

OUTPUT DEVICE

3. Replace the MBM controller

FAILURE PCA.

66.12.09 or 66.12.09 External Memory Error. Replace the MBM Controller or PCA. 66.22.09 66.22 09

OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE

574 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-9. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 66.12.zz or 66.12.zz MBM C-link is not responding. 1. Check for proper installation or of the C-link cables. 66.22.zz 66.12.zz 2. Replace the C-link cables. OUTPUT DEVICE 3. Replace the 8-bin Mailbox FAILURE controller PCA. C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 575,

Finisher Devices Messages Stapler Error Messages

Table 7-10. Stapler Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message CHECK FINISHER Error A stapler jam or a paper jam 1. Clear the paper from the occurred. stapler.

DEVICE

alternates with 2. Open the top cover of the stapler and clear the stapler jam. CLEAR JAM 3. Resend the print job. CHECK FINISHER Error The paper is not aligned correctly in 1. Remove the paper from the the stapler. stapler.

DEVICE

alternates with 2. Resend the print job. FINISHER ALIGN

ERROR

576 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Table 7-10. Stapler Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message FINISHER LOW Warning The finishing device is running out of Refill the finishing device.

finishing material.

ON FINISHING AGENT FINISHER OUT Error The external paper handling finisher Refill the finishing device.

device is out of binding agent.

OF BINDING AGENT STAPLER LOW ON Warning The stapler device is running out of Refill the stapler device.

staples.

STAPLES STAPLER OUT OF Warning The external paper handling stapler Refill the stapler device.

device is out of staples.

STAPLES TOO MANY PAGES Warning The external paper handling stapler Staple the pages manually.

device received too many pages to

IN JOB TO

staple. The pages will be ejected

STAPLE

unstapled. 13.23 or 13.33 0A Staple Jam. • Clear jammed staple. • Replace staple cartridge. 13.33 PAPER • Replace Stapler Top Cover

JAM IN OUTPUT

Assembly.

DEVICE • Replace Stapler Controller

PCA. 13.33 0B Rack Jam. • Remove jammed media. • Perform a device reset cycle by opening and closing the Stapler Top Cover. • Manually move the internal parts of the stapling unit looking for free movement. • Replace the Stapler Top Cover Assembly. • Replace the Stapler Controller

PCA

13.33 0C Slider Jam. • Remove jammed media. • Perform a device reset cycle by opening and closing the Stapler Top Cover. • Manually move the sliders looking for free movement and observe the power on sequence. • Replace the Stapling Bed Assembly • Replace the Stapler Controller PCA.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 577

, Table 7-10. Stapler Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 13.23 or 13.33 0D Retainer Jam. • Remove jammed media. • Perform a device reset cycle by 13.33 PAPER opening and closing the Stapler JAM IN OUTPUT Top Cover. DEVICE • If the problem persists replace the Stapling Bed Assembly. 578 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Duplexer Error Messages Table 7-11. Duplexer Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

13. 1 13.1 0B Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. No 1. Open the front door, and page from Duplexer. remove any paper. 2. Open the right door, and remove any paper. 3. Remove any paper from the Duplexer. 4. Perform a Paper Path Test using the Duplexer. 5. Check that the sensors in the Duplexer have free movement. 6. If the problem persists, replace the entire Duplexer Unit. 13.1 16 Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 2nd sensor. 13.1 1F Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 2nd sensor. 13.10 13.10 15 Duplex turn around. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 1st sensor. 13.11 13.11 04 Duplex turn around. Paper stopped jam. Duplexer's 1st sensor. 13.12 13.12 0D Duplex path. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 2nd sensor. 13.20 13.20 08 Could not automatically eject paper.

C4229-90911 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 579

,

Paper Handling Controller Error Messages Table 7-12. Paper Handling Controller Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message

66.00.zz 66.00.01 A communication error occurred in 1. Turn the printer off, and then through the Paper Handling Controller or in turn the printer on.

SERVICE ERROR

66.00.65 the controller PCA of an external 2. Replace or exchange C-link paper handling device. cables. 3. If the problem persists, replace the PCA controller board for the input or output device. 4. If the problem persists, replace the Formatter PCA. 66.00.15 66.00.15 The Paper Handling Controller had a 1. Turn the printer off, and then bad C-link (communication) cable. turn the printer on.

SERVICE ERROR

This error could be caused by a 2. If the problem persists, check power failure. the C-link and power cables. 3. If the problem persists, check the device power connector and power supply (internal or external). Replace if damaged. 4. If the problem persists, replace the PCA Controller board for the device. 5. If the problem persists, replace the Formatter PCA. 66.00.23 66.00.23 Error 66.00.23 is due to a bad C- 1. Turn the printer off, and then link connection or a damaged C-link turn the printer on.SERVICE ERROR cable. 2. If the problem persists, replace the PCA Controller board for the input or output device. 3. If the problem persists, replace the Formatter PCA. 580 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Step 4 Paper Path Troubleshooting

Paper jams occur in the printer when paper either does not reach or clear a photosensor along the printer's paper path in a specific amount of time. If a paper jam occurs, a 13.xx PAPER JAM message is displayed on the printer's Control Panel. The following lists general questions you should ask and topics you should explore prior to troubleshooting: Table 7-13. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions Problem Action What is the frequency of the Verify with the customer. Print or display the Event Log to paper jams (e.g. determine paper jam history. See “Display” on page 538 and continuous, one jam per “Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages” on page 542 100 pages, one jam per and evaluate the Event Log. 1000 pages, etc.)? Do paper jams only occur See “Paper Jams” on page 582 and use the Paper Path Test to when the paper is fed from isolate the problem. a particular paper input source (e.g., Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, or Envelope Feeder)? Do jams only occur when Use “Paper Path Test” on page 584 to isolate the problem. paper is output to a specific output bin (e.g., Face-down bin, Face-up Bin, mailbox bin, duplex operation, stapler)? Do paper jams occur with a Try known good media. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper specific type of media? Specifications Guide. Where does the leading Attempt to duplicate. See “Paper Path Test” on page 584. Inspect edge of the first sheet of the paper path and all paper path mechanical assemblies prior to paper in the printer's paper the leading paper jam. path stop when a jam occurs? Are any sheets of paper physically damaged or torn? C4229-90911 Paper Path Troubleshooting 581, Table 7-13. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions (continued) Problem Action Is the customer loading the Observe the customer loading the paper. Do not fan the paper. paper trays correctly? See proper paper handling procedures in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide. Is the customer overfilling Make sure that the paper is NOT over the maximum fill marks in the paper trays? the paper trays. Observe the customer loading paper in the trays. Are the paper tray guides Make sure that the Tray 2 and 3 left-side paper fence is set set correctly? correctly at both the front and rear of the tray. Make sure that the front fence is locked into the correct position. For Tray 4, make sure that all adjustments are set correctly: front, back, and side at the top and bottom of the tray. Does the printer need Inspect the paper path and paper path rollers. See “Cleaning the cleaning? Mopier and Accessories” on page 112. When was the User From the Configuration Page, determine the number of pages Maintenance performed on since the last maintenance (see figure 7-16 on page 590). The the printer? Printer Maintenance Kit should be installed every 350,000 images.

Paper Jams

Paper jams occur most often when: ● Paper trays are not correctly loaded. Make sure the paper is loaded with the arrow pointing up in Tray 1 and down in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5. ● The print media does not meet the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide. ● The media is in poor condition. ● The printer needs cleaning. The printer monitors the timing of four sensors to determine that a paper jam has occurred: PS2, PS1, PS1403, and PS1402. 582 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, If a paper jam occurs, the printer will display a 13.x PAPER JAM message on the control panel. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 544 for detailed descriptions of the 13.x messages and the recommended actions to resolve the errors. Figure 7-13 shows the possible locations for most of the paper jams. Figure 7-13 Paper Path Jam Locations 1 Toner cartridge area 7 Tray 2 and Tray32Tray 1 pickup roller and feed area 8 Fusing Assembly Area 3 Right door 9 Left door 4 Tray 4 (2000-sheet Input Tray) and 10 8-bin Mailbox Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox not shown) transfer door (not shown) 5 Tray 4 (2000-sheet Input Tray) and 11 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, not shown) 6 Front door C4229-90911 Paper Path Troubleshooting 583,

Paper Path Test

Using the error trend information from “Display” on page 538, you can verify a specific printer paper path with the paper path test. You must first set the desired paper destination in the configuration menu and then select the paper path test. The paper path test menu will allow you to select the desired paper source and number. Note Feeding paper from Tray 1 will not allow the user to send paper to the Face-down output bins during this test. Note If the 8-bin Mailbox is installed, in order to perform the paper path test, the printer must be configured to mailbox mode. If the printer is not in mailbox mode, ask the network administrator to change the configuration to mailbox mode to complete this test.

To perform a paper path test:

1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT PAPER PATH TEST appears. 3 Press SELECT. 4 Press + or - until the desired input tray appears. 5 Press SELECT. 6 Press + or - until the desired output bin appears. 7 Press SELECT. 8 Press + or - until the desired duplex mode appears. 9 Press SELECT. 10 Press + or - to choose the desired number of copies. 11 Press SELECT. 584 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-14 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection

Customer Print Job

Ask the customer to send a print job from the problem source(s) to the problem destination(s). Try to recreate the paper jam errors by having the customer do typical print jobs and the type of print job that has been causing the paper jams. When verifying print jobs, make sure that all of the settings are selected as desired. Keep in mind that application settings take priority over driver settings, which take priority over the printer control panel settings. If a single setting is not present in the application, but is set in the driver, that will override the front panel settings. Note JetAdmin does have capabilities to override paper types and sizes and certain conditions. See the HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N and 8100 DN Printers User Guide for more information. C4229-90911 Paper Path Troubleshooting 585,

Clearing Paper Jams

Note Open and close all printer covers to clear the paper jam message. After removing a sheet of paper, you may need to check other areas to make sure that all paper has been removed. All portions of a jammed piece of paper must be removed or you may run into repeated jams. If the jam persists, try the following: ● If you have PostScript installed, use the JAM RECOVERY=ON menu item under the PostScript Menu. The printer will attempt to automatically recover from paper jams. ● Execute a formfeed from the computer or the printer's control panel. A formfeed may flush any paper or envelopes left in the printer. ● Check to make sure you have located and removed all scraps of paper from inside the printer. ● Use the Event Log Page and Event Log Codes to aid you in isolating where the errors are occurring.

Clearing Repeated Paper Jams

1 Check to see that media is correctly loaded in trays and that all width guides are correctly set (not skewed). 2 Try turning over the stack of paper in the tray. If you are using letterhead paper, try printing from Tray 1. 3 Do not use previously printed paper or torn, worn, or irregular paper. 4 Check the media specifications. If it is outside of the recommended specifications, problems may occur. (See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide.) 5 The printer may be dirty. Clean the printer as described in the first section of this chapter. 6 Check that paper loaded in Tray 1 is NOT longer than 17.7 inches (450 mm) or wider than 11.7 inches (297 mm). (These are the maximum dimensions that the printer can feed; otherwise the printer will jam.) 7 Make sure that Tray 4 and Tray 5 are set for the size of paper installed and that the tray is not overloaded with paper. 586 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Step 5 Information Pages

From the printer’s Control Panel you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current configuration. The following information pages are described: ● Menu Map (below) ● Event Log (page 538) ● Configuration Pages (page 589) ● File Directory Page (page 592) ● Usage Page (page 593) For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, print a Menu Map and see the Information Menu.

Menu Map

To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the Mopier Control Panel, print a Control Panel Menu Map: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT MENU MAP appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the Menu Map. The content of the Menu Map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. The printer driver or software application can override many of these values. See figure 7-15 on page 588 for a sample Menu Map. C4229-90911 Information Pages 587, Figure 7-15 Sample Menu Map Table 7-14. Key to Figure 7-15 Information Menu lets you print information pages and perform a paper path test. Paper Handling Menu contains paper handling options. Print Quality Menu lets you set print quality settings. Printing Menu contains various print options. Configuration Menu contains various printer settings. I/O Menu contains communication settings. Resets Menu shows options for resetting the printer. Note Items will only appear if options are installed. 588 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Configuration Pages

Use the configuration pages to view current Mopier and copy module settings, help troubleshoot printer problems, or verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. To print a configuration page from the Mopier control panel: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the configuration page. See figure 7-16 on page 590 for a sample configuration page. The content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration page, verify that the C-link cabling is correctly connected and functional (figure 7-7 on page 523) and that DC power is available to the paper handling devices. Check and reseat suspect cable connections. If any of the cables are replaced, you must cycle the power to have the printer recognize the device again. The Menu Map shows current control panel settings. See figure 7-15 on page 588 for a sample Menu Map. See chapter 3 for information about the default settings. C4229-90911 Information Pages 589, Printer Information Memory Lists the serial number, HP Lists printer memory, PCL Driver JetSend IP addresses, page Work Space (DWS), and I/O counts, and other information buffering and resource saving for the printer. information. Event Log Lists the number of Security entries in Lists the the log, the status of the maximum printer’s number of Control entries Panel lock, viewable, Control and the last Panel three password, entries. and disk drive. Installed Personalities and Options Paper Trays and Options Lists all printer languages that are Lists the size settings for all the installed (such as PCL and PS) and lists trays and lists the optional paper the options that are installed in each handling devices that are installed. DIMM slot and EIO slot. HP TonerGauge Indicates the amount of toner remaining in the cartridge. Must be reset at the Control Panel when a new cartridge is installed. Figure 7-16 Sample Mopier Configuration Page (1 of 2) 590 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, General Information Lists information about the EIO Copy Connect Card, model and serial number, firmware revision, and other information for the copy module. Cleaning Counter Indicates number of scans since last cleaning. (Reset in service mode). Maintenance Counter Usage Count Information Indicates number of scans since Indicates total ADF and flatbed scans. the last time maintenance was performed. (Reset in service mode). Figure 7-17 Sample Copy Module Configuration Page C4229-90911 Information Pages 591,

File Directory Page

Print a file directory page to ensure the copy module firmware is loaded on the Mopier’s hard disk drive. To print a file directory page from the Mopier control panel: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT FILE DIRECTORY appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the file directory page. Information about the hard disk Indicates device type and File Size location, capacity, serial Indicates size of number, and other each file. information. Directory/File Name Shows the names of directories and files. Figure 7-18 Sample File Directory Page 592 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Usage Page

The usage page is designed to fit into a pay-per-page (PPP) model. A reseller can configure the usage page with instructions for a user to send the information back to the reseller in order to prepare bills. Print a usage page from the Mopier control panel (or access the information remotely from Web JetAdmin) to determine how many simplex or duplex pages of each paper size have been scanned on the copy module and printed on the Mopier. Average toner coverage is approximated by counting pixels. Paper jams are not counted. The data cannot be reset manually and values such as total print and scan impressions, toner coverage, serial number, default language and default paper size are backed up between the Mopier’s NVRAM and hard disk. To print a usage page from the Mopier control panel: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT USAGE PAGE appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the usage page. C4229-90911 Information Pages 593, Information box configurable by resellers Simplex and duplex counted separately Resellers can specify click values for each paper size Precalcu- lated total prints and scans Average % toner Number of toner coverage cartridges that have been in the printer Figure 7-19 Sample Usage Page 594 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Verify Installed Options

In the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page, look for options such as hard disk information and DIMM types RAM or ROM and sizes. Verify that the options installed in the printer are reflected in the configuration page. If an installed device is not shown on the configuration page, see table 7-15 on page 596 for recommended actions. The Paper Tray and Options section of the configuration page identifies two types of paper handling devices that communicate or interact with the printer: ● Engine DC controller-driven devices • Duplexer • Envelope Feeder ● Communication Link Devices (C-link protocol) • Input devices: 2000-sheet Input Tray2x500-sheet Input Tray • Output devices: 8-bin Mailbox 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (includes a finisher) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox While the engine DC controller-driven devices draw power (24V DC) and control signals from the engine, the C-link devices have their own power supply and controller board. The information from the Paper Handling Controller is carried by the C-link cables that connect the controller board of all the C-link protocol supported devices. The C-link protocol supports up to 5 devices connected to the paper handling controller in a daisy chain. Each device controller has an input or output port that provides flexible connections in different configurations. However, it is recommended to use the configuration shown in figure 7-7 on page 523 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device numbering and confusions when evaluating the Event Log. C4229-90911 Information Pages 595, Table 7-15. Printer Devices Troubleshooting Device Action if installed and not detected Duplexer Turn the power off, reseat the Duplexer, verify that the connector is not broken, and turn the printer on. If the connector is broken or turning the printer on and off does not work, then replace the duplex cable and/or duplexer. Envelope Feeder Turn the power off, reseat the envelope feeder, and turn the printer on. If this does not work, replace the envelope feeder. Device 1 Verify that the C-link cables are installed correctly (see figure 7-7 on page 2000-sheet Input 523). Tray Remove all C-link connections and visually inspect for connector damage Device 2 on the cable pins and connector ends. 8-bin Mailbox Try using a different cable to connect the problem device directly to the Device 3 Paper Handling Controller. All C-link cables are wired the same, but are Stapler different lengths. If a device is not recognized, replace the device controller or defective C-link cable. Device 1 Verify that AC power is present in the 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input2x500-sheet Tray. and 2000-sheet Input Verify that the C-link cable is connected properly to the Paper Handling Tray Controller or the tray will not lift. Device 2 Verify that the DC power supply is receiving power. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Verify that the DC power supply output is connected to the 8-bin Mailbox controller. Verify that the C-link cables are properly installed and external power applied. Check if Fuse F202 in the2x500-sheet or 2000-sheet Input Tray's Controller PCA is blown. Replace the DC power supply. Replace the 8-bin Mailbox controller. 596 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Step 6 Image Quality

When you are working with customers, obtain a print sample before you begin troubleshooting their printer. Ask the customer to explain the quality they expect from the printer. The print sample will also help clarify the customer's explanation and expectations. Table 7-16. Image Quality Problem Action 1. Do you have a print Obtain a print sample from the customer. sample? 2. Does the problem repeat Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler in figure 7-20 on page 613. on the page? 3. Is the toner cartridge full Check the toner cartridge using the check list on page 598. and is it manufactured by HP? 4. Is the printer clean? Perform the cleaning procedure described in “Cleaning the Mopier and Accessories” on page 112. 5. Is the customer using For more information about HP's paper specification standards, print media that meets all see “Paper Capacities and Sizes” on page 11 and the HP HP paper specification LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide. standards? 6. Is the print sample similar Compare and perform the actions recommended in “Image to those in the “Image Quality Tables” on page 599. Quality Tables” on page 599? 7. Is the problem on the Perform the steps in “Half Self Test Functional Check” on drum or transfer roller? page 614 to determine where the defect is. If the defect is on the drum, replace the toner cartridge. If it is not on the drum, replace the transfer roller. C4229-90911 Image Quality 597,

Check the Toner Cartridge

Image formation defects are often the result of toner cartridge problems. If there is any doubt, always replace the toner cartridge before troubleshooting image defects. Use the following check list to make sure that the toner cartridge is still operable. ● Make sure that the toner cartridge has toner. Full toner cartridge weight = 3200 grams (114 oz) Empty weight = 2200 grams (80.5 oz) ● Check the expiration date of the toner cartridge (stamped on the cartridge box). ● Check the toner cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or refilled. ● Make sure that the toner cartridge is seated properly in the printer cavity. ● Inspect the cartridge for toner leaking through worn seals. (If the drum has been manually rotated it may have caused internal damage and toner spills may result.) Note Toner cartridges are rated for 20,000 images at 4% coverage. It is possible to wear out the gears and the cartridge seals before TONER LOW is displayed if the 20,000 image expectancy is exceeded. ● Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched. Touching the drum will contaminate the photosensitive surface and may cause spotting and defects during printing. ● White areas on the page may indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for too long. If white areas appear, stop the printer and wait a few minutes. This should eliminate most defective images. If not, the toner cartridge may be placed in a dark environment for several days, which may restore some life to the drum. 598 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Image Quality Tables

Table 7-17. Blank (White) Page Possible Cause Recommended Action OCCASIONAL BLANK PAGES: 1. Software Configuration. Make sure that the application software is not sending incorrect page length requests, or extra page eject commands. 2. Network Configuration. Some Check with the network administrator. sharing devices on networks may generate a blank page as a separator. 3. Multiple Feeds. The printer may be Remove the paper from the tray and feeding two or more pages at once bend the stack to separate the pages because the paper is difficult to (see the HP LaserJet Printer Family separate. Paper Specifications Guide). ALL PAGES BLANK: 1. Sealing tape left in toner cartridge. Remove the sealing tape. Table 7-18. Black Pages Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Defective toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. 2. Light is leaking into the printer. Make sure that all covers are in place. C4229-90911 Image Quality 599, Table 7-18. Black Pages (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. High voltage contact springs are Inspect and clean the high voltage dirty or defective. The high voltage contacts. If damaged, replace the contacts are mounted on the High High Voltage Power Supply PCA. See Voltage Power Supply PCA and “High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)” protrude into the toner cartridge on page 269 for instructions. cavity. 4. High voltage power supply circuit is Replace the High Voltage Power defective (not supplying the correct Supply PCA. See “High Voltage negative voltage). Power Supply (HVPS)” on page 269 for instructions. 5. DC Controller PCA is defective. If Replace the DC Controller PCA. See the DC Controller turns on the laser “PCA, DC Controller” on page 261 for beam continuously, the entire surface instructions. of the Photosensitive drum is neutralized causing a completely black page. 6. Laser/Scanner Assembly is faulty Replace the Laser/Scanner (turning laser on continuously). Assembly. See “Laser/Scanner Assembly” on page 254 for instructions. 7. Connectors between the Laser/ Inspect and reseat the connectors. Scanner unit and DC Controller are Replace cables as necessary. not seated properly or are defective. Table 7-19. Fading Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner supply is low. Shake the cartridge gently to redistribute the toner, or replace the cartridge. 2. Print Density is set incorrectly. Change to a darker setting and retry printing. 600 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-19. Fading Print (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. EconoMode is on. EconoMode Turn EconoMode off. Verify that saves toner by reducing the dot EconoMode is not being enabled by density. This may appear to be a print either the printer driver or the job quality problem in some cases. application. 4. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The moisture content, LaserJet Printer Family Paper conductivity, or surface finish may not Specifications Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 5. Transfer Roller is defective or Inspect the Transfer Roller for proper incorrectly installed. If the Transfer installation and contact. If the Roller loses conductivity, it cannot Transfer Roller is damaged, replace effectively pull toner from the drum to it. See “Transfer Roller Assembly” on the paper. page 282 for instructions. 6. Laser/Scanner door is not opening 1. Remove and reseat the toner properly. cartridge. 2. Check the Laser/Scanner shutter door for proper operation. If defective, replace the Laser/Scanner Assembly. See “Laser/Scanner Assembly” on page 254 for instructions. 7. High voltage contact springs are Check the contacts for functionality. If dirty or defective. The high voltage dirty, clean using alcohol; if damaged, contacts are mounted on the High replace the High Voltage Power Voltage Power Supply PCA and Supply PCA. See “High Voltage protrude into the toner cartridge Power Supply (HVPS)” on page 269 cavity. for instructions. 8. High Voltage Power Supply PCA is Replace the High Voltage Power defective. Supply PCA. See “High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)” on page 269 for instructions. 9. DC Controller PCA is defective. Replace the DC Controller PCA. See The DC Controller supplies the “PCA, DC Controller” on page 261 for proper voltage to the High Voltage instructions. Power Supply PCA. C4229-90911 Image Quality 601, Table 7-20. Dropout Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Single sheet of paper is defective. Try reprinting the job. 2. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The moisture content, LaserJet Printer Family Paper conductivity, or surface finish may not Specifications Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 3. DC Controller is defective (low Replace the DC Controller. See primary voltage). “PCA, DC Controller” on page 261 for instructions. 4. High Voltage Power Supply PCA is Replace the High Voltage Power defective. Supply PCA. See “High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)” on page 269 for instructions. 5. Transfer Roller is defective. Replace the Transfer Roller. See “Transfer Roller Assembly” on page 282 for instructions. Table 7-21. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path) Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge is not seated Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. properly. 2. Toner cartridge is damaged. Inspect the toner cartridge for a scratched or streaked photosensitive drum. Clean the printer (see “Cleaning the Mopier and Accessories” on page 112), and replace the cartridge. 602 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-21. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. Fusing Assembly is contaminated Inspect the Fusing Assembly for or damaged. toner build-up or scratches on the fuser rollers. Replace the Fusing Assembly if damaged. See “Fusing Assembly” on page 252 for instructions. 4. Static Eliminator Strip teeth are Clean using compressed air. Be contaminated or defective. careful not to spray the Transfer Roller. 5. Repetitive defect. If the lines are See the Repetitive Image Defect repeated at a consistent interval Ruler (figure 7-20 on page 613). down the page, this is a repetitive defect. Table 7-22. Toner Smear Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot or other specifications. The moisture content, media (see HP LaserJet Printer conductivity, or surface finish of the Family Paper Specifications Guide). media being printed may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 2. Fusing Rollers are dirty. Toner Remove and inspect the Fusing build-up can cause the print on a Assembly for excessive toner build- page to smear. up. 3. The Static Eliminator Strip is dirty Clean the Anti-Static Brush using or is not grounded, allowing a static compressed air. charge to remain on the page. C4229-90911 Image Quality 603, Table 7-22. Toner Smear (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 4. Fusing Assembly is defective. The Replace the Fusing Assembly. See print will smear if the Fusing “Fusing Assembly” on page 252 for Assembly is not heated sufficiently to instructions. Try changing fuser bond the toner image to the paper. modes depending on the type of media used. 5. DC Controller is defective. The DC If a new Fusing Assembly does not Controller regulates fusing roller resolve the problem, replace the DC temperature. Controller PCA. See “PCA, DC Controller” on page 261 for instructions. Table 7-23. Background Scatter Possible Cause Recommended Action Random Background Scatter 1. Paper does not meet Try a different media or paper lot (see specifications. The moisture content, HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper conductivity or surface finish may not Specifications Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 2. Inside of printer is dirty (toner may Clean inside of printer (see “Cleaning have leaked out of the toner the Mopier and Accessories” on cartridge). page 112). Install a new toner cartridge if leaking. 3. Printing on envelope seams. Move the text to an area without Printing on an envelope seam can seams. If not printing on seams, try a cause a background scatter problem. higher print density setting (see item 6, below). 4. Toner cartridge is defective. Install a new toner cartridge. 604 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-23. Background Scatter (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 5. Transfer Roller is dirty or worn. A Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry, worn Transfer Roller can cause lint-free cloth. DO NOT touch the background scatter due to improper Transfer Roller with your fingers. If bias voltages. the problem persists, replace the Transfer Roller Assembly. See “Transfer Roller Assembly” on page 282 for instructions. 6. Print Density is set too low, Adjust the print density to a higher causing background scatter, setting. particularly with envelopes and heavier papers. Background Scatter at Leading Edge Only (Leading Edge Halo) 1. Toner buildup in the Fuser Inlet Clean Fuser Inlet Guide. See Guide. “Cleaning the Mopier and Accessories” on page 112 for instructions. Table 7-24. Repetitive Defects Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge is damaged. If the Inspect the drum for scratches or defect repeats at any of the following damage. Replace the toner cartridge. intervals and in the direction of paper Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler, movement, it is associated with a figure 7-20 on page 613. component inside the toner cartridge. See figure 7-20 on page 613. 2. Transfer Roller has toner on it. If Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry, defects occur on the back of the page lint-free cloth. DO NOT touch the at intervals of 54mm (2.3 inches), the Transfer Roller with your fingers. If Transfer Roller may be dirty. This the problem persists, replace the problem sometimes corrects itself Transfer Roller Assembly. See after a few pages. “Transfer Roller Assembly” on page 282 for instructions. C4229-90911 Image Quality 605, Table 7-24. Repetitive Defects (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. Rollers are dirty. Any dirty roller in Examine and clean the rollers in the the paper path may result in a paper path. See “Cleaning the Mopier repetitive print defect. and Accessories” on page 112. 4. Fusing Assembly is dirty or Clean the Fusing Assembly using defective. alcohol. If the problem persists, replace the Fusing Assembly. See “Fusing Assembly” on page 252 for instructions. 5. Gears are worn, causing slippage Inspect the gears driving the toner or jumping. cartridge and the Fuser. Replace the Main Drive Assembly if necessary. See “Main Gear Assembly” on page 256 for instructions. 6. Paper does not meet Try a different media or paper lot (see specifications. The surface of the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper paper may be too coarse, causing Specifications Guide). repeated marks. Table 7-25. Line at Edge of Paper Possible Cause Recommended Action Toner cartridge is defective. The Replace the toner cartridge. photosensitive drum is wearing out. The line will grow wider, with cross- hatching. Shaking the cartridge does not relieve the problem. 606 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-26. Misshapen Characters, Voids Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper surface too rough. Toner Turn EconoMode off. Use paper with migrates to low spots, leaving higher correct finish (smoothness) (see HP areas void. LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide). 2. Printing on wrong side of paper. Turn EconoMode off. Check for the The label on the ream of paper arrow on the paper wrapper. Be sure indicates which side to print on. The paper is loaded with the arrow different surface properties of some pointing up in Tray 1 or down in Trays papers may cause problems if loaded 2, 3, 4, and 5. wrong side up. 3. Paper surface is too smooth for Turn EconoMode off. Use paper with proper toner adhesion. correct finish (smoothness) (see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide). 4. Transparencies are bad. Turn EconoMode off. Use Hewlett- Transparencies can have this Packard approved transparencies problem because they are not (see HP LaserJet Printer Family designed for proper toner adhesion. Paper Specifications Guide). 5. Transfer Roller is bad. If the Turn EconoMode off. Clean the Transfer Roller has finger oils on its Transfer Roller using a dry, lint-free surface, is dirty, or is worn-out, this cloth. DO NOT touch the Transfer problem can result. Roller with your fingers. If the problem persists, replace the Transfer Roller Assembly. See “Transfer Roller Assembly” on page 282 for instructions. 6. Laser/Scanner Assembly is bad. Replace the Laser/Scanner Assembly. See “Laser/Scanner Assembly” on page 254 for instructions. C4229-90911 Image Quality 607, Table 7-27. Faulty Registration Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper tray is overloaded. If the tray Reload proper amount of paper is overloaded, the Pickup Rollers may squarely in the tray. Review paper not pick correctly. loading with the customer. 2. Paper guide on the paper tray is Make sure that the paper guide is incorrectly adjusted. If the guide is adjusted for the correct paper size pushing too tightly against the paper, and is locked into position. it may be delayed in being pulled into the printer. If the guide is too loose, it may cause image skewing. 3. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The surface of the LaserJet Printer Family Paper paper may be too smooth for the Specifications Guide). Pickup and Feed Rollers to correctly feed paper into the printer. 4. Drive gears are worn or broken. If Replace the defective gear or Main any gear within the drive train or Drive assembly. See “Main Gear paper path becomes excessively Assembly” on page 256 for worn or dirty, erratic paper movement instructions. can result. 5. Worn Pickup or Registration Inspect all paper path rollers, looking Rollers. Paper is not being picked up for wear, cracks, or glazing. Replace consistently. the worn rollers. Table 7-28. Image Skew Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper is loaded incorrectly. If the Remove paper from the tray, and paper is not installed flush into the install paper correctly. Position the paper tray, a skewing problem will paper guide correctly for the paper result. size being used. 2. Paper size adjustment levers are Verify and correct. missing or installed incorrectly. 608 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-28. Image Skew (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. Paper lot is bad. Paper that is Try a different paper lot (see HP manufactured poorly or inconsistently LaserJet Printer Family Paper or that has too smooth or too rough a Specifications Guide). surface texture can cause an image skew problem. 4. Pickup and/or Registration Rollers Inspect all paper path rollers, looking are worn. Paper is not being picked for wear, cracks, or glazing. Replace up consistently. the worn rollers. Table 7-29. Bubble Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Photosensitive drum inside toner 1. Check for proper mounting of the cartridge is not grounded. High Voltage Power Supply (HVPW) and the HVPS ground contacts on the toner cartridge. 2. Check for proper seating of toner cartridge. 3. Replace the toner cartridge. 2. Toner cartridge is leaking. Replace the toner cartridge. 3. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The moisture content, LaserJet Printer Family Paper conductivity, or surface finish may not Specifications Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 4. High Voltage Power Supply is Replace the High Voltage Power defective. Supply. See “High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)” on page 269 for instructions. C4229-90911 Image Quality 609, Table 7-30. White Stripes Parallel to Path Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge is nearly empty. Remove the toner cartridge, and This can cause uneven toner shake it gently. The cartridge will distribution. soon require replacement. 2. Toner cartridge has been exposed Store the toner cartridge in a to too much light. darkened environment for several days. This may restore the photosensitive potential. 3. Foreign objects in beam path. Any Remove the toner cartridge, and foreign objects will block the light check for damage. Replace the toner from developing an image on the cartridge if it is damaged. Photosensitive drum. Remove the printer cover, and inspect the path from the Laser/ Scanner to the toner cartridge drum, looking for foreign objects in the beam path. Table 7-31. Partial Blank Page Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Page is too complex. The printer Set Page Protect to on or auto. cannot create the image fast enough Simplify print job. to keep pace with the print engine. 2. Not enough memory. The page is Add printer memory. See “Memory too complex for standard printer and Personality Upgrade” on memory. page 204 for instructions. As an alternative, simplify the print job. 3. Printing on legal-size paper from Review software selection. Make Tray 4 when software is specifying sure that printing is on selected size. letter size (this will also cause paper jams). 610 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-32. Compressed Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge bushings are too Replace the toner cartridge. tight. This may occur on refilled toner cartridges. 2. Gear is broken or worn. Inspect and replace the worn gear or assembly. Table 7-33. Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page (Tray 4 Input only) Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Bad clutch in vertical transfer door. Replace the Tray 4 vertical transfer door. 2. Bad clutch in paper pickup Replace Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. assembly. C4229-90911 Image Quality 611,

Repetitive Defect Ruler

Repetitive print defects are usually associated with a specific roller within the printer or the toner cartridge. Use figure 7-20 to isolate the cause of repetitive print defects. Align the first occurrence of the defect with the top of the “ruler” and measure to the next occurrence of the defect to determine the roller in question. When you are certain that your defect pattern matches the pattern of the ruler, replace the indicated roller. 612 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-20 Repetitive Defect Ruler C4229-90911 Image Quality 613,

Image System Troubleshooting Half Self Test Functional Check

The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following stages: ● Cleaning (removing excess toner from drum surface) ● Conditioning (placing a uniform electrical charge on drum) ● Writing (laser strikes surface of drum to create latent image) ● Development (formation of the toner image on drum) ● Transfer (charge to transfer the image to paper) ● Fusing (heat and pressure to produce a permanent image) See Chapter 5 for more information. The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which process is malfunctioning. Perform the test as follows: 1 Print a Configuration Page. See “Configuration Pages” on page 589 for instructions. 2 Open the top cover after the paper advances half-way through the printer (about five seconds after the Main Motor begins rotating). The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the toner cartridge. 3 Remove the toner cartridge. 4 Open the toner cartridge's drum shield to view the drum's surface. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum's surface, assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing—see Chapter 5), and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If NO image is present on the photosensitive drum, perform the functional checks on the following pages. 614 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Drum Rotation Functional Check

The photosensitive drum, located in the toner cartridge, must rotate for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the Main Drive assembly. To verify whether the drum is rotating: 1 Open the top cover. 2 Remove the toner cartridge. 3 Mark the cartridge's drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark. 4 Install the toner cartridge, and close the top cover. The start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark. 5 Open the printer, and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3. Verify that the mark moved. If the mark did not move, inspect the Main Drive assembly to make sure that it is meshing with the toner cartridge gears. If the drive gears appear functional, and the drum does not move, replace the toner cartridge. Note This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges have been used.

High-Voltage Power Supply Check

The High-Voltage Power Supply PCA provides the necessary voltages for the electrophotographic processes (see figure 7-21 on page 616). A method for verifying the high-voltage system is given below. Toner cartridge connection points Visually inspect the four connection points on the inside right end of the toner cartridge. If they are dirty or corroded, clean the connections. Clean using only alcohol. If damaged, replace the toner cartridge. High voltage contacts The high voltage contact springs mount on the High Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude through the toner cartridge cavity to contact the toner cartridge. Verify that the contacts are not dirty or corroded and that the spring action is functional. If dirty, clean using only alcohol. If damaged, replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA (see “High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)” on page 269 for instructions). C4229-90911 Image Quality 615, Primary Charging Roller Toner Registration/ Toner Sensor Drum Ground Developing Roller Bias Post Transfer Bias Transfer Roller Fuser Bias Figure 7-21 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 616 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices

2000-sheet Input Tray Stand-alone

Diagnostics

The 2000-sheet Input Tray can run stand-alone diagnostic tests to test the device’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need one power cord, one #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flat-blade screwdriver for the DIP switches. 2000-sheet Input Tray Motor Test This test verifies that the three motors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray are functioning properly. 1 Identify the Back Cover (opposite from the tray door). Remove the four screws in the Back Cover. Remove the Back Cover (see “Back Cover” on page 219). 2 Pull open the paper tray, and open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 3 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to Motor Test Mode. (See Table 7-34 on page 619 for an explanation of the DIP switch settings.) 4 To turn the Power Supply switch to Diagnostic Mode pull out on the blue handle. • If the motors are working properly, you will hear them as they rotate continuously. • If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field- replaceable unit: either the Paper Pickup Assembly, the VTU, or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 5 To stop the test, set the power switch back to Operational Mode (push in), and reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see Table 7-34 on page 619). 2000-sheet Input Tray Stand-alone Running Test This test verifies that the 2000-sheet Input Tray is functioning properly. For this test, use the LED located on the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. (See Table 7-35 on page 620 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 617, CAUTION If the 2000-sheet Input Tray is setting underneath the printer, paper jams may occur because the printer will not pick up the paper. To prevent excessive paper jams during this test, feed only 6 to 8 pages. 1 Make sure that paper is in the tray. 2 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for stand-alone running mode. (See Table 7-34 for an explanation of the settings). 3 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. The motors will start. Paper should now be lifted from the tray and fed through the VTU. • If the unit does not work properly, the lower Service LED on the Controller PCA flashes in a pattern that indicates the problem. (See Table 7-35 on page 620 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) 4 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see Table 7-34). Open the VTU, and remove any media from the paper path. 618 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensor Test This test manually activates the sensors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to test if they are working properly. 1 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for sensor test mode. (See Table 7-34 for an explanation of the settings.) 2 For each paper sensor: a Pull open the paper tray, and open the VTU. b Remove the metal spring that holds the sensor unit in place (secured by 1 screw). (See Figure 6-76, callouts 2 and 5.) c Pull out the sensor unit. 3 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. 4 To manually activate each sensor, press it in with your finger. • When you activate the sensor, the bottom Service LED on the Controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the LED goes off. • If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the sensor. Replace the corresponding field-replaceable unit. 5 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see Table 7-34). Table 7-34. DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Normal Motor Test Stand- Sensor Test alone Running Test 1 Off On On Off 2 Off On Off Off 3 Off Off Off On 4 Off On On On Note Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the unit will not work properly. Then, replace the back cover. C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 619, 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation

If the 2000-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it will pick up paper

from the tray and feed it through the VTU, and the bottom Service

LED will flash regularly every 0.5 seconds. Table 7-35. 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation Long Short (.03 Error Number/ Recommended Action

(1 sec.) sec.) Meaning3166.11.01 Lift the tray by hand to make sure that it lifts freely. Lifter Malfunction Make sure that the paper size plates are correctly installed (in the same corresponding slots) and are not bent. If neither if these is the problem, replace Tray 4. 2 1 13.11.11 The media does not reach the sensor. Open the Registration Sensor VTU door, and remove the media. Replace the VTU Delay Jam assembly or the paper pickup assembly. 2 2 13.11.3B Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Check Registration Sensor the sensors, and replace the corresponding field- Station Jam/Initial replaceable unit. Jam2313.11.31 The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU Jam Sensor Delay door, and remove the media. Replace the VTU or Jam the paper pickup assembly. 2 4 13.11.21 Open the VTU door and remove the media. 13.11.2B Jam Sensor Stationary Jam/Initial Jam11VTU Door Open Close the door. 1 2 Paper Tray Close the tray. Open Wrong Size Paper Load the correct size of paper, or check the sensors. Loaded. 1 3 No Paper in Tray Load paper, or check the sensors.

Note If the LED does not come on, replace the Paper Deck PCA or the Universal Power Supply Assembly.

620 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Standalone

Diagnostics

The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the2x500-sheet Input Tray’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need a power cord, a #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flatblade screwdriver for the DIP switches. If the2x500-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it picks paper up from the tray and feeds it into the VTU, while the bottom service LED flashes regularly every 0.5 seconds. Note To go from one test to another or to change the DIP switch settings, set the blue power supply switch to Operational Mode (push in). Reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA, and then switch the power supply back to Diagnostic Mode (pull out) to enable the new diagnostic test. See figure 7-37 on page 624 for DIP switch settings. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Motor Test This test verifies that the three motors on the2x500-sheet Input Tray are functioning properly. 1 Identify the Back Cover (opposite side from tray door). Remove the 4 screws in the Back Cover. Remove the Back Cover. 2 Pull open Trays 4 and 5, and open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 3 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to Motor Test Mode. (See table 7-6 on page 561 for an explanation of the DIP switch settings.) 4 To turn the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull out on the blue handle. • If the motors are working properly, you will hear them as they rotate continuously. • If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field- replaceable unit: either the Paper Pickup Assembly, the VTU, or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 5 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode (push in), and reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position. C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 621, Table 7-36. DIP Switch Settings for troubleshooting test procedures DIP Switch Normal Motor Test Stand- Sensor Test alone Running Test 1 Off On On Off 2 Off On Off Off 3 Off Off Off On 4 Off On On On Note The DIP switch is on if it is set to the top. The DIP switch is off if it is set to the bottom. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Running Test This test verifies that the2x500-sheet Input Tray is functioning properly. For this test, use the LED located on the Controller PCA. (See table 7-37 on page 624 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) CAUTION If the2x500-sheet Input Tray is underneath the printer, paper jams may occur because the printer will not pick up the paper. To prevent excessive paper jams during this test, feed only 6 to 8 pages. 1 Make sure that there is paper in both trays. 2 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for standalone running mode. (See table 7-36 on page 622 for an explanation of the settings). 3 To test Tray 5, open Tray 4. To test Tray 4, open Tray 5. 622 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 4 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. The motors will start. Paper should now be lifted from the tray and fed through the VTU. The service LED flashes regularly every 0.5 seconds. • If the unit does not work properly, the service LED on the Controller PCA flashes in a pattern that indicates the problem. (See table 7-37 on page 624 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) 5 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode. Open the VTU, and remove any media from the paper path. 6 To test Tray 4, close Tray 4 and open Tray 5. Repeat step 4. 7 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see table 7-36 on page 622). Open the VTU, and remove any media from the paper path. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensor Test Note Be sure that trays 4 and 5 and the VTU are closed before starting the sensor test. This test manually activates the sensors on the2x500-sheet Input Tray to test if they are working properly. 1 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for sensor test mode. (See table 7-6 on page 561 for an explanation of the settings.) 2 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. 3 To manually activate each sensor, press it in with your finger. • When you activate the sensor, the service LED on the Controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the LED goes off. • If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the sensor. Replace the corresponding field-replaceable unit. 4 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see table 7-6 on page 561). Note Be sure to turn the power supply off, and set all the DIP switches to the off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the printer will not work properly. Replace the back cover. C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 623, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation

If the2x500-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it will pick up paper

from the tray and feed it though the VTU and the bottom service LED will flash regularly every 0.5 seconds.

See page 561 for2x500-sheet Input Tray error messages.

7DEOH3DWWHUQVRI/('IODVKLQJ VHFRQGSDXVHEHWZHHQHDFKSDWWHUQ

Long Short Error Number/

(1 sec) (0.3 sec) Meaning Recommended Action3165.11.04 Verify that the tray lifts up freely by lifting it by hand. Lifter malfunction Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly (in the same corresponding slots) and are not bent. If neither of these is the problem, replace Tray 4 or 5. 2 1 13.11.11 The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU Registration sensor door, and remove the media. Replace the paper delay jam feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pickup assembly. 2 2 13.11.31 Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Check Registration sensor the sensors, and replace the corresponding field- stationary/jam initial replaceable unit. jam2313.11.1B The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU Jam sensor delay jam door, and remove the media. Replace the paper feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pickup assembly. 2 4 13.11.3B Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Jam sensor stationary jam/initial jam11The VTU door is open Close the door. 1 2 Trays 4/5 are open Close the tray(s). Check the sensors. Wrong paper size Load the correct size of paper. Check the sensors. loaded13No paper in trays 4/5 Load paper. Check the sensors.

Note If the LEDs will not come on, replace the paper deck PCA or the

universal power supply assembly. 624 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone

Diagnostics

The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the device’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need a power cord, a #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flatblade screwdriver for the DIP switches. Note To change from one test to another or change the DIP switch settings, push the blue power supply switch in (off position), then set to the new test positions. 1 To remove the back cover remove 2 screws (see page 352). 2 Identify the interlock switch. This black switch is set when the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox comes into contact with the printer. (Look on opposite side from the paper trays.) This interlock can be defeated by holding it in with a finger or a piece of tape. 3 Identify the DIP switch, SW1 (upper-right corner of the controller PCA). 4 Identify the service LED, LED1 (near the C-link connectors). Table 7-38. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test DIP Switch Normal Motor Standalone Running Test Sensor Test Settings Test Mailbox Stacker 1 Off On On Off Off 2 Off On Off On Off 3 Off Off On Off On 4 Off On Off On On Note The DIP switch is on if it is set to the right. The DIP switch is off if it is set to the left. C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 625, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Motor Test This test allows you to verify the functionality of the main motor, Face- down solenoid, and face-up diverter solenoid. 1 The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform this test. 2 Set the DIP switches for the motor test (see table 7-38). 3 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position. 4 Press and hold in the interlock switch. A self-test should be performed, then the main motor will start moving continuously until the interlock switch is released. The service LED will flash every 0.5 seconds. If any other pattern results with the service LED, see table 7-39 on page 627 for the possible causes. 5 Push in the power supply switch to the normal position. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Running Test This test allows you to feed paper into the unit to test the paper path without a connection to the printer. You can configure either the Mailbox Mode or the Stacker Mode to ensure the paper path is working properly. 1 The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform this test. 2 Set the DIP switches for the standalone running test in either Mailbox Mode or the Stacker Mode (see table 7-38 on page 625). 3 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position. 4 Press and hold in the interlock switch. Perform a self-test. Then manually start feeding paper. • In Mailbox Mode, the unit will deliver paper to all bins, starting with the Face-up Bin, then down to the bottom bin. • In Stacker Mode, the unit will stack paper starting at the bottom bin until the top-of-stack is reached on each bin. 5 If problems are found, the possible cause will be indicated by the Service LED (see table 7-39 on page 627). 6 Push in the power supply switch to the normal position. 626 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensor Test This test allows you to check if all unit sensors are working properly. By activating any unit sensor flag, the service LED should turn on. 1 Make sure that all bins are empty to perform the sensor test. 2 Set the DIP switches for the sensor test (see table 7-38 on page 625). 3 Do NOT press the interlock switch in at this time. 4 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position. 5 Make sure that the service LED is off. 6 Manually activate any sensor flag. The service LED should turn on if the sensor is functional. Note To test the top cover or paper access door sensors, you need to press the interlock switch and simultaneously open and close each cover. A self-test should be performed, and the LED should remain on. To test the bin full sensors, press the sensor in the paper tray closest to the back of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox (on your left as you face the bins). The test will not work if you press the sensor closest to the front of the device. CAUTION Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the printer will not work properly. Replace the back cover. See page 565 for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox error messages. Table 7-39. Patterns of Flashing LEDs Error Number/ Long Short Meaning Recommended Action3166.12.16 ● Perform the motor test to check the solenoids. 66.22.16 ● Perform the sensor test. Paper exit solenoid ● Replace the sensor bin full PCA, solenoids, or malfunction controller board. 2 1 13.12.31 ● Open the top cover and paper access door to 13.22.31 remove any remaining paper, then perform a Initial jam sensor test. ● Replace the sensor bin full PCA or controller PCA. C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 627, Table 7-39. Patterns of Flashing LEDs (continued) Error Number/ Long Short Meaning Recommended Action2213.12.01 ● Open all covers and doors in the device, and 13.22.01 remove any jammed paper. Jam without delivery ● Check for paper jammed in the printer. notice ● Try printing again. 2 3 13.12.11 ● Open all covers and doors in the device, and 13.22.11 remove any remaining media. Entry sensor delay ● Check each output bin. 2 5 13.12.17 ● Perform a sensor check. 13.22.17 ● Check the sensor flag, the optical sensor, or Face-up sensor delay cabling. 2 7 Reversing area delay ● Replace the sensor PCAs. ● Replace the controller PCA. 2 9 13.12.15 13.22.15 Vertical sensor delay2413.12.21 ● Open the top and back covers, and remove 13.22.21 any remaining media. Entry sensor ● Check each output bin. activated too long ● Perform a sensor check. 2 6 13.12.27 ● Check the sensor flag, the optical sensor, or 13.22.27 cabling. Face-up sensor ● Replace the sensor PCAs. activated too long ● Replace the controller PCA. 2 8 13.12.21 13.22.21 13.12.27 13.22.27 Reversing area sensor activated too long 2 10 13.12.22 13.22.22 13.12.25 13.22.25 Vertical sensor activated too long11Door open or ● Close the top cover and paper access door. interlock switch ● Firmly attach the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox to deactivated the printer. ● Perform a sensor check. ● Check the bin full and interlock sensor PCA, cabling, and controller PCA. 628 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-39. Patterns of Flashing LEDs (continued) Error Number/ Long Short Meaning Recommended Action12Bin full when running ● Remove paper from all the bins. the standalone test C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 629, 8-bin Mailbox Stand-alone Diagnostics The stand-alone diagnostics are designed to test the device’s motors and functionality without connection to the printer. Note that the diagnostics do not test the functionality of the stapler. You will need one power cord and a small flat-blade screwdriver for the power supply switch. 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description The 8-bin Mailbox has two sets of LEDs: ● User LED. The first is a single LED located on the right side of the top cover (Figure 7-22, callout 1). This User LED provides information to the end user about the 8-bin Mailbox power-on status and the attachment and alignment to the printer. ● Service LEDs. The second set is formed by three independent LEDs located in the middle of the left side cover (Figure 7-22, callout 2). This group is called the Service LEDs, and they show additional technical information to decode the 8-bin Mailbox status. Figure 7-22 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description 8-bin Mailbox Stand-alone Diagnostic Test Each time you run the stand-alone diagnostic test, proceed as follows: 1 Turn off the printer, and pull the 8-bin Mailbox away from the printer. 2 With the 8-bin Mailbox unplugged, configure the power supply switch to the test mode by sliding the power supply switch up with a small flat-blade screwdriver (Figure 7-23, callout 1). 630 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-23 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply Test Mode Switch 1 Plug in the power cord. The User LED should be solid green, and the Service LEDs should be ‘Off, Solid Red, Off’ to indicate the test mode has been entered. Note Be sure to reset the power supply switch to the normal operation when you finish the diagnostics; otherwise the unit will not work properly.

Power-on Test

1 Push the 8-bin Mailbox interlock switch and keep it pressed. A sequence of tests will begin to test the device. 2 The head assembly will move up and down twice, scanning that all unit bins are properly installed and that all unit motors have started. 3 At the end of the power-on test, the flipper motor remains on and waits for paper to be fed. 4 The User LED remains solid green and the service LEDs remain ‘Off, Solid Red, Off’ as an indication that the power-on test was successful. 5 If a problem exists, an error code will be shown in the Service LEDs. (See table 3-3 for an interpretation of the LEDs.) C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 631, 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path Test 1 If the power-on test is successful, then manually feed paper through the input paper guide in the horizontal position. 2 The paper will pass across the flipper assembly and move down to the bottom bin by the double belt system through the head assembly. 3 If after feeding several pages the paper path test is successful, then reattach the 8-bin Mailbox to the printer. 4 If a problem exists, an error code will be shown in the Service LEDs. (See table 7-40 for an interpretation of the LEDs.) Note Be sure to reset the power supply switch to the normal operation when you finish the diagnostics; otherwise the unit will not work properly. 632 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Status Interpretation Table 7-40. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank MBM Ready No action required. The 8-bin Mailbox was successfully connected and initialized by the printer. PowerSave Mode No action required. The 8-bin Mailbox is in PowerSave mode. Self-test Mode ● Run the power-on test. The 8-bin Mailbox is in test mode. ● Run the paper path test. MBM Unlatched from the Printer ● Check for proper alignment. The 8-bin Mailbox is not properly ● Check the attachment clips. attached to the printer. ● Check the Adjustable Casters. ● Check the Interlock Switch. Face-up Bin is Too Full ● Remove the paper from the The Face-up Bin has too much paper Face-up Bin. and it has reached the PSFaceUp flat, ● Check for a stuck Sensor Flag. avoiding the flipping operation. ● Replace the Flipper Assembly. 65.12.01 ● Check for the proper cable 65.22.01 connections. C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 633, Table 7-40. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Jam in Flipper Area ● Open the Jam Access Door, A time-out condition occurred at the and check for a paper jam or entry area. an out-of-place Flipper Assembly shaft. 13.12.02 ● Check for a stuck paper 13.22.02 sensor. 65.12.01 ● Replace the Flipper Assembly. 65.22.01 ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. Jam in Belt ● Check for paper jammed at the A time-out condition occurred in the Transport Belt System/ Transport Belt. Delivery Head Assembly. ● Make sure that the Transport 13.12.03 Belt (both belts) move freely. 13.22.03 ● Make sure that the belts are parallel in the Transport Belt system. ● Make sure that the Metal Tape is in place and in good condition. ● Replace the Transport Belt Motor. ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. ● Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. 634 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-40. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Jam in Delivery Head Assembly ● Check for paper jammed in the A time-out condition occurred in the Delivery Head Assembly. PSExit1 sensor. ● Make sure that both the PSExit1 and PSExit2 sensors 13.12.05 on the Delivery Head Assembly 13.22.05 move freely. ● Make sure that the fingers are over the Ejector Rollers on the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 635, Table 7-40. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Jam in the Delivery Head Position ● Make sure that the Blind Cover System and Scan Bar are installed The elevator motor detected an invalid properly. window when scanning. ● Check for paper jammed in the Transport Belt System and the 13.12.06 Delivery Head Assembly. 13.22.06 ● Make sure that the Delivery 65.12.03 Head Assembly (up and down) 65.22.03 moves freely. 65.12.03 65.22.03 ● Make sure that all paper bins are seated correctly. ● Make sure that the paper bins and the Blind Cover are not broken. ● Replace the Delivery Head Position Motor. ● Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. Slider Problem at the Head ● Check for paper jammed in the Assembly Delivery Head Assembly. The sliders do not activate the slider ● Make sure that all the paper photosensor. bins are seated correctly. ● Replace the Delivery Head 65.12.04 Assembly. 65.22.04 636 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-40. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Wrong Page Request ● Check the bin destination. A page request was received with an ● Check the paper size invalid output bin or invalid paper size configuration. information. ● Turn on the printer. 13.12.0A 13.22.0A Flipper Error ● Check for paper jammed in the During the flipper calibration, an Flipper Assembly area. abnormal reference voltage was ● Check the cable connections. encountered. ● Replace the Flipper Assembly. 66.12.08 ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox 66.22.08 PCA. External Memory Error ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox The 8-bin Mailbox’s nonvolatile RAM PCA. (NVRAM) is damaged. 66.12.09 66.22.09 C4229-90911 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 637,

Diagrams

This section contains the following diagrams: ● Figure 7-24, “Printer Sensors and Switches,” on page 639 ● Figure 7-25, “Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids,” on page ● Figure 7-26, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-27, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-28, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-29, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-30, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-31, “Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram,” on page 646 ● Figure 7-32, “2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs,” on ● Figure 7-33, “2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs,” on ● Figure 7-34, “2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram,” on ● Figure 7-35, “8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram,” on page 650 ● The main wiring diagram is inserted inside the cover. 638 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-24 Printer Sensors and Switches C4229-90911 Diagrams 639, Figure 7-25 Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids 640 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-26 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5) C4229-90911 Diagrams 641, Figure 7-27 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5) 642 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-28 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5) C4229-90911 Diagrams 643, Figure 7-29 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5) 644 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-30 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5) C4229-90911 Diagrams 645, Figure 7-31 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram 646 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-32 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs C4229-90911 Diagrams 647, Figure 7-33 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs 648 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Figure 7-34 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram C4229-90911 Diagrams 649, 5 1 10 6 Vcc 15 111 2 (two dots) J5 34 1 /TX53/RX previous PS FLIPPER14/TERMINATE OUT device PS FLIPPER26/CLOCK connector J11 12 /STROBE 1(in) 2 M2 Encoder 13 POWER ON IN J4C-link 3 2-7-8-11 GND 4 5-10 24 V MULTIBIN Flipper Roller Motor

MAILBOX Transport Belt Motor CONTROLLER 1 M5

J8 2(one dot) PCA 34 1 /TX 3 /RX next 4 /TERMINATE IN device J9 12 INTERLOCK SWITCH 6 /CLOCK connector J12 12 /STROBE (out) 13 POWER ON OUT C-link Vcc 12 PS FUFULL 2-7-8-11 GND 5-10 24 V J2 3 PS FACEUP 4 PS ENTRYCBARed Green power 2 LEDs supply J13 J10 3 connector 4 152631+24V 1 M1 Delivery Head 2 +24V 1 53 2 Position Motor3 3 GND26J74 Vcc44GND55ON/OFF J1 6 +5V 1716151413121110987654321Head Slider M3 M4 Ejector Motor Motor PS BIN EMPTY PS EXIT 2 PS BIN FULL / HEAD POSITION PS EXIT 1 PS EJECT

Figure 7-35 8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram

650 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Troubleshooting the HP Digital Copy 320

This section deals with troubleshooting procedures specific to the HP Digital Copy 320. For a general troubleshooting approach, see the flowcharts starting on page 517. The steps for troubleshooting the HP Digital Copy 320 are as follows: ▼ Step 1: Power On (page 652) ▼ Step 2: Display and Communication (page 653) ▼ Step 3: Error Messages and Problems (page 654) ▼ Step 4: Information Pages (page 659) ▼ Step 5: Paper Path (page 660) ● Step 6: Image Quality (page 661) C4229-90911 Troubleshooting the HP Digital Copy 320 651,

Step 1 Power On

Is the copy module on and displaying anything on the Front Panel? (YES = Go to Step 2: Display and Communication) Table 7-41. Power On Checks Check Recommended Action Is the host Mopier on ● Make sure both the Mopier and copy module power switches are and functioning set to the on position. correctly? ● Ensure the Mopier and copy module are not in power save mode. Press any key on the front panel. ● Eliminate paper-handling devices as a cause of the problem. ● Troubleshoot the Mopier. See page 534. Is AC power available to ● Check power to the Mopier's power receptacle. the Mopier System? ● Make sure power is cabled correctly to provide AC power to the copy module. (See “Install the Y Power Cord” on page 436 for y cable descriptions.) ● To test power, plug in the copy module directly. ● Plug in a known working device to test the outlet. Is the copy module’s fan ● If the fan is running, the copy module power supply and Control working? PCA are probably OK. ● Disconnect the copy connect cable to the Mopier and plug in the Copy Module directly to the AC outlet. The copy module should boot to the second icon and stop. ● If the fan still does not run check its connection to the Control PCA. If the connection is OK, suspect the power supply. After completing the power-on checks above, print the information pages from the Mopier's Information Menu. ● Verify that the copy connect EIO appears on the Mopier configuration page. ● Verify that the HP Digital Copy 320 page prints. 652 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Step 2 Display and Communication

Does the copy module LCD display indicate READY TO COPY? (YES = Go to Step 3: Error Messages and Problems) Table 7-42. Display and Communication Checks Problem Recommended Action The Fan works, but the ● Re-check power availability. display is blank with no ● Check the front panel connections and cable. backlight. ● Reseat the ribbon cable into the connector on the front panel. ● Suspect the front panel or the cable. The display is blank ● Check the front panel connections and cable. with the backlight on. ● Inspect and reseat the ribbon cable into the connector on the front panel. ● Check the connections to and reseat the Power Supply and Main Board Assemblies. ● Reseat the copy connect EIO card and copy processor card. ● Check the connections between the copy connect EIO card and the Copy Processor card. ● Perform an offline test (page 667) to confirm the control PCA is good. ● Perform a Copy Processor LED test (page 664). If the Copy Processor is okay, suspect the front panel. Replace the suspected part. The front panel ● Perform a Copy Processor LED test (page 664) to confirm that backlight comes on the Copy Processor is okay. If necessary, replace the Copy and display shows the Processor. logo, a boot icon, or ● Reseat the copy connect EIO card and the copy processor card. error message. ● Check the connections between the copy connect EIO card and the Copy Processor card. ● Print a directory of the Mopier’s hard disk drive to check that the Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 592). ● Make sure Loading Program 1 displays on the Mopier’s control panel during bootup. If it does not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 107). ● If the display shows an error message, see page 654 to resolve the problem. ● If the display stops at one of the four boot icons, note which and see page 666 to resolve the problem. C4229-90911 Display and Communication 653,

Step 3 Error Messages and Problems

Have you resolved error messages? (YES = Go to Step 5: Paper Path) Note Show or print the event log for the copy module or Mopier from the Mopier’s Information Menu. ● Does the copy module’s front panel report any errors? (See page 654 and take appropriate actions.) ● Does the Mopier’s control panel report any copy module errors? (See page 544 and take appropriate actions.) ● Does the Mopier’s event log report any errors? (See page 538 and take appropriate actions.)

Status Messages

This section shows status messages that display on the HP Digital Copy 320 Front Panel when there is a problem with the HP Digital Copy 320. There are 3 different types of errors made by the HP Digital Copy 320: ● Boot Errors (page 655) ● Equipment Errors (page 655) ● Temporary Errors (page 658) For Mopier problem solving information, see the Mopier troubleshooting flowchart starting on page 518. For Mopier and paper-handling devices error messages see page 542. 654 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Boot Errors

Table 7-43. Boot Errors Boot Error Description 0x00058001 Bad connection (displayed after the second icon is displayed) This error indicates a bad physical connection between the copy module and the printer. This could also indicate that the Scanner Service Agent failed to load, or that the printer ID is not an HP Mopier 320 0x00058002 No file (displayed after the third icon is displayed) This error indicates that a connection was established, the Scanner Service Agent loaded, but firmware was not found on the disk. 0x00058003 Bad file (displayed after the third icon is displayed) This error indicates that a connection was established, the Scanner Service Agent loaded, firmware was found on the disk, but one or more of the files appear to be corrupt. Note that the “bad file” error below can also indicate that the copy processor gave up on downloading the runtime firmware after trying several times. It can also occur sporadically if you try to print a printer configuration page while the copy processor is downloading the firmware Note All other numbered Boot Errors (0x00000000-0x000007FF) indicate that the Copy Processor card failed its own diagnostics and is probably bad. These errors will likely be seen in conjunction with and can be confirmed by a blinking red LED on the Copy Processor LED test.

Equipment Errors

To correct an equipment error, turn the Mopier and HP Digital Copy 320 off and then turn both devices on. If the error message persists, replace the indicated part. C4229-90911 Error Messages and Problems 655, Table 7-44. Equipment Errors Error Message Description DEVICE ERROR: Turn the Mopier off and then on. If the error persists, replace the EEPROM FAILURE Control PCA and the EEPROM. DEVICE ERROR: An error occurred while accessing the backside RAM buffer. BACKSIDE RAM BUFFER Replace the Control PCA.

FAILURE

DEVICE ERROR: The motor has a blown fuse. MOTOR FUSE FAILURE ● Check connections to motors. ● Check to see if the motors turn. ● Replace the motor. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply. DEVICE ERROR: A Lamp has a blown fuse. LAMP FUSE FAILURE ● Check connections to Lamps. ● Replace the Control PCA. DEVICE ERROR: A problem occurred with the backside optical system. BACKSIDE OPTICAL ● Check to see if the Lamp(s) turn on during an offline test. If FAILURE yes, then clean the glass and optics. If no, replace the Lamp. ● Check the Optical Unit cable connection. ● Replace the Lamp. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. DEVICE ERROR: A problem occurred with the frontside optical system. FRONTSIDE OPTICAL ● Check to see if the Lamp(s) turn on during an offline test. If FAILURE yes, then clean the glass and optics. If no, replace the Lamp. ● Check the Optical Unit/Carrier Unit cable connection. ● If necessary, replace the Lamp. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. 656 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-44. Equipment Errors (continued) Error Message Description DEVICE ERROR: A mechanical problem occurred. MECHANICAL FAILURE ● Check that the shipping lock has been removed and reinserted properly. ● Check that the Home Position Sensor is connected. ● Check the Carrier Belt. ● Check the Flatbed Motor. ● If the problem persists, replace the Flatbed Motor Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply. C4229-90911 Error Messages and Problems 657,

Temporary Errors

A Temporary Error displays when problems with the paper path occur. The Front Panel will display the specific error and graphically illustrate the actions needed to correct the error. Automatic Document Feeder Table 7-45. Temporary Errors Error Message Description ADF PAPER JAM Paper was not found on the ADF path before a READ command was executed, or paper did not pass through the ADF within the specified time. This error state can be reset by one of the following operations: ● the copy module receives a CLEAR command ● or remove paper from the ADF and close the ADF cover ● visually inspect for bad alignment ● If the problem is chronic, clean or replace the ADF pick rollers and separation pad ADF COVER IS OPEN The ADF cover was opened during the ADF READ operation or the ADF cover was open when the ADF read started. ADF MISFEED A START command was received but a misfeed occurred from the ADF input tray. Restack the pages in the ADF input tray. Press START to continue the copy job. ● visually inspect for bad alignment ● If the problem is chronic, clean or replace the ADF pick rollers and separation pad 658 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Step 4 Information Pages

Print information pages from the Mopier’s Information Menu. See page 587. C4229-90911 Information Pages 659,

Step 5 Paper Path

Is the ADF feeding paper correctly? (YES = Go to Step 6: Image Quality) ● Does the copy module cause damage to the original, experiencing frequent mispicks, double-feeds, jams, or skewed paper feeding? ● Check paper types used by customer and suggest to use the flatbed if out of specification. ● Determine if the ADF cleaning interval has been exceeded. (Check the configuration page. See “Sample Copy Module Configuration Page” on page 591 for an example. Inspect and clean the ADF assemblies as needed.) ● Determine if the maintenance interval has been exceeded. (Check the configuration page. See “Sample Copy Module Configuration Page” on page 591 for an example. Inspect and replace the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad as needed.) ● Try a copy from the flatbed to isolate the problem to the ADF mechanism or optics. ● Confirm connection to the ADF (3 cables), confirm ADF Motor Belt, and perform a test of the ADF sensors in the copy module service mode to ensure each sensor moves freely. ● Perform an ADF offset calibration (page 126). ● Perform the ADF test in service mode or an offline test and inspect mechanisms for failure. Be sure to use paper that conforms to HP recommended paper specifications for this test. Replace implicated components. ● See “Error Conditions” on page 661. 660 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Step 6 Image Quality

Is the image quality acceptable? (YES = End) ● Does the copy module output display problems with any of the following? Resolution, grayscale, jitter, skew, image placement, improper image scaling, image out of position, part of image missing, unclear image. ● Determine if the problem is isolated to the flatbed, ADF, or occurs from both. Check to see if the suggested cleaning interval has been exceeded and clean if necessary. (See error and symptom tables and take recommended action.) Table 7-46. Error Conditions Error Condition/Symptom Remedies Power Lamp does not light ● Check the power plug and the Front Panel connection. ● Make sure that the PCA tray is inserted. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply. No image or image scrambled ● Check interface connections. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Check the backside or frontside (if frontside only, replace the Carrier Unit). Grayscale or resolution is bad on ● Check that the document is placed on the flatbed the flatbed correctly. ● Clean both sides of the flatbed glass. ● Clean the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Excessive Jitter on the flatbed ● Check to see if the cables routed in the mechanism frame are in contact with the Carrier Frame. Reroute the cables if necessary. ● Check for objects blocking the movement of the Carrier Unit during scan. Clean or remove. ● Check if carrier unit belt is loose. ● Replace FB Motor Unit if necessary. ● Clean and relubricate the Carrier Unit Shaft. ● Lubricate the carrier guide rail. ● Replace the Control PCA if necessary. C4229-90911 Image Quality 661, Table 7-46. Error Conditions (continued) Error Condition/Symptom Remedies Image is out of position or partly ● Run an offset adjustment. missing from the flatbed ● Make sure that the glass plate assembly has been reseated correctly if moved. ● Replace the Carrier Unit. Image is unclear or faded from the ● Check that the document is placed on the flatbed flatbed correctly. ● Inspect and clean both sides of the flatbed glass. ● Clean the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Magnification is incorrect from the ● Check to see if magnification is incorrect on subscan flatbed or mainscan direction. ● Subscan: check the Carrier Belt and tighten the adjustment screw, and lubricate the Carrier Shaft and Guide Rail. If the problem persists, replace the Flatbed Motor. ● Mainscan: replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Grayscale or resolution is bad on ● Check to see that the document is placed in the ADF the ADF paper chute correctly. ● Check to see that the document size is supported by the ADF. ● Frontside: clean both sides of the glass and clean the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Backside: clean the glass under the ADF and clean the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Excessive Jitter on the ADF ● Check for contaminants on the Feed Roller, Eject Roller, and Idler Feed Roller. ● Check that the document size is supported by the ADF. ● Check the ADF for objects blocking mechanical operation. ● Clean the ADF. ● If the problem persists, replace the ADF. 662 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Table 7-46. Error Conditions (continued) Error Condition/Symptom Remedies Image is out of position or partly ● Check that the original document size is supported by missing from the ADF the ADF. If not, use the flatbed. ● Perform an offset adjustment. ● Clean the ADF. ● If the problem persists, replace the ADF. ● If frontside, replace the Carrier Unit. ● If backside, replace the Optical Unit. Image is unclear, faded, or ● Inspect and clean both sides of the flatbed glass. streaked from the ADF ● Clean the ADF. ● Frontside: clean the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Backside: clean the Optical Unit and back Lamp. If the problem persists, replace the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Magnification is incorrect on the ● Check that the original document paper type is ADF supported by the ADF. If not, then use the flatbed. ● Check to see if magnification is incorrect on the subscan or mainscan direction. ● Subscan: inspect the Feed Roller, Eject Roller and Idler Feed Roller for foreign objects and clean if necessary. Clean the ADF. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Mainscan frontside: replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Mainscan backside: replace the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Frequent paper feed errors: jams, ● Check that the original document paper type is mispicks, double-feeds, damaged supported by the ADF. If not, then use the flatbed. originals, skewed copies on the ● Make sure that the originals are being loaded into the ADF ADF correctly. ● Inspect the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad for contamination and clean. ● Clean the ADF. ● Replace the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad. ● Perform an offset calibration. Front panel buttons and touch ● Perform Front Panel tests. screen are not working ● Replace the Front Panel. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. C4229-90911 Image Quality 663,

Testing the HP Digital Copy 320

Use the following tests to diagnose problems with the copy module. ● Print information pages (page 587) ● Copy Processor LED Test (below) ● Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions (page 666) ● Copy Module Offline Test (page 667) ● Other Tests (page 669) ● Service Mode Tests (page 671) Note If the 1394 connect or firmware download fails, the display will freeze at icon 2, 3, or 4. The display of any icon is the best indication that the Front Panel is functioning correctly.

Copy Processor LED Test

Figure 7-36 Copy Processor LEDs 664 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Performing a Copy Processor LED Test

1 From the back of the copy module, unscrew the left thumb screw on the Copy Processor Card. 2 Gently pull the loosened thumbscrew downward, moving the bulkhead of the Copy Processor Card slightly away from the body of the copy module. Be careful not to unseat the Copy Processor Board. 3 Look down inside the copy module near the bulkhead of the Copy Processor Card. You should be able to see the Copy Processor LEDs. Note If you cannot see the LEDs you may have to temporarily remove the Copy Processor bulkhead. To do this, remove 2 screws to temporarily detach the bulkhead from the PCA so that the LEDs may now be seen easily. Reinstall the Copy Processor.

Copy Processor LED Test Results

Table 7-47. Copy Processor LED Test Results If LED is Indicates that Copy Process or is Blinking green Good - do not replace it Blinking red Bad and should be replaced Blinking red and green Probably good, but firmware download was not successful (Check the “Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions” on page 666 and the printer connections) C4229-90911 Testing the HP Digital Copy 320 665,

Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions

Table 7-48. Icon Conditions Icon Condition Recommended Action No icon ● If the display is blank, or only the backlight appears, or it freezes at the logo, see “Display and Communication” on page 653. ● Check connections and suspect the Front Panel. (If the Copy Processor passes the LED test, the Front Panel should not stop at Icon 1.) Stops at Icon 1 The copy processor did not pass its power on tests. ● Perform a Copy Processor LED test and if the test indicates the Copy Processor is bad, replace it. Stops at Icon 2 The Copy Processor likely cannot make the connection to the printer. ● Check connections. ● Reseat cards. ● Check the printer’s configuration pages for the Copy Connect EIO and Digital Copy 320 Pages. ● Ensure the Mopier and its peripherals are working correctly. ● Make sure Loading Program 1 displays on the Mopier’s control panel during bootup. If it does not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 107). ● Make sure the Mopier is an HP Mopier 320. Stops at Icon 3 Copy module firmware failed to download. ● Check connections. ● Reseat cards. ● Print a directory of the Mopier’s hard disk drive to check that the Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 592). ● Redownload the Copy Module Firmware (page 108). ● Make sure the Mopier is an HP Mopier 320. Stops at Icon 4 The system could not start the downloaded copy module firmware. ● Perform the recommended actions above. ● Make sure Loading Program 1 displays on the Mopier’s control panel during bootup. If it does not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 107). ● Print a directory of the Mopier’s hard disk drive to check that the Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 592). ● Redownload the Copy Module Firmware (page 108). ● Check the printer’s configuration pages for the Copy Connect EIO and Digital Copy 320 Pages. 666 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, Note Download is complete and successful when the main menu replaces Icon 4.

Copy Module Offline Test

This test does not depend on a functioning Copy Processor or a functioning Front Panel. This is a pass or fail test. If the Carrier Unit moves, the ADF feeds paper, and the Lamps come on, then the test is passed. If this does not happen, the copy module will appear to be dead. Successful completion of this test will exercise the functionality of both Lamps, the Carrier Unit, the Optical Unit, and the Control PCA. ADF cover OMR sensor ADF empty open sensor B5sensor A4 B4 size A3 sensor Top of paper sensor Figure 7-37 Locations of ADF Sensors 1 Turn the copy module off. 2 Open the ADF cover and pull the ADF Empty Sensor to the paper out position, and push the B5 Paper Sensor (with respect to portrait paper) while turning the copy module on. When you hear the copy module begin to initialize, release the sensors. 3 Close the ADF and then open the ADF. C4229-90911 Testing the HP Digital Copy 320 667, 4 Close the ADF. At this point you should be in the offline test mode. If no paper is loaded within 5 seconds, the flatbed test executes. (The Carrier Unit moves and the Lamp lights as if they were making a flatbed copy.) 5 Open the ADF to stop the flatbed test. 6 Have a stack of paper ready. Close the ADF and load paper. 7 The ADF will move paper and the Lamps will light as if making a two-sided copy. Note Successful completion of this test will exercise the functionality of both Lamps, the Carrier Unit, the Optical Unit, and the Control PCA. 668 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Other Tests

Use the tests listed below to determine if a part is “good” or “bad” without swapping parts. Table 7-49. Other Tests Possible Bad Part Tests and indicators that the part is “Good” or “Bad” Copy Processor Board Good if: ● the Front Panel icons display. ● the Copy Processor LED test (page 664) shows green or green and red. Control PCA Good if: ● there are no equipment errors. ● the fan is on. ● the Front Panel works. ● the offline test is OK. Front Panel Good if: ● the backlight comes on (might be OK). ● logo displays (probably OK). ● the first icons display (definitely OK). ● passes the service mode tests (which catch small defects such as bad pixels, stuck buttons, or no touch). Power Supply Good if: ● the fan comes on. ● the start button LED lights. ● the Front Panel displays an image. Paper handling mechanisms Good if: ● the service mode ADF test works. ● the offline test works. ● both tests work without damaging the original. C4229-90911 Testing the HP Digital Copy 320 669, Table 7-49. Other Tests (continued) Possible Bad Part Tests and indicators that the part is “Good” or “Bad” Optics Good if: ● there is no optical failure. (An optical failure may also indicate it is time to clean the optics.) ● Lamps light during the offline test. ● a simple page is copied. Copy Module Firmware Good if: ● the disk directory matches the standard (file names and sizes). ● Loading Program 1 is visible on the Front Panel of the Mopier. ● the Mopier configuration page identifies an HP Mopier 320. ● copy module firmware is reloaded. Copy Connect EIO Good if: ● shows up on the configuration pages. ● the fourth startup icon is passed. ADF Sensors Good if: ● the service mode test of each sensor passes. ADF Lamp Good if: ● resistor R3 is temporarily shorted to ground and the lamp lights. ● lights during an offline test. Home Position Sensor Bad if: ● the Carrier Unit bumps into the side of the copy module for 5 seconds. Carrier Unit Lamp Good if: ● lights during an offline test. 670 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911,

Service Mode Tests

The following tests are available through the copy module’s Tests Menu in service mode. Follow the prompts on the front panel to complete the tests. 1 Front panel tests ● display ● touch screen 2 Keypad/LED tests ● keypad buttons ● start button LED 3 Sensors Tests (ADF) 4 ADF paper feed tests C4229-90911 Testing the HP Digital Copy 320 671, 672 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4229-90911, 8 Parts and Diagrams

Chapter contents

How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams - - - - - - - - - 674 Illustrations and Parts Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 675 Mopier and Paper-handling Components - - - - - - - - - 676 Printer Parts and Diagrams- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 680 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams - - - - - - - 694 Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices)714 Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 724 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams - - - - - - - - - 735 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) - - - - - - - - - - 750 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) - - - - - - - - - - - 754 C4229-90911 Chapter contents 673,

How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams

The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies and their component parts. Each table lists the reference designator (item number) for each part, the associated part number for the item, the quantity, and a description of the part. While looking for a part number, pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model of printer. Note Parts that have no item or part number listed are not field-replaceable parts and cannot be ordered.

Ordering Parts

All standard part numbers listed are stocked and may be ordered from HP's PSD/SMO or PSD/SME. Hewlett-Packard Co. Product Support Division/Support Materials Organization 8050 Foothills Blvd. Roseville, CA 95678 Parts Direct Ordering 1-800-227-8164 (U.S. Only) Hewlett-Packard Co. Product Support Division/Support Materials, Europe Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33 D-7030 Böblingen, Germany (49 7031) 14-2253 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers.

Common Hardware

See table 6-1 in Chapter 6 for a list of the common hardware used in the printer. 674 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Illustrations and Parts Lists

The following illustrations and their associated parts tables list the field-replaceable components for this printer. Where applicable, the exchange part number is listed immediately following the original equipment part numbers. This chapter also provides two cross- reference tables of all the parts listed in this chapter: Table on page 714 lists the parts in alphabetical order, and Table 8-18 on page 714 lists the parts in numerical order. Both tables are cross- referenced to the appropriate figure and reference designator in this chapter. C4229-90911 Illustrations and Parts Lists 675,

Mopier and Paper-handling Components

Figure 8-1 HP Mopier 320 Paper-Handling Components 676 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components Part/Exchange Ref Description/Product Number Number QTY

01 Formatter Assembly C4107-67901 01A Formatter Assembly, Exchange C4107-69001 (ex.) 05 Toner Cartridge/C4182X 06 Envelope Feeder/C4242A C3765-60501 1 07 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4237A R95-3002-000CN 1 not shown2x500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 and 5)/C4236A R95-3003-000CN 08 Tray 2 RG5-3951-000CN 1 09 Tray 3 RG5-3952-000CN 1 not shown Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) RF5-1484-000CN 1 not shown Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) RS5-8605-000CN 1 10 Duplexer/C4782A C4782-60501 1 C4782-69501 (ex.) 12 8-bin Mailbox/C4240B 1 12 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4241A 1 12 5-bin Mailbox for Stapler/C4241A (5-bin Mailbox only, C4787-60502 1 without the Stapler Unit.) C4787-69502 (ex.) 13 Face-up Bin RB1-6491-000CN 1 14 EIO Coverplate 5182-5899 3 15 Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1 not shown 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4238A R95-3007-000CN 1 not shown Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4239A C4784-60500 1 not shown Packaging Kit, printer 5041-9238 not shown Packaging Kit, duplexer C3762-60500 not shown Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray C3763-60500 not shown Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60500 not shown Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder C3765-60500 not shown Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A C3914-69001 (ex.) not shown Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A C3915-69001 (ex.) not shown C-link Cable Assembly 61 cm (Engine to 2000-sheet C3763-60502 Input Tray) not shown C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox to Stapler) C3766-60539 not shown Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A

C4229-90911 Mopier and Paper-handling Components 677

, Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components (continued) Part/Exchange Ref Description/Product Number Number QTY not shown Power Box (includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 not shown Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 not shown Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 678 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911, C4229-90911 Mopier and Paper-handling Components 679,

Printer Parts and Diagrams

Figure 8-2 Printer Covers and Doors 680 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-2. Printer Covers and Doors Ref Description Part Number QTY

1 Display, Control Panel RG5-4384-000CN 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (English) C4214-40029 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (French) C4214-40030 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) C4214-40031 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) C4214-40032 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (German) C4214-40041 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) C4214-4004212Tray, Output-Face-down RB1-6490-000CN13Spring, Torsion RB1-6509-000CN14Spring, Compression RB1-6493-000CN15Label, Operation RS5-8676-000CN16Hinge Plate RB2-3641-000CN17Screw, M4 x 10 XA9-0870-000CN 8 Tray, Face-up RB1-6491-000CN19Delivery Cover ( Left Side F/U) RB2-3558-000CN 1 10 Hinge, Stopper RF5-2701-000CN 2 11 Cover, Left-Lower RB1-6480-000CN 1 12 Screw, M4x8XA9-0605-000CN 13 Cover, Switch RB1-6492-000CN 1 14 Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) RB2-3626-000CN 1 15 Front Cover RG5-4362-000CN 1 16 Right Cover Assembly RG5-1915-000CN 1 17 Open/Close Stopper RB1-6484-000CN 1 18 Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal) RB2-3642-000CN 1 19 Screw, M3x8XA9-0872-000CN 20 Cover, Rear RF5-1402-000CN 1 21 Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) RB1-6489-000CN 1 22 Diverter Assembly RG5-4325-000CN 1 22a (not Gear, 20T RS5-1127-000CN 1 shown) 22b Diverter Drive Assembly RF9-1249-000CN 1 23 Top Cover Assembly RG5-4360-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Printer Parts and Diagrams 681

, Figure 8-3 Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) 682 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-3. Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) Ref Description Part Number QTY

1 Assembly, Transfer Roller RG5-4304-000CN12Roller, Transfer RF5-2675-000CN13Transfer Guide Bushing RB1-6441-000CN24Transfer Guide RF5-2676-000CN25Holder, Damper-Front RB1-6461-000CN16Holder, Damper-Rear RB1-6462-000CN18Main Motor Cable RG5-4386-000CN19Screw, M4x8TP XB6-7400-807CN 1 10 Main Motor RH7-5219-000CN 1 11 Clutch Cover RB2-3631-000CN 1 12 Paper Input Unit (PIU) (See Figure 8-7 on page 690 to RG5-4434-000CN 1 order) 12 Paper Input Unit (PIU) (ex.) C4214-69004 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 110V RG5-4315-000CN1xFuser Lock Lever-Right RB1-6615-020CN1xFuser Lock Lever-Left RB1-6616-020CN 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 110V (ex.) C4214-69007 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 220V RG5-4317-000CN 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 220V (ex.) C4214-69008 1 14 Printer Drive Assembly RG5-4365-000CN 1 15 Registration Assembly RG5-4303-000CN 1 15A Electromagnetic Clutch RH7-5187-000CN 1 16 Feeder Assembly (see figure 8-7 on page 690 for detail) RG5-4305-000CN 1 17 Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 8-7 on page 690 for detail) RG5-4330-000CN 1 17A Cover, Internal Tray RB1-6749-000CN 1 18 Tray 1 Assembly Cover RG5-4329-000CN 1 19 Face-down Delivery Assembly (see figure 8-7 on page RG5-1874-000CN 1 690 for detail)

C4229-90911 Printer Parts and Diagrams 683

, Figure 8-4 Printer Internal Components (2 of 4) 684 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-4. Printer Internal Components (2 of 4) Ref Description Part Number QTY

1 Guide, Rear RF5-2726-000CN12Release, Arm RB1-6446-000CN 3 Arm-Pressure-front RB1-6444-000CN 4 Guide, Front RB2-3622-000CN 5 Foot RB1-6421-000CN 6 ROD RB1-6778-000CN 7 Spring, Tension RS5-2499-000CN 8 Guide, Rail RB1-6776-000CN 9 Stopper, Rail RB1-6777-000CN 10 Stopper, Rail RB1-6783-000CN 11 Cable, Tray Sensor RG5-1920-000CN 1 12 Cover, Upper Right RB1-6464-000CN

C4229-90911 Printer Parts and Diagrams 685

, Figure 8-5 Printer Internal Components (3 of 4) 686 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-5. Printer internal Components (3 of 4) Ref Description Part Number QTY

1 Cable, Scanner Motor RG5-4378-000CN12Assembly, Laser Scanner RG5-4344-000CN12Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) C4214-69003 (ex.) 1 3 Laser and Control Panel Cable RG5-4377-000CN14Stopper, CG RB1-6427-000CN25Fan, FM2/Laser Scanner RH7-1266-000CN16Shutter, White RB1-6473-000CN17High-Voltage Power Supply RG5-4306-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Printer Parts and Diagrams 687

, Figure 8-6 Printer Internal Components (4 of 4) 688 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-6. Printer Internal Components (4 of 4) Ref Description Part Number QTY

1 Guides, Interface RB1-6771-000CN22Shield, Formatter RF5-2678-000CN13Guide, Slide RB1-6775-000CN14Shield, Plate RF5-1464-000CN15Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V RG5-4300-000CN15Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V RG5-4301-000CN17Cable, Registration RG5-1928-000CN18Cable, Fuser 2 RG5-1850-000CN19Cable, Fuser 1 RG5-4381-000CN 1 10 Fan, FM3/Formatter RH7-1271-000CN 1 11 Cable, Fan 1 RG5-1921-000CN 1 12 Fan, FM1/Low Voltage Power Supply RH7-1396-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Printer Parts and Diagrams 689

, Figure 8-7 Detail of Assemblies 690 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-7. Detail of Assemblies Ref Description Part Number QTY

A1 Feeder Assembly RG5-4305-000CN A2 Block, Shaft Holding, Front RB2-3503-000CN 1 A3 Compression Spring, Front RS6-2072-000CN 1 A4 Sensor Cable RG5-1843-000CN 1 A5 Sensor Arm PS1 RB1-6417-000CN 1 A6 Sensor Arm Spring RB1-6409-000CN 1 A7 Compression Spring, Rear RS6-2073-000CN 1 A8 Block, Shaft Holding, Rear RB2-3504-000CN 1 B1 Assembly, Paper Pickup RG5-4334-000CN 1 B2 Plate, Guide-Upper RB1-6582-000CN B3 Roller, Pickup RF5-2708-000CN B4 Limiter, torque RB2-3581-000CN 2 B5 Clutch, Paper Feed RH7-5188-000CN 1 B6 PCA, PIU RG5-1860-000CN 1 B7 Photo Interrupter WG8-0291-000CN 1 B8 Arm, Sensor-PS2 RB1-6557-000CN 1 B9 Spring, Sensor Arm RB1-6558-000CN 1 B10 Cable, Sensor RG5-1859-000CN 1 B11 Motor, PIU RH7-1350-000CN 1 B12 Cable, Paper Pickup RG5-1861-000CN 1 B13 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN 4 C1 Assembly, Tray 1 RG5-4330-000CN 1 C2 Fan, FM5 RH7-1397-000CN C3 Tray1 Feed Roller RB1-9526-000CN 1 C4 Tray 1 Separation Pad RF5-2703-000CN 1 D1 Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN 1 D3 Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly RH7-1289-000CN 1 D5 Paper Height Lever RB1-6693-000CN 1 D6 Paper Sensing Lever RB1-6692-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Printer Parts and Diagrams 691

, Figure 8-8 PCB Assembly Location Diagram Table 8-8. PCB Assembly Locations Ref Description Part Number QTY 1 PCB, Switch/Sensor RG5-1846-000CN12Assembly, DC Controller PCB RG5-4375-000CN12Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) C4214-69001 (ex.) 1 3 PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose RG5-1884-000CN14PCB, Tray Sensor RB5-1845-000CN 2 692 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911, Figure 8-9 Face-up Solenoid Assembly Table 8-9. Face-up Solenoid Assembly Ref Description Part Number QTY 1 Face-up Solenoid Assembly RG5-1875-000CN 1 C4229-90911 Printer Parts and Diagrams 693,

Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams Input Devices

2000-sheet Input Tray Kit 1 Kit 1 Kit 1 84 78 Kit 1 Kit 1 80 81 79 74 73 72 76 Kit 1 Kit 1 75 89 Kit 1 Figure 8-10 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) 694 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-10. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) Ref Description Part Number QTY

71 Back Cover RB2-2519-000CN 1 72 Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN 1 73 Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN 1 74 Caster XZ9-0442-000CN 4 75 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN 2 76 Front Cover (with LED window) RF5-2568-000CN 1 77 Left Cover RF5-2646-000CN 1 78 Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN 3 79 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray RG5-3845-000CN 1 80 Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5-3851-000CN 1 81 Paper Deck Drive Bushing RS5-1399-000CN 1 82 Paper Pickup Assembly RG5-3843-000CN 1 83 Pickup Roller RF5-1835-000CN 1 84 Plate Paper Limit Back RG5-4201-000CN 1 85 Plate Paper Limit Middle RG5-3849-000CN 1 86 Plate Paper Reference Front RG5-3850-000CN 1 87 Right Cover RB1-7832-020CN 1 88 Top Cover (Label Included) RG5-2644-000CN 1 89 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) RG5-3854-000CN 1 Kit 1 Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 695

, Figure 8-11 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) 696 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-11. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) Ref Description Part Number QTY

90 Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN 1 91 Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5-4204-000CN 1 92 Main Cable RG5-3919-000CN 1 93 Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) RB1-7835-000CN 1 94 Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) RB1-7677-000CN 1 95 Outrigger RG5-4205-000CN 1 96 Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray Controller) RG5-3908-000CN 1 97 Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2166-000CN 1 98 Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2168-000CN 1 99 Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN 1 100 Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN 1 101 Tension Spring RS5-2561-000CN 1 102 Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN 1 103 2000-sheet Input Tray (whole unit) R95-3002-000CN 1 Kit 1 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN 1 Not Shown Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 1 Not Shown Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 1 Not Shown Power Box (includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 1 Not Shown Tray Shipping Lock RB1-7746-000CN 1 Not Shown C-link Cable (engine to input device) C3763-60502 1 Not Shown Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray RB2-2509-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 697

, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Figure 8-122x500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components 698 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components Ref Description Part Number QTY

1 Back Cover RB2-3675-000CN12Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN13Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN14Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN45Front Top Cover RF5-2762-000CN16Left Cover RF5-2764-000CN17Main Cable RG5-4440-000CN18Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) RB2-3668-000CN19Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5-4416-000CN 1 102x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5-4442-000CN 1 11 Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) RG5-4403-000CN 1 12 Paper Pickup Assembly RG5-4410-000CN 1 13 Storage Paper Tray RB2-3669-000CN 1 14 Tray-Size Sensing PCA RG5-1845-000CN 1 15 Holder Size PCA RB2-3667-000CN 1 16 Pickup Roller RF5-2708-000CN 1 17 Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN 1 18 Right Cover RB2-3666-000CN 1 19 Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN 1 20 Outrigger RG5-4205-000CN 1 21 Caster XZ9-0442-000CN 1 22 Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN 1 23 Front LED PCA RG5-4441-000CN 1 25 Tray 4 Assembly R98-1007-000CN 1 26 Tray 5 Assembly R98-1006-000CN 1 27 Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN 1 not shown Power Box (Includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 1 not shown Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 1 not shown Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 1 not shown Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN 1 not shown Clutch cover for2x500-sheet input tray RB2-3690-000CN 1 32 Top Cover (Includes label) RF5-2766-000CN 1 33 Spacer, latch RB2-3705-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 699

, Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components (continued) Ref Description Part Number QTY 34 Latch XZ9-0379-000CN 1 352x500-sheet Input Tray (whole unit) R95-3003-000CN 1 Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit, and all shipping locks are included in the Shipping Locks Kit. 700 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911, C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 701,

Output Devices

7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Figure 8-13 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components 702 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components Reference Description Part Number QTY

1 Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide) RG1-3838-000CN12Bin Full Sensor RA2-2484-000CN13Flag, Sensor RA2-2485-000CN14Bushing RA2-2505-000CN15Front Cover RF1-4004-000CN16Back Cover RA2-2455-000CN17Power Supply RH3-2205-000CN187-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly RG1-3853-000CN19Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7-5223-000CN 1 10 Solenoid Flipper RH7-5225-000CN 1 11 Reversing Mechanism Motor RF7-1395-000CN 1 12 Plate (Motor Cover) RA2-2541-000CN 1 13 Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) RG1-3836-000CN 1 14 Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) RG1-3837-000CN 1 15 Reversing Tray (Face-up) RA2-2487-000CN 1 16 Diverter Assembly (Flipper) RG1-3844-000CN 1 17 Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA RG1-3816-000CN 1 18 Right Cover Assembly RG1-3840-000CN 1 19 Plate, Stopper RA2-2527-000CN 1 20 LED PCA RG1-3817-000CN 1 21 Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1-3815-000CN 1 22 Support Plate RA2-2500-000CN 1 23 Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA RG1-3814-000CN 1 not shown C-link Cable (80 cm) C4783-70000 1 25 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, whole unit R95-3007-000CN 1 not shown 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, Stand Assembly C4784-60500 1 27 Bottom Bin (Tray) RA2-2408-000CN 1 31 Handle Latch RA2-2512-000CN 1 32 Cover Latch RA2-2531-000CN 1 33 Pin Positioning Bushing RA2-2439-000CN 1 34 Spring Tension RA2-2513-000CN 1 35 Rail Assembly RG1-3842-000CN 1 36 Latching Mechanism RF1-4005-000CN 1

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 703

, Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components (continued) Reference Description Part Number QTY not shown Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RY7-5048-000CN 1 Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit. 704 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911, C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 705, 8-bin Mailbox Figure 8-14 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) 706 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-14. 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) Ref Description Part Number QTY

20 User LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60515 1 21 Adjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60511 1 22 Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) C4785-60516 1 23 Blind Cover C4785-60503 1 24 Standard Output Bin C4785-60502 1 25 Face-up Bin C3764-60505 1 26 Front Cover C4785-60504 1 27 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod C4785-69500 (ex.) 1 (Exchange Unit) 28 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod (Whole C4785-60500 1 Unit) 29 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) C4785-60508 1 30 Nonadjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60510 1 31 Top Cover C3764-60555 1 32 Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) 1 33 Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1 34 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler C4787-60502 1 35 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69502 (ex.) 1 Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1 Kit 1/1G Spacer, Plastic (included in Kit 1) Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1 Kit 3/3B Screws Torx, T20, M4X10 (included in Kit 3) Kit 3/3C Screws Torx, Tapping T20, M4X10 (included in Kit 3) Kit 3/3E Screw Torx, Tapping T10 (included in Kit 3)

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 707

, Figure 8-15 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) 708 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-15. 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) Ref Description Part Number QTY

32 Flipper Assembly C4785-60509 1 33 Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) C4785-60506 1 34 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly C4785-60507 1 Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1 Kit 1/1A Anticurl String Kit 1/1B Anticurl Spring Kit 1/1C Pulley, Small Bottom Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1 Kit 3/3D Screws Torx, T20, M4x12 Kit 3/3E Screw Torx, Tapping T10 Kit 3/3F Caster Screws Not Shown Repackaging Kit C4785-60513 1 Not Shown Short C-link Cable adapter (extension)1 C4785-70001 1 Not Shown C-link Cable 5-bin 8-bin Mailbox to Stapler Unit C3766-60539 1 1. The extension is necessary when no input device is used in combination with an 8-bin mailbox or a 5-bin mailbox with stapler.

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 709

, Figure 8-16 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) 710 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-16. 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) Ref Description Part Number QTY

35 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60514 1 36 Attachment Clip C4785-60512 1 37 Back Cover C4785-60505 1 38 Delivery Head Position Motor C3764-60507 1 39 Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) C3764-60561 1 40 Power Supply C4785-60501 1 41 Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) C4785-60518 1 Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1 Kit 1/1D Cable Holder Round Gasket Kit 1/1E Flat Cable holder Edge Kit 1/1F Flat Cable Holder Kit 2 Cables C4785-60520 1 Kit 2/2A Interlock Switch Kit 2/2B Delivery Head Motor Cable Kit 2/2C Flipper Sensors - Controller Cable Kit 2/2D Flipper Encoder - Controller Kit 2/2E Flipper Motor - Controller Kit 2/2AF ESD Cable Kit 2/2G Delivery Head Assembly Flat Cable Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1 Kit 3/3A Screws Torx Not Shown Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with C4787-60503 1 Stapler

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 711

,

Finisher

8 2 Figure 8-17 Stapler Internal Components 712 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-17. Stapler Internal Components Ref Description Part Number QTY

Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1 Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) 1 1 Top Cover Assembly C3766-6050112Stapling Bed Assembly C3766-6050313Stapler Control PCA C4787-6050114Back Plate C3766-6050515Hinges, Set of C3766-6050616Wire Frame C3766-6050717Brushes C3766-60508 1 not shown Stapler Packaging C3766-6050918Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar (shown) C3766-60510 1 bin full sensor, actuator, and flag (not shown) not shown Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) C3766-6051119C-link Cable (97 cm) C3766-60512 1 not shown Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3766-60516 1

C4229-90911 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 713

,

Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List Description Part Number Table No. and Page

2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 and 5)/C4236A R95-3003-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-12 (page 699) 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5-4442-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4237A R95-3002-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray RG5-3845-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60514 Table 8-16 (page 711) 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler C4787-60502 Table 8-14 (page 707) 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange C4787-69502 (ex.) Table 8-14 (page 707) Unit) 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4241A C4787-69502 (ex.) Table 8-1 (page 677) 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4241A (8-bin Mailbox C4787-60502 Table 8-1 (page 677) only, without the Stapler Unit.) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly RG1-3853-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, Stand Assembly C4784-60500 Table 8-13 (page 703) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4238A R95-3007-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-13 (page 703) 8-bin Mailbox/C4240B Table 8-1 (page 677) Adjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60511 Table 8-14 (page 707) Arm, Sensor-PS2 RB1-6557-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Arm-Pressure-front RB1-6444-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Assembly, DC Controller PCB RG5-4375-000CN Table 8-8 (page 692) Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) C4214-69001 (ex.) Table 8-8 (page 692) Assembly, Laser Scanner RG5-4344-000CN Table 8-5 (page 687) Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) C4214-69003 (ex.) Table 8-5 (page 687) Assembly, MP Tray (Tray 1) RG5-4330-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Assembly, Paper Pickup RG5-4334-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Assembly, Transfer Roller RG5-4304-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) C4785-60516 Table 8-14 (page 707) 714 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Attachment Clip C4785-60512 Table 8-16 (page 711) Back Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C4785-60505 Table 8-16 (page 711) Back Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RA2-2455-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Back Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RB2-2519-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Back Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RB2-3675-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Back Plate C3766-60505 Table 8-17 (page 713) Bin Full Sensor RA2-2484-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Blind Cover C4785-60503 Table 8-14 (page 707) Block, Shaft Holding, Front RB2-3503-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Block, Shaft Holding, Rear RB2-3504-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Bottom Bin (Tray) RA2-2408-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Brushes C3766-60508 Table 8-17 (page 713) Bushing RA2-2505-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) C-link Cable (61 cm) (engine to input device) C3763-60502 Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) C-link Cable (80 cm) C4783-70000 Table 8-13 (page 703) C-link Cable (97 cm) C3766-60512 Table 8-17 (page 713) C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox to C3766-60539 Table 8-1 (page 677) Stapler) Table 8-15 (page 709) Cable, Fan 1 RG5-1921-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Cable, Fuser 1 RG5-4381-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Cable, Fuser 2 RG5-1850-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Cable, Paper Pickup RG5-1861-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Cable, Registration RG5-1928-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Cable, Scanner Motor RG5-4378-000CN Table 8-5 (page 687) Cable, Sensor RG5-1859-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Cable, Tray Sensor RG5-1920-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Cables C4785-60520 Table 8-16 (page 711) Caster XZ9-0442-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) Clutch Cover RB2-3631-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Clutch cover for2x500-sheet input tray RB2-3690-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray RB2-2509-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Clutch, Paper Feed RH7-5188-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691)

C4229-90911 Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 715

,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Compression Spring, Front RS6-2072-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Compression Spring, Rear RS6-2073-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Cover Latch RA2-2531-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Cover, Internal Tray RB1-6749-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Cover, Left-Lower RB1-6480-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Cover, Rear RF5-1402-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Cover, Switch RB1-6492-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Cover, Upper Right RB1-6464-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Delivery Cover (Left Side F/U) RB2-3558-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Delivery Head Position Motor C3764-60507 Table 8-16 (page 711) Display, Control Panel RG5-4384-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Diverter Assembly RG5-4325-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Diverter Assembly (Flipper) RG1-3844-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Diverter Drive Assembly RF9-1249-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Duplexer/C4782A C4782-60501 Table 8-1 (page 677) C4782-69501 (ex.) EIO Coverplate 5182-5899 Table 8-1 (page 677) Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) RB1-6489-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Electromagnetic Clutch RH7-5187-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1-3815-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Envelope Feeder/C4242B C3765-60501 Table 8-1 (page 677) Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) RG1-3837-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) RG1-3836-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Face-down Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Face-up Bin (8-bin Mailbox) C3764-60505 Table 8-14 (page 707) Face-up Bin (engine) RB1-6491-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA RG1-3816-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Face-up Solenoid Assembly RG5-1875-000CN Table 8-9 (page 693) Fan, FM1/Low Voltage Power Supply RH7-1396-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Fan, FM2/Laser Scanner RH7-1266-000CN Table 8-5 (page 687) Fan, FM3/ Formatter RH7-1271-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly RH7-1289-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) 716 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Fan, FM5 RH7-1397-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) Feeder Assembly RG5-4305-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Table 8-7 (page 691) Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) Flag, Sensor RA2-2485-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Flipper Assembly C4785-60509 Table 8-15 (page 709) Foot RB1-6421-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Formatter Assembly C4107-67901 Table 8-1 (page 677) Formatter Assembly, Exchange C4107-69001 (ex.) Table 8-1 (page 677) Front Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C4785-60504 Table 8-14 (page 707) Front Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RF1-4004-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Front Cover, engine RG5-4362-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) RB2-3626-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Front Cover (with LED window) RF5-2568-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) RB2-3668-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Front LED PCA RG5-4441-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5-4204-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Front Top Cover RF5-2762-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA RG1-3814-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Fuser Lock Lever-Left RB1-6616-020CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Fuser Lock Lever-Right RB1-6615-020CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Fusing Assembly, 110V RG5-4315-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Fusing Assembly, 220V RG5-4317-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Fusing Assembly, 110V (ex.) C4214-69007 Table 8-3 (page 683) Fusing Assembly, 220V (ex.) C4214-69008 Table 8-3 (page 683) Gear, 20T RS5-1127-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Guide, Front RB2-3622-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Guide, Rail RB1-6776-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Guide, Rear RF5-2726-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Guide, Slide RB1-6775-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Guides, Interface RB1-6771-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689)

C4229-90911 Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 717

,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Handle Latch RA2-2512-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Hardware C4785-60521 Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-15 (page 709) Table 8-16 (page 711) Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RY7-5048-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) C4785-60506 Table 8-15 (page 709) High-Voltage Power Supply RG5-4306-000CN Table 8-5 (page 687) Hinge Plate RB2-3641-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Hinge, Stopper RF5-2701-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Hinges, Set of C3766-60506 Table 8-17 (page 713) Holder Size PCA RB2-3667-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Holder, Damper-Front RB1-6461-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Holder, Damper-Rear RB1-6462-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) C3764-60561 Table 8-16 (page 711) Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar C3766-60510 Table 8-17 (page 713) bin full sensor, actuator, and flag Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) C3766-60511 Table 8-17 (page 713) Label, Operation RS5-8676-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Laser and Control Panel Cable RG5-4377-000CN Table 8-5 (page 687) Latch XZ9-0379-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Latching Mechanism RF1-4005-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) LED PCA RG1-3817-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Left Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RF5-2646-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Left Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RF5-2764-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Limiter, torque RB2-3581-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3766-60516 Table 8-17 (page 713) Main Cable, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3919-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) 718 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Main Cable, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-4440-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Main Motor RH7-5219-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Main Motor Cable RG5-4386-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A C3914-69001 (ex.) Table 8-1 (page 677) Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A C3915-69001 (ex.) Table 8-1 (page 677) Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) RB1-7835-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Metal Tape and Housing Assembly C4785-60507 Table 8-15 (page 709) Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) RB1-7677-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Motor, PIU RH7-1350-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) MP Separation Pad RF5-2703-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) MP Tray Assembly Cover (Tray 1) RG5-4329-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Multi-purpose Tray Assembly (Tray 1) RG5-4330-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller (Tray 1) RB1-9526-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod C4785-60500 Table 8-14 (page 707) (Whole Unit) 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod C4785-69500 (ex.) Table 8-14 (page 707) (Exchange Unit) 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) C4785-60508 Table 8-14 (page 707) Nonadjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60510 Table 8-14 (page 707) Open/Close Stopper RB1-6484-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Outrigger, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-3852-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Outrigger, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-4205-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray C3763-60500 Table 8-1 (page 677) Overlay, Control Panel (English) C4214-40029 Table 8-2 (page 681) Overlay, Control Panel (French) C4214-40030 Table 8-2 (page 681) Overlay, Control Panel (German) C4214-40041 Table 8-2 (page 681) Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) C4214-40031 Table 8-2 (page 681) Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) C4214-40032 Table 8-2 (page 681) Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) C4214-40042 Table 8-2 (page 681) Packaging Kit, duplexer C3762-60500 Table 8-1 (page 677) Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder C3765-60500 Table 8-1 (page 677) Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60500 Table 8-1 (page 677) Packaging Kit, Printer 5041-9238 Table 8-1 (page 677) Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3851-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695)

C4229-90911 Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 719

,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input RG5-4416-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray Paper Deck Drive Bushing RS5-1399-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3908-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Controller) Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) RG5-4403-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Paper Height Lever RB1-6693-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Paper Input Unit (PIU) RG5-4434-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Paper Input Unit (PIU) (ex.) C4214-69004 Table 8-3 (page 683) Paper Pickup Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3843-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Paper Pickup Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-4410-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2166-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Paper Sensing Lever RB1-6692-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) RF5-1484-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) RS5-8605-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2168-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) PCA, PIU RG5-1860-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) PCB, Switch/Sensor RG5-1846-000CN Table 8-8 (page 692) PCB, Tray Sensor RB5-1845-000CN Table 8-8 (page 692) PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose RG5-1884-000CN Table 8-8 (page 692) Photo Interrupter WG8-0291-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Pickup Roller, 2000-sheet Input Tray RF5-1835-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Pickup Roller, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RF5-2708-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Pin Positioning Bushing RA2-2439-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Plastic Parts C4785-60519 Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-15 (page 709) Table 8-16 (page 711) Plate (Motor Cover) RA2-2541-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Plate Paper Limit Back RG5-4201-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Plate Paper Limit Middle RG5-3849-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Plate Paper Reference Front RG5-3850-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Plate, Guide-Upper RB1-6582-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Plate, Stopper RA2-2527-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) 720 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Power Box (Includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) Power Supply (8-bin Mailbox) C4785-60501 Table 8-16 (page 711) Power Supply (7-bin Tabletop Mailbox) RH3-2205-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V RG5-4301-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V RG5-4300-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Printer Drive Assembly RG5-4365-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Rail Assembly RA2-3842-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Registration Assembly RG5-4303-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Release, Arm RB1-6446-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Repackaging Kit C4785-60513 Table 8-15 (page 709) Reversing Mechanism Motor RF7-1395-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Reversing Tray (Face-up) RA2-2487-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Right Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RB1-7832-020CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Right Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RB2-3666-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Right Cover Assembly, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RG1-3840-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Right Cover Assembly, engine RG5-1915-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal) RB2-3642-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) ROD RB1-6778-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Rollers, Feed and Separation RF5-1834-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Roller, Pickup RF5-2708-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Roller, Transfer RF5-2675-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Screw, M3x8XA9-0872-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Screw, M4 x 10 XA9-0870-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Screw, M4x8XA9-0605-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Screw, M4x8TP XB6-7400-807CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Sensor Arm PS1 RB1-6417-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Sensor Arm Spring RB1-6409-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Sensor Cable RG5-1843-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691)

C4229-90911 Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 721

,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Shield, Formatter RF5-2678-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Shield, Plate RF5-1464-000CN Table 8-6 (page 689) Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox C4787-60503 Table 8-16 (page 711) with Stapler Short C-link Cable adapter C4785-70001 Table 8-15 (page 709) Shutter, White RB1-6473-000CN Table 8-5 (page 687) Solenoid Flipper RH7-5225-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7-5223-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Spacer, latch RB2-3705-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Spring, Compression RB1-6493-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Spring, Torsion RB1-6509-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Spring Tension RA2-2513-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Spring, Sensor Arm RB1-6558-000CN Table 8-7 (page 691) Spring, Tension RS5-2499-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4239A C4784-60500 Table 8-1 (page 677) Standard Output Bin C4785-60502 Table 8-14 (page 707) Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-17 (page 713) Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-17 (page 713) Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A Table 8-1 (page 677) Stapler Control PCA C4787-60501 Table 8-17 (page 713) Stapler Packaging C3766-60509 Table 8-17 (page 713) Stapling Bed Assembly C3766-60503 Table 8-17 (page 713) Stopper, CG RB1-6427-000CN Table 8-5 (page 687) Stopper, Rail RB1-6777-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Stopper, Rail RB1-6783-000CN Table 8-4 (page 685) Storage Paper Tray RB2-3669-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Support Plate RA2-2500-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Tension Spring RS5-2561-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Toner Cartridge/C4182X Table 8-1 (page 677) Top Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60555 Table 8-14 (page 707) Top Cover (Includes label), 2 x 500-sheet Input RF5-2766-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray 722 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-18. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Top Cover (Label Included), 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-2644-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Top Cover Assembly (Engine) RG5-4360-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Top Cover Assembly, stapler C3766-60501 Table 8-17 (page 713) Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide), 7-bin Tabletop RG1-3838-000CN Table 8-13 (page 703) Mailbox Transfer Guide RF5-2676-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Transfer Guide Bushing RB1-6441-000CN Table 8-3 (page 683) Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) C4785-60518 Table 8-16 (page 711) Tray 2 RG5-3951-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Tray 3 RG5-3952-000CN Table 8-1 (page 677) Tray 4 Assembly R98-1007-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray 5 Assembly R98-1006-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray Shipping Lock RB1-7746-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray, Face-up RB1-6491-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Tray, Output-Face-down RB1-6490-000CN Table 8-2 (page 681) Tray-Size Sensing PCA RG5-1845-000CN Table 8-12 (page 699) Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) User LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60515 Table 8-14 (page 707) Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) RG5-3854-000CN Table 8-10 (page 695) Wire Frame C3766-60507 Table 8-17 (page 713)

C4229-90911 Alphabetical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 723

,

Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List Part Number Description Table No. and Page

Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A Table 8-1 (page 677) Toner Cartridge/C4182X Table 8-1 (page 677) 5041-9238 Packaging Kit, Printer Table 8-1 (page 677) 5182-5899 EIO Coverplate Table 8-1 (page 677) C3762-60500 Packaging Kit, duplexer Table 8-1 (page 677) C3763-60500 Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-1 (page 677) C3763-60502 C-link Cable (61 cm) (engine to input device) Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) C3764-60500 Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox Table 8-1 (page 677) C3764-60505 Face-up Bin (8-bin Mailbox) Table 8-14 (page 707) C3764-60507 Delivery Head Position Motor Table 8-16 (page 711) C3764-60555 Top Cover, 8-bin Mailbox Table 8-14 (page 707) C3764-60561 Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) Table 8-16 (page 711) C3765-60500 Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder Table 8-1 (page 677) C3765-60501 Envelope Feeder/C4242A Table 8-1 (page 677) C3766-60501 Top Cover Assembly, stapler Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60503 Stapling Bed Assembly Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60505 Back Plate Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60506 Hinges, Set of Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60507 Wire Frame Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60508 Brushes Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60509 Stapler Packaging Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60510 Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar Table 8-17 (page 713) bin full sensor, actuator, and flag C3766-60511 Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60512 C-link Cable (97 cm) Table 8-17 (page 713) C3766-60539 C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox to Table 8-1 (page 677) Stapler) Table 8-15 (page 709) C3766-60516 Mailbox with Stapler Packaging Table 8-17 (page 713) 724 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

C3914-69001 (ex.) Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A Table 8-1 (page 677) C3915-69001 (ex.) Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A Table 8-1 (page 677) C4107-67901 Formatter Assembly Table 8-1 (page 677) C4107-69001 (ex.) Formatter Assembly, Exchange Table 8-1 (page 677) C4214-40029 Overlay, Control Panel (English) Table 8-2 (page 681) C4214-40030 Overlay, Control Panel (French) Table 8-2 (page 681) C4214-40031 Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) Table 8-2 (page 681) C4214-40032 Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) Table 8-2 (page 681) C4214-40041 Overlay, Control Panel (German) Table 8-2 (page 681) C4214-40042 Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) Table 8-2 (page 681) C4214-69001 (ex.) Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) Table 8-8 (page 692) C4214-69003 (ex.) Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) Table 8-5 (page 687) C4214-69004 (ex.) Paper Input Unit (PIU) (exchange) Table 8-3 (page 683) C4214-69007 (ex.) Fusing Assembly, 110V (exchange) Table 8-3 (page 683) C4214-69008 (ex.) Fusing Assembly, 220V (exchange) Table 8-3 (page 683) C4781-60500 Power Box (Includes bracket clip) Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) C4781-60501 Jumper Cable, Short Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) C4781-60502 Jumper Cable, Long Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) C4782-60501 Duplexer/C4782A Table 8-1 (page 677) C4782-69501 (ex.) C4783-70000 C-link Cable (80 cm) Table 8-13 (page 703) C4784-60500 Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4239A Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-13 (page 703) C4785-60500 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod Table 8-1 (page 677) (Whole Unit) Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60501 Power Supply (8-bin Mailbox) Table 8-16 (page 711) C4785-60502 Standard Output Bin Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60503 Blind Cover Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60504 Front Cover, 8-bin Mailbox Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60505 Back Cover, 8-bin Mailbox Table 8-16 (page 711)

C4229-90911 Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 725

,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

C4785-60506 Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) Table 8-15 (page 709) C4785-60507 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly Table 8-15 (page 709) C4785-60508 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60509 Flipper Assembly Table 8-15 (page 709) C4785-60510 Nonadjustable Fixed Caster Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60511 Adjustable Fixed Caster Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60512 Attachment Clip Table 8-16 (page 711) C4785-60513 Repackaging Kit Table 8-15 (page 709) C4785-60514 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) Table 8-16 (page 711) C4785-60515 User LED PCA (with Cable) Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60516 Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) Table 8-14 (page 707) C4785-60518 Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) Table 8-16 (page 711) C4785-60519 Plastic Parts Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-15 (page 709) Table 8-16 (page 711) C4785-60520 Cables Table 8-16 (page 711) C4785-60521 Hardware Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-15 (page 709) Table 8-16 (page 711) C4785-69500 (ex.) 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod Table 8-14 (page 707) (Exchange Unit) C4785-70001 Short C-link Cable adapter Table 8-15 (page 709) C4787-60500 Stapler Assembly Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-17 (page 713) C4787-60501 Stapler Control PCA Table 8-17 (page 713) C4787-60502 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4241A (8-bin Mailbox Table 8-1 (page 677) only, without the Stapler Unit.) Table 8-14 (page 707) C4787-60503 Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox Table 8-16 (page 711) with Stapler C4787-69500 (ex.) Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) Table 8-14 (page 707) Table 8-17 (page 713) C4787-69502 (ex.) 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange Table 8-14 (page 707) Unit) R95-3002-000CN 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4237A Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-11 (page 697) R95-3003-000CN2x500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 and 5)/C4236A Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-12 (page 699) 726 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

R95-3007-000CN 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4238A Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-13 (page 703) R98-1006-000CN Tray 5 Assembly Table 8-12 (page 699) R98-1007-000CN Tray 4 Assembly Table 8-12 (page 699) RA2-2408-000CN Bottom Bin (Tray) Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2439-000CN Pin Positioning Bushing Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2455-000CN Back Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2484-000CN Bin Full Sensor Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2485-000CN Flag, Sensor Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2487-000CN Reversing Tray (Face-up) Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2500-000CN Support Plate Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2505-000CN Bushing Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2512-000CN Handle Latch Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2513-000CN Spring Tension Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2527-000CN Plate, Stopper Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2531-000CN Cover Latch Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-2541-000CN Plate (Motor Cover) Table 8-13 (page 703) RA2-3842-000CN Rail Assembly Table 8-13 (page 703) RB1-6409-000CN Sensor Arm Spring Table 8-7 (page 691) RB1-6417-000CN Sensor Arm PS1 Table 8-7 (page 691) RB1-6421-000CN Foot Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6427-000CN Stopper, CG Table 8-5 (page 687) RB1-6441-000CN Transfer Guide Bushing Table 8-3 (page 683) RB1-6444-000CN Arm-Pressure-front Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6446-000CN Release, Arm Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6461-000CN Holder, Damper-Front Table 8-3 (page 683) RB1-6462-000CN Holder, Damper-Rear Table 8-3 (page 683) RB1-6464-000CN Cover, Upper Right Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6473-000CN Shutter, White Table 8-5 (page 687) RB1-6480-000CN Cover, Left-Lower Table 8-2 (page 681) RB1-6484-000CN Open/Close Stopper Table 8-2 (page 681) RB1-6489-000CN Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) Table 8-2 (page 681) RB1-6490-000CN Tray, Output-Face-down Table 8-2 (page 681)

C4229-90911 Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 727

,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

RB1-6491-000CN Face-up Bin (engine) Table 8-1 (page 677) Table 8-2 (page 681) RB1-6492-000CN Cover, Switch Table 8-2 (page 681) RB1-6493-000CN Spring, Compression Table 8-2 (page 681) RB1-6509-000CN Spring, Torsion Table 8-2 (page 681) RB1-6557-000CN Arm, Sensor-PS2 Table 8-7 (page 691) RB1-6558-000CN Spring, Sensor Arm Table 8-7 (page 691) RB1-6582-000CN Plate, Guide-Upper Table 8-7 (page 691) RB1-6615-020CN Fuser Lock Lever-Right Table 8-3 (page 683) RB1-6616-020CN Fuser Lock Lever-Left Table 8-3 (page 683) RB1-6692-000CN Paper Sensing Lever Table 8-7 (page 691) RB1-6693-000CN Paper Height Lever Table 8-7 (page 691) RB1-6749-000CN Cover, Internal Tray Table 8-3 (page 683) RB1-6771-000CN Guides, Interface Table 8-6 (page 689) RB1-6775-000CN Guide, Slide Table 8-6 (page 689) RB1-6776-000CN Guide, Rail Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6777-000CN Stopper, Rail Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6778-000CN ROD Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6783-000CN Stopper, Rail Table 8-4 (page 685) RB1-6894-000CN Tray Size Plate Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) RB1-7677-000CN Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) Table 8-11 (page 697) RB1-7746-000CN Tray Shipping Lock Table 8-11 (page 697) RB1-7832-020CN Right Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) RB1-7835-000CN Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) Table 8-11 (page 697) RB1-9526-000CN Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller Table 8-7 (page 691) RB2-2509-000CN Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray Table 8-11 (page 697) RB2-2519-000CN Back Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) RB2-3503-000CN Block, Shaft Holding, Front Table 8-7 (page 691) RB2-3504-000CN Block, Shaft Holding, Rear Table 8-7 (page 691) RB2-3558-000CN Delivery Cover (Left Side F/U) Table 8-2 (page 681) RB2-3581-000CN Limiter, torque Table 8-7 (page 691) RB2-3622-000CN Guide, Front Table 8-4 (page 685) RB2-3626-000CN Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) Table 8-2 (page 681) 728 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

RB2-3631-000CN Clutch Cover Table 8-3 (page 683) RB2-3641-000CN Hinge Plate Table 8-2 (page 681) RB2-3642-000CN Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal) Table 8-2 (page 681) RB2-3666-000CN Right Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Table 8-12 (page 699) RB2-3667-000CN Holder Size PCA Table 8-12 (page 699) RB2-3668-000CN Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) Table 8-12 (page 699) RB2-3669-000CN Storage Paper Tray Table 8-12 (page 699) RB2-3675-000CN Back Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Table 8-12 (page 699) RB2-3690-000CN Clutch cover for2x500-sheet input tray Table 8-12 (page 699) RB2-3705-000CN Spacer, latch Table 8-12 (page 699) RB5-1845-000CN PCB, Tray Sensor Table 8-8 (page 692) RF1-4004-000CN Front Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Table 8-13 (page 703) RF1-4005-000CN Latching Mechanism Table 8-13 (page 703) RF5-1402-000CN Cover, Rear Table 8-2 (page 681) RF5-1464-000CN Shield, Plate Table 8-6 (page 689) RF5-1484-000CN Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) Table 8-1 (page 677) RF5-1834-000CN Feed and Separation Rollers Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) RF5-1835-000CN Pickup Roller, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) RF5-2556-000CN Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) RF5-2568-000CN Front Cover (with LED window) Table 8-10 (page 695) RF5-2646-000CN Left Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) RF5-2675-000CN Roller, Transfer Table 8-3 (page 683) RF5-2676-000CN Transfer Guide Table 8-3 (page 683) RF5-2678-000CN Shield, Formatter Table 8-6 (page 689) RF5-2701-000CN Hinge, Stopper Table 8-2 (page 681) RF5-2703-000CN MP Separation Pad Table 8-7 (page 691) RF5-2708-000CN Roller, Pickup Table 8-7 (page 691) Table 8-12 (page 699) RF5-2726-000CN Guide, Rear Table 8-4 (page 685) RF5-2762-000CN Front Top Cover Table 8-12 (page 699) RF5-2764-000CN Left Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Table 8-12 (page 699)

C4229-90911 Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 729

,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

RF5-2766-000CN Top Cover (Includes label), 2 x 500-sheet Input Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray RF7-1395-000CN Reversing Mechanism Motor Table 8-13 (page 703) RF9-1249-000CN Top Cover Assembly Table 8-2 (page 681) RG1-3814-000CN Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3815-000CN Empty Bin Sensor PCA Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3816-000CN Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3817-000CN LED PCA Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3836-000CN Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3837-000CN Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3838-000CN Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide), 7-bin Tabletop Table 8-13 (page 703) Mailbox RG1-3840-000CN Right Cover Assembly, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3844-000CN Diverter Assembly (Flipper) Table 8-13 (page 703) RG1-3853-000CN 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly Table 8-13 (page 703) RG5-1843-000CN Sensor Cable Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-1845-000CN Tray-Size Sensing PCA Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-1846-000CN PCB, Switch/Sensor Table 8-8 (page 692) RG5-1850-000CN Cable, Fuser 2 Table 8-6 (page 689) RG5-1859-000CN Cable, Sensor Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-1860-000CN PCA, PIU Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-1861-000CN Cable, Paper Pickup Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-1874-000CN Face-down Delivery Assembly Table 8-3 (page 683) Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-1875-000CN Face-up Solenoid Assembly Table 8-9 (page 693) RG5-1884-000CN PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose Table 8-8 (page 692) RG5-1915-000CN Right Cover Assembly, engine Table 8-2 (page 681) RG5-1920-000CN Cable, Tray Sensor Table 8-4 (page 685) RG5-1921-000CN Cable, Fan 1 Table 8-6 (page 689) RG5-1928-000CN Cable, Registration Table 8-6 (page 689) RG5-2166-000CN Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly Table 8-11 (page 697) RG5-2168-000CN Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly Table 8-11 (page 697) RG5-2644-000CN Top Cover (Label Included), 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) RG5-3843-000CN Paper Pickup Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) 730 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

RG5-3845-000CN 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) RG5-3849-000CN Plate Paper Limit Middle Table 8-10 (page 695) RG5-3850-000CN Plate Paper Reference Front Table 8-10 (page 695) RG5-3851-000CN Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-10 (page 695) RG5-3852-000CN Outrigger, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-3853-000CN Feet Adjustable Tip Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-3854-000CN Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) Table 8-10 (page 695) RG5-3908-000CN Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-11 (page 697) Controller) RG5-3909-000CN Power Supply Cable (PSU) Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-3919-000CN Main Cable, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-11 (page 697) RG5-3951-000CN Tray 2 Table 8-1 (page 677) RG5-3952-000CN Tray 3 Table 8-1 (page 677) RG5-4021-000CN Universal Power Supply Assembly Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-4201-000CN Plate Paper Limit Back Table 8-10 (page 695) RG5-4204-000CN Front LED PCA with holder and cable Table 8-11 (page 697) RG5-4205-000CN Outrigger, 2000-sheet Input Tray Table 8-11 (page 697) RG5-4300-000CN Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V Table 8-6 (page 689) RG5-4301-000CN Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V Table 8-6 (page 689) RG5-4303-000CN Registration Assembly Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4304-000CN Assembly, Transfer Roller Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4305-000CN Feeder Assembly Table 8-3 (page 683) Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-4306-000CN High-Voltage Power Supply Table 8-5 (page 687) RG5-4315-000CN Fusing Assembly, 110V Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4317-000CN Fusing Assembly, 220V Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4325-000CN Diverter Assembly Table 8-2 (page 681) RG5-4329-000CN MP Tray Assembly Cover (Tray 1) Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4330-000CN Multi-purpose Tray Assembly (Tray 1) Table 8-3 (page 683) Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-4334-000CN Assembly, Paper Pickup Table 8-7 (page 691) RG5-4344-000CN Assembly, Laser Scanner Table 8-5 (page 687)

C4229-90911 Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 731

,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

RG5-4360-000CN Top Cover Assembly Table 8-2 (page 681) RG5-4362-000CN Front Cover, engine Table 8-2 (page 681) RG5-4365-000CN Printer Drive Assembly Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4375-000CN Assembly, DC Controller PCB Table 8-8 (page 692) RG5-4377-000CN Laser and Control Panel Cable Table 8-5 (page 687) RG5-4378-000CN Cable, Scanner Motor Table 8-5 (page 687) RG5-4381-000CN Cable, Fuser 1 Table 8-6 (page 689) RG5-4384-000CN Display, Control Panel Table 8-2 (page 681) RG5-4386-000CN Main Motor Cable Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4403-000CN Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-4410-000CN Paper Pickup Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-4416-000CN Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input Table 8-12 (page 699) Tray RG5-4434-000CN Paper Input Unit (PIU) Table 8-3 (page 683) RG5-4440-000CN Main Cable, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-4441-000CN Front LED PCA Table 8-12 (page 699) RG5-4442-000CN2x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Table 8-12 (page 699) RH3-2205-000CN Power Supply (7-bin Tabletop Mailbox) Table 8-13 (page 703) RH7-1266-000CN Fan, FM2/Laser Scanner Table 8-5 (page 687) RH7-1271-000CN Fan, FM3/Formatter Table 8-6 (page 689) RH7-1289-000CN Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly Table 8-7 (page 691) RH7-1350-000CN Motor, PIU Table 8-7 (page 691) RH7-1396-000CN Fan, FM1/Low Voltage Power Supply Table 8-6 (page 689) RH7-1397-000CN Fan, FM5 Table 8-7 (page 691) RH7-5187-000CN Electromagnetic Clutch Table 8-3 (page 683) RH7-5188-000CN Clutch, Paper Feed Table 8-7 (page 691) RH7-5219-000CN Main Motor Table 8-3 (page 683) RH7-5223-000CN Solenoid Reversing Mechanism Table 8-13 (page 703) RH7-5225-000CN Solenoid Flipper Table 8-13 (page 703) RS5-1127-000CN Gear, 20T Table 8-2 (page 681) RS5-1399-000CN Paper Deck Drive Bushing Table 8-10 (page 695) RS5-2499-000CN Spring, Tension Table 8-4 (page 685) RS5-2561-000CN Tension Spring Table 8-11 (page 697) 732 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-19. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

RS5-8605-000CN Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) Table 8-1 (page 677) RS5-8611-000CN Tray Size Labels Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699) RS5-8676-000CN Label, Operation Table 8-2 (page 681) RS6-2072-000CN Compression Spring, Front Table 8-7 (page 691) RS6-2073-000CN Compression Spring, Rear Table 8-7 (page 691) RY7-5044-000CN 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-11 (page 697) RY7-5048-000CN Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Table 8-13 (page 703) VD7-1893-151CN Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A Table 8-11 (page 697) Table 8-12 (page 699) WG8-0291-000CN Photo Interrupter Table 8-7 (page 691) XA9-0605-000CN Screw, M4x8Table 8-2 (page 681) XA9-0870-000CN Screw, M4 x 10 Table 8-2 (page 681) XA9-0872-000CN Screw, M3x8Table 8-2 (page 681) XB6-7400-807CN Screw, M4x8TP Table 8-3 (page 683) XZ9-0379-000CN Latch Table 8-12 (page 699) XZ9-0442-000CN Caster Table 8-10 (page 695) Table 8-12 (page 699)

C4229-90911 Numerical Parts List (Mopier and Paper Handling Devices) 733

, 734 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams

Figure 8-18 Assembly Location Diagram 1 Covers 2 Flatbed 3 Glass Plate Assembly 4 Power Supply and Main Board Tray 5 Carrier Unit 6 ADF Unit 7 Optical Unit 8 Document Cover Assembly C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 735, Figure 8-19 Covers 736 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-20. Covers Ref Description Part Number QTY

101 Upper Cover (skin) PA03002-C107FJ 1 102 ADF Cover (skin) PA03002-C106FJ 1 103 ADF Latch Cap PA03002-C201FJ 1 105 Output Tray Assembly PA03002-C121FJ 1 105-1 Output Tray Flip-out PA03002-C263FJ 1 106 Panel Cover PA03002-C264FJ 1 107 Front Panel Bracket PA03002-C257FJ 3 108 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring PA03002-C266FJ 1 109 Front Panel 9000288TF 1 not shown Front Panel Frame Ground Plate PA03002-C272FJ 1 not shown Front Panel Cable Clamp PA03002-C273FJ 1

C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 737

,

Figure 8-20 Flatbed Table 8-21. Flatbed Ref Description Part Number QTY

202 Carrier Rail PA03002-C205FJ 1 203 FB Motor Unit (w/belt) PA03002-C116FJ 1 205 Carrier Tension Pulley Collar PA03002-C214FJ 1 206 Carrier Tension Pulley Spring PA03002-C212FJ 1 207 Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft PA03002-C211FJ 1 208 Carrier Belt Tension Pulley PA03002-C210FJ 1 209 Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer PA03002-C213FJ 2 210 Idle Roller Coil Spring PA03002-C209FJ 1 211 Carrier Unit Protector PA03002-C216FJ 1 212 Rubber Foot PA03002-C218FJ 4 213 Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector PA03002-C217FJ 1 214 Control PCA Protector PA03002-C215FJ 1 215 Junction PCA Cover PA03002-C267FJ 1 738 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-21. Flatbed (continued) Ref Description Part Number QTY

216 Junction PCA PA03002-C103FJ 1 217 Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead PA03002-C262FJ 1 218 Front Panel Cable PA03002-C125FJ 1 219 Front Panel Cable Cover PA03002-C270FJ 1 220 Carrier Flex Cable PA03002-C204FJ 1 221 Home Position Sensor PA03002-C207FJ 1 222 Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) PA03002-C124FJ 1 223 Frame Ground Spring 1 PA03002-C208FJ 1

C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 739

,

Figure 8-21 Glass Plate and PCA Assembly Table 8-22. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly Ref Description Part Number QTY

301 Glass Plate Assembly PA03002-C219FJ 1 301-1 Output Tray Bracket, Front PA03002-C223FJ 1 301-2 Output Tray Bracket, Rear PA03002-C222FJ 1 301-4 Exit Idle Roller PA03002-C224FJ 2 301-5 HK Ring V2 PA03002-C225FJ 2 302 Main/PS Cover Bracket PA03002-C220FJ 1 304 Fan Assembly PA03002-C118FJ 1 305 Power Supply PA03002-C101FJ 1 306 Control PCA (FJ) PA03002-C102FJ 1 307 Copy Processor Card Cage PA03002-C258FJ 1 309 Back PCA Board (CP mate) PA03002-C119FJ 1 311 DC Cable PS to Main PA03002-C203FJ 1 313 RFI Cover PA03002-C202FJ 1 314 CCD Cable PA03002-C229FJ 1 740 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911, Table 8-22. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly (continued) Ref Description Part Number QTY 315 Copy Processor Card PM-3700 1 316 Copy Connect Cable 8120-8749 1 C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 741, Figure 8-22 Carrier Unit 742 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-23. Carrier Unit Ref Description Part Number QTY

401 Carrier Unit PA03002-C113FJ 1 401-1 Lower Lamp (front side) PA03002-C114FJ 1 401-2 Carrier Unit Lamp PCA PA03002-C251FJ 1 401-3 Carrier Rail Bushing PA03002-C206FJ 1 401-4 Carrier Unit Dust Cover PA03002-C256FJ 1 401-5 Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt PA03002-C259FJ 1

C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 743

,

Figure 8-23 ADF Unit Table 8-24. ADF Unit Ref Description Part Number QTY

501-1 ADF Latch Lever Front PA03002-C242FJ 1 501-2 ADF Latch Spring PA03002-C245FJ 2 501-3 Drive Roller Bearing PA03002-C233FJ 2 501-5 Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad PA03002-C227FJ 1 501-6 Drive Roller Shaft PA03002-C230FJ 2 501-7 ADF Latch Shaft PA03002-C244FJ 1 501-8 Pick Spring PA03002-C240FJ 1 501-9 ADF Motor Unit PA03002-C109FJ 1 501-11 LED Assembly (includes cable) PA03002-C126FJ 1 501-12 Key Washer PA03002-C241FJ 1 501-15 ADF Belt PA03002-C111FJ 1 501-16 Bearing for Feed Roller PA03002-C265FJ 2 501-17 ADF Latch Lever Rear PA03002-C243FJ 1 744 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-24. ADF Unit (continued) Ref Description Part Number QTY

501-18 Reduction Gear PA03002-C232FJ 2 501-19 Drive Roller Gear PA03002-C231FJ 1 501-20 Pad Shaft PA03002-C238FJ 2 501-21 Pad Assembly Frame PA03002-C236FJ 1 501-22 ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm PA03002-C235FJ 1 501-23 Pad Plate PA03002-C239FJ 1 501-24 Pad Spring PA03002-C237FJ 1 501-25 Separation Pad Assembly PA03002-C122FJ 1 501-26 Sensor Unit Assembly PA03002-C110FJ 1 501-26A Top of Form Sensor Arm PA03002-C234FJ 1 501-26B ADF Cable PA03002-C228FJ 1 501-27 Paper Anti Static Assembly PA03002-C246FJ 1 501-30 Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C112FJ 1 501-32 ADF Lift Spring Rear PA03002-C248FJ 1 501-33 ADF Lift Spring Front PA03002-C247FJ 1 501-34 Idle Roller Leaf Spring PA03002-C249FJ 1 501-35 Pick Roller Assembly PA03002-C120FJ 1 501-36 Brass Bushing for Pick Roller PA03002-C269FJ 4 501-37 Pick Roller Clutch/Gear PA03002-C250FJ 1 501-38 Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick Roller PA03002-C123FJ 2 Cover)

C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 745

, Figure 8-24 Optical Unit Table 8-25. Optical Unit Ref Description Part Number QTY 501 ADF Unit PA03002-C108FJ 1 601 Optical Unit PA03002-C117FJ 1 601-1 Upper Lamp (back side) PA03002-C115FJ 1 601-2 ADF Lamp PCA PA03002-C252FJ 1 746 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911, Figure 8-25 Document Cover Assembly Table 8-26. Document Cover Assembly Ref Description Part Number QTY 701 FB Cover Assembly PA03002-C104FJ 1 701-1 Document Holding Pad PA03002-C105FJ 1 701-2 Rubber Stop, Document Cover PA03002-C226FJ 1 701-3 Paper Chute Flip Out PA03002-C260FJ 1 C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 747,

A D B C Figure 8-26 Screws (1 of 4) Table 8-27. Screws (1 of 4) RefABCDDescription Part Number Qty

in kit B1 8 mm 2.5 mm 8 mm 3 mm TP Screw m3x8PA03002-C282FJ 20 B2 8 mm 2.5 mm 6 mm 3 mm TP Screw m3x6PA03002-C281FJ 20

A D B C Figure 8-27 Screws (2 of 4) Table 8-28. Screws (2 of 4) RefABCDDescription Part Number Qty

in kit B3 10 mm 3.2 mm 8 mm 4 mm TP Screw m4x8PA03002-C288FJ 20 B4 7 mm 2 mm 6 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C283FJ 20 washer m3x6B5 7 mm 2 mm 8 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C284FJ 20 washer m3x8B6 7 mm 2 mm 35 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C285FJ 20 washer m3 x 35 B10 9 mm 2.6 mm 8 mm 4 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C286FJ 20 washer m4x8748 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911, ADBCFigure 8-28 Screws (3 of 4) Table 8-29. Screws (3 of 4) RefABCDDescription Part Number Qty in kit B15 6 mm 1.75 mm 6 mm 3 mm Flat Head Screw m3 x6 PA03002-C287FJ 20

B C D A

Figure 8-29 Screws (4 of 4) Table 8-30. Screws (4 of 4) RefABCDDescription Part Number Qty in kit B20 7 mm 3 mm 2.6 mm 0.6 mm E-ring, Latch Lever PA03002-C254FJ 20 (20pcs) B21 9 mm 4 mm 3.5 mm 0.6 mm E-ring, Idle Roller PA03002-C253FJ 20 (20pcs) B22 5 mm 2 mm 1.7 mm 0.4 mm Retainer Ring ADF Lock PA03002-C255FJ 20 Bearing (20pcs) not Thumb screws for Pick PA03002-C123FJ shown Roller Cover not 13 5.5 10 4 Thumb screw for CA03002-C290 20 shown Document Cover C4229-90911 HP Digital Copy 320 Parts and Diagrams 749,

Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) Table 8-31. Alphabetical Parts List Description Part Number Table No. and Page

ADF Belt PA03002-C111FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Cable PA03002-C228FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Cover (skin) PA03002-C106FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) ADF Lamp PCA PA03002-C252FJ Table 8-25 (page 746) ADF Latch Cap PA03002-C201FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) ADF Latch Lever Front PA03002-C242FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Latch Lever Rear PA03002-C243FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Latch Shaft PA03002-C244FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Latch Spring PA03002-C245FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Lift Spring Front PA03002-C247FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Lift Spring Rear PA03002-C248FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Motor Unit PA03002-C109FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm PA03002-C235FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) ADF Unit PA03002-C108FJ Table 8-25 (page 746) Back PCA Board (CP mate) PA03002-C119FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Bearing for Feed Roller PA03002-C265FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Brass Bushing for Pick Roller PA03002-C269FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Calibration Target Kit PA03002-C261FJ Carrier Belt Tension Pulley PA03002-C210FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Flex Cable PA03002-C204FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Rail PA03002-C205FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Rail Bushing PA03002-C206FJ Table 8-23 (page 743) Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead PA03002-C262FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector PA03002-C217FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) PA03002-C124FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Tension Pulley Collar PA03002-C214FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft PA03002-C211FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer PA03002-C213FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Carrier Tension Pulley Spring PA03002-C212FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) 750 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-31. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Carrier Unit PA03002-C113FJ Table 8-23 (page 743) Carrier Unit Dust Cover PA03002-C256FJ Table 8-23 (page 743) Carrier Unit Lamp PCA PA03002-C251FJ Table 8-23 (page 743) Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt PA03002-C259FJ Table 8-23 (page 743) Carrier Unit Protector PA03002-C216FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) CCD Cable PA03002-C229FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Control PCA (FJ) PA03002-C102FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Control PCA Protector PA03002-C215FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Copy Connect Cable 8120-8749 Table 8-22 (page 740) Copy Processor Card PM-3700 Table 8-22 (page 740) Copy Processor Card Cage PA03002-C258FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) DC Cable PS to Main PA03002-C203FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Document Holding Pad PA03002-C105FJ Table 8-26 (page 747) Drive Roller Bearing PA03002-C233FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Drive Roller Gear PA03002-C231FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Drive Roller Shaft PA03002-C230FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) PA03002-C253FJ Table 8-30 (page 749) E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) PA03002-C254FJ Table 8-30 (page 749) Exit Idle Roller PA03002-C224FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Fan Assembly PA03002-C118FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) FB Cover Assembly PA03002-C104FJ Table 8-26 (page 747) FB Motor Unit (w/belt) PA03002-C116FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Flat Head Screw m3 x6 PA03002-C287FJ Table 8-29 (page 749) Frame Ground Spring 1 PA03002-C208FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Front Panel 9000288TF Table 8-20 (page 737) Front Panel Bracket PA03002-C257FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Front Panel Cable PA03002-C125FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Front Panel Cable Clamp PA03002-C273FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Front Panel Cable Cover PA03002-C270FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Front Panel Frame Ground Plate PA03002-C272FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Front Panel Frame Ground Spring PA03002-C266FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Glass Plate Assembly PA03002-C219FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) HK Ring V2 PA03002-C225FJ Table 8-22 (page 740)

C4229-90911 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) 751

,

Table 8-31. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Home Position Sensor PA03002-C207FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Idle Roller Coil Spring PA03002-C209FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Idle Roller Leaf Spring PA03002-C249FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Junction PCA PA03002-C103FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Junction PCA Cover PA03002-C267FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Key Washer PA03002-C241FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) LED Assembly (includes cable) PA03002-C126FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Lower Lamp (front side) PA03002-C114FJ Table 8-23 (page 743) Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 PA03002-C285FJ Table 8-28 (page 748) Machine Screw w/washer m3x6PA03002-C283FJ Table 8-28 (page 748) Machine Screw w/washer m3x8PA03002-C284FJ Table 8-28 (page 748) Machine Screw w/washer m4x8PA03002-C286FJ Table 8-28 (page 748) Main/PS Cover Bracket PA03002-C220FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Maintenance Kit: see Pick Roller Assembly and Separation Pad Assembly Optical Unit PA03002-C117FJ Table 8-25 (page 746) Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad PA03002-C227FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Output Tray Assembly PA03002-C121FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Output Tray Bracket, Front PA03002-C223FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Output Tray Bracket, Rear PA03002-C222FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Output Tray Flip-out PA03002-C263FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Pad Assembly Frame PA03002-C236FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Pad Plate PA03002-C239FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Pad Shaft PA03002-C238FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Pad Spring PA03002-C237FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Panel Cover PA03002-C264FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Paper Anti Static Assembly PA03002-C246FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Paper Chute Flip Out PA03002-C260FJ Table 8-26 (page 747) Pick Roller Assembly PA03002-C120FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Pick Roller Clutch/Gear PA03002-C250FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C112FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Pick Spring PA03002-C240FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Power Supply PA03002-C101FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) 752 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-31. Alphabetical Parts List (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page

Reduction Gear PA03002-C232FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) PA03002-C255FJ Table 8-30 (page 749) RFI Cover PA03002-C202FJ Table 8-22 (page 740) Rubber Foot PA03002-C218FJ Table 8-21 (page 738) Rubber Stop, Document Cover PA03002-C226FJ Table 8-26 (page 747) Sensor Unit Assembly PA03002-C110FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Separation Pad Assembly PA03002-C122FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick PA03002-C123FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) Roller Cover) Top of Form Sensor Arm PA03002-C234FJ Table 8-24 (page 744) TP Screw m3x6PA03002-C281FJ Table 8-27 (page 748) TP Screw m3x8PA03002-C282FJ Table 8-27 (page 748) Upper Cover (skin) PA03002-C107FJ Table 8-20 (page 737) Upper Lamp (back side) PA03002-C115FJ Table 8-25 (page 746)

C4229-90911 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) 753

,

Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List Part Number Description Table No. and Page

8120-8749 Copy Connect Cable Table 8-22 (page 740) 9000288TF Front Panel Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C101FJ Power Supply Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C102FJ Control PCA (FJ) Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C103FJ Junction PCA Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C104FJ FB Cover Assembly Table 8-26 (page 747) PA03002-C105FJ Document Holding Pad Table 8-26 (page 747) PA03002-C106FJ ADF Cover (skin) Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C107FJ Upper Cover (skin) Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C108FJ ADF Unit Table 8-25 (page 746) PA03002-C109FJ ADF Motor Unit Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C110FJ Sensor Unit Assembly Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C111FJ ADF Belt Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C112FJ Pick Roller Cover Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C113FJ Carrier Unit Table 8-23 (page 743) PA03002-C114FJ Lower Lamp (front side) Table 8-23 (page 743) PA03002-C115FJ Upper Lamp (back side) Table 8-25 (page 746) PA03002-C116FJ FB Motor Unit (w/belt) Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C117FJ Optical Unit Table 8-25 (page 746) PA03002-C118FJ Fan Assembly Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C119FJ Back PCA Board (CP mate) Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C120FJ Pick Roller Assembly Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C121FJ Output Tray Assembly Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C122FJ Separation Pad Assembly Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C123FJ Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick Table 8-24 (page 744) Roller Cover) PA03002-C124FJ Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C125FJ Front Panel Cable Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C126FJ LED Assembly (includes cable) Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C201FJ ADF Latch Cap Table 8-20 (page 737) 754 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

PA03002-C202FJ RFI Cover Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C203FJ DC Cable PS to Main Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C204FJ Carrier Flex Cable Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C205FJ Carrier Rail Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C206FJ Carrier Rail Bushing Table 8-23 (page 743) PA03002-C207FJ Home Position Sensor Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C208FJ Frame Ground Spring 1 Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C209FJ Idle Roller Coil Spring Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C210FJ Carrier Belt Tension Pulley Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C211FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C212FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Spring Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C213FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C214FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Collar Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C215FJ Control PCA Protector Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C216FJ Carrier Unit Protector Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C217FJ Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C218FJ Rubber Foot Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C219FJ Glass Plate Assembly Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C220FJ Main/PS Cover Bracket Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C222FJ Output Tray Bracket, Rear Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C223FJ Output Tray Bracket, Front Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C224FJ Exit Idle Roller Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C225FJ HK Ring V2 Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C226FJ Rubber Stop, Document Cover Table 8-26 (page 747) PA03002-C227FJ Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C228FJ ADF Cable Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C229FJ CCD Cable Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C230FJ Drive Roller Shaft Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C231FJ Drive Roller Gear Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C232FJ Reduction Gear Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C233FJ Drive Roller Bearing Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C234FJ Top of Form Sensor Arm Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C235FJ ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm Table 8-24 (page 744)

C4229-90911 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) 755

,

Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

PA03002-C236FJ Pad Assembly Frame Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C237FJ Pad Spring Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C238FJ Pad Shaft Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C239FJ Pad Plate Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C240FJ Pick Spring Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C241FJ Key Washer Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C242FJ ADF Latch Lever Front Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C243FJ ADF Latch Lever Rear Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C244FJ ADF Latch Shaft Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C245FJ ADF Latch Spring Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C246FJ Paper Anti Static Assembly Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C247FJ ADF Lift Spring Front Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C248FJ ADF Lift Spring Rear Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C249FJ Idle Roller Leaf Spring Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C250FJ Pick Roller Clutch/Gear Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C251FJ Carrier Unit Lamp PCA Table 8-23 (page 743) PA03002-C252FJ ADF Lamp PCA Table 8-25 (page 746) PA03002-C253FJ E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) Table 8-30 (page 749) PA03002-C254FJ E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) Table 8-30 (page 749) PA03002-C255FJ Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) Table 8-30 (page 749) PA03002-C256FJ Carrier Unit Dust Cover Table 8-23 (page 743) PA03002-C257FJ Front Panel Bracket Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C258FJ Copy Processor Card Cage Table 8-22 (page 740) PA03002-C259FJ Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt Table 8-23 (page 743) PA03002-C260FJ Paper Chute Flip Out Table 8-26 (page 747) PA03002-C261FJ Calibration Target Kit PA03002-C262FJ Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C263FJ Output Tray Flip-out Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C264FJ Panel Cover Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C265FJ Bearing for Feed Roller Table 8-24 (page 744) PA03002-C266FJ Front Panel Frame Ground Spring Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C267FJ Junction PCA Cover Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C269FJ Brass Bushing for Pick Roller Table 8-24 (page 744) 756 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List (continued) Part Number Description Table No. and Page

PA03002-C270FJ Front Panel Cable Cover Table 8-21 (page 738) PA03002-C272FJ Front Panel Frame Ground Plate Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C273FJ Front Panel Cable Clamp Table 8-20 (page 737) PA03002-C281FJ TP Screw m3x6Table 8-27 (page 748) PA03002-C282FJ TP Screw m3x8Table 8-27 (page 748) PA03002-C283FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3x6Table 8-28 (page 748) PA03002-C284FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3x8Table 8-28 (page 748) PA03002-C285FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 Table 8-28 (page 748) PA03002-C286FJ Machine Screw w/washer m4x8Table 8-28 (page 748) PA03002-C287FJ Flat Head Screw m3 x6 Table 8-29 (page 749) PM-3700 Copy Processor Card Table 8-22 (page 740)

C4229-90911 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) 757

, 758 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4229-90911,

Index Numerics LEDs 620

2 x 500-sheet input tray (trays 4 & 5) left cover 289 adjustable foot tip 343 lifter operation 159 adjustment procedure 116 locating pins 311 back cover 316 main cable harness 294 casters 342 main drive assembly 291 controller PCA 334 messages 557 diagnostics 621 motor test 617 dimensions 51 motors 156 electrical specifications 53 ordering 24 front door (storage area) 341 orientation 286 front LED PCA 345 paper paths and components 155 identification label 22 paper quantity switch assembly 306 left cover 317 paper size switch assembly 306 locating pins 344 paper tray 293 main cable 338 pickup and feed system 157 messages 561 pickup assembly 300 ordering 24 power supply 159, 302 orientation 315 printing from 159 paper deck drive assembly 331 removing and replacing 207 paper paths and components 160 right cover 290 parts and diagrams 698 rollers 304 pickup and feed system 162 sensor test 619 pickup assembly 329 sensors 156 power supply 163, 337 specifications 11, 51 printing from 159 stand-alone running test 617 removing and replacing 207 switches 156 right cover 321 tension springs 310 rollers 333 troubleshooting 528, 529 specifications 11, 51 verifying installation 589 storage paper tray 340 vertical transfer unit (VTU) 308 tray-size sensing PCA 335 weight 51 verifying installation 589 wiring diagram 649 vertical transfer unit 318 2-sided printing 154 weight 51 5-bin mailbox with stapler, see mailbox 2000-sheet input tray (tray 4) with stapler adjustable foot 313 7-bin tabletop mailbox 209 adjustment procedure 118 back cover 352 back cover 288 collator mode 168, 175 casters 312 controller PCA 358 clutches 156 cover latch 383 controller PCA 296 diagnostics 625 diagnostic tests 617 dimensions 52 dimensions 51 electrical specifications 54 electrical specifications 53 empty bin sensor 367 features 155 face-down bins 364 front cover 287 face-up sensors PCA 372 front LED PCA assembly 298 face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) 375 identification label 22 flipper solenoid 380

C4229-90911 Index 759

, 7-bin tabletop mailbox (continued) paper jams 530 front cover 349 paper path 170, 632 full bin and interlock sensor PCA 369 power box 28 handle 381 power supply 388 identification label 22 power-on sequence 173, 631 latching mechanism 382 receiving paper 173 messages 565 removing and replacing 208 modes 167 sensors 171 operation 166 space requirements 48 ordering 24 specifications 12, 52 orientation 348 stand-alone diagnostics 630 paper paths and components 164 stapler operation 177 parts and diagrams 702 status LED PCA 412 power supply 359 switches 171 removing and replacing 209, 347 testing 630 reversing mechanism 373 transport belt motor 394 right door assembly (paper path cover) troubleshooting 528, 530 360 verifying installation 589 short tray 7 378 virtual stacker mode 174 solenoid reversing mechanism 379 weight 52 specifications 12 wiring diagram 650 stand dimensions and weight 52 A ordering 25 AC access cover (Mopier) 218 verifying installation 589 AC power virtual stacker mode 168 distribution 132 weight 52 troubleshooting 534 8-bin mailbox accessories anticurl strings 402 locations 23 attachment assembly 415 ordering 24 back cover 386 see also paper-handling devices blind cover 389 user installable 204 casters 414 verifying installation 589 components 170 acoustic emissions 54 controller PCA 171, 400 ADF (HP Digital Copy 320) delivery head assembly 173, 404 belt 484 delivery head motor 393 cover 452 diagnostic LED PCA 410 duplex operation 194 dimensions 48, 52 lamp 479 electrical specifications 53 lamp PCA 477 features 170 latch cap 451 flipper assembly 173, 390 loading front cover 386 motor unit 483 identification label 22 paper path sensors 199 input paper guide 396 simplex operation 193 interlock switch 409 unit 487 LEDs 633 adhesive labels, see labels mailbox mode 174 adjustable foot messages 5702x500-sheet input tray 343 metal tape and housing assembly 398 2000-sheet input tray 313 motors 171 anticurl strings (8-bin mailbox) 402 operating modes 170, 173 attachment assembly (8-bin mailbox) 415 operation 173 attention light 60 ordering 24 automatic document feeder, see ADF orientation 385 paper bins 389 760 Index C4229-90911,

B paper size 61, 85, 88

back PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 474 performing 62 back plate (stapler) 419 collator mode background scatter 604 7-bin tabletop mailbox 168, 175 bed assembly (stapler) 425 communication (HP Digital Copy 320) 653 bins communication (Mopier) 198 configuring communication channels 198 7-bin tabletop mailbox 167 communications link, see cables, c-link 8-bin mailbox 173 compressed print 611 specifications 11, 52 configuration menu 75 bins (removing and replacing) configuration page 7-bin tabletop mailbox 364 printing 89 8-bin mailbox 389 troubleshooting 589 black lines 602 consumables 513 black page 599 control panel blank page default settings 60 entire 599 display 65 middle of page 611 keys 58 partial 610 language 62 bubble print 609 layout 58 button functions (HP Digital Copy 320) 98 lights 59 overriding settings 60

C removing and replacing 215

troubleshooting 538 cable harness (2000-sheet input tray) 294 control panel menus 65 cables configuration 75 c-link EIO 82 input and output 180 I/O 80 troubleshooting 523 information 67 main (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 338 map 588 ordering 27 paper handling 68 parallel 184 print quality 70 calibration (HP Digital Copy 320) 126 printing 72 cancel job key 59 resets 84 capacity of paper trays 11 service mode 85 card cage (HP Digital Copy 320) 470 control PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 469 carrier belt and motor (HP Digital Copy controller PCA 320) 5092x500-sheet input tray 334 carrier unit (HP Digital Copy 320) 497 2000-sheet input tray 296 carrier unit lamp (HP Digital Copy 320) 7-bin tabletop mailbox 358 494 8-bin mailbox 171, 400 cartridge slots 3 DC (printer) 261 casters stapler 4212x500-sheet input tray 342 copy connect cable (installing) 435 2000-sheet input tray 312 copy connect EIO board (installing in 8-bin mailbox 414 Mopier) 434 cleaning copy module, see HP Digital Copy 320 Mopier and accessories 112 copy processor board (HP Digital Copy spilled toner 114 320) toner cartridge drum 142 LED test 665 cleaning (HP Digital Copy 320) 120 power-up 189 clutches removing and replacing 464 2000-sheet input tray 156 diagram 640 drive signals 137 locations 150 cold reset

C4229-90911 Index 761

, covers diagnostics on paper-handling devices2x500-sheet input tray 617 back 316 diagrams front top 324 how to use 674 left 317 list 638 right 321 dimensions of Mopier and accessories 47 2000-sheet input tray dimensions of Mopier and paper-handling back 288 devices 51 front 287 dimensions of printer and accessories 52 left 289 DIMM see memory right 290 DIMM, see memory 7-bin tabletop mailbox DIP switches 619 back 352 display checks (HP Digital Copy 320) 653 front 349 diverter assembly latch 383 7-bin tabletop mailbox 375 top 354 door 230 8-bin mailbox removing and replacing 229 back 386 document holding pad (HP Digital Copy blind 389 320) 445 front 386 documentation 28 cleaning 114 door assembly HP Digital Copy 320 445 7-bin tabletop mailbox 360 Mopier printer right lower 231 AC access 218 downloading firmware (HP Digital Copy back 219 320) 108 front 220 draft mode, see EconoMode left lower 222 drive assembly (2000-sheet input tray) top 223 291 stapler driver top 424 overriding control panel settings 60 curl (paper) 533 troubleshooting 527 dropouts 602

D drum

daisy chain connections 523 cleaning 142 data light 59 conditioning 143 DC controller PCA rotation functional check 615 diagrams 641 duplexer functions 137 dimensions 52 removing 261 memory requirements 31 DC power 131 messages 579 declaration of conformity operation 154 HP Digital Copy 320 40 ordering 24 HP Mopier 320 39 paper paths and components 150 default settings removing and replacing 206 control panel 60 specifications 12 restoring 84 speed 2 delivery head assembly (8-bin mailbox) standard or optional 3 173, 404 verifying installation 589 delivery head motor (8-bin mailbox) 393 weight 52 delivery unit (face-down output bin) duty cycle 3 fan 238 removing 226 E density calibration adjustment (HP Digital EconoMode 136 Copy 320) 128 EDO DIMMs, see memory diagnostic LED PCA (8-bin mailbox) 410 EEPROM (HP Digital Copy 320) 471 762 Index C4229-90911, 8-bin mailbox electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESD) anticurl strings 402 202 attachment assembly 415 EMI statement for Korea 43 back cover 386 engine test blind cover 389 microswitch 138 casters 414 troubleshooting 537 components 170 envelope feeder controller PCA 171, 400 dimensions 52 delivery head assembly 173, 404 messages 564 delivery head motor 393 ordering 24 diagnostic LED PCA 410 paper paths and components 150 dimensions 48, 52 printing from 154 electrical specifications 53 removing and replacing 206 features 170 specifications 12 flipper assembly 173, 390 verifying installation 589 front cover 386 weight 52 identification label 22 envelopes input paper guide 396 guidelines 13 interlock switch 409 paper jams 530 LEDs 633 troubleshooting 529, 531 mailbox mode 174 environment messages 570 operating 46 metal tape and housing assembly 398 requirements 50 motors 171 environmental product stewardship 35 operating modes 170, 173 error messages, see messages operation 173 ESD precautions 202 ordering 24 event log orientation 385 clearing 85 paper bins 389 troubleshooting 538 paper jams 530 using 538 paper path 170, 632 exchange program 513 power box 28 exhaust power supply 388 fan 1 (laser/scanner) 234 power-on sequence 173, 631 fan 2 (lvps) 236 receiving paper 173 fan 4 (delivery unit) 238 removing and replacing 208 sensors 171 F space requirements 48 face-down bins specifications 12, 52 7-bin tabletop mailbox 364 stand-alone diagnostics 630 8-bin mailbox 389 stapler operation 177 delivery unit 226 status LED PCA 412 specifications 11 switches 171 face-up solenoid assembly 281 testing 630 face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) (7-bin transport belt motor 394 tabletop mailbox) 375 troubleshooting 528, 530 factory settings 60 verifying installation 589 fading print 530, 600 virtual stacker mode 174 fan weight 52 fan 1 (laser/scanner) 234 wiring diagram 650 fan 2 (lvps) 236 EIO cards fan 3 (formatter) 237 ordering 28 fan 4 (delivery unit) 238 standard 3 fan 5 (tray 1 intake) 239 status 89 HP Digital Copy 320 472 EIO menu 82 locations 150 electrical specifications 53 motors 138

C4229-90911 Index 763

, faulty registration 608 functional overview (HP Digital Copy 320) FCC statement 34 185 feeder assembly 248 fusing assembly feet (HP Digital Copy 320) 502 cleaning 114 felt pad (HP Digital Copy 320) 501 removing 252 field replaceable units, ordering 512 fusing images finisher components 175 about 149 Finland laser statement 43 troubleshooting 531 firmware (HP Digital Copy 320) 108 5-bin mailbox with stapler, see mailbox G with stapler gear assembly 256 flash DIMMs (ordering) 27 glass plate assembly (HP Digital Copy see also memory 320) 490 flashing light 59 go key 58 flatbed cover assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 448 flatbed operation (HP Digital Copy 320) H 194 half self test functional check 614 flipper assembly handle (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 381 7-bin tabletop mailbox 375 hard disk 8-bin mailbox 390 about 30 fonts ordering 27 internal 3 removing and replacing 205 ordering 27 verifying installation 589 foot hardware table 2122x500-sheet input tray 343 engine 212 2000-sheet input tray 313 HP Digital Copy 320 437 HP Digital Copy 320 502 Hardware Technical Support Center formatter assembly (HTSC) 33 fan 237 high voltage power supply function 134 check 615 part locations 7 contacts 133, 140 removing 250, 251 distribution 133 retaining settings 87 removing and replacing 269 frame ground spring (HP Digital Copy 320) hinges (stapler) 427 503 home position sensor (HP Digital Copy front lamp PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 504 320) 492 front LED PCA HP ASAP (Automated Support Access2x500-sheet input tray 345 Program) 32 2000-sheet input tray 298 HP Digital Copy 320 front panel (HP Digital Copy 320) ADF belt 484 brackets 460 ADF cover 452 frame ground spring 488 ADF duplex operation 194 installing overlay 90 ADF lamp 479 layout 91 ADF lamp PCA 477 removing and replacing 454 ADF latch cap 451 ribbon cable 457, 507 ADF motor unit 483 using 90 ADF simplex operation 193 front top cover (2 x 500-sheet input tray) ADF unit 487 324 alphabetical parts list 750 FRUs, see field replaceable units assembly locations 735 FTP technical assistance 33 back PCA 474 full bin sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop boot errors 655 mailbox) 369 Boot Up Icon Conditions 666 functional block diagram 130 button functions 98 calibrating 126 card cage 470 764 Index C4229-90911, HP Digital Copy 320 (continued) maintenance 126 carrier belt and motor 509 media selection guidelines 17 carrier unit 497 menu tabs 92 carrier unit lamp 494 numerical parts list 754 cleaning 120 offline test 667 cleaning ADF and glass 121 offset adjustment 128 complete optics cleaning 124 optical unit 475 configurations 9 orientation 439 context sensitive help 97 output tray 447 control PCA 469 output tray brackets 489 copy processor output tray flip-out 447 function 187 panel cover 459 layout 187 paper chute flip-out 446 copy processor board paper path 660 LED test 665 paper path sensors 199 power-up 189 parts 8 removing and replacing 464 parts and diagrams 735 default configurations 97 performing maintenance 440 density calibration adjustment 128 pick roller assembly 441 display and communication power on checks 652 troubleshooting 653 power supply 465, 473 document holding pad 445 power-up 191 document quality 18 RFI cover 467 downloading firmware 108 sensor unit assembly 480 EEPROM 471 sensors 667 equipment errors 655 separation pad assembly 440 error messages 654 service mode 105 fan 472 service mode tests 671 features 2 settings and defaults 100 features of the copy module 4 shipping lock 431 feet 502 skins 445 felt pad 501 specifications 55 flatbed 104 stand (installing) 430 flatbed cover assembly 448 start button LED 99 flatbed operation 194 status bar 91 frame ground spring 503 temporary errors 658 front lamp PCA 504 testing 664 front panel troubleshooting 651 installing overlay 90 upper cover 462 layout 91 vertical magnification adjustment 128 removing and replacing 454 y power cord 436 using 90 HP distribution center 512 front panel brackets 460 HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval front panel frame ground spring 488 Support Technology) 32 front panel ribbon cable 457, 507 HP JetDirect print server card, see EIO functional overview 185 cards glass plate assembly 490 HP JetDirect Print Server Software hardware table 437 Installation Guide 28 home position sensor 492 HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper image quality 661 Specification Guide 28 installing 430 HP reseller sales and service support 33 junction PCA and cover 505 HP resource manager 107 LED Assembly PCA 486 HP support line 512 LED functions 98 HTSC, see Hardware Technical Support loading ADF Center lubricating 124

C4229-90911 Index 765

, humidity 50 laser statement for Finland 43 hvps, see high voltage power supply laser/scanner assembly 254

I drive 137

I/O fan 234 menu 80 motors 138 troubleshooting 523 latching mechanism (7-bin tabletop identification 22 mailbox) 382 image formation layout block diagram 139 copy processor (HP Digital Copy 320) developing 146 187 fusing 149 LED system 1392x500-sheet input tray front LED PCA transferring 148 345 writing 144 2000-sheet input tray 620 image path 196 2000-sheet input tray front LED PCA image quality 298 HP Digital Copy 320 661 7-bin tabletop mailbox LED PCA 371 Mopier 597 8-bin mailbox 633 image skew 529, 608 diagnostic 410 images per month 3 status 412 indicator lights 59 Assembly PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) information menu 67 486 input paper guide (8-bin mailbox) 396 HP Digital Copy 320 interface functions 98 accessories 27 start button LED 99 standard 3 interpreting status 620, 630, 633 interlock sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop troubleshooting 624 mailbox) 369 left output bin specifications 11 interlock switch (8-bin mailbox) 409 light print 530, 600 internet technical assistance 33 lights on control panel 59 item key 59 lines black 602 edge of paper 606

J white 610

job interrupt 198 LocalTalk cable 27 job separator mode locating pins 7-bin tabletop mailbox 1682x500-sheet input tray 344 junction PCA and cover (HP Digital Copy 2000-sheet input tray 119, 311 320) 505 low voltage power supply distribution system 131

K removing and replacing 270

keys on control panel 58 lvps, see low voltage power supply Korean EMI statement 43

M L Macintosh network cable kit (ordering) 27

labels mailbox mode adhesive 14 7-bin tabletop mailbox 167 paper jams 530 8-bin mailbox 174 printer identification 22 mailbox with stapler language on control panel 62 electrical specifications 53 languages (personalities) identification label 22 removing and replacing 204 operation 177 standard printer 3 ordering 24 status 89 paper jams 530 verifying installation 589 removing and replacing 208 766 Index C4229-90911, mailbox with stapler (continued) power-up 192 specifications 12 specifications 51 troubleshooting 530 testing 89 verifying installation 589 motor wiring diagram 646 2000-sheet input tray 156 main cable harness (2000-sheet input 7-bin tabletop mailbox reversing tray) 294 mechanism 373 main drive assembly (2000-sheet input 8-bin mailbox 171 tray) 291 8-bin mailbox transport belt 394 main gear assembly 256 assembly 259 maintenance diagram 640 HP Digital Copy 320 126 fan 1 235 kit, ordering 28 fan 3 237 preventative 115 locating 150 setting count 87, 250 main motor assembly 259 manuals 28 operation 138 mass storage, see hard disk drive test 617 media selection guidelines (HP Digital verifying functionality 617 Copy 320) 17 multi-purpose tray, see tray 1 media separation 148 media, see paper N memory network cards, see EIO cards installing network troubleshooting 523 ordering 27 noise removing and replacing 204 emissions 54 requirements 30 troubleshooting 528 standard 3 status 89 verifying installation 589 O menu key 58 offline test (HP Digital Copy 320) 667 menu map page 588 offset adjustment (HP Digital Copy 320) menu tabs (HP Digital Copy 320) 92 128 menus, see control panel menus operating messages environment 462x500-sheet input tray 561 overview 57 2000-sheet input tray 557 optical unit (HP Digital Copy 320) 475 7-bin tabletop mailbox 565 options, see accessories 8-bin mailbox 570 ordering parts 512, 674 duplexer 579 output paper sensor PCA 262 engine 545 output tray (HP Digital Copy 320) 447 envelope feeder 564 output tray brackets (HP Digital Copy 320) HP Digital Copy 320 654 489 paper handling controller 580 output tray flip-out (HP Digital Copy 320) stapler 576 447 metal tape and housing assembly (8-bin overcurrent/overvoltage protection 132 mailbox) 398 overhead transparencies, see minus key 59 transparencies model number 22 overriding control panel settings 60 monthly usage 3 Mopier P communication 198 page count dimensions 47, 51, 52 setting 85, 87, 250 electrical specifications 53 troubleshooting 529 features 2 page skew 529, 608 paper paths and components 150 pages per minute (ppm) 2 part locations 673 panel cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 459

C4229-90911 Index 767

, paper parallel cables delivery 173 ordering 27 ordering 26 pin configuration 184 sizes and memory requirements 31 specifications 184 specifications (HP Digital Copy 320) 17 parts specifications (Mopier and paper- diagrams 673 handling devices) 11, 13 ordering 512, 674 specifications guide 28 PCL storing 15 fonts 3 paper chute flip-out (HP Digital Copy 320) memory requirements 31 446 PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference paper deck drive assembly (2 x 500-sheet Documentation Package 28 input tray) PCL 5e and PCL63operation 158, 162 personalities, see languages removing and replacing 331 phone numbers paper guide (8-bin mailbox) 396 ordering parts 512 paper handling controller messages 580 technical assistance 32 paper handling menu 68 PhoneNET cable 27 paper input unit (PIU) photosensitive drum 141 removing and replacing 260 pick roller assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) sensor 277 441 paper jams pickup assembly 8-bin mailbox or mailbox with stapler2x500-sheet input tray 329 530 2000-sheet input tray 300 detection 182 tray 1 244 troubleshooting 581, 582, 585 pins (locating) paper motion monitoring and control 1372x500-sheet input tray 344 paper path 2000-sheet input tray 119, 311 cleaning 113 PIU, see paper input unit HP Digital Copy 320 660 plus key 59 sensors (HP Digital Copy 320) 199 PM kit, see preventative maintenance test 89, 584, 632 PostScript Level 2 emulation (PS) troubleshooting 581 fonts 3 paper path cover (7-bin tabletop mailbox) memory requirements 31 360 power box 28 paper size power distribution system 131 cold reset 61, 85, 88 power rating 22 PCA 266 power save mode paper size switches description 1342x500-sheet input tray 162 electrical specifications 53 2000-sheet input tray 306 power supply trays 2 & 3 1532x500-sheet input tray 163, 337 paper source default 61 2000-sheet input tray 302 paper tray capacities 11 7-bin tabletop mailbox 359 paper weight equivalence table 16 8-bin mailbox 388 paper-handling devices HP Digital Copy 320 465, 473 diagnostics 617 operation (2000-sheet input tray or2xdimensions 51 500-sheet input tray 159 locations 23 see also high voltage power supply ordering 24 or low voltage power supply parts and diagrams 676 power troubleshooting (HP Digital Copy specifications 11, 51 320) 652 verifying installation 589 power-up sequence test 631 ppm, see pages per minute 768 Index C4229-90911, preventative maintenance S about 115 scanner count 87, 250 see HP Digital Copy 320 ordering kit 28 see laser/scanner print job interrupt 198 screws hardware table print quality HP Digital Copy 320 437 cleaning Mopier 112 Mopier 212 menu 70 SDRAM DIMMs, ordering 27 troubleshooting 597 see also memory print settings select key 59 density adjustment 133 self test, see configuration page speed 2 sensor unit assembly (HP Digital Copy printer stand (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 320) 480 dimensions and weight 52 sensors ordering 25 2000-sheet input tray 156 printer, see Mopier 7-bin tabletop mailbox printing menu 72 empty bin 367 printing supplies 26 face-up 372 product ID (HP Mopier 320) 192 full bin and interlock 369 PS, see PostScript Level 2 emulation 8-bin mailbox 171 PS1, see registration sensor PSEntry 173 PS2, see paper input unit sensor PSFaceUp 173 activating 619

R diagram 639

ready light 59 HP Digital Copy 320 480, 667 recycling toner cartridges 514 locating 150 registration assembly output paper 262 cleaning roller 113 paper input unit (PIU) 277 removing and replacing 271 registration 279 sensor 279 testing 619 registration faulty 608 separation pad (Mopier) regulatory information 22 cleaning 114 remanufactured assemblies 513 tray 1 275 removal and replacement strategy 202 separation pad assembly (HP Digital Copy repair process 512 320) 440 repetitive defects serial number ruler 613 location 22 troubleshooting 605 setting 85, 87, 250 resets menu 84 troubleshooting 529 resetting printer 62 server troubleshooting 527 resolution enhancement (REt) 135 service approach 512 reversing mechanism (7-bin tabletop service mode mailbox) HP Digital Copy 320 105 motor 373 Mopier 85 solenoid 379 service mode tests (HP Digital Copy 320) RFI cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 467 671 rollers 7-bin tabletop mailbox2x500-sheet input tray 333 back cover 352 2000-sheet input tray collator mode 168, 175 pickup, feed, and separation 304 controller PCA 358 separation roller 158 cover latch 383 cleaning, pickup, and feed 114 diagnostics 625 HP Digital Copy 320 441 dimensions 52 transfer 282 electrical specifications 54 tray 1 274 empty bin sensor 367 trays 2 & 3 276 face-down bins 364

C4229-90911 Index 769

, 7-bin tabletop mailbox (continued) stacker mode face-up sensors PCA 372 7-bin tabletop mailbox 168 face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) 375 8-bin mailbox 174 flipper solenoid 380 stand (7-bin tabletop mailbox) front cover 349 dimensions and weight 52 full bin and interlock sensor PCA 369 ordering 25 handle 381 stapler identification label 22 back plate 419 latching mechanism 382 controller PCA 421 messages 565 dimensions 52 modes 167 hinges 427 operation 166 messages 576 ordering 24 non-HP cartridges 514 orientation 348 operation 177 paper paths and components 164 paper jams 530 parts and diagrams 702 paper paths and components 175 power supply 359 parts and diagrams 691, 693, 713 removing and replacing 209, 347 removing and replacing 416 reversing mechanism 373 stapler bed assembly 425 short tray 7 378 top cover 424 solenoid reversing mechanism 379 verifying installation 589 specifications 12 weight 52 stand status bar (HP Digital Copy 320) 91 dimensions and weight 52 storage paper tray (2 x 500-sheet input ordering 25 tray) 340 top cover 354 supplies (ordering information) 24 verifying installation 589 Support Materials Europe (SME) 512, virtual stacker mode 168 674 weight 52 Support Materials Organization (SMO) short tray 7 (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 378 512, 674 site requirements 45 switches skew 529, 6082x500-sheet input tray, paper size 162 skins (HP Digital Copy 320) 445 2000-sheet input tray 156 slides, see transparencies 8-bin mailbox 171 SME, see Support Materials Europe detecting tray 159 smeared toner 603 diagram 639 SMO, see Support Materials Organization function 157, 162 solenoids paper quantity 157 7-bin tabletop mailbox paper size 157 flipper 380 trays 2 & 3 (paper size) 153 reversing mechanism 379 diagram 640 T face-up assembly (printer) 281 technical assistance 32 locations 150 temperature (printer) 50 space requirements 47 tension springs (2000-sheet input tray) specifications 310 acoustic emissions 54 test electrical 53 HP Digital Copy 320 664 ordering guide 28 Mopier 89 paper 13 paper-handling devices 617 paper trays, bins, and accessories 11 printer 584, 589 printer and paper-handling devices 51 timing (printer) 182 specks 604 speed (pages per minute) 2 770 Index C4229-90911, toner cartridge paper-handling devices 617 cleaning spills 114 power-on 534 contacts 133, 140 print quality 597 detection 133 printer stops/hangs 530 image formation 140 process 515 life expectancy 513 toner cartridge 598 ordering 262x500-sheet input tray (trays 4 & 5) recycling 514 adjustable foot tip 343 refilled 514 back cover 316 troubleshooting 598 casters 342 warranty 514 controller PCA 334 weight 51 diagnostics 621 toner smear 603 dimensions 51 tools 203 electrical specifications 53 transfer roller assembly front door (storage area) 341 cleaning 114 front LED PCA 345 removing and replacing 282 front top cover 324 transparencies identification label 22 guidelines 15 left cover 317 paper jams 530 locating pins 344 transport belt motor (8-bin mailbox) 394 main cable 338 tray 1 messages 561 pickup assembly 244 ordering 24 printing from 153 orientation 315 removing and replacing 241 paper deck drive assembly 331 specifications 11 paper paths and components 160 tray 7 (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 378 parts and diagrams 698 tray selection pickup and feed system 162 default paper source 61 pickup assembly 329 troubleshooting 529, 531 power supply 163, 337 trays 2 & 3 printing from 159 adjustment procedure 116 removing and replacing 207 pickup motor 138 right cover 321 printing from 153 rollers 333 removing and replacing 284 specifications 11, 51 specifications 11 storage paper tray 340 trays 4 & 5 (removing and replacing) 327 tray-size sensing PCA 335 tray-size sensing PCA (2 x 500-sheet input verifying installation 589 tray) 335 vertical transfer unit 318 troubleshooting weight 51 c-link cables 523 2-sided printing 154 communication 523 2000-sheet input tray (tray 4) control panel 538 adjustable foot 313 diagnostic tools 617, 630 adjustment procedure 118 drum rotation functional check 615 back cover 288 engine test 537 casters 312 event log 538 clutches 156 general 528 controller PCA 296 half self test functional check 614 diagnostic tests 617 high voltage power supply check 615 dimensions 51 HP Digital Copy 320 651 electrical specifications 53 image defects 599 features 155 image quality 597 front cover 287 interface 525 front LED PCA assembly 298 paper curl 533 identification label 22 paper jams 581, 582, 585 LEDs 620

C4229-90911 Index 771

, 2000-sheet input tray (tray 4) (continued) wiring diagram left cover 289 2000-sheet input tray 649 lifter operation 159 8-bin mailbox 650 locating pins 311 mailbox with stapler 646 main cable harness 294 printer, see foldout pages main drive assembly 291 world wide web technical assistance 33 messages 557 motor test 617 Y motors 156 y power cord (installing) 436 ordering 24 orientation 286 paper paths and components 155 paper quantity switch assembly 306 paper size switch assembly 306 paper tray 293 pickup and feed system 157 pickup assembly 300 power supply 159, 302 printing from 159 removing and replacing 207 right cover 290 rollers 304 sensor test 619 sensors 156 specifications 11, 51 stand-alone running test 617 switches 156 tension springs 310 troubleshooting 528, 529 verifying installation 589 vertical transfer unit (VTU) 308 weight 51 wiring diagram 649 typefaces, see fonts

U

upper cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 462

V

value key 59 VCCI statement (Japan) 42 vertical magnification adjustment (HP Digital Copy 320) 128 vertical transfer unit2x500-sheet input tray 318 2000-sheet input tray 308 virtual stacker mode 7-bin tabletop mailbox 168 8-bin mailbox 174

W

white lines 610 white page 599 772 Index C4229-90911, igital Copy 320. rtment corresponding to each part

HP Digital Copy 320 - Keeping Track of Screws

Use the table on the other side of this page to keep track of screws as you remove and replace parts on the HPD1Remove this page from the manual. 2 Tape an ice cube tray or other 14-compartment container over the blank squares. Place screws in the compa or Place this page on a level surface. Place screws in the blank squares corresponding to each part. C4229-90911, l Panel Cover Upper Cover 2 Screws 4 Screws__nding Front Panel Brackets ble 3 Brass Screws with Screws Washers Power Supply Back PCA 6 Screws 2 Screws C4229-90911 Pick Roller Cover Flat Bed Cover ADF Latch Cap ADF Cover Front Pane 2 Thumb Screws Assembly and 1 screw 2 Screws 1 screw 1 Thumb Screw__Pick Roller Cable Grou 4 Brass Bushings Clamp & Ca Protector 3 Power Supply and RFI Cover Control PCA Card Cage Fan Main Board Tray 7 Screws 7 Screws 4 Screws 2 Screws 2 Brass Screws, igital Copy 320. rtment corresponding to each part

HP Digital Copy 320 - Keeping Track of Screws

Use the table on the other side of this page to keep track of screws as you remove and replace parts on the HPD1Remove this page from the manual. 2 Tape an ice cube tray or other 14-compartment container over the blank squares. Place screws in the compa or Place this page on a level surface. Place screws in the blank squares corresponding to each part. C4229-90911, bly PCA ADF Unit Front Panel Frame 4 Screws Ground Spring 2 Screws PCA Junction PCA and Carrier Belt and Motor Cover 3 Screws 2 Screws C4229-90911 Optical Unit Tie-down ADF Lamp Sensor Unit Assembly ADF Motor Unit LED Assem and 1 Screw 2 Screws 4 Screws 2 Screws 3 Screws Output Tray Brackets Glass Plate Assembly Carrier Unit Lamp Carrier Unit Front Lamp and Screws (1 each) 2 Screws 1 Screw 1 Screw 1 Screw,

HP Mopier 320 System Service Manual English

Copyright© 1998 Hewlett-Packard Co. Printed in USA

Manual Part No. HP Mopier 320 System C4229-90911 Service Manual

*C4229-90911* Printed on at least *C4229-90911* 50% Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper C4229-90911]

15